Graupner and KG MC-20 COMPUTER SYSTEM GRAUPNER/SJ HOTT User Manual ZKZ MC 20 Manual

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG COMPUTER SYSTEM GRAUPNER/SJ HOTT ZKZ MC 20 Manual

UserManual.wiki >

Graupner and KG >

MC 20 User Manual

Users Manual

33020.mc-20 HoTT.2.enProgramming ManualoProPromc-20mc-20

2Table of contentsCode lock ...................................................... 31Secret mode .................................................. 32Display contrast ........................................ 32Language selectionVoice update............................................. 32Change of display language ..................... 33Firmware update via SD card ................... 36Joystick calibration ................................... 36Telemetry data display ................................... 36Commissioning the transmitter ................................ 42Firmware update via PC ..................................... 43Commissioning the receiver .................................... 46Receiver system power supply ........................... 47General charging notices ................................... 49Firmware update ................................................ 50Installation notices ................................................... 52Term deﬁ nitions ....................................................... 54Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches ................................................ 56Digital trim ............................................................... 58Winged models ........................................................ 60Receiver layout ................................................... 61Helicopter models .................................................... 64Receiver layout ................................................... 65Program descriptionsLoading a new memory location .............................. 66»Model select« ....................................................... 69»Copy / Erase« ....................................................... 70Erase model ....................................................... 70Copy model ¼ Model ......................................... 70Export to SD card ............................................... 71Import from SD card ........................................... 72Copy ﬂ ight phase ................................................ 72Changes ............................................................. 73»Suppress codes« ................................................. 74»Suppress models«............................................... 75»Basic settings, model«Winged model .................................................... 76Binding receivers ........................................... 77General noticesTable of contents ....................................................... 2Environmental protection notices .............................. 3Safety notices ............................................................ 4Safety notices and handling regulations for Lithium-Ion (LiIo) and Lithium-Polymer (LiPo) batteries .......................................................... 7Foreword .................................................................. 10Remote control set description ................................ 11Technical data .......................................................... 14General operating noticesTransmitter .......................................................... 16Opening the transmitter housing ...................16Transmitter power supply...............................16Recommended chargers ...............................17Battery operation timer in display .................. 18Lithium battery, CR 2032 ............................... 18Joystick length adjustment ............................18Joystick conversions ......................................19Holder bracket for transmitter straps ............. 20Installing additional controls, switches, etc. ... 20Aligning the antenna ...................................... 20Transmitter descriptionFront side.......................................................21Face-side connectorsCharger socket ......................................... 22DSC (Direct Servo Control) ...................... 22mini-USB connector ................................. 23Data socket .............................................. 23Card slot (data storage) ........................... 23Headset connector ................................... 24ext. PPM ................................................... 25SPI ........................................................... 25Inside the transmitter ..................................... 26Display and key pads .................................... 28Operating the "data terminal" ........................ 29Shortcuts ....................................................... 30Warnings in the display ................................. 30Function ﬁ elds in the display ......................... 31 Table of contentsRange test ..................................................... 80Helicopter model ................................................ 84Binding receivers ........................................... 85Range test ..................................................... 88»Model type« .......................................................... 94»Helicopter type«................................................... 98»Servo adjustment« ............................................ 102»Stick mode«Winged model .................................................. 104Helicopter model .............................................. 106»Control adjust«Winged model .................................................. 108Helicopter model .............................................. 112Throttle limit function ................................... 117Idle setting ................................................... 117Throttle limit in combination with ARin the »Stick mode menu« ......................... 119»Dual Rate / Expo«Winged model .................................................. 120Helicopter model .............................................. 124»Channel 1 curve«Winged model .................................................. 128Helicopter model .............................................. 131»Switch display« .................................................. 134»Control switch« .................................................. 135»Logical switches« .............................................. 138How do I program a ﬂ ight phase? .......................... 140»Phase settings«Winged model .................................................. 142Helicopter model .............................................. 146»Phase assignment« ........................................... 148»Phase trim« (winged model) ............................... 150»Non-delayed channels«..................................... 151»Timers (general)«............................................... 152»Flight phase timers«.......................................... 156What is a mixer ...................................................... 159»Wing mixers« ..................................................... 1601 aileron ............................................................1631 aileron and 1 camber ﬂ ap ..............................1642 ailerons ..........................................................166

3Table of contents2/4 ailerons and 1/2/4 camber ﬂ aps .................168»Helicopter mixer« .............................................. 176Adjusting the throttle and pitch curve ............... 187Autorotation setting ........................................... 190General remarks about freely progr. mixers .......... 192»Free mixers« ...................................................... 193Linear mixers .................................................... 197Exponential mixers ........................................... 199Examples .......................................................... 201»MIX active/phase«.............................................. 204»Mix only Channel« ............................................. 205»Dual mixer« ........................................................ 206»Swashplate mixer« ............................................ 208»Fail Safe« ............................................................ 208»Teacher/pupil« ................................................... 210Connection schematic ...................................... 213Wireless HoTT system ..................................... 214»Transmitter output« ........................................... 218»Proﬁ -trim«Winged model .................................................. 220Helicopter model .............................................. 222»Trim memory«Winged model .................................................. 224Helicopter model .............................................. 226»Telemetry« .......................................................... 228Setting & dataview ............................................ 229Satellite mode of two receivers ................... 238Sensor/s ...................................................... 239Selecting sensor/s ............................................ 240RF status view .................................................. 241Select voice update .......................................... 242»Channel sequence« ........................................... 244»Multichannel«..................................................... 246»Ring Limiter«...................................................... 250»MP3-Player« ....................................................... 254»General basic settings« .................................... 256»Servo display« ................................................... 262»Servo test« ......................................................... 263»Code lock« ......................................................... 264»Info display« ....................................................... 266 Environmental protection noticesThe symbol on this product, its operating instructions or packaging gives notice that this product may not be discarded as common household waste at the end of its service life. It must be turned over to a recycling collection point for electric and electronic apparatus. The materials can be recycled according to their markings. You make an important contribution to protection of the environment by utilizing facilities for reuse, material recycling or other means of exploiting obsolete equipment. Batteries must be removed from the unit and disposed of separately at an appropriate collection point.Please inquire with local authorities about the responsible waste collection locations.This manual serves only as a source of information and can be changed without prior notiﬁ cation. Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies which may be contained in the information section of this manual.Programming examplesIntroduction ............................................................ 268Winged modelFirst steps ......................................................... 270Incorporating an electric drive .......................... 276C1 joystick switchover betweenElectric motor and butterﬂ y .......................... 279Electric motor and airbrake ......................... 282Timer activation by control or switch ................. 284Parallel operating servos .................................. 286Using ﬂ ight phasesExample 1 ................................................... 288Example 2 ................................................... 2928-ﬂ ap wings ...................................................... 298Delta and ﬂ ying wing models ............................ 301F3A model ........................................................ 304Helicopter model .................................................... 308AppendixFCC declaration ..................................................... 318Conformity declaration ........................................... 319Guarantee certiﬁ cate ............................................. 320

4Safety noticesIn order to enjoy your modeling hobby for a long time, please read these instructions thoroughly and give particular attention to the safety notices. You should also register right away at https://www.graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung.aspx since this is the only way for you to automatically receive current information about your product via email.If you are a beginner with remote controlled model aircraft, ships or cars, you should really ask an experienced model pilot for assistance.If this remote control system changes ownership, these instructions should surely be included with remote control system.Intended usageThis remote control system may only be used for the purpose intended by the manufacturer, i.e. for the operation of unmanned remote controlled models.Any other usage is not permissible.Safety noticesSAFETY IS NO ACCIDENTandREMOTE CONTROLLED MODELS ARE NOT TOYS… because even small models can cause substantial property damage and/or personal injuries if they are not handled properly - even if caused by third parties.Technical defects of an electrical or mechanical nature can lead to unexpected startup of a motor and/or parts being hurled through the air to pose a danger of injury to you and to others.Short circuit conditions are to be avoided absolutely! A short circuit condition may not only destroy parts of the remote control system but, depending on the circumstances and the battery energy involved, may also pose acute danger of incineration or even explosion.All motor-driven parts, such as aircraft or ship propellers, helicopter rotors, open gearboxes etc. represent a constant danger. Contact with these parts must be avoided. A rapidly turning aircraft propeller can, for example, sever a ﬁ nger. Also pay attention that other objects do not come into contact with driven parts.When a drive battery is connected or a motor is running: never get into the danger zone of driving mechanisms.Be sure to pay attention that motors do not start up unintentionally while performing programming operations. Disconnect the fuel supply or battery terminals to motors before programming.Protect all units from dust, dirt, moisture and other foreign parts. Never expose these units to vibrations or excessive hot or cold temperatures. Remote control operation may only be performed under "normal" outdoor temperatures, i.e. within a range of -15 °C to +55 °C.Avoid mechanical jarring and pressure stresses. Always check units for damage to housings and cables. Do not use units which have been damaged or become wet, even after they are dry again. Only those components and accessories which we recommend may be used. Always use original Graupner plug and jack connectors which are made for one another out of the same materials. When routing cables, pay attention that they are not stressed, unduly kinked or broken. The sharp edges of adjacent parts also represent a hazard for insulated conductors.Be sure that all plug and jack connections are ﬁ rmly seated. Do not pull on the cable to disconnect a plugged connector.No modiﬁ cations whatsoever may be made to units. Modiﬁ cations will void the operating permit and all insurance protection.Installing the receiverThe receiver is to be installed with a cushion of foam rubber to afford protection against jarring; in aircraft models behind a strong rib, for a car or ship model the location must be protected against dust and spray water. The receiver may not be mounted in direct contact with the hull or chassis as this would allow motor vibrations and/or roadway jarring to be transferred directly to the receiver. When a receiver system is installed in a model with a combustion motor, all receiver parts should always be protected against the intrusion of exhaust gases and oil residue. Above all, this applies to the model's ON/OFF switch, which is typically built into the model's outer surface.Position the receiver such that connecting cables to the servos and the power supply are routed with a bit of slack and that the receiver's antenna is at least 5 cm away from any large metal parts or wiring except for other receiver wires/cables. In addition to steel, this also includes carbon ﬁ ber parts, servos, electric motors, fuel pumps and all sorts of cables, etc. Optimally the receiver should be placed at a readily accessible location that is well away from all other equipment. Under no circumstances may a servo cable be wrapped around the antenna or routed close to it.Make sure that cables near the antenna cannot move about during ﬂ ight.Routing the receiver's antennaThe receiver and its antennas must be positioned as far away as possible from drives of any kind. If the model's hull is made of carbon ﬁ ber material, the ends of the antennas must extend outside of the hull.The orientation of antennas is not critical. Nevertheless, a vertical (upright) installation of receiver antennas is advantageous. In the case of diversity antennas (two antennas), the second antenna should be oriented at a 90° angle to the ﬁ rst antenna. Safety noticesBe sure to pay attention!

5Safety noticesPre-start checksBefore switching the receiver on, be sure the throttle control is at its Stop/Idle position.Always switch the transmitter on ﬁ rst and then the receiver.Always switch the receiver off ﬁ rst and then the transmitter.If this sequence is not maintained, such that the receiver is still switched on when the corresponding transmitter is switched to "OFF", then the receiver may respond to other transmitters or general radio frequency noise. This can cause the model to execute uncontrolled operations that may cause personal injuries and/or property damage.In particular, for models equipped with a mechanical gyro:before switching off the receiver, disconnect the model's power supply to prevent the motor from revving up unintentionally. The residual spin of a gyro often produces so much voltage that the receiver may falsely interpret a throttle signal! This will then cause the motor to start up unexpectedly.Range testPerform checks for proper operation and range before every session. Secure the model adequately in place and ensure that no one is in front of the model.Perform a complete functional test on the ground and execute a complete simulated ﬂ ight to exclude the possibility of system faults or problems with the model's programming. When doing this, be sure to follow the notices provided on pages 80 and 88.Never operate the transmitter in Model mode, i.e. for ﬂ ying or driving, without an antenna. Be sure the antenna is ﬁ rmly seated in its socket. Operating a winged aircraft, helicopter, ship or carNever ﬂ y over spectators or other pilots. Never endanger humans or animals. Never ﬂ y in the vicinity of high-voltage wires. Do not operate the model in the vicinity of sluice locks or where real boats or ships are operating. Do not operate a model on public streets or highways, paths or plazas, etc.Monitoring transmitter and receiver batteriesYou must stop running the model to recharge the transmitter's battery no later than when low transmitter battery voltage triggers the "Batt must be recharged!!" display and acoustic signal.Check the charge in batteries routinely, particularly the receiver's battery. Do not wait until the movements of controlled mechanisms are noticeably slower. Replace expended batteries before they cause problems.The battery manufacturer's charging instructions are always to be followed, this includes mandatory adherence to the length of charging time. Never leave batteries being charged unattended.Never attempt to charge primary batteries (non-rechargeable batteries) because they can explode.All secondary batteries (rechargeable batteries) must be charged before every session. To avoid short circuit conditions, ﬁ rst connect the charger cable's banana plugs, polarity correct, into the charger and thereafter connect the charger cable's plugs to the transmitter and receiver batteries. Disconnect all power sources from the model when it is not to be used for an extended period of time. Never attempt to use defective batteries, damaged batteries or mixed-type battery combinations as a single group. Do not use mixed combinations of old and new batteries or batteries of different manufacture.Servo installationAlways mount servos with the provided rubber vibration-damper parts. Only in this manner can these parts be protected against excessively hard vibrations.Installing control rodsControl rods must be installed such that they operate freely and smoothly. It is particularly important that all rudder levers are able to move to their full limits, i.e. not otherwise mechanically blocked.In order to be able to stop a running motor at any time, control rods must be adjusted such that the carburetor tap is completely closed when the joystick and trim wheel are brought into their end idle position.Pay attention that no metal parts, e.g. as a result of rudder actuation, vibration, rotating parts, etc., rub against one another. Metal-to-metal contact causes electrical "noise" which can interfere with the correct operation of the receiver.Transmitter antenna orientationTransmission ﬁ eld strength is minimal in an imaginary line extending straight out from the end of the transmitter's antenna. This means that "pointing" the transmitter's antenna directly toward the model will not produce good reception but rather degrade reception.When multiple remote controls are operating simultaneously, pilots should position themselves in a loose group. Pilots standing off to themselves not only endanger their own models but those of others as well. However, when 2 or more pilots using 2.4 GHz remote control systems are closer than 5 m to one another this can lead to return channel overdrive which, in turn, will trigger a range warning much too early. Increase your distance between one another until the range warning ceases.

6Safety noticesCapacity and operating timeThe rule: "capacity is reduced with every successive recharging", applies to all batteries. Internal resistance increases at low temperatures to further reduce capacity. As a consequence, the battery's ability to provide current and hold its voltage is reduced.Frequent charging or the use of battery maintenance programs can also result in gradual loss of battery capacity. Therefore the capacity of batteries should be checked at regular intervals, not in excess of every six months, and replaced if performance is found to be signiﬁ cantly deﬁ cient.Purchase only genuine Graupner batteries!Interference suppression for electric motorsAll conventional electric motors produce sparks between their collector and brushes. Depending on the type of motor involved, this may cause more or less interference with the functionality of the remote control system.The electric motors of a properly built system should therefore have interference suppression features. For electric drive models it is particularly important that every one of its motors is provided with proper interference suppression. Interference ﬁ lters extensively suppress such disturbances and should always be included. Follow the respective recommendations included in the motor's operating and installation notices.For further details about interference ﬁ lters, refer to the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de.Servo interference ﬁ lters for extension cablesOrder no. 1040The servo interference ﬁ lter is necessary when an extended-length servo cable is used. This ﬁ lter is attached directly to the receiver output. In critical cases a second ﬁ lter can be attached to the servo. Using electronic speed controllersChoosing the right electronic controller is largely a matter of matching controller performance to the motor to be controlled.In order to prevent an overload or damage to the speed controller, its current rating should be at least half of the maximum locked-rotor current draw of the motor to which it is connected.Particular attention is appropriate for so-called "tuning motors". Because of their low-turns coils these motors can draw a multiple of their rated current in a locked-rotor condition and this can lead to the destruction of the speed controller.Electric ignition systemsCombustion motor ignition systems also produce interference that can negatively inﬂ uence remote control functionality.Always supply power to an electric ignition system from a separate, dedicated battery.Use only interference-suppressed spark plugs, spark caps and shielded ignition leads.Mount the receiver sufﬁ ciently far away from ignition system components.Static chargesA remote control system will be destroyed by the magnetic shock waves produced by a lightning strike - even if the storm is miles away. Therefore …… stop ﬂ ying right away if a storm is approaching. Static charging via the antenna also represents a lethal hazard.AttentionIn order to fulﬁ ll FCC HF emission requirements •for mobile transmitters, a distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between this system's antenna and other persons when this system is operating. Operation of this system at a lesser distance is therefore not recommended. To avoid disturbance caused by the electrical •characteristics and emissions of other transmitters, keep at least a 20 cm distance from other transmitters.Operation of the remote control system requires a •correct program setting for the given country in the Safety notices

7Safety noticestransmitter unit. This is necessary for compliance with diverse regulations like FCC, ETSI, CE etc. Follow the respective instructions provided for this with the transmitter and receiver.Prior to every ﬂ ight, perform a complete functional •test, range test and execute a complete simulated ﬂ ight in order to exclude the possibility of system faults or problems with the model's programming.Never program the transmitter or receiver while •the model is being operated. Care and maintenanceNever clean the housing, antenna, etc. with cleaning agents, gasoline, water or similar means. Use only a dry, soft cloth.Components and accessoriesAs manufacturer of this equipment Graupner GmbH & Co. KG recommends only components and accessories which have been tested and approved by Graupnerfor their suitability, functionality and safety. If this recommendation is followed, Graupner accepts responsibility for the product. Graupner cannot accept any responsibility for the parts or accessories of other manufacturers which have not been approved and Graupner cannot evaluate every individual product made by other companies to assess if they are safe to use.Liability exclusion / damage compensationThis manual serves only as a source of information and can be changed without prior notiﬁ cation. Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies which may be contained in this manual.Graupner cannot monitor compliance with the assembly instructions, the operating instructions or the conditions and methods under which remote control components are installed, operated, utilized or maintained. Therefore Graupner accepts no form Safety notices and handling regulations for Lithium-Ion (LiIo) and Lithium-Polymer (LiPo) batteries of liability for loss, damage or costs consequential to incorrect usage or operation or which can be attributed to same.Unless otherwise prescribed by law, the obligation of Graupner to provide damage compensation, regardless of legal grounds, is limited to the invoice value of the quantity of Graupner goods contributing directly to the damage-inducing event. This does not apply if Graupner is found to be subject to unlimited liability pursuant to binding legal stipulations with respect to intent or gross negligence. As applicable for all highly technical products, observance of the following safety notices and handling instructions is essential for a long service life, fault-free operation, and harmless utilization of lithium/polymer batteries.These instructions are to be safeguarded. If the unit is transferred to another user, these instructions should certainly be passed along to the new user.General noticesLiIo-/LiPo batteries require particularly attentive •handling. This applies to charging, discharging as well as for storage and other handling. Adherence to the following special speciﬁ cations is necessary:Incorrect handling can lead to explosions, ﬁ re, •smoke and poisoning hazards. Furthermore, disregard for instructions and warnings can lead to performance losses and other defects.The battery's capacity is reduced by every charge/•discharge cycle. Storing the battery at temperatures which are too high or too low can also lead to a gradual reduction in capacity. In model operation, battery capacity drops to about 50 … 80 % of new battery capacity after about 50 charge/discharge cycles – even though all charge/discharge rules are followed. This is due in part to the high discharge currents and inductive currents caused by motors.Battery packs may only be connected in series or •parallel in exceptional cases as cell capacities and charged state can differ too greatly. This is why the battery packs we deliver are selected. Special notices for charging LiIo-/LiPo batteries from GraupnerSince• Graupner GmbH & Co. KG cannot supervise the correct charging and discharging of cells, the entire guarantee is void in cases of improper charging or discharging. Never leave batteries being charged unattended.•Only approved chargers with appropriate charging •cables may be used for charging LiIo-/LiPo batteries. Any manipulation to the charger or charger cables can lead to severe damage. The maximum charging capacity must be limited •to 1.05 times the battery's capacity.Example: 700 mAh battery = 735 mAh max. charging capacityUse only the outlet-charger included with the set •or a specially designed charger/discharger from Graupner to charge and discharge LiIo-/LiPo batteries, refer to page 17 or www.graupner.de.Ensure the settings for the number of cells or for •ﬁ nal charging voltage and ﬁ nal discharge voltage are correct. Be sure to observe the operating instructions for your charger/discharger.Other handling noticesThe battery to be charged must be placed on a •non-combustible, heat resistant, non-conducting surface during the charging process. Combustible or readily ignited objects are to be kept away from the charging conﬁ guration. Batteries may only be charged under supervision. LiIo-/LiPo batteries connected in series within •a pack may only be charged as a group if the voltage of individual cells do not differ by more than 0.05 V. The LiIo battery included with the set, order no. 33000.1 (changes reserved), is equipped with a special safety circuit such that

8Safety noticesDischarging below 2.5 V per cell damages cells •permanently and is therefore to be avoided absolutely. The mc-20 HoTT transmitter switches itself off when its power supply voltage reaches its lower limit of 3.3 V. Short circuit conditions are to be avoided absolutely. Permanent short circuits lead to destruction of the battery, high temperatures and perhaps even self-ignition may follow.During discharge, battery temperature must not •rise, in any case, to over +70 °C. Otherwise, better cooling or a lower rate of discharge must be introduced. The temperature can easily be checked with the infrared thermometer, order no. 1963. The battery must never be discharged via the transmitter's charging socket. This socket is not suitable for this purpose.Other handling noticesNever short-circuit the battery. A short-circuit •allows very high current to ﬂ ow and this heats up the cells. This will lead to loss of electrolyte, the production of gases and perhaps even explosions. In the vicinity of, or while handling, GraupnerLiIo-/LiPo batteries, avoid electrically conducting surfaces because of the danger of creating a short-circuit condition.Handling connectors:•These connectors are not as robust as for other batteries. This applies particularly to the plus pole connector. The connections can easily be broken off. Due to thermal transfer, the connector tabs may not be soldered directly. Cell connection:•Direct soldering on battery cells is not permitted. The heat of direct soldering can damage battery components, such as separator or isolator.Battery connections should only be made by industrial spot welding. A professional repair made by the manufacturer or distributor is necessary to replace missing or torn-off cables. Replacing individual battery cells:•The replacement of battery cells may only be made by the manufacturer or distributor and never by the user himself.Damaged cell usage:•Damaged cells may never be used or returned to service.Characteristics of damaged cells include: •damaged housing packing, deformed battery cells, electrolyte or leaking electrolyte. In these cases, further use of the battery is not permissible.Damaged or useless cells are hazardous waste •items and must be appropriately disposed.General warning noticesBatteries must never be put in ﬁ re or burned. •Battery cells must not be submerged in liquids, •such as water, seawater or beverages. Any contact with liquids, of whatever nature, is to be avoided.Individual battery cells and batteries are not toys •and must therefore not get into the hands of children. Batteries/cells must be kept out of the reach of children.Batteries must not get into the vicinity of babies or •small children. If a battery is swallowed, immediately go to a doctor or emergency medical facility.Batteries must not be put in a microwave oven or •put under pressure. Smoke, ﬁ re and more can be the consequences.Never dismantle a LiIo-/LiPo battery. Dismantling •a battery can cause internal short-circuits. Gas, ﬁ re, explosions and other problems can result.The electrolyte and electrolytic vapors in LiIo-/LiPo •batteries are harmful. Absolutely avoid all direct contact with electrolytes. If electrolytes come into contact with skin, eyes or other body parts, immediately wash out or rinse out with generous amounts of fresh water then be sure to consult "compensation" for voltage differences between individual cells, by way of an otherwise typical balancer plug connection, is not necessary.Under these conditions • Graupner LiIo-/LiPo batteries can be charged with a maximum of 2C (the value 1C corresponds to the cell capacity) charging current. At a voltage of maximum 4.2 V per cell and above, charging must continue a constant voltage of 4.2 V per cell until charging current drops below 0.1 … 0.2 A.Charging voltage over 4.20 V per cell must be •avoided absolutely as the cell would otherwise be permanently damage and could cause a ﬁ re. In order to prevent the over-charging of individual cells in a pack, a cut-off voltage between 4.1 V … 4.15 V per cell should be set to increase service life.Never attempt to charge battery cells with the •wrong polarity. Abnormal chemical reactions take place when batteries are charged with reversed polarity and the battery will be useless. This can cause breaks, smoke and ﬂ ames.The permissible temperature range for charging •and storing LiIo-/LiPo batteries is 0 … +50 °C.Storage: LiIo-/LiPo cells should have a 10 … 20 % •charge capacity when stored. If cell voltage drops below 3 V, then LiIo-/LiPo cells must absolutely be recharged to a capacity of 10 … 20 % of full capacity. Otherwise, further deep-discharging of the battery will make it useless during storage in a discharged state.Special notices for discharging LiIo-/LiPo batteries from GraupnerA continuous current rate of about 1C does not •represent a major problem for Graupner LiIo-/LiPo batteries. For larger currents, please follow the catalog speciﬁ cations. In any case, observe the maximum current rating for the connector system, see maximum discharge current on the battery.

9Safety noticesa doctor.Batteries built into equipment must always be •removed from that equipment when it is not currently in use. Alway switch off equipment after it is used to prevent deep discharging. Always charge batteries before it is too late. Store batteries on a non-combustible, heat resistant, non-conducting surface! Deep-discharged LiIo-/LiPo batteries are defective and may no longer be used!Notice for remote control set mc-20 HoTTOrder no. 32032This remote control set is factory equipped with a Lilo transmitter battery (changes reserved). Once the factory preset voltage limit of 3.60 V has been reached, a warning will appear in the display. Disposal of used batteries:Some countries have laws requiring that all used batteries be turned over to an authorized collection center.Disposing of batteries along with common household garbage is forbidden. Old batteries can be turned into communal collection centers for disposal at no charge or they can be returned to one of our dealerships or anywhere else where batteries of that given type are sold. Used batteries we have delivered can also be sent back to us, at your cost, through the mail. Use the return address below:Graupner GmbH & Co. KGService: Used batteriesHenriettenstr. 94-96D-73230 Kirchheim unter TeckThis represents an essential contribution to environmental protection.Caution:Damaged batteries require among other things, special packaging, because they are very toxic!

10 Forewordmc-20 the Newest Generation of Remote Control TechnologyThe technical advances across the entire spectrum of model building is an ever-present challenge to design engineers. This is why the introduction of new transmission technology in the 2.4 GHz band represents a new milestone. The HoTT-System (Hopping Telemetry Transmission) developed by Graupner is a synthesis of know-how, engineering and testing done around the world by professional pilots. Established Graupner HoTT techniques theoretically permit over 200 models to be operated at the same time. However, because of the interspersed radio-frequency utilization permitted by certiﬁ cation for the 2.4 GHz ISM band, this number is signiﬁ cantly lower in practical application. Nevertheless, in general more models can be operated simultaneously in the 2.4 GHz band than would be the case in conventional 35 or 40 MHz frequency bands. The real limiting factor is – as often before – is still likely to be the size of available operating space (i.e. airspace for aircraft). Alone the fact that it is no longer necessary to coordinate transmitting frequencies with other pilots in the vicinity (which is sometimes quite difﬁ cult in broken landscapes, such as on hillside slopes) represents an enormous boost for remote control operating security.Bidirectional communication between transmitter and receiver, by way of a return channel built into the receiver, permits convenient access to data and programming in the HoTT receiver. For example, this makes it possible to swap receiver outputs or to divide up control functions among multiple servos (channel mapping). Servo travel and servo rotation directions in the receiver can also be matched to one another with these facilities. Telemetry data, like VARIO and GPS data, can be called up from optionally available modules.Based on the mc-24 Graupner/JR computerized remote control system, the mc-20 HoTT remote control system has been especially developed for experienced RC pilots All conventional model types can be readily operated with the mc-20 HoTTsystem, regardless of whether the model is a winged aircraft, helicopter, ship or land vehicle. Complex mixed-control functions of guiding surfaces are often necessary for winged aircraft (rudder, elevators) and helicopter models (swashplate). Thanks to modern computer technology, very diverse model requirements can be programmed in the simplest conceivable manner with touch-sensitive keys (CAP Touch). Simply select the given model type from the mc-20 HoTT program and its software will assemble all signiﬁ cant mixer functions and coupling functions automatically. This eliminates the need for separate modules in the transmitter to implement complex coupled functions and also makes sophisticated mechanical mixer mechanisms in the model unnecessary. For example, this makes the mc-20 HoTT transmitter fully equipped with both software and hardware to operate the well-known NAUTIC modules on the receiver side. The "channel sequencer" is new. It permits the operation of up to three servos to be automated.The mc-20 HoTT system offers optimal security and reliability without having to forgo great operating convenience. The mc-20 HoTT remote control system has 80 model memory locations. Additional ﬂ ight-phase-speciﬁ c settings can be stored in every model memory location. For example, such settings can be made for various parameters that can be called up to implement particular ﬂ ight maneuvers at the "press of a button". Additional model memories can be stored on the SD card, which is included standard with the set. Even telemetry data can be recorded for subsequent evaluation on a PC.Since the mc-20 HoTT is equipped with two displays, the lower display has been optimized for comprehensible, simple operation of the software. The graphic representation of mixer functions is particularly helpful. The upper display allows telemetry data to be called up from the receiver.Functionally-related options are clearly arranged by content in a simple organization. The clear, comprehensible program structure permits a beginner to quickly become familiar with the various functions and able to use all options pertinent to his level of expertise with remote control models.This handbook describes every menu in detail. There are tips, many notices and programming examples to supplement the descriptions and also explanations for model speciﬁ c technical terms, like transmitter control, dual rate, butterﬂ y, and so on.Please observe the safety notices and technical notices. Read through the instructions attentively. Before usage, test all functions by simply attaching servos to the receiver included in the set. While doing this, observe respective notes on page 68. This will help you learn the essential operating techniques and functions of the mc-20 HoTT.Always handle your remote controlled model with a sense of responsibility so that you do not endanger yourself or others.The Graupner team wishes you much pleasure and success with your mc-20 HoTT, the newest generation of remote control systems.Kirchheim-Teck, December 2011

11Remote control set descriptionmetsySretupmoC mc-20-zHG4.2niteslortnocetomerlennahc23 Graupner-HoTT technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)Technology that enthrallsThe superior functional security of Graupner HoTTTechnology accomplished with bidirectional communications between transmitter and receiver with integrated telemetry, freelyprogrammable voice output via headset connector, and ultra-fast response times.PrQITCOOKPIKUUKORNKſed by a programmingtechnique implemented with capacitive touchbuttons.High contrast, 8 line, graphic display for perfectpresentation of all parameter settings. Switchon/off of blue back-lighting at will. A second,independent display for presentation of telemetrydata. Storage of telemetry data on a microSD memory card.4096 steps of 12-bit resolution on the channelsignal assures extreme control sensitivity.USB connection to read and write the model's memories as well as fQTOCMKPIſrmware updatesIntegrated• Graupner HoTT 2.4 GHz transmissionsystemMaximum interference immunity made possible b •optimized frequency hopping through as many as 75 channels and wider channel spreadIntelligent data transfer with correction function•Over 200 systems can be used simultaneously•The HoTT technique of bidirectional •communication between sender and receiver,as well as the fastest possible transmission rate(10 ms) assures extremely short reaction times.5 different languages (German, English, French,•Italian and Spanish) available per softwareupdate. For the availability of a given language,refer to the download area.80 model memories with storage for all model-•speciſc programs and parameter settingsSeven switches (two 3-way switches, three 2-way•switches and two 2 pushbutton switches) as wellas three digital actuators are already built-in and can be used as desiredA function encoder with two touch-sensitive,•four-way keys ("CAP Touch") permit simpliſedprogramming and precise settingsKey-lock function to prevent unintentional•operation.Voice and, as applicable also MP3 ſle, output over•headset output or loudspeakerSimple, very fast model-independent binding•Extremely fast rebinding, even at maximum•distanceRange: test and warning function•Under-voltage warning•Extremely wide receiver operating voltage range•of 3.6 V to 8.4 V (functional to 2.5 V)Fail-safe, free channel assignment (channel •mapping), mixer functions and all servo settings are simple to program

12 Remote control set descriptionBinding of any number of receivers to the channel •expansion (32 channels maximum)As many as four servos can be controlled •simultaneously as a block in the SAME operating mode with a servo cycle time of 10 ms (digital servos only).Thanks to cycle time reduced down to as little •as 10 ms, extremely short response times are achieved.Real-time telemetry evaluation in the transmitter •display Additionally, telemetry data can also be selectively displayed by the SMART-BOX.Additional HoTT features of the mc-20Super-fast response time through use of a fast •main processor for data transmission.Micro-SD card for storage of telemetry data and •for additional functionsObsolescence-proof through update capability over •USB interface as well as via the micro-SD cardThe included Lilo battery (changes reserved) •has a capacity of over 6000 mAh. This makes extremely long ﬂ ight times possible and also reduces the number of charging repetitions.Modulation changeover per software: e.g. from •"EXT. PPM" (e.g. Weatronic) to HoTT at the press of a button.Swashplate limiting: This function limits the •swashplate's tilt angle to prevent the potential for mechanical collision in helicopter 3D operation at full-limit roll and pitch-axisRing-limiter: • functions similar to swashplate limitation but is used for control of up to threeVoith-Schneider drives in ship modelsChannel sequencer for automating servo motion •sequences of up to three servos, e.g. to automate the lowering of landing gear or to extend/retract drives in self-launching glidersMulti-channel function for operating • Graupnerproduct line NAUTIC modulesDigital trimming with pseudo »analog« endless •pinions, effective per speciﬁ c ﬂ ight-phaseAuto-trim function. The current joystick positions •for trimming ﬁ xed-wing or helicopter models will be stored in trim memory at the press of a button. (Model »compensation«, activate switch and release joystick. The correction will be blended in »gently« upon return of the joystick.C1 changeover, brake/elec. motor: This •changeover can be implemented very easily via enhanced ﬂ ight phase programming. The pilot determines the joystick positions (forward/rear) at which the motor is to switched off or the airbrakes are to be retracted.16 control functions maximum•Simpliﬁ ed arrangement of operating elements, •such as joysticks, external switches, proportional controls and trim levers as control functionsProtection against obsolescence is provided •by virtue of a fast 32-bit operating system with modern ﬂ ash memory that can be updated.Blue back-lighted MULTI-DATA-GRAPHIK-LCD •monitor with signiﬁ cantly better legibility under unfavorable light conditionsCONVENIENCE MODE SELECTOR to simplify •changeovers between operating modes 1 … 4 (e.g. throttle left/throttle right)Two freely programmable mixers for ﬁ xed-wing •or helicopter models, each with freely selectable input and output functions; four curve mixers with innovative 8-point curve technology for easy to set and adjust curve values at up to eight points for throttle, pitch, tail or other non-linear characteristics. The arithmetic unit in the CPU employs an ingenious method of calculating polynomial approximations for truly-rounded, ideal MPC (multi-point curve) mixer curvesBi di f b f i t th h l d t li NAUTIC d lComputer System mc-2032 channel remote control set in 2.4 GHz Graupner-HoTT technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)Shifting curve mixer points can be done along •both axes with the CAP touch pad keys Eight ﬂ ight-phase programs can be individually •adapted for each model and given a name. The switchover time is programmable separately.SUPER SERVO menu with a perfect overview •of all servo setting data and simple parameter correction at four "levels": direction of rotation, mid-point setting, separate servo travel on both sides and separate travel limiting on both sides for 16 servos with a total of 96 setting optionsSUPER-DUAL-RATE, EXPO and EXPO/DUAL-•RATE menu with 36 potential setting variants for three servo functions and six ﬂ ight phasesPractice-optimized multi-function menu for •aerofoils and helicopter models. Entry of the number of aileron and ﬂ ap servos automatically programs all necessary mixer functions in the multi-function "Wing mixers" menu. Differential aileron mixer, butterﬂ y mixer, dual-ﬂ ap mixer, automatic gyro set function and other special functionsHelicopter swashplate mixer for 1, 2, 3, or 4 point •steering.Selectable cycle time: 10 ms or 20 ms/30 ms, •depending on receiver and operating modeA convenient timers menu with a system of eight •stopwatches, alarm timer, countdown timer, laps counter and so on. Two running timers and one lap timer can be displayed at the same time in large characters.Stopwatch with history: In addition to the lap •counter there is a "Time 1" which captures the switch-on time and a "Time 2" which records the ON and OFF times separatelyChannel mapping• in the receiver allows free distribution of control functions.The travel distance and rotation direction settings •

13Remote control set descriptionintegrated into the receiver make it possible, for example, to match up mapped servos with one anotherThe programmable fail-safe functions »Hold«, •»Off« and »Move to preset positions« that are built into the receiver for every individual servo channel can be set separatelyA slot for FAT or FAT32 formatted SD and SDHC •memory cards is available on the transmitter for log ﬁ les and model programsModel programsTransmitter operating time timer•Flight phase switch assignments: six switches, two •with a priority function. Every switch combination can be named freely. This makes the number of ﬂ ight phases independent of the number of ﬂ ight phase switches.Tail type normal, V-tail, Delta/ﬂ ying-wing and 2 HR •Sv 3+8 (which immediately makes two coupled elevator servos available without using free mixers or dual mixers)Flap count 4 AIL/4 FL: Full support of eight wing •servos, even without use of free mixersFlight phase switching cutoff delay: •the delay time can be switched off for individual channels on a ﬂ ight-phase basis (e.g. for motor off in electric models or to activate/deactivate helicopter head lock).Ten additional, user deﬁ nable phase names: aside from the prescribed ﬂ ight phase names, the user can also freely assign up to ten phase names of his own choice.Enhanced transmitter control menu: option to •assign input-side mid-point setting for C1 control + trim as a transmitter control. A single input can be assigned to two switches for a true 3-way switch function.Wing mixers: New concept for the multi-ﬂ ap menu •to simplify settings of one to eight wing servos on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis in a comprehensible manner without requiring the use of free mixers»Info« sub-option in the Base setup model menu •Any kind of additional information about every model can be entered here. This additional information will then appear in the newly designed model select function»Logical switches«: this function permits two •switches to be coupled as »and« or »or« logic functions. The result can be employed as a virtual switch. Typical application: The activation of certain functions should only be possible in conjunction with other functions, e.g. wheel brake can only be activated when the landing gear is down. A number of functions which are normally independent of one another, are to be put in their base settings by way of an »Emergency switch«. This program automation can be activated by multiple switches that also select the appropriate program.Servo-middle setting range extended to ±125 %•Number of ﬂ ight phases: (ﬁ xed-wing: 8, helicopter: •7 + AR)Settable »Throttle too high« warning threshold •in the helicopter menu, programmable switch-on warningTime-frame can only be stopped, and thus also •erased, (if the timer switch is in its OFF position) by touching the center ESC key while the ef or cd selection keys are also being touched.Phase trim for all axes of ﬁ xed-wing models •possibleHotkey for servo display: one tap on the • e and f keys of the left CAP touch pad (touch sensitive keys) will call up the servo display directly from virtually all menus.Servo occupancy swap on the receiver output•CAP TOUCH operating elements with key lock •function to prevent unintentional operation.CAP TOUCH display change from the main menu •to the telemetry main menu via ESC.Numerous telemetry displays, programming •functions and evaluation functions are presented directly in the transmitter's screenGraphic presentation of model icons for the model •type display (ﬁ xed-wing/helicopter)Built-in connector sockets for PC-USB interface, •headset, SMART BOX, external RF module, DSC system. Prepared for teacher/pupil operation.Teacher/pupil system with or without cable for •complete transfer; all settings are made on the teacher transmitter.Additional functions are planned for •implementation via software update.

14 Remote control set descriptionehtrofatadlacinhceT - HoTT transmitterFrequency band 2.4 … 2.4835 GHzModulation FHSSRegion EURO or FRANCE, see page 261Control functions 16 functions, 4 of these can be trimmedTemperature range -10 … +55 °CAntenna collapsibleOperating voltage 3.2 … 4.8 VCurrent draw about 500 mARange up to about 4 000 mDimensions about 252 x 252 x 60 mmWeight about 1,685 g with transmitterbatteryReceiver GR-32 Dual HoTTGraupner HoTT 2.4 GHz technology gives the dual-receiver a new Hopping Telemetry Transmission high-frequency section with state-of-the-art components and software. The dual-receiver has two complete receiver sections and additional hardware antenna diversity. Reception is always switched over to the better antenna signal and, for transmitting,the antenna last used for receiving will always be used. Thus it is assured that return channel data is transmitted via the better positioned antenna.Parameters for receiver supply voltage, receivertemperature and signal strength are transmittedwithout any additional sensors.The receiver has a connector for telemetry sensors and one for sum signal input or output.The receiver has six battery inputs to make it an excellent power source for even high-load servos.AccessoriesOrder No.Description71.26 Transmitter straps, Graupner HoTT72.40 Transmitter straps, deluxeTeacher/pupil cable for mc-20 HoTTsee page 213Replacement partsOrder No.Description3080 Aluminum transmitter case, HoTT,400x300x150 mm33000.1 Transmitter battery, ƀat LiIo, single cell six-pack/6000 3.7 V TX33002.1 Micro-SD card, 2 GB for HoTT transmitter33032.2 Transmitter metal hanger for mc-2033032.3 Hand rests for mc-20 (2 piece)33801 HoTT transmitter antennaTechnical data for the GR-32 Dual HoTT receiverOrder no. 33516Operating voltage 3.6 … 8.4 V*Current draw about 140 mAFrequency band 2.4 … 2.4835 GHzModulation FHSSAntenna 2 x 2 diversity antennas,about 145 mm long, about 115 mm of this length encapsulated and about 30 mm activePlug-in servos 16Plug-in sensors up to four sensorsTemperature range about -10 … +55 °CRange up to about 5 000 mDimensions about 63 x 30 x 14 mmAntenna length 4 x wire 145 mm (activeantennae 30 mm)Weight about 24 g* The speciſcation for permissible operating voltage range applies only to the receiver. Please note in this context that receiverinput voltage is applied without regulation to connected servosbut the voltage range for most connectible servos (speed controls, gyros, etc.) is only 4.8 to 6 V.The set, order no. 33032, includesMicrocomputer transmitter• mc-20 HoTT with built-in LiIo single cell six-pack/6000 mAh/3.7 Vtransmitter battery (change reserved)Electric outlet charger (4.2 V, 500 mA)•Graupner• bidirectional receiver, GR-32 Dual HoTT (order no. 33516) for connection of up to 16 servosUSB adapter/interface (order no.•7186.6) including suitable USB cable for connection to a PC and an adapter cable for receiver updatesMicro-SD card (2 GB) with an adapter for a card •readerSturdy aluminum transmitter case with foam•cushioning (order no. 3080)Other accessories in Internet at www.graupner.de.Contact or visit your local dealer. He will be glad to provide advice.Thildtf thmc 20 H TT t itt ThilTh t d 33032 i l dComputer System mc-2032 channel remote control set in 2.4 GHz Graupner-HoTT technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)33020, includes

16 General operating notices General operating noticesTransmitter Transmitter power supplyThe mc-20 HoTT transmitter is equipped with a high-capacity, rechargeable LiIo 1s6p/6000 3.7V TX battery (order no. 33000.1) as standard equipment. (changes reserved) However, the standard built-in battery is not charged upon delivery of the transmitter.When the transmitter is used, its battery voltage should be monitored by way of the indicators provided in the LCD display. If the voltage level preset in the "Battery warning" line of the »General basic settings«menu, page 260, (default setting 3.60 V) is underrun, an acoustic signal will be sounded and a warning message will appear in the display. #01 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.03.5V0:00.000000:00hMVBatt must be re-charged!!No later than now, operation must be terminated so the battery can be charged again. Note:Be sure the correct battery type is set in the »Generalbasic settings« menu, page 260! The standard setting for this is "Lith.". Charge the transmitter battery with the plug-in charger.The transmitter's rechargeable LiIo battery can be charged by way of the charger socket located behind a cover on the left, front side of the transmitter – as viewed from the front – with the included plug-in charger (order no. 32032.4).Depending on the state of discharge, the included plug-in charger (4.2 V/500 mA) requires up to about 15 hours to fully recharge the transmitter battery.Never use plug-in chargers from other manufacturers or chargers intended for other battery types. Charger output voltage which is too high or possibly even different plug polarity, see further below, can cause immense damage. We recommend that this plug-in charger be appropriately labeled.Also observe the safety notices provided on pages 4 … 7.The transmitter must be switched "OFF" during the entire charging procedure. Never switch on the transmitter when it is connected to the charger. Even a brief interruption to charging can cause charging voltage to rise to a level that will immediately damage the transmitter with over-voltage. Also for this reason, be sure all connectors are always plugged in securely and have good contact. Opening the transmitter housingSwitch off the transmitter before opening it (power switch to »OFF«). Push both housing base latches in the opposite the direction of the arrow marks, toward the inside, to their limits. Now tilt the transmitter somewhat to the rear so the housing base can ﬂ ip open and can be unhooked. Close the transmitter's housing base by ﬁ rst hooking it to the underside, ﬂ ip the base closed then push both latches toward the outside. When closing the base, pay attention that no cables are pinched.Notes:Make no modiﬁ cations of any kind to the •circuit boards as this will void the guarantee as well as the unit's ofﬁ cial permit.Be sure not to touch the circuit boards with •any metallic objects. Do not touch contacts with your ﬁ ngers.Before performing any tasks inside the •transmitter, disconnect the transmitter's battery (see next page) to avoid potential short circuit damage to the transmitter's circuit boards.

17General operating noticesCharging with automatic chargersTo achieve quicker recharging of the single cell LiIo battery, Graupner automatic chargers can also be used. The table below shows a selection of these chargers. Recommended chargers (accessory)OrderNo. DesignationInput voltage 220 VInput voltage 12 Vsuitable for battery typesintegr. balancerNiCdNiMHLiPo/LiIolead battery6411 Ultramat 8 xxxxx6463 Ultramat 12 plus x x xxxx6464 Ultramat 14 plus x x x xxxx6466 Ultra Trio plus 14 x x x xxxx6468 Ultramat 16S x x x xxxx6469 Ultra Trio Plus 16 xxxxx x6470 Ultramat 18 x x x xxxx6475 Ultra Duo Plus 45 x x x xxxx6478 Ultra Duo Plus 60 x x x xxxx6480 Ultra Duo Plus 80 x x x xxxxCharger cable, order no. 3022 is additionally needed for the transmitter and charger cable, order no. 3021 is additionally needed for the receiver.Other charger units and details about the listed chargers can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de.The charger socket is equipped standard with a diode to protect against reversed polarity. Original Graupner automatic chargers also detect battery voltage polarity. Observe the conﬁ guration notices for the charger used.First connect the charger cable's banana plugs to the charger and only then connect the cable's other end into the charging jack on the transmitter. Never allow the bare ends of the banana plugs to come into contact with one another when the other end of the cable is plugged into the transmitter. Charging current may not exceed 1.5 A as otherwise the diode, and perhaps other components, could be damaged. If necessary, limit the current at the charger.mc-20 HoTT charging jack polarityThe charger cables on the market from other manufacturers often have different polarities. Therefore use only an original Graupner charger cable, order no. 3022. Removing the transmitter's batteryTo remove the transmitter's battery, ﬁ rst unlatch the cover of the battery compartment on the rear side of the transmitter housing then remove the cover.Take out the transmitter's battery then disconnect the transmitter battery's connector by carefully pulling on the supply line cable. Inserting the transmitter's batteryThe battery connector is protected against a reverse polarity connection by two slanted edges, see illustration. When correctly plugged in, the unconnected pin of the connector is at the bottom, as shown in the illustration. The plus pole (red lead) is in the middle and the minus pole (brown or black lead) is toward the antenna side. Never try to force the connector onto its circuit-board socket. Place the battery into its compartment and close the transmitter's cover.Transmitter connector polarityBattery connectorBattery connector

18 General operating notices Battery operation timer at the bottom left of the screenThis timer shows the transmitter's cumulative operating time since the transmitter's battery was last charged. This timer is automatically reset to "0:00" when the transmitter is switched on and its battery voltage is signiﬁ cantly higher than when the transmitter was last used, e.g. because the battery was charged.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMV Lithium battery, CR 2032On the side of the transmitter board opposite the transmitter battery there is a ﬁ xture containing a lithium battery, type CR 2032, which can be replaced by the user.This battery maintains the date and time settings during a transmitter power supply outage, for example when the transmitter's main battery is being replaced. Joystick length adjustmentThe length of both joysticks can be continuously adjusted to adapt these transmitter controls to the pilot's preference.Hold the lower half of the knurled grip in place then turn the upper section to release its counter-locked threads. Now pull up or push down on the joystick's end to the desired length. When the length is suitable, tighten the counter-locked threads of the upper and lower sections again.Lithium batteryLithium battery

19General operating noticesJoystick restoring forceThe joystick's restoring force can also be adjusted to the pilot's preference. The adjustment is located next to the return springs, see markings in the ﬁ gure below.Spring force for the given direction of motion can be adjusted by turning the respective screw with a Phillips screwdriver.clockwise = stronger return,•counter-clockwise = weaker return.•Note:The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of the left joystick so corresponding screws for the right joystick are located to the right of the middle. Joystick conversionsNeutralizationBoth the left and the right joystick can be conﬁ gured for neutralized or non-neutralized operation. Open the transmitter.To change the joystick's factory setting, locate the screw shown in the ﬁ gure below enclosed in a white circle. Note:The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of the left joystick so the corresponding screw for the right joystick is on the right side just below the middle.Now turn this screw down until the respective joystick is free to move from limit to limit - or turn the screw out until the joystick again completely self-restoring. Brake spring and ratchetThe outboard screw of the two marked in the next ﬁ gure adjusts the braking force and the inboard screw adjusts the strength of the ratchet for the respective joystick. Note:The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of the left joystick so corresponding screws for the right joystick are located at the top left.verticalverticalhorizontalhorizontal

20 General operating notices Holder bracket for transmitter strapsA stable transmitter hanger for fastening neck straps is standard equipment on the mc-20 HoTT transmitter.To unfold the holder brackets, ﬁ rst press both brackets inward a bit near where they are lettered then turn them upward by 90 °. The brackets will automatically lock into position. If you have a neck strap fastened to the holder bracket with key-rings, ﬁ rst press lightly on the right holder bracket to release its latch so it can be folded down then do the same with the left holder bracket. Afterward, press both brackets SIMULTANEOUSLY into the recess.The following straps are available as accessories:Order no. Description71.26 Transmitter straps, Graupner HoTT72.40 Transmitter straps, deluxe Installation of switches, switch modules and knob modulesThere are a total of 20 holes in the transmitter's housing available for mounting accessory modules.To be safe, always disconnect the transmitter battery before installation to avoid short circuit conditions. Be sure to pay attention that soldered points on the transmitter board do not come into contact with metal objects!Unoccupied holes in the transmitter's housing are closed with blind plugs. These can easily be pulled out from the outside with one's ﬁ ngernails.Insert the accessory switch, etc. through a hole in the housing from the inside.Accessory switches, potentiometers, etc. are fastened into place by screwing a nut onto the threaded shaft protruding though the housing and tightening it with a suitable wrench. If the control has a knob, it can be reattached after the nut is tightened down. Trim nut wrench (order no. 5733) is well suited for tightening down these nuts.Trim nut wrench (order no. 5733) is well suited for tightening down switch element trim nuts. Aligning the antennaThe removable, articulated antenna is to be screwed into the ball-joint connector then aligned by hand. The antenna exhibits very limited ﬁ eld strength straight out from its end, pointing it directly toward the model is wrong.When screwing in the antenna, pay attention that the center pin in the antenna socket does not get bent or pressed back in the socket.

22 General operating notices - Face-side connectionstelemetry data and symbols will be suppressed.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hDSCThe transmitter's upper display will show the message "CANNOT RECEIVE DATA" during this time.Thus the transmitter is ready for operation. In contrast, the mc-20 HoTT transmitter in teacher mode is to be switched on prior to plugging in the respective cable.Connect the other end of the cable to the desired 3. unit in compliance with the given operating instructions for that unit.Important:Pay attention that all plugs are inserted securely into their respective sockets and use only the prescribed 2-pole TRS connector plugs on the DSC-side.In the line "DSC Output" in the »4. Basic settings, model«, page 81 or 88 or the line "Pre-set DSC Output" in the »General basic settings«, page 258, – depending on the number of functions transferred – one of the following modes can be set: PPM10, PPM16, PPM18 or PPM24. Default setting: PPM10.Notice about ﬂ ight simulators:Because of the myriad of ﬂ ight simulators available on the market, it may be necessary to have the contact layout of the audio plug or DSC module appropriately modiﬁ ed by Graupner Service. DSC / Direct Servo ControlThe acronym "DSC" is a carryover which stands for the original "Direct Servo Control" function. However, in HoTT systems the "direct servo control" function is no longer available via a diagnose cable due to technical reasons.Once the left face-side cover has been moved away, the mc-20 HoTT transmitter's DSC socket is accessible:The standard two-pole DSC jack in the mc-20 HoTT transmitter is used as the teacher or pupil jack as well as an interface to ﬂ ight simulators.To ensure a proper DSC connection, please observe:Make any necessary menu changes.1. Refer to the section beginning on page 210 to adapt the mc-20 HoTT transmitter to a teacher/pupil system.When operating a ﬂ ight simulator or when 2. operating the mc-20 HoTT transmitter as a pupiltransmitter, ALWAYS leave the transmitter's ON/OFF switch in the "OFF" position as only in this position does the transmitter's RF module remain inactive after the DSC cable is inserted. This also reduces the transmitter's power consumption somewhat.Only the "Battery" LED should remain constantly illuminated and the transmitter's basic display should show the character string "DSC" below the operating time clock. At this time, the display of Face-side connections Charger jackThe mc-20 HoTT transmitter's charger jack becomes accessible after turning the left face-side cover away.The transmitter's rechargeable LiIo battery can be charged by way of the charger socket located behind a cover on the left, front side of the transmitter – as viewed from the front – with the included plug-in charger (order no. 32032.4).Maximum permissible charging current with Graupner automatic chargers: 1.5 A.Never use plug-in chargers from other manufacturers or chargers intended for other battery types. Charger output voltage which is too high or possibly even different plug polarity, see further below, can cause immense damage. More information about charging the transmitter's battery can be found on page 16. Observe the safety notices on pages 7 … 9 when handling lithium batteries.

23General operating notices - Face-side connections Card slotmicro SD and micro SDHCThe mc-20 HoTT transmitter's card slot for type micro-SD and micro-SDHC memory cards becomes accessible once the right face-side cover has been turned away. All conventional micro SD memory cards up to 2 GB and micro SDHC cards up to 32 GB storage capacity can be used. However, as a manufacturer we recommend the use of memory cards no larger than 4 GB as this is completely adequate for all normal situations.The type of memory card to be used in the transmitter is that known in conjunction with digital cameras and cell phones. It is to be pushed into the slot, contacts up, until it latches, see photos above. Once the memory card has been inserted, the transmitter's cover ﬂ ap can be closed again. The stylized image of a memory card will appear in the basic setup screen to indicate the presence of the inserted memory card.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVRX VOLT 4.8VRemoving the memory card Press the SC card a bit further into the card slot to The so-called "DATA jack" is located at the right of this group of connector sockets.This jack is intended for connection of the optional Smart-Box, order no. 33700.Details about the Smart-Box can be found with the given product in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de. Data jackConnector jack for software updates as well as for changing date and time from a PC with a Windows XP, Vista or 7 operating system.The USB cable, order no. 32032, which is included with the set is to be connected to this jack. The procedure for carrying out a software update via a PC is described on page 43.The PC software required, as well as the suitable USB driver, can be found on the download page for the given product on the Graupner website at www.graupner.de.Once the necessary driver and software is installed on the PC, this USB connection can be used to update the transmitter or even just to set the transmitter's date and time.To set the transmitter's date and time by way of this jack, refer to the »Info display« menu, beginning page 266. Mini-USB connector

24 General operating notices - Face-side connectionsvoice packet of a different language at any time. More information about this can be found in the section »SECRET MODE« beginning on page 32.Importing/exporting model memoriesAny model memory can be stored to an inserted memory card or from an inserted card into the transmitter. This feature is intended to support data exchange between identical transmitters or even use as data backup. More information about this can be found in the section »Copy / Erase« beginning on page 71. Note:Some special symbols that can be used in model names are subject to speciﬁ c restrictions associated with the FAT or FAT32 ﬁ le system used by the memory cards and these special symbols will be replaced during the copy process with a tilde (~).Once the right face-side cover has been moved away, the mc-20 HoTT transmitter's headset connector is accessible:The jack is intended for connecting conventional earplugs or a headset by way of a 3.5 mm TRS plug. (not included in the set) An appropriate symbol will appear in the basic display when a headset is connected.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVRX VOLT:4.8VThe transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those signals associated with the telemetry menu are output via this connection. These announcements are made in German language by default. More about this can be found under "Voice output" in the section »SECRET MODE« beginning on page 32 and »Telemetry« beginning on page 228.The volume of signals and voice output sent to the headset can be adjusted individually in the lines "Voice volume", "Vario volume", and "Touch-beeps vol." of the »General basic settings« menu, page 259. Headset connectorrelease the slot's latch then pull out the memory card.Data acquisition / storageThe storage of data on the SD card is coupled to the ﬂ ight timer. If this timer is started – when a suitable memory card is inserted in the card slot and a telemetry link to the receiver exists – data acquisition is also started. Data acquisition will stop again when the ﬂ ight timer is stopped. The ﬂ ight timer is started and stopped as described in the section "Timers (general)" on page 153. While data acquisition is ongoing, the on-screen card image will blink continuously at a slow rate. The amount of data written on the memory card is presented as a black bar graph which grows from left to right as data ﬁ lls the memory card.After a data acquisition session is ﬁ nished, there will be an (empty) folder "Models" and a "LogData" folder on the memory card. Within the "LogData" folder there will be log ﬁ les in sub-folders that are designated with names in the format 0001_year-month-day.bin, 0002_year-month-day.bin, etc. If a model memory folder is still "unnamed" when the memory card is removed from the transmitter and inserted into the card slot of a PC or laptop, the respective log ﬁ les can be found in a sub-folder designated "NoName". There is a PC program available on the transmitter's download web page at www.graupner.de with which the stored data can be evaluated on a compatible PC.Importing voice ﬁ lesAs mentioned in section "Headsets", here at the right, the transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those signals and announcements associated with the telemetry menu can be output by way of the headset connector. These announcements are made in German language by default. These announcements are summarized in a voice packet which is stored in a transmitter-internal memory but can be replaced by a

25General operating notices - Face-side connectionsAn external RF module, for example a WEATRONIC module, can be connected to this jack, see illustration below.An external RF module, for example a WEATRONIC module, can be connected to this jack. If an external RF module is attached, then switching between the external module and the internal HoTT RF module is accomplished in the "Module" line of the »Basic settings, model« menu, page 77 or 85, by selecting either "HoTT" or "EXT.PPM". If necessary, the signal provided on this connection can be inverted by selecting the appropriate option for the line "ext. PPM signal" in this same menu, see page 83 or 92.Note:The "INT PPM" socket located inside the transmitter is also suitable for this purpose. However, a connecting cable must be passed through to the outside of the transmitter housing by way of one of the module openings originally intended for a switch. EXT.PPMThe designation "SPI" stands for an interface for future applications. This socket is currently non-functional and may not be connected. SPI

26 General operating notices - Face-side connections Bottom side transmitter interiorNotes:Disconnect the transmitter battery at its connector when performing any type of work inside the transmitter. Never allow solder points to come into contact with objects as this can create short circuit conditions.All jacks and plugs not described are to be left unconnected.Transmitter battery plugFor charging the battery and a list of suitable automatic chargers, see page 17Lithium battery CR2032(not rechargeable) Independent backup for the transmitter's date and time settings, see »Info display« menu on page 266.Transmitter batteryObserve charging rules, see page 16Plug-in locationsSix free plug-in locations for additional switches are standard, see page 21These switch plug-in locations can be used in any sequence.Plug-in locationOne free plug-in location for a proportional rotary control module, order no. 33001.11 INT PPM plug-in locationOne free plug-in location for connecting an additional – internal – RF moduleLithium batteryCR2032(not rechargeable)Independentbackupfor the transmitter'sdate and time settings, see »Info display« menu on page 266.Plug-in locations (UVR, 5-pole)eight free plug-in locations for future rotary control installations.

29Transmitter description - Display and keypad Operating the "data terminal"Entry keys ESC and SETDisplay symbolsDisplayed telemetry symbols the active model memory has not yet been "bound" to a HoTT receiver. More about the "Binding" process can be found on page 77 and 85. Switched off on RF transmitter sideblinking antenna symbol: The last receiver bound to the active model is inactive or out of rangeM x no telemetry signal to receiveMsignal strength indicator of the connection to the modelP signal strength indicator of the connection to the pupil transmitter in the display of the teacher transmitter for wireless teacher/pupil operationKeys left of the displayESC• key each brief tap on the ESC key will cause a stepwise return in function selection or even further to the base screen. Any changes made to settings remain.Momentarily touching the ESC key for about 1 s while in the base screen will open and close the Telemetry menu.Selection keys • ef cdA tap on one of these keys will scroll, 1. appropriate for the given arrow direction, through lists, such as through the model selection list or the multi-function list or within menus though the menu's lines. A brief simultaneous tap on the 2. ef keys will cause a switch from the transmitters base screen, as well as from almost any menu position, into the »Servo display« menu.Keys to the right of the displayS•ET keyAfter switching the transmitter on, a brief tap 1. on the SET key will cause a jump from the displayed base screen to the Multi-function menu. In the same manner, a selected menu can now be called up with the SET key. Within menus having settings, activate / 2. deactivate (conﬁ rm) the given setting ﬁ elds with a tap on the SET key.Selection keys • ef cd1. "Scrolling" through the Multi-function menu and menu lines within the Basic Settings menu analogous to the selection keys of the left touch pad or by "circling" over the four selection keys.2. Select or set parameters in setting ﬁ elds after their activation with a tap on the SET key, whereby the fc and ed keys will have the same given function. In this case it is completely irrelevant which of these two keys are used.A brief simultaneous tap on the 3. cd oref keys will set a changed parameter value in the entry ﬁ eld back to its default value (CLEAR).Notes:Touching the given touch pad does not itself •initiate the given action but rather the end of the touch.In the event the touch pads do not exhibit any •functionality immediately after switching the transmitter off and then on again right away, this is not a fault. Just switch the transmitter off again then wait for several seconds before switching it on again.

30 Transmitter description - Shortcuts and warning notices ShortcutsThe following key combinations can be used to directly call up certain menus and options:CLEAR•A brief simultaneous tap on the cd or efkeys of the right touch pad will reset a changed parameter value in the active entry ﬁ eld back to its default value.»• Servo display«A brief simultaneous tap on the ef keys of the left touch pad will change from the transmitter's base screen or from almost any menu position to the »Servo display« menu, see page 262.»• Telemetry« menuTap the center ESC key of the left touch pad for about 1 s to call up the »Telemetry« menu from the transmitter's base screen or return to the base screen again, see text beginning on page 228.Graphic display of telemetry data•Brieﬂ y touching one of the selection keys of the left or right touch pad will cause a jump from the base screen directly to the transmitter's graphic display of telemetry data or will allow paging back and forth between individual graphic displays. A brief tap on the center ESC or SET key will cause a return back to the base screen.»• SECRET MODE«(language selection and contrast)Touch and hold the cd selection keys of the left touch pad then momentarily touch the SET key of the right touch pad, see text beginning on the next double-page.Entry lockout•Entry lockout is activated and deactivated from the base screen by simultaneously touching the ESCand SET keys for about 2 s.Quick-Select•From the multi-function list, a jump can be made into a "Structure overview" by way of a brief, simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad. Menus are arranged in clear groups in this overview.MemoryBase servo sett. Transm. controlsSwitches Flight phasesTimers MixersSpecial funct. Global functionsAll codesNow the desired group can be selected with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad … MemoryBase servo sett. Transm. controlsSwitches Flight phasesTimers MixersSpecial funct. Global functionsAll codes… then ﬁ nally tap the center SET key of the right touch pad brieﬂ y. As soon as the key is released, only the respective generic term for the given menu will remain listed. For example:Copy / EraseSupress codes Supress modelsModel selectWarning noticesBIND. N/AOK"Bind not available"A receiver has not yet been bound to the currently active model memory. A brief tap on the SET key will cause a direct jump to the appropriate option.CAN‘TRECEIVEDATANo bound receiver in rangeOFFONPlease selectRF on/off? Only for a receiver that has already been bound:Please select RF "on" or "off"?RFMUST BEOFFOKPrompt to switch off RF transmission(A bound receiver can only be replaced by another receiver when RF transmission is switched off.)ACTTRAINERWireless LinkINHIs the "wireless teacher/pupil connection" that was active when the transmitter was last used to be continued, ACT(active, i.e. continue) or switched off INH (inhibit, i.e. discontinue)?Batt. mustbe re-charged!!Operating voltage is too low Warning notices

31Transmitter description - Function ﬁ elds and entry lockoutFail Safe setup t.b.d.Failsafe has not yet been activatedThrottle too high!Helicopter throttle joystick or limiter too highNo pupil signalConnection between teacher and pupil is interruptedSD-CARDINSERTOKNo SD or SDHC memory card in the card slot or card is not legibleThe transmitter has not been operated within •the time period speciﬁ ed by the "Stick warning" line of the »General basic settings« menu, see page 260. The message …!Stick!…, die "WARNING" LED at the right next to the on/off switch will blink and an acoustic warning will sound. If the transmitter is not operated within the next minute, the transmitter will switch itself off.If battery voltage is too low, a model switch is •blocked for reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen:not possible nowvoltage too lowA lockout for the touch keys, and thus protection against inadvertent use of all setting options, can be established by touching and holding the ESC and SET keys simultaneously for about two seconds while the mc-20 HoTT transmitter is in its basic display. This lockout condition is indicated by a key symbol, located at the intersection point of the trim bars, which is displayed in reverse video.#01 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVUnlock byESCand SETRX VOLT:4.9VThe lockout is effective immediately but controls remains operationally ready. This lockout can be removed by again touching and holding the ESC and SET keys for about two seconds. A lockout condition is also removed the next time the transmitter is switched on. Entry lockout Depending on the given menu, certain function ﬁ elds will appear on the bottom display line.CLR SEL SET STO SYM ASY A marked function is activated with a tap on the SET key.Function ﬁ eldsCLR• (clear) eraseSEL• (select): selectionSET• (set) "set" or adjust a valueSTO• (store): store (e.g. control position)SYM• set values symmetrically ASY• set values asymmetrically • switch ﬁ eld symbol (assignment of all types of switches)• within a menu, change to the second page, (menu continuation) Function ﬁ elds in the displaySEL,STO,SYM,ASY, ,

32 Transmitter description - Secret modeThe mc-20 HoTT transmitter's »SECRET MODE«menu can be called up from almost any menu position by touching and holding the cd selection keys of the left touch pad and the SET key of the right touch pad for at least 3 seconds. This will produce the display shown below.¿SECRET MODE¿TOP LCD CONTRASTVOICE UPDATE0FIRMWARE UPDATECALIBRATIONBOTTOM LCD CONTRAST 0 TOP / BOTTOM LCD CONTRASTFollowing a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, a selected "… CONTRAST" line can be used to adjust the contrast of the given display to meet personal preference with the selection keys, as described in more detail on page 259. Another tap on the SET or ESC key will return to line selection.The line … VOICE UPDATEAs mentioned in section "Headsets" on page 24, the transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those signals and announcements associated with the telemetry menu can be output by way of the headset connector. These announcements are made in German language by default. These announcements are summarized in a voice packet which is stored in a transmitter-internal memory but they can be replaced by a voice packet of a different language at any time.At the time of this manual's printing, the standard SECRET MODELanguage selection and display contrastSD card delivered with the set includes the following languages: German•English•French•Italian•Spanish•The given active language packet can be swapped out either with the PC program available as a download from the transmitter's web page at www.graupner.de or with the SD card, as described below. If not already done, insert the SD card or SDHC card into the transmitter as described on page 23. Once the memory card is inserted in the transmitter, switch the transmitter on with RF switched off.ONPlease selectRF on/off?OFF Language changeUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the line "VOICE UPDATE" line. ¿SECRET MODE¿TOP LCD CONTRASTVOICE UPDATE0FIRMWARE UPDATEBOTTOM LCD CONTRAST 0Use the center SET key of the right touch pad to switch to the selection page for the "VOICE UPDATE" line.FILE LISTVOICE_FRANCE.VDFVOICE_GERMAN.VDFVOICE_ITALIANO.VDFVOICE_SPAIN.VDFVOICE_ENGLISH.VDFNow use the cd keys of the left or right touch pad to choose the desired language, for example:FILE LISTVOICE_FRANCE.VDFVOICE_ITALIANO.VDFVOICE_SPAIN.VDFVOICE_ENGLISH.VDFVOICE_GERMAN.VDFConﬁ rm the choice with another tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad. The selected language packet will be loaded into the transmitter's memory.¿SECRET MODE¿TOP LCD CONTRASTVOICE UPDATE0FIRMWARE UPDATEBOTTOM LCD CONTRAST 022/100%IThe loading process is ﬁ nished as soon as the progress bar at the lower edge of the display disappears.

33Transmitter description - Secret mode¿SECRET MODE¿TOP LCD CONTRASTVOICE UPDATEWFIRMWARE UPDATEBOTTOM LCD CONTRAST WWhen this process is ſnished, switch off the transmitter.All settings stored in the transmitter remain intact after a change of language has been made.Notes:If the warning …•RFMUST BEOFFOK… appears, then the transmitter's RF radiationis still active. Jump to the »Base setup model«menu, select the "RF transmit" line, select its "OFF" option then repeat the procedureIf the warning …•SD-CARDINSERTOK… appears then the transmitter does not detect a memory card in its card slot or the card foundcannot be read.If the selection window is empty …•FILE LIST… then the transmitter could not ſnd an appropriate ſle on the inserted memory card.Check the contents of the SD card's "VoiceFile"directory on a PC or laptop.ETADPUERAWMRIFegaugnalyalpsidegnahCImportant notice:Be sure to check the charge status of yourtransmitter's battery or charge its battery as a precaution before every update. Also backupall occupied model memories so they can be restored if that should become necessary.¿SECRET MODE¿TOP LCD CONTRASTVOICE UPDATE0FIRMWARE UPDATEBOTTOM LCD CONTRAST 0In the same manner as described above in the section "VOICE UPDATE", this menu item can be used to update or change the transmitter's ſrmware,including its display language. At the time of this manual's printing, the standard SD card deliveredwith the set includes the following languages:German•English•A French, Italian and Spanish version are to be implemented at a later point in time.Appropriate updates and information can be found on the mc-20 HoTT transmitter's product page under theDownload link at www.graupner.de.FILE LISTMC-20_1V234_ENGLISH.BINMC-20_1V234_FRENCH.BINMC-20_1V234_DEUTSCH.BINNow use the cd selection keys of the left or righttouch pad to choose the desired ſrmware version, forexample:FILE LISTMC-20_1V234_FRENCH.BINMC-20_1V234_DEUTSCH.BINMC-20_1V234_ENGLISH.BINConſrm the choice with another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The loading of ſrmware into the transmitter's memory will be startedand following two displays, visible only very brieƀy,which only make reference to the ſrmware update …

34 Transmitter description - Secret mode¾¾¾¾¾¾Firmware DownloadProzess StartPlease Wait....¾¾¾¾¾¾Boot DownloadSuccess!!!Please Wait....…, the message:¾¾¾¾¾¾FirmwareDownloading...Progress 023/275… will appear in the display. As soon as the counter to the left of the "/" character reaches the value shown on the right as the volume to be loaded, the message …¾¾¾¾Firmware UpgradeSuccess!!!… will appear. After a few seconds this message will be erased and the transmitter will automatically restart. The transmitter is now again operational.Notes:If the warning …•SD-CARDINSERTOK… appears then the transmitter does not detect a memory card in its card slot or the card found cannot be read.If the selection window is empty …•FILE LIST… then the transmitter could not ﬁ nd a suitable ﬁ rmware ﬁ le on the inserted memory card. Check the contents of the SD card's "Firmware" directory on a PC or laptop. JOYSTICK CALIBRATIONIf you feel the neutral position of your self-calibrating joysticks (controls 1 … 4) are not exactly 0 % of their control travel, then this can be checked and, if necessary, corrected as follows.Jump to the »Model select« menu and initialize a free model memory as described on page 69. Whether the model to be initialized is a winged aircraft or a helicopter is irrelevant. Wait for the notices which typically appear in the transmitter's base screen following a model change then jump to the »Servo display« menu, for example by simultaneously touching the ef keys of the left touch pad (WITHOUT any interim changes to trim settings or other program settings). If all four of your transmitter's joystick functions are still self-neutralizing, this display should ideally look like the one shown below.135791113150000000000000000246810121416Otherwise the graph bars show current setting percentages for joystick control functions which are not self-neutralizing – typically for the "C1" throttle/brake or throttle/pitch joystick. For example, if the throttle/brake joystick is in its "quarter-throttle" position, the display would appear as shown below.1357911131500000000–500000000246810121416One after the other, put both joysticks into each of their four possible limit positions withoutexerting force at the limit position. In each of these eight possible limit positions, the – side dependent – indication for exactly -100 % or +100 % should be displayed. For example, if transmitter control 2 is at its right limit and the other three joystick functions are in their respective middle positions then the transmitter's display should look like the one shown below.

35Transmitter description - Secret mode13579111315–100000000000000000246810121416Regardless of the number of self-neutralizing joystick functions available on your transmitter, if these checks produce four 0 % results and eight 100 % results then your transmitter's joysticks are optimally calibrated. You can terminate this process then, if appropriate, delete the model memory just created.Otherwise jump (as described at the outset of the previous double page) to the "Stick calibration" line in the »SECRET MODE« menu then brieﬂ y touch the center SET key of the right touch pad.STICK CALIBRATION0%dcThe ef selection keys of the right touch pad will now allow you to cyclically select the four calibrated joystick planes, e.g. the left/right plane of the right joystick.STICK CALIBRATION0%dcNow position the right joystick – without exerting extra force – to its left limit corresponding with the on-screen blinking arrow pointing to the left.STICK CALIBRATION+102%dc… and brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. This concludes this example calibration of the right joystick's left limit. The circle in the middle of the stylized joystick plane will now blink as conﬁ rmation of the calibration.STICK CALIBRATION+100%dcNow release the self-neutralizing joystick so it can return to its center position and then tap again on the center SET key to calibrate the joystick's centered position. The right triangle marker will begin to blink.STICK CALIBRATION0%dcRepeat the calibration process for the right limit of the right joystick. The other joystick planes are calibrated analogously.Proceed similarly to calibrate the three sliders mounted in the middle console and the two proportional rotary controls on the sides of the transmitter. The calibration options for these ﬁ ve proportional controls can be reached by repeatedly tapping on the e or f selection keys of the right touch pad until the desired calibration position is reached, e.g..:LEVER CALIBRATION0%dcNotes:Correct any bad calibrations by repeating the •respective process.Within a given joystick plane, each of the three •calibration positions can be selected directly with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad.Brieﬂ y touching the center ESC key of the left touch pad will terminate the process and return to the sub-menu "Stick calibration".

37Transmitter description - Telemetry data displaywww.graupner.de in the web page for the given product. RECEIVER RX–S QUA: 100%RX–S STR: 100%TX–dBm: 33dBmRX–dBm: 33dBmRX–VOLT:4.8 TMPL–PACK: 10msCH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCER-LOW V:4.6 +22°CThis screen presents the »RX DATAVIEW« of the Telemetry menu's »SETTING & DATAVIEW« sub-menu, see page 229, with data processed and displayed graphically. The displayed items are as follows:Value ExplanationRX-S QUA signal quality in %RX-S ST signal strength in %RX-dBm Reception power in dBmTX-dBm transmit power in dBmV PACK Indicates the longest time span in ms in which data packages are lost in the transmission from the transmitter to the receiver.RX-VOLT current operating voltage of the receiver's power supply in voltsM-RX V Lowest receiver operating voltage since last startup, in voltsTMP the thermometer depicts the receiver's current operating temperature GENERAL MODULERX–S QUA: 100%RX–S ST : 100%TX–dBm: 33dBmRX–dBm: 33dBmRX–SPG.:4.8 TMPV–PACK: 10msCH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCERECEIVERGENERALELECT. AIRVARIOGPS0.0VBAT1BAT20.0V T2 0°C T1 0°CE FUEL FCELL.V1:0.002:0.003:0.004:0.005:0.006:0.0000.0VBAT1BAT20.0V T2 0°C T1 0°CE FUEL F ALT 0m 0m1 0m3 0.0APOWER 0.0V0If attached to the receiver, this screen will display the data acquired by a General-Engine module, order no. 33610, , or a General-Air module, order no. 33611.More details about these modules can be found in the appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in the web page for the given product.Depending on how this module is equipped with sensors, this screen can permanently display the data shown in the table below.The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and BAT2), the measurement results of up to two temperature sensors (T1 and T2) and a ﬁ ll level gage for the fuel tank.An alternating display along the screen's right edge will display a list of current cell voltages for a LiPo battery with up to six cells or operational data (current altitude with respect to the starting location, ascent/decent m/1 s and m/3 s, current current being drawn in amperes and current voltage of the battery connected to the sensor). The displayed items are as follows:Value ExplanationBAT1 / BAT2battery 1 or 2FUEL fuel level / tank gageE / F empty /fullT1 / T2 temperature of sensor 1 or 2CELL V cell voltage of cells 1 … max. 6ALT current altitude0m1 m/1 s ascent/decent rate0m3 m/3 s ascent/decent rateA current draw i amperesV battery voltageBattery and load indicators0.0V0.0A0mAh0mlThis display depicts current voltage, current current draw and, if attached, the expended capacity of "Batt 1" connected to the General-Engine module (order no. 33610) or General-Air (order no. 33611)module as well as the fuel consumed in ml.

38 Transmitter description - Telemetry data displaySENSOR 10.0V0°CSENSOR 1If attached, this display depicts currently measured voltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage sensor, order no. 33612 or 33613, connected to "T(EMP)1" of the General-Engine module (order no. 33610) or the General-Air module (order no. 33611).SENSOR 20.0V0°CSENSOR 2If attached, this display depicts currently measured voltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage sensor, order no. 33612 or 33613, connected to "T(EMP)2" of the General-Engine module (order no. 33610) or the General-Air module (order no. 33611).Rotary speed sensorU/min000If attached, this display depicts the measured rotary speed of a speed sensor (order no. 33615or 33616) attached to a General-Engine module (order no. 33610) or a General-Air module (order no. 33611).Note:The appropriate blade count must ﬁ rst be set in the module's telemetry menu before the correct speed can be displayed.Vario0.00mmsIf attached, this display will depict the altitude (in m) relative to location, starting location as well as the current rate of ascent/descent (in m/s) data originating from a Vario integrated into a General-Engine module (order no. 33610) or General-Air module (order no. 33611). ELECTRIC AIR MODULERX–S QUA: 100%RX–S ST : 100%TX–dBm: 33dBmRX–dBm: 33dBmRX–SPG.:4.8 TMPV–PACK: 10msCH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCERECEIVERGENERALELECT. AIRVARIOGPS0.0V 0m/3sBAT1 0m/1sBAT20.0V T2 0°CT1 0°C01L0.002L0.003L0.004L0.005L0.006L0.00 ALT 0m7L0.00 0.0V 0A0.0V 0m/3sBAT1 0m/1sBAT20.0V T2 0°CT1 0°C01H0.002H0.003H0.004H0.005H0.006H0.00 ALT 0m7H0.00 0.0V 0AIf attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data acquired by an Electric-Air module, order no. 33620. More details about this module can be found in the appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in the web page for the given product.Depending on how this module is equipped with sensors, this screen can permanently display the data shown in the adjacent table.The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and BAT2), up to two temperature measurements (T1 and T2), current altitude with respect to the starting location, the model's ascent/decent rate in m/1 s and m/3 s and, in the middle of the screen, the current draw currently being taken from a power source.Along the right edge of the screen is a table of alternating values for cell voltages at balancer connections (L) or voltages for up to 7 attached battery cell packs (H). The displayed items are as follows:Value ExplanationV current voltageA current currentBAT1 / BAT2battery 1 or 2ALT current altitudem/1 s m/1 s ascent/decent ratem/3 s m/3 s ascent/decent rateT1 / T2 temperature of sensor 1 or 2

39Transmitter description - Telemetry data displayL or H cell voltage of cells 1 … max. 14L = balancer connection 1H = balancer connection 2AKKU 10.0V0.0A0mAhThis display depicts current voltage, current current draw and, if attached, the expended capacity of "Batt 1" connected to the Electric-Air module (order no. 33620).SENSOR 10.0V0°CSENSOR 1If attached, this display depicts currently measured voltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage sensor (order no. 33612 or 33613) connected to "T(EMP)1" of the Electric-Air module (order no. 33620).SENSOR 20.0V0°CSENSOR 2If attached, this display depicts currently measured voltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage sensor (order no. 33612 or 33613) connected to "T(EMP)2" of the Electric-Air module (order no. 33620).Vario0.00mmsIf attached, this display will depict the altitude (in m) relative to location, starting location as well as the current rate of ascent/descent (in m/s) dataoriginating from a Vario integrated into a Electric-Air module (order no. 33620). VARIO RX–S QUA: 100%RX–S ST : 100%TX–dBm: 33dBmRX–dBm: 33dBmRX–SPG.:4.8 TMPV–PACK: 10msCH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCERECEIVERGENERALELECT. AIRVARIOGPSRXSQ 0 MAX 0m MIN 0m ALT 0HLm/1s0.0m/3s0.0m/10s0.0If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data acquired by a Vario module, order no. 33601.The displayed items are as follows:Value ExplanationALT current altitudeRXSQ Signal strength of the signal received by the receiver in %, see page 230.MAX the preset maximum altitude limit relative to starting location at which, when exceeded, will cause an audible warning to be soundedMIN the preset minimum altitude limit relative to the starting location at which, when underrun, will cause an audible warning to be soundedm/1 s m/1 s ascent/decent ratem/3 s m/3 s ascent/decent ratem/10 s m/10 s ascent/decent rate Vario 0.00mmsIf attached, this display will depict altitude relative to location or starting location (in m) as well as the current rate of ascent/decent (in m/s) from data acquired by a Vario module (order no. 33601).

40 Transmitter description - Telemetry data display GPSRX–S QUA: 100%RX–S ST : 100%TX–dBm: 33dBmRX–dBm: 33dBmRX–SPG.:4.8 TMPV–PACK: 10msCH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCERECEIVERGENERALELECT. AIRVARIOGPSNRXSQ 0 DIS 0mALT 0m0.0m/1s0m/3s0m/10sN 0°00.0000O 0°00.0000WESKmh0If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order No. 33600.Aside from the model's current position and speed, the center section of this screen will also display current altitude with respect to the starting location as well as the model's current ascent/decent rate in m/1 s, m/3 s and m/10 s, current reception quality and the model's distance from its starting location.The displayed items are as follows:Value ExplanationW / N / O / S west / north / east / southKmh speedRXSQ return channel signal strengthDIS distanceALT current altitude with respect to startingm/1 s m/1 s ascent/decent ratem/3 s m/3 s ascent/decent ratem/10 s m/10 s ascent/decent rateGPSNWOSKmh0km/hDISmm/sALTm000.00If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order No. 33600.The displayed items are as follows:Value Explanationkm/h speed DIS horizontal distance in mm/s ascent/decent rate in m/sALT altitude relative to starting location in mVario0.00mmsIf attached, this display will depict the altitude (in m) relative to location, starting location as well as the current rate of ascent/descent (in m/s) from data originating from the Vario integrated into the GPS-/Vario module (order no. 33600).

42 Commissioning the transmitterPreliminary remarksThe Graupner HoTT system theoretically permits simultaneous operation of more than 200 models. However, because of the interspersed radio-frequency utilization permitted by certiﬁ cation for the 2.4 GHz ISM band, this number is signiﬁ cantly lower in practical application. Nevertheless, in general more models can be operated simultaneously in the 2.4 GHz band than would be the case in conventional 35 or 40 MHz frequency bands. The real limiting factor is – as often before – is still likely to be the size of available operating space (i.e. airspace for aircraft). Alone the fact that it is no longer necessary to coordinate transmitting frequencies with other pilots in the vicinity (which is sometimes quite difﬁ cult in broken landscapes, such as on hillside slopes) represents an enormous boost for remote control operating security.Battery charged?Since the transmitter is delivered with an empty (not charged) battery, the battery must ﬁ rst be charged according to the charging instructions on page 16. Otherwise a warning tone will be sounded and an appropriate message will be blended into the basic display if the low voltage threshold set in the "Battery warning" line of the »General basic settings« menu (see page 260) is underrun. Transmitter startupAfter being switched on, the message shown below will appear in the transmitter's screen for about two seconds. OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?Within this brief period there is an opportunity to switch RF transmission off by using the c or f key of the right touch pad to shift the position of the ﬁ eld shown in inverse video to the right so that ON is in standard video and OFF is presented in inverse video.ONPlease selectRF on/off?OFFNow switch the RF module off by tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The telemetry display just below the antenna socket will then brieﬂ y show the message …CAN‘TRECEIVEDATA… and in parallel to this, the transmitter's basic display will appear similar to that shown below:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.0000000:00hMVThe symbol combination means that the currently active model memory has already "bonded " with a Batt. mustbe re-charged!! Commissioning the transmitterPreliminary remarks about the mc-20 HoTT transmitterGraupner-HoTT receiver but there is no connection to that receiver at the moment. (In this example, RF transmission has been switched off.) If, however, the transmitter is switched on withoutswitching RF transmission off, the symbolic antenna mast will blink. At the same time, an acoustic warning will sound until a connection is established with the respective receiver. As soon as the connection is established, the "X" at the base of the symbolic antenna will be replace with a ﬁ eld strength indicator, for example , and the visual and acoustic warnings will cease. If a telemetry connection has also been established for the incoming signal, that is output by the receiver in the model, then the right side of this same screen line will display a similar indication of signal strength for this reception of the receiver's transmitted signal (M ) as well as the current voltage of the receiver's power supply. On the other hand, if the symbol combination 6appears in in the display and the front display shows the message "Can't receive data" then the currently active model memory is not "bound" to any receiver at the moment.Under-voltage warningIf the transmitter's voltage drops below a certain value set in the »General basic settings« menu (page 260), 4.7 V by default, there will be visual and acoustic under-voltage warnings issued.Important notices:The transmitter in the set is already preset, •as delivered, with default values which are correct for operation in most European countries (except France). If the remote control system is to be operated in France then the transmitter's "Region" setting MUST be changed over to "FRANCE" mode, see page 261. IN NO CASE may the

43Commissioning the transmitterUniversal/EUROPE mode be used IN FRANCE.As many as 16 servos can be attached to the •standard receiver included with the mc-20HoTT 2.4 Set. The speciﬁ c receiver included in the set has already been bound to the set's transmitter at the factory.In order to achieve the greatest possible ﬂ exibility but still preclude unnecessary inadvertent operator errors, control channels 5 … 16 have not been assigned to any controls. This means that servos connected by way of these channels will remain in their middle positions until an operator element has been assigned. Practically all mixers are initially inactive for this same reason. More about this can be found on page 108 (winged aircraft) or 112 (helicopter models).The fundamental procedure for initial •programming of a new model memory location can be found on page ?? and the programming examples that begin on page 268. When the remote control system is switched •on, being bonded or when making settings, that the transmitter's antenna is always far enough away from the receiver's antennas. If the transmitter's antenna is brought too close to the receiver's antennas this will cause receiver over-modulation and its red LED will illuminate. At the same time the return channel will drop out and, as a consequence, the ﬁ eld strength indicator in the transmitter's screen will be replaced by an "x" and the receiver's current battery voltage display will show 0.0 V. The remote control is then in Fail-Save mode, see page 208, i.e. servos will remain in their current positions until a new, valid signal can be received. In such a case, increase the distance (between the transmitter and the model containing the receiver) until the indicators are again "normal".Transmitter ﬁ rmware updates are carried out either as described under "FIRMWARE UPDATE / Change display language" in the section »Secret mode« on page 33 or as described below with the help of a PC running a Windows XP, Vista or 7 operating system. This second method connects the transmitter to the PC via its 5-pole mini-USB interface connector, located behind the transmitter's left front cover – as viewed from the front – and, if this method is chosen, it is done at one's own risk. Current software and information is available in Internet at www.graupner.de under the Download link for the given product.Note:You will automatically be notiﬁ ed of new updates per email after registering your transmitter at https://www.graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung. The aforementioned "given product page" is most easily reached by entering "www.graupner.de" into your Internet browser's address line then pressing the ENTER key on your PC or laptop keyboard.On the so-called "homepage" for Graupner, click on one of the "ﬂ ags" to switch the website to a language of your choice, e.g. the British ﬂ ag for English. Afterwards locate the entry ﬁ eld with the title "Search".Place the cursor in this ﬁ eld with a mouse click then enter a search keyword, e.g. the article number printed on the type plate located on the rear side of the transmitter.Another press of the ENTER key on the PC or laptop will open the sought page: Transmitter ﬁ rmware updates

44 Commissioning the transmitterNow use your Internet browser's vertical scroll bar to move down the page a bit until the tabs "Characteristics", "Spare parts" "Accessories" and "Downloads" appear. Because the "Downloads" tab is still missing on the mc-20 HoTT transmitter's page at the time of this manual's printing:Now search here for the necessary ﬁ le/s and start the download with a double-click on the "Download" control button beneath the selected ﬁ le.Store the ﬁ le on your computer in a directory of your choice.Updating mc-20 HoTT softwareThe USB interface cable, order no. 7168.6(included with the set), will be needed to update the transmitter's software via the transmitter's face-side USB interface connector. This cable's connector is to be directly plugged into the 5-pole mini-USB connector socket on the rear side of the transmitter.Note:Be sure to check the charge status of your transmitter's battery or charge its battery as a precaution before every update. Also backup all occupied model memories so they can be restored if that should become necessary. Installing drivers1. Install the required driver software, included in the "USB Drivers" folder of the program packet, onto your PC or laptop so your computer can handle the transmitter's integrated USB interface.Start driver installation with a double-click on the respective ﬁ le and follow the on-screen instructions. Once this software has been successfully installed, the computer must be re-started. Drivers only need to be installed once. Installing the software up-loader2. Unpack the ﬁ le "Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_Ver-XX.zip" in a suitable directory then execute the "Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_Ver-XX.exe" program ﬁ le with a double-click on its ﬁ lename. Follow the instructions provided by the installation wizard. Establishing a transmitter-to-PC connection3. With the transmitter switched off, connect the USB cable by way of its 5-pole mini-USB socket to the rear side of the transmitter.Updating4. mc-20 HoTT transmitter softwareStart the "Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_Ver-X.X" program from the directory where it is located.Use the selection sequence "Menu", "Port Setup" or open the "Controller Menu" and click on "Port select".Now in the "Port select" window, select the COM port connected to the USB interface. The correct port can be recognized by its designation "Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge" in the "Device Name" column. In the above example this would

46 Receiver initialization Receiver initializationPreliminary remarks about the GR-32 DUAL receiverReceiver systemThe mc-20 HoTT remote control set includes a type GR-32 DUAL, 2.4 GHz bidirectional receiver for connecting up to 16 servos.After switching on this HoTT receiver, should "its" transmitter not be within range or switched off, then the receiver's red LED will illuminate continuously for about 1 s then begin to blink slowly. This indicates the receiver has not (yet) established a link to a GraupnerHoTT transmitter. If a link has been established, the green LED will illuminate continuously and the red LED will extinguish. In order to establish a link to the transmitter, the Graupner HoTT receiver must ﬁ rst be "bound" to "its" particular model memory in "its" GraupnerHoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as "binding". This "binding" linkage is only necessary once for each receiver/model memory combination. Refer to pages 77 or 85. The "binding" procedure has been done at the factory for model memory 1 of the units delivered together as a set so this "binding" procedure will only be necessary to link additional receivers or if a memory location change becomes necessary (and – e.g. after a change of transmitter – can be repeated anytime).On-board voltage displayThe current voltage of the receiver's power supply will be shown in the right side of the transmitter's screen if a telemetry link exists between the receiver and transmitter. Temperature warningShould the receiver's temperature sink below an adjustable threshold (default value -10 °C) or rise above an adjustable threshold (default value +55 °C) , an acoustic warning will be issued by the transmitter in the form of a uniform beep of about 1 s duration. The aforementioned threshold limits are stored and adjusted in the receiver.Servo connections and polarityGraupner HoTT receiver servo connections are numbered. The connectors used are keyed against polarity reversal. Pay attention to the small side chamfers when plugging in these connectors. Never use force. The four outer, vertical connectors, designated with "B + -" are intended for battery connections.Do not reverse the polarity of this connection. Reversed polarity could destroy the receiver and devices attached to it.The supply voltage is bussed across (i.e. common for) all numbered connections. The function of every individual channel is determined by the transmitter used, not by the receiver. It is not only the throttle servo connection which is different for every manufacturer and model type. For example, in Graupner remote control systems the throttle servo is on channel 1 for winged aircraft and on channel 6 for helicopter models. Concluding notices:The signiﬁ cantly greater servo resolution •characteristic of the HoTT system produces a noticeably ﬁ rmer response behavior in comparison to previous technology. Please take the time to familiarize yourself with this sensitive behavior.If you have a speed controller with integrated •BEC* arranged in parallel with the receiver battery, its positive pole (red cable) may to be removed from the 3-pole connector. Be sure to look for notices about this in the instructions for the speed controller used.With a small screwdriver, carefully lift up the the connector's center latch (1) just a bit then pull out the red lead (2) and tape it up with insulation tape to prevent possible short circuits (3).Follow the installation instructions on page 52 for the receiver, the receiver antenna and for mounting the servo.ResetTo execute a reset of the receiver, press and hold the SET button on the receiver's top-side while switching the power supply on. If a receiver reset is done while the transmitter is switched off or on a receiver which is not bound, the receiver's LED will slowly blink red for about 2 or 3 seconds. Now release the button again. The binding process can now be initiated right away on the transmitter-side. If reset is done on a bound receiver and the corresponding model memory is active in the powered on transmitter, the LED will illuminate in green after 2 or 3 seconds as an indication that the transmitter/receiver system is again ready for operation. Now release the button again. Please note the following: A receiver RESET will cause ALL receiver settings, except for binding information, to return to their factory settings. Therefore if a RESET is triggered unintentionally, any custom settings that had been present in the receiver before the reset will have to be established again by way of the Telemetry menu.A deliberate RESET is recommended, especially if a receiver is to be "transferred" into another model. This is a rather simple method to eliminate settings which are no longer applicable.* Battery Elimination Circuitrot123

47Receiver initialization Receiver power supplyAmong other aspects, the safe operation of a model depends on a reliable power supply. In the event that, despite smooth operating rods, fully charged battery, battery leads with adequate cross-section, minimum contact resistances at connectors, etc., the transmitter indicates repeated receiver voltage collapses or is receiver voltage is generally too low; please give attention to the following notices.Give primary attention to fully charged batteries when model operation is to be started. Be sure that the contact surfaces of connectors and switches really are low resistance. If necessary, measure the voltage drop across installed switch cables when they are under load because even new heavy-duty switches can cause a voltage drop of up to 0.2 V. This value can increase in contacts by factors as a consequence of aging and oxidation. The constant vibrations and jarring also takes its toll on contacts to produce a creeping increase of contact resistance. Servos present another possible problem source. Even rather small servos like a Graupner/JR DS-281 can draw up to 0.75 A of current when it is blocks under load. Just four of these servos in a "foam" model can therefore load down the on-board power supply by as much as 3 A …Therefore you should choose a power supply which will not break down under greater loads but rather always deliver sufﬁ cient voltage. To "calculate" necessary battery capacity you should always ﬁ gure on at least 350 mAh for every analog servo and at least 500 mAh for every digital servo. For example, from this point of view a battery with 1400 mAh would be the absolute minimum to power a receiver system with a total of 4 analog servos. But be sure to also consider the receiver itself into the calculation because its bidirectional functionality will draw about 70 mA of current too.In any case, it is recommended that several of the six available connections designated "- +/B" be used for the supply of power. (These connections are ONLY intended for battery connections.) Connect the power supply preferably by way of the socket/s which are close to connectors of attached servos. Where only high-power servos are connected, it may be necessary to use all receiver battery connections to connect as many as three PRX receiver power supplies (depending on battery power). Even where only two batteries are used via 1 PRX it is preferable to use the receiver connections closest to the servos which draw the most current. The ﬁ gure below shows an example of a stabilized receiver power supply (PRX-5A, order no. 4136) for the connection of two batteries. As an alternative solution, a switch could be inserted with power supply cables to two receiver connectors. Such a double connection not only reduces the risks associated with a cable break but also ensures a more uniform supply of power to attached servos.If a separate battery is connected to each receiver battery connection, be absolutely sure the batteries have the same voltage and power rating. Never connect different battery types or batteries charged to signiﬁ cantly different levels to the receiver. This can lead to effects similar to short circuit conditions. In such cases, insert voltage stabilizers, such as the PRX-5A receiver power supply, between the batteries and the receiver.PRX receiver power supply, stabilizedOrder No. 4136For reasons of safety, do not use battery boxes or dry cell batteries.The voltage of the on-board power supply will be displayed at the bottom right of the transmitter's screen while the model is in operation.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVRX VOLT:4.8VIf the adjustable warning threshold (default value 3.60 V) set in the Telemetry menu, see page 260, is underrun, a visual and an acoustic under-voltage warning will be issued.Despite this feature, be sure to check the condition of the battery at regular intervals. Do not wait for the warning to be issued before recharging the battery.Note:An overview of available batteries, chargers and current source test instruments can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de. A selection of suitable Compter chargers are listed in the table on page 17. Receiver power supply

48 Receiver initializationCharging the receiver batteryCharger cable, order no. 3021, can be plugged directly onto the receiver's battery for charging. If the battery in the model is connected by way of an order no. 3046,3934,3934.1 or 3934.3 power supply cable, then charging can be accomplished via the charging jack or special charging connector integrated into the switch. The switch in the power supply cable must be in its "OFF" position for charging.Receiver battery connection polarityReceiver system power supplyNiMH 4-cell battery packsIn compliance with the aforementioned conditions, your Graupner HoTT receiver system can be readily operated with traditional 4-cell battery packs as long as the packs have adequate capacity and voltage level.NiMH 5-cell battery packsFive-cell battery packs offer a greater voltage tolerance than do 4-cell packs. However, be aware that not every servo available on the market is able to tolerate the voltage level output by a 5-cell pack over the long term, this is particularly true when the battery pack is freshly charged. Some of these servos react to this with a noticeable "grinding" sound. Therefore pay attention to the speciﬁ cations of the servos you use before making a choice for a 5-cell battery pack..LiFe 6.6 V batteries with 2 cellsFrom a contemporary perspective, these new cells are the very best choice. LiFe cells are also available in hard plastic casings to protect them from mechanical damage. Like LiPo cells, LiFe cells can be quick charged in suitable chargers and they are comparatively robust.This type of secondary cell battery is also rated for a signiﬁ cantly greater number of charge/discharge cycles than, for example, LiPo batteries The nominal 6.6 V output of a 2-cell LiFe battery pack does not present a problem for either Graupner HoTT receivers nor for those servos, speed controllers, gyros and other devices which have been speciﬁ cally approved for operation in this – higher – voltage range. Please note however that practically all servos, speed controllers, gyros and other devices built in the past and most such devices currently still offered on the market have only a permissible voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V. Use of these batteries in conjunction with these devices demand use of a stabilized voltage regulator, e.g. the PRX, Order No. 4136, see appendix. Otherwise there is danger that attached devices will incur damage within a short period of time.LiPo 2-cell packsFor a given capacity, LiPo batteries are lighter than, for example, NiMH batteries. LiPo batteries are also available in hard plastic casings to protect them from mechanical damage.The comparatively high nominal voltage, 7.4 V, for a 2-cell LiPo pack does not present a problem for either Graupner HoTT receivers nor for those servos, speed controllers, gyros and other devices which have been speciﬁ cally approved for operation in this – higher – voltage range. Please note however that practically all servos, speed controllers, gyros and other devices built in the past and most such devices currently still offered on the market have only a permissible voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V. Use of these batteries in conjunction with these devices demand use of a stabilized voltage regulator, e.g. the PRX, Order No. 4136, see appendix. Otherwise there is danger that attached devices will incur damage within a short period of time.

49Receiver initialization General charging noticesThe charging instructions for the charger as well •as for the battery from its manufacturer to be observed.Pay attention to the maximum permissible •charging current speciﬁ ed by the battery's manufacturer. In order to prevent damage to the transmitter, charging current should never exceed 1 A. If necessary, limit the current at the charger.If the transmitter battery is nevertheless to be •charged at a current rate in excess of 1 A, then it is imperative that this is done outside the transmitter. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the transmitter's board due to overloading its printed circuit paths and/or overheating of the battery.If an automatic charger is to be used for charging, •perform several test charging procedures to ensure the ﬂ awless functionality of its automatic shut-off. This applies particularly if you want to charge the standard installed NiMH battery with an automatic charger unit intended for NiCd batteries Monitor the charger's shut-off behavior if it has that option.Do not execute a battery discharge or battery •maintenance program through the charger jack. The charger jack is not suitable for this purpose.Alway connect the charger cable to the charger •ﬁ rst and then to the receiver or transmitter battery. This avoids the possibility of shorting the bare banana plug ends together.If the battery heats up signiﬁ cantly, check the •battery's condition, replace the battery or reduce the charging current.Never leave a charging battery unattended.•Follow the safety notices and handling •instructions provided on page 7.

52 Installation noticesIn order to prevent uncontrolled movements of servos connected to the receiver during startupalways ﬁ rst switch on the transmitter and then the receiverand when ﬁ nished with operation ﬁ rst switch off the receiver and then the transmitter.When programming the transmitter, be sure that electric motors cannot start running without control or that a combustion motor equipped with automatic starting cannot start up unintentionally. To be safe, disconnect the receiver's drive battery or, in the case of a combustion motor, disconnect the fuel supply.Several notices and suggestions for installing remote control components into a model are provided below.Wrap the receiver in a foam rubber pad that is at 1. least 6 mm thick. Attach the foam rubber to the receiver with rubber bands so it will be protected against vibration and/or the jars of a hard landing. All switches must be installed such that they are 2. not affected by exhaust gases or vibration. The switch knob must be freely accessible over its entire range of movement.Mount servos on rubber bushes/spacers with 3. hollow brass bearings to protect them from vibration. Do not tighten the fastening screws down too tight as this would negate the vibration protection to be provided by the rubber bush/spacer. Only when servo fastening screws are properly tightened will this arrangement provide security and vibration protection for your servos. The ﬁ gure below shows how a servo is mounted properly. The brass bearings are to be pushed into the rubber bushes/spacers from below.Servo mounting lugRetaining screwRubber grommetTubular brass spacerServo arms must be free to move throughout their 4. entire range of motion. Pay attention that there are no objects which could hinder servo arm motion.The sequence in which servos are connected to the receiver depends on the type of model. Follow the connection layouts provided for this on pages 61 and 65.Also observe the safety notices provided on pages 4 … 9. Installation noticesReceiver installationRegardless of which Graupner receiver system you use, the procedure is always the same.Please pay attention that the receiver's antennas must be mounted at least 5 cm away from all large metal parts or any wiring that is not directly routed out of the receiver itself. In addition to steel parts, this also includes carbon ﬁ ber parts, servos, fuel pumps and all kinds of cables etc. Optimally the receiver should be placed at a readily accessible location that is well away from all other equipment. Under no circumstances may servo cables be wrapped around the antennas or routed close to it.Please note that cables are subject to the acceleration forces which occur during ﬂ ight and these forces may cause such cables, to shift in position. Therefore be sure the cables in the vicinity of the antennas are not able to move. Such moving cables can cause reception disturbances.Tests have shown that vertical (upright) antennas provide the best results during wide-range ﬂ ights. In the case of diversity antennas (two antennas), the second antenna should be oriented at a 90° angle to the ﬁ rst antenna.The connectors designated "B + -" on the GR-32 DUAL HoTT receiver are intended for battery connections. The power supply is bussed across all numbered connections so it can be attached at any of these 16 connectors. However, due to additional voltage losses associated with the traverse connectors, connections 13 through 16 should not be used for connecting the receiver's battery.The function of every individual channel is determined by the transmitter used, not by the receiver. However, channel assignments can be changed in the receiver by programming done in the »Telemetry« menu. Nevertheless, it is recommended this be done on the transmitter side via the "Transmitter output" option, see page 218.

54 Term deﬁ nitions Term deﬁ nitionsControl function, control, function input, control channel, mixer, switch, control switch, ﬁ xed switchTo make use of this mc-20 HoTT manual easier, a number of the terms used repeatedly throughout this manual have been deﬁ ned below.Control functionA "control function" is to be perceived – initially independent of its signal path – as a signal intended to affect a given control function. For example, this could be for throttle, rudder or aileron in a winged aircraft or pitch, roll or crow for a helicopter. A control function signal can be applied directly over a single control channel or also through a mixer and then applied over multiple control channels. A typical example of multiple control channels is separately operated aileron servos or the use of two roll or crow servos in helicopters. The control function explicitly includes the inﬂ uence of the control's mechanical travel on the respective servo. This can not only be spread or compressed by software but even the travel characteristic can be modiﬁ ed from linear to extremely exponential.Control"Controls" include all operating elements on the transmitter, which are directly activated by the pilot, that impose an effect on servos, speed controllers etc. connected to the receiver. This includes: both• joysticks for control functions 1 through 4, whereby these four functions can be freely swapped around for both model types ("winged aircraft" and "helicopters") by way of software "Mode" settings, e.g. throttle left or right. The joystick function for throttle/airbrake control is often also referred to as the C1 control (channel 1).both proportional controls located on the •transmitter's sides, which are, for example, given the designations SD1 (right-side "rotary slider") and SD2 (left-side "rotary slider") in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112.the three • proportional sliders in the middle console designated SR1 … 3, for example as shown in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112,all ﬁ ve • proportional rotary controls on the transmitter's front side, which are, for example, given the designations DR1 … 5 in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112,the switches present, if they are assigned to a •control channel in the »Control adjust« menu.The proportional operating elements produce a direct effect on servos which is commensurate with the control's position whereas switch modules can only effect a two or three increment change.Just which of these controls and switches operate which of the servos 5 … 16 (max.) is freely programmable.Important notice:Inputs 5 … 15 for helicopters and 5 … 16 for winged aircraft are generally "free", i.e. not assigned, in the transmitter's basic programming.Function inputThis is an imaginary point in the signal path and must not be considered the same as the point on the circuit board where the transmitter control is connected. The choice of "Stick mode" and settings in the »Control adjust« menu have their effect "downstream" of these imaginary connection points. Thus differences between the physical control's number and the number of the downstream control channel can indeed emerge.Control channelFrom the point at which a signal contains all control information necessary for a particular servo – whether directly from the physical control or indirectly by way of a mixer – the term "control channel" is used. This signal is only yet to be inﬂ uenced by settings made in the menus »Servo adjustment« and »Transmitter output« before it leaves the transmitter's RF module. Once it arrives at the receiver, this signal may still be modiﬁ ed by settings made in the telemetry menu before ﬁ nally being applied as a control quantity for the respective servo.MixerThe transmitter's software contains a variety of mixer functions. These can be used to apply one control function to multiple servos or, conversely, to apply multiple control functions to a single servo. Please look over the numerous mixer functions in the text beginning on page 159 of this manual.SwitchesThe four standard toggle switches, the two 3-way switches and both push-button switches can also be incorporated into control programming. However, these switches are generally intended for switching program options, e.g. to start and stop timers, to switch mixers on and off, or as a teacher/pupil switchover, etc. Each of these switches can be assigned any number of functions.Appropriate examples are detailed in the manual.Control switchesSince it is very practical to have some functions automatically switched on or off for a certain control's position (e.g. switch on/off of a stopwatch for acquisition of model run time, automatic extension of spoilers and other possibilities), eight control switches have been integrated into mc-20 HoTT software.These software switches, designated "C1 … C8", are merely deﬁ ned by virtue of their contact state along the physical control's course of travel by the touch of a key. The switching action can be correlated to the physical control's travel direction by software.Of course control switches can also be freely combined with the aforementioned physical switches to solve even more complex problems.There is a series of instructive examples which make

55Term deﬁ nitionsthis programming child's play. Learn about this by taking advantage of the programming examples beginning on page 268.Logical switchesThese functions permit two switches, control switches and/or logical switches or any combination of these to be combined with one another to create logical "AND" and "OR" functionality. A total of 8 logical switches, "L1 … L8" can be programmed, see page 138.Fixed switches FXI and FXThis type of switch turns a function, e.g. a timer, permanently on (closed ﬁ xed switch) or off (open ﬁ xed switch) or they can provide a ﬁ xed input signal for a control function, e.g. FXI = + 100 % and FX = -100 %. For example, in ﬂ ight phase programming, these ﬁ xed switches can be used to switch a servo or speed controller between two settings.

56 Physical control, switch and control switch assignments Physical control, switch and control switch assignmentsPrinciple procedureMaximum ﬂ exibility is offered by the mc-20 Hott system when it comes to assigning standard equipment operating elements to certain functions.Since the assignment of controls and switches is done in the same way, even though different menus may be involved, it is appropriate at this point to explain the fundamental programming technique so that users can concentrate on the particular contents when reading the detailed menu descriptions.Physical control and switch assignmentsThe third column of the »Control adjust« menu can be used to assign transmitter inputs 5 … 16 to operate servos, both in any given joystick direction (C1 … C4) as well as to assign any present control or switch. After tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the window shown below will appear in the display.Gewünschten Schalteroder Geber betätigenNow simply move the desired control or switch.Notes:The control will only be recognized beyond a certain amount of travel. Therefore these controls can be moved back and forth until the correct assignment is shown in the display. If adjustment travel is insufﬁ cient, activate the control in the other direction.On the other hand, if the »Control switch« menu, page 135, is used to assign a control, the message shown below will appear: Move desiredcontrol adj.Important notice:Controls to be assigned MUST be pre-assigned in the »Control adjust« menu to one of the inputs 5 through 16!Switch assignmentWherever programming permits a switch to be assigned, a switch symbol will appear in the screen's bottom display line.Use the selection keys in the left or right touch pad to select the appropriate column.How to assign a switchBrieﬂ y touch the 1. SET key of the right touch pad. The message shown below will appear in the screen.Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Now it is only necessary to put the selected switch 2. into the desired "ON" position or, as described at the right in "Assignment of external switches", to select a switch from the list of "External switches". This concludes the assignment. The switch symbol to the right of the switch's number indicates the current state of the particular switch.Changing switch actionIf the activation of a switch is to result in the opposite action, put the switch or joystick in the desired OFF position, again activate the switch assignment and reassign the switch again so it will respond with the desired action.Clear switchA switch which has been assigned as described under point 1 can be cleared with a brief simultaneous tap on the cd or ef key combination in the right key pad (CLEAR).Assignment from the "external switch" listThose menus in which the message …Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)… appears permit the assignment of switches belonging to the so-called "external switches".Do this by conﬁ rming the message text with the SET key. A new window will appear with a list of the eight control switches "C1 … C8", followed by two so-called "FX" ﬁ xed switches and the eight inverted switches "L1 … L8".M wünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C3C1Use the selection keys in the left or right key pad to select the desired switch then assign it with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Notes:Switching for some special functions may •be better implemented from a certain freely programmable control position rather than switching them manually with a normal switch.To this end, there are a total of 8 so-called "control switches", C1 … C8, available whose switching direction can be established, even inverted, in the »Control switch« menu, page 135.Two switches and/or also control switches can be •combined with one another to form the logical "AND" or "OR" functions via the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138. A total of 8 logical switches "L1 … L8" (as well as another 8 inverted logical switches with inverted switching direction) are available.The result of a logical switch function can also be used as an input for another logical switch function. Refer to the appropriate menu for more details about this.

57Physical control, switch and control switch assignmentsThe two FX switches switch a function on "FXI" or •off "FX " permanently.All other switches mentioned can have multiple •assignments. Pay attention that you do not UNINTENTIONALLY assign reciprocally conﬂ icting functions to a single switch. If necessary, note down the given switch functions.Typical applications:Shut-off of an on-board glow plug heater upon •underrun or overrun of an idle threshold point programmed for the C1 joystick. In this case the glow plug heater switch is controlled by a transmitter mixer.Automatic switch on/off of the timer to measure •pure "ﬂ ight time" for a helicopter by way of a control switch on the throttle limiter.Automatic switch off of the "AI • ¼ Rud" when brake ﬂ aps are extended, for example to adapt the roll of a model to the ground when making a landing on a slope without inducing a change of ﬂ ight direction due to inﬂ uence on the rudder.Extending landing ﬂ aps with elevator trim adjustment •during a landing as soon as the throttle stick is moved beyond its switch point. Switch on/off of the timer for measuring the •operating time of electric motors.

58 Digital trimming Digital trimmingFunctional description and description of C1 cut-offDigital trim with visible and audible indicatorsBoth joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. By default, turning trim wheels will offset the joystick's neutral position by 4 increments (out of a possible 100 steps per side). This offset is also reported acoustically. A brief press on the trim wheel will reset an existing trim offset back to "0". Any other "zero points" can be speciﬁ ed with the help of the »Trim memory« menu. If ﬂ ight phases have been created and each assigned with a ﬁ tting name in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment«menus, then these names will appear at the bottom left in the »Trim memory« menu and their trim values will be stored on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis.The default 4-steps per click increment range placed in every new model memory upon initialization can be changed at any time in the »Stick mode« menu, page 104 or 106, separately for each joystick plane, in a range of 1 … 10 for ﬁ xed-wing models and in a range of 0 … 10 for helicopter models. (A trim function can be deactivated by selecting "0" steps, which can be advantageous in helicopters with certain gyro systems.)Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made. Furthermore, – except for the trim of the throttle/airbrake joystick, the so-called "C1"(channel 1) control function – digital trim can be set to operate globally or on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis within a memory location. This choice is made, separate for each joystick plane, in the second column of the »Stick mode« menu, page 104 or 106.Notes:Finding the mid-point position during a ﬂ ight is •easy and can be done without even looking at the display. A brief press on the trim wheel will reset trim to "0" or, in the »Trim memory« menu, will reset a stored ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c trim value. The "cut-off trim" function, known from other •Graupner remote control systems in the mc and mx series, and typically described in this section can be realized with the help of the "Thr. CutOff" option in the »Basic settings, model« menu, see page 81 and 90.

60 Winged models Winged models Convenient support is provided for up to four aileron servos and four ﬂ ap servos on normal models or, for V tail and ﬂ ying wing/delta models, up to two aileron/elevator servos plus four ﬂ ap servos. The majority of motorized and glider models belong to the tail unit type "normal" and are equipped with one servo each for elevator, rudder and ailerons in addition to a motor throttle or electronic speed controller (or for brake ﬂ aps in the case of a glider model). Beyond this, tail unit type "2 HR Sv 3+8" permits the connection of two elevator servos to receiver outputs 3 and 8."V-tail" is to be selected from the »Model type« menu if the model has a V-tail instead of a "normal" tail. This V-tail option provides coupled control functions for elevator and rudder such that both tail ﬂ aps – each controlled by a separate servo – are able to handle both elevator and rudder functionality.For delta and ﬂ ying wing aircraft models, aileron and elevator functionality is affected by way of a common rudder ﬂ ap on the trailing edge of each side (right and left) of the wing. The program contains appropriate mixer functions for both servos.If ailerons, and conditionally the ﬂ aps, are each actuated with two separate servos then settings can be made for differentiated control of all aileron and ﬂ ap pairs in the »Wing mixers« menu, i.e. settings for downward rudder throw independent of upward throw. And ﬁ nally, the positioning of ﬂ aps can also be controlled by one or even more of the three proportional sliders or the seven proportional rotary controls. Alternatively, there is a phase-dependent trim function available for ﬂ aps, ailerons and elevators in the »Phase trim« menu.Up to 8 ﬂ ight phases can be programmed into each of the 80 model memory locations. Except for C1 trim, digital trim will be stored on a ﬂ ight-phase basis. C1 trim permits easy location of a carburetor idle setting.Two timers are always available for ﬂ ight operation. The transmitter operating time expired since the last battery charge is also displayed.All transmitter controls and switches can be assigned in the »Control adjust« menu to inputs 5 … 16 with almost no restrictions.The "Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions for ailerons, rudder and elevators are separately programmable and each are convertible between the two variations on a speciﬁ c ﬂ ight-phase basis.In addition to 8 freely allocatable linear mixers, 4 curve mixers (»Free mixers« menu) and 4 dual mixers (»Dual mixer« menu) there are also ﬂ ight-phase dependent 8-point curves available to control channel 1 (throttle/brake), see »Channel 1 curve« menu).Depending on the number of wing servos, ﬁ xed-deﬁ nition mix and coupling functions can be selected from a list in the »Wing mixers« menu.Multi-ﬂ ap menu: control of ﬂ aps as ailerons, •the inﬂ uence aileron trim on ﬂ aps controlled as ailerons, ﬂ ap differentiation, ﬂ ap function throw magnitude for all aileron and ﬂ ap pairs, ailerons controlled as ﬂ aps, elevator mixer ¼ ﬂ apsBrake settings: butterﬂ y, differential reduction, •elevator curvesaileron• ¼ rudder mixerﬂ aps •¼ elevator mixerElevatorFlapFlapElevatorFlapAileronAileronFlapAileronRudderElevatorAileronleftrightElevatorFlapFlapElevatorAileronRudderAileronFlapAirbrake FlapAirbrake ElevatorAirbrake-Function 1leftrightRudder/ElevatorV-TailAIFLFLAIBrake FL, FL2Brake ElevatorBrake AI, AI2AIFLFL2AIFLFL2AI2FLJAIFLIAIELIFLRU I AIEL I AIELJFLAI2AIJFLAIIFL

61Winged models / Receiver layoutInstallation notices Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the sequence illustrated here. Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages. Winged aircraft with and without motor having up to 2 aileron servos and up to 4 ﬂ ap servos …… and tail plane type " normal" or "2 elevator servos"Receiver power supplyfree or AIL2 left or aux. functionfree or AIL2 right or aux. functionRudderAileron or left aileronElevator or 1st elevatorfree or 2nd Elevator or aux. functionReceiver power supplyAirbrake or throttle servoor speed controller (electric motor)Right aileron or aux. functionFlap or left flapRight flap or free or aux. functionfree or left flap2 or aux. functionfree or flap2 right or aux. function13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supply… and tail plane type " V tail unit"Receiver power supplyfree or left AIL2 or aux. functionfree or right AIL2 or aux. functionAileron or left aileronfree or 2nd elevator or aux. functionReceiver power supplyAirbrake- or throttle servoor speed controller (electric motor)Right aileron or aux. functionFlap or left flapRight flap or free or aux. functionfree or left flap2 or aux. functionfree or right flap2 or aux. function13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyLeft elevator/rudderRight elevator/rudder Delta/ﬂ ying wing aircraft models with and without motor having up to two aileron/elevator servos and up to 2 ﬂ ap/elevator servosReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyAirbrake- or throttle servoor speed controller (electric motor)13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyfree or aux. function or AIL2 / left EL free or aux. function or AIL2 / right EL free or aux. functionfree or flap / left elevatorfree or flap / right elevatorfree or aux. function or flap2 / left ELfree or aux. function or flap2 / right ELfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionAIL / elevator leftAIL / elevator rightfree or aux. functionfree or rudder

62 Winged models - Servo direction wrongBecause of orientation differences for installed servos and their rudder linkages, the actuating direction of some servos may be initially backward. The table below provides remedies.Modeltype ServodirectionwrongRemedyV tail Rudder and elevator reversed Reverse polarity of servos 3 & 4 in the »Servo adjustment«menuRudder correct, elevators reversed Swap servos 3 & 4 on the receiverElevators correct,rudder reversed Reverse polarity of servos 3 & 4 in the »Servo adjustment«menu AND swap them on the receiverDelta,ﬂ ying wingElevator and aileron reversed Reverse the polarity of servos 2 & 3 in the »Servo adjustment«menuElevator correct, aileron reversed Reverse polarity of servos 2 & 3 in the »Servo adjustment«menu AND swap them on the receiverAileron correct, elevators reversed Swap servos 2 & 3 on the receiverAll "program descriptions" for menus relevant to a winged aircraft model are marked with a winged aircraft symbol …… so only these menus need to be dealt with to program a winged aircraft model.

64 Helicopter models Helicopter modelsThe advanced developments incorporated into the transmitter as well as those now in helicopter models and their components like gyros, speed regulators, rotor blades, etc. make it possible to master a helicopter even in 3D acrobatic ﬂ ight. On the other hand, a beginner needs only a few settings to get started with hovered ﬂ ight training then, step-by-step, take advantage of mc-20 HoTT features with increasing expertise.The mc-20 HoTT program can operate all conventional helicopters having 1 … 4 servos for pitch control.Seven ﬂ ight phases plus autorotation are available within a model memory, see menus »Control adjust«, »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment«.As with winged aircraft, here too, in addition to the basic screen's standard timers there are additional timers as well as a lap counter with ﬂ ight-phase-dependent stopwatch functionality which are available for selection (menus »Timers (general)« and »Fl. phase timers«).Except for pitch/throttle trimming, digital trimming can be stored as "global" for all ﬂ ight phases or as "ﬂ ight phase speciﬁ c". C1 trim permits easy location of an idle setting.The control assignments for inputs 5 … 16 is made separately for each ﬂ ight phase (»Control adjust«menu).A ﬂ ight phase copy function is helpful during ﬂ ight trials (»Copy / Erase« menu)."Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions can be coupled for roll, nick and tail rotor and programmable in two variations in every ﬂ ight phase.There are 8 freely assignable linear mixers. There are also 4 curve mixers that can be programed and these can also be switched on or off, depending on the ﬂ ight phase, in the »MIX active/phase« menu. Beyond this, there are also 4 dual mixers available.The »Helicopter mixer« menu provides ﬂ ight-phase-dependent 8-point curves for the non-linear characteristics pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixer as well as two independent swashplate mixers each for roll and nick. Independent of this, the control curve of the channel 1 joystick can be deﬁ ned with up to a total of 8 points in every ﬂ ight phase. The beginner will initially only adapt the hover ﬂ ight point to the control middle for the non-linear characteristics. Pre-programmed mixers in the »Helicopter mixer« menu:Pitch curve (8-point curve)1. C12. ¼ throttle (8-point curve)Channel 1 3. ¼ tail rotor (8-point curve)Tail rotor 4. ¼ throttleRoll5. ¼ throttleRoll6. ¼ tail rotorPitch-axis7. ¼ throttlePitch-axis8. ¼ tail rotorGyro suppression9. Swashplate rotation10. Swashplate limiter11. The "Throttle limit" function (input Tl16 in the »Control adjust« menu) allows the motor to be started in any ﬂ ight phase. The right-side proportional rotary slider is assigned to input "Tl16" by default. This "throttle limiter" establishes – depending on its given position – the maximum possible throttle servo position. This makes it possible for the motor to be controlled in the idle range, if necessary even by the proportional regulator. The throttle curves become effective only when the proportional regulator is pushed toward the full throttle direction.Collective Pitch CurveSwashplate RotationRoll ThrottlePitch-Axis ThrottleChannel 1 ThrottleRoll Tail RotorPitch-Axis Tail RotorChannel 1 Tail RotorChannel1TailRotorTailRotorThrottle

65Helicopters / Receiver layoutNotice for those transitioning from older Graupner systems:In comparison to previous receiver layouts, servo connector 1 (pitch servo) and servo connector 6 (throttle servo) have exchanged places. Servos mustbe connected to receiver outputs as illustrated at the right in the bottom ﬁ gure. Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. More details about respective swashplate types can be found on page 98 in the »Helicopter type« menu.Installation noticesServos MUST be connected to the receiver in the sequence illustrated here. Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.Note:A speed control is also to be connected to receiver output "6" in order to take full advantage of the throttle limiter's convenience and safety features, see text beginning on page 117. See page 181 about this. Receiver allocation for helicopter models with 1 to 3 swashplate servosReceiver power supplyReceiver power supply13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTail rotor servo (gyro system)Roll-1 servoPitch-axis 1 servofrei or speed governor or aux. functionCollective pitch or roll 2 or pitch-axis 2 servofree or aux. functionThrottle servo or speed controllerGyro gain Receiver allocation for helicopter models with 4 swashplate servosReceiver power supplyReceiver power supply13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or speed governor or aux. functionThrottle servo or speed controllerGyro gainTail rotor servo (gyro system)Roll 1 servoPitch-axis 1 servoRoll 2 servoPitch-axis 2 servoAll menus relevant to helicopter models are marked in the "program descriptions" section with a helicopter symbol …… so only these menus need to be dealt with to program a helicopter model.

66 Detail program description - Loading a new memory locationAnyone who has worked through to this part of the manual has certainly already tried out a bit of programming. Nevertheless a detailed description of every menu should not be left out. This section begins with the loading of a "free" memory location, a procedure which would be performed if a new model was being "programmed".#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.0RX VOLT:0.0v000000:00hMVFrom the basic display, a jump to the "Multi-function list" is made with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. (The center ESC key of the left touch pad will cause a jump back to the basic display.) By default, when the multi-function list is called for the ﬁ rst time after switching on the transmitter, the »Model select« menu option will be active and displayed in inverse video. Otherwise use the cdor ef selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Model select« menu option , whereby the upper of the two following ﬁ gures shows a selection list for a ﬁ xed-wing model and the lower shows the selection list for a helicopter model.Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model type Detail program description Loading a new memory locationServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter typeTap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:030405¿¿¿ free¿¿¿020106E16¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿00:12hIn the transmitter's delivered state, the ﬁ rst model memory is initialized to the "ﬁ xed-wing model" type and the receiver in the delivery is "bound" to this model. The time display located near the line's middle indicates the overall operating time of the respective model memory. The remaining memory locations, marked with "ÄÄÄfreeÄÄÄ", are still unoccupied and therefore also "non-bound". If you wish to program a ﬁ xed-wing model then, after leaving the »Model select« menu with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad, programming of the model can begin right away … or now use the c or d keys of the left or right touch pad to select one of the free memory locations …0304050106R16¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿00:12h¿¿¿ free¿¿¿02… and then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to conﬁ rm the choice.Afterward you will be prompted to select the basic model type, i.e. either "winged model" or "helicopter model".Select model type ( free model memory )Use the e or f keys of the left or right touch pad to select the basic model type then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. This initializes the selected model memory with the selected model type and the display will return to the base screen. The memory location is now accordingly occupied. However, if you wish to begin with a helicopter,select one of the memory locations marked "ÄÄÄfreeÄÄÄ" with the c or d keys of the left or right touch pad then conﬁ rm the selection with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. You will be now be prompted to specify the basic model type, in this case the "helicopter model". Select the appropriate symbol with the e or f keys of the left or right touch pad then again tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to conﬁ rm the choice. This initializes the selected model memory with the

67Detail program description - Loading a new memory locationFurther details about binding a receiver can be found on page 77 or 85.At the right and above the aforementioned "BIND. •N/A" warning message, the warning …Fail Safe setup t.b.d.… will appear (also for just a few seconds) to indicate that no no failsafe settings have yet been made. More about this can be found on page 208. If the screen should display the warning …•Throttle too high!… then move the throttle joystick, or the limiter for a helicopter, (by default this is rotary slider SD1) into its idle position.Whether or not this warning appears also depends on the settings selected for the "Motor on C1" and "Pitch min." options in the »Model type«menu, see page 94, or »Helicopter type« menu, see page 98. For winged aircraft models, select "None" to deactivate this message if you have no motorto enter.If the transmitter already has occupied model •memories then sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase«menu will display a pictograph of the selected model type at the respective memory location followed by a blank line or the model name which was entered in the »Basic settings, model«menu, page 76 or 84. To the right of this will be as display of the model operating time and, if present, "Info" about the model.If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover •cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An selected model type and you can now program your model into this model memory.Changing over to another model type is still possible if you ﬁ rst erase this memory location (»Copy / Erase« menu, page 70).Notes:If, from the base screen, the currently active model •memory is to be erased then immediately after the erase action one of the two model types, "Winged" or "Heli" must be deﬁ ned. You cannot avoid this selection even if you switch the transmitter off. When the transmitter is switched on again the undesired occupation of the that model memory will have to be erased from another memory location.If a non-active memory location is erased, it will subsequently be marked as "999free999" in the "Model select" menu.After the selected model memory is initialized with •the desired model type, the display will switch to the base screen of the freshly occupied model memory. At this time the warning …BIND. N/AOK… will appear for several seconds as notiﬁ cation that a binding connection to a receiver is "notavailable". A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will cause a direct jump to the appropriate option.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS, MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTSEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4appropriate message will appear in the screen:not possible nowvoltage too lowAs a basic principle, there are four different ways to assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle or brake ﬂ aps for winged models as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch for helicopter models, to the two joysticks. Just which of these methods is used depends on the preferences of the individual model pilot. This function is set for the currently active model memory in the "Stick mode" line of the »Basic settings, model«menu, page 76 or 84.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTSELIf this setting is desired as a default for future models, the setting can also be entered into the »Generalbasic settings« menu, page 258:Owners namePre-set stick modePre-set DSC Output1GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSPPM10SELPre-set modulation HoTTIt should be noted here once again that, in the interest of greatest ﬂ exibility in combination with the prevention of unintentional operating errors, no controls are preassigned to control channels 5 … 16 by default.This means that, in the system's delivered state,

68 Detail program description - Loading a new memory locationonly servos attached to receiver outputs 1 … 4 can typically be operated by the two joysticks and that any servos attached to receiver connectors 5 … 16 (max) will remain in their middle positions. A newly initialized helicopter model is also able to more-or-less move servo 6 – depending on the position of the right-side proportional rotary slider, which is the default throttle limiter control. With either model type, this situation will only change after appropriate assignments have been made in the »Control adjust« menu.On the other hand, if a newly initialized model memory is to be put into operation then it MUST ﬁ rst be appropriately "connected" with one or more receivers before the servos attached to the receiver/s can be operated. More about this can be found in the section "Binding" on page 77 or 85. A fundamental description of programming steps for a winged aircraft model can be found in the programming examples section beginning on 268, or for helicopter models beginning on page 308.The menu descriptions below are arranged in the sequence individual menus are listed in the multi-function list.

69Detail program description - Model select Model selectCall up model 1 … 80The basic operation of the transmitters keys was explained on pages 28 and 29 and, on the previous double-page, explanations were provided for navigating to the multifunction list and about how to make allocations for a new model memory. At this point we now wish to begin with the "normal" description of individual menu items in the sequence they are arranged in the transmitter. Therefore we will begin with the menu …Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeAs many as 80 complete model settings, including digital trim values for the trim wheel, can be stored. Trimming is stored automatically such that a switchover from one model to another does not cause a loss of current trim settings. To the right of the model number, each occupied model memory line in this display shows a pictograph of the model type as well as the model's name entered for the model in its »Basic settings, model« menu, page 76 or 84. The code, if present, for the receiver "bound" to the model memory location will appear after the model number.Select the »Model select« menu with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂ y tap on the SET key of the right touch pad.Attention!Switch-OFFthe Receiver first!If this message appears, there is a telemetry connection to an operationally ready receiver system. Switch that receiver system off.0304Ultimate02 00:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim needed¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿050601 01:23hR16Graubele 1234g/080811Now, with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad, select the desired model memory from the list and activate it with a tap on the SET key. A tap on the ESC key will cause a return to the previous menu page without activating a model change.Notes:If, after a model change, the "Throttle too high" •warning appears, the throttle/pitch joystick (C1) or the throttle limiter – by default, the right-side proportional rotary slider – is too far in the full throttle direction.If a model change causes the message …•BIND. N/AOK… to appear then binding settings should be checked.If a model change causes the message …•Fail Safe setup t.b.d.… to appear then respective failsafe settings should be checked.If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover •cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen:not possible nowvoltage too low

70 Detail program description - Copy / Erase Copy model ¼ modelSelect the »Copy model ¼ model« sub-menu with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap the SET key.Copy flight en kopierenErase modelCopy modelodell –> ModellExport to SD-KarteImport fromn von SD-Karte=>OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. Choose the model to be copied with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad …03040501¿¿¿ free¿¿¿01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededCopy from model:… then, following the change into the "Copy to model" window caused by another tap on the SETkey of the right touch pad, the destination memory can be selected with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Yet another tap on the SET key will then conﬁ rm the copy process or a tap on ESCkey will cause the copy to be canceled. A memory location which is already occupied can be overwritten.030401 01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededSelect model to be erased :… whereby another tap on the SET key will cause the conﬁ rmation request …Model reallyUltimateto be erased? NO YES02… to appear. A NO response will cause the process to be canceled and a return to the previous screen. Selecting the YES response with the f selection key of the left or right touch pad followed by conﬁ rmation of the selection with a brief tap on the SET key will erase the selected model memory.Caution:This erase process cannot be undone. All data in the selected model memory will be erased completely.Note:If the currently active model memory is to be erased, a model type "Winged" or "Heli" must be deﬁ ned immediately after the erase process. If, however, an inactive memory location is erased, it will subsequently appear in "Model select" list as "ÄÄÄfreeÄÄÄ". Copy / EraseErase or copy model ¼ model, copy from or to SD card, copy ﬂ ight phases, store/cancel changes Use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Copy / Erase« menu …Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter type… then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Erase modelCopy flight phaseErase modelCopy model –> modelExport to SDImport from SD =>Select the "Erase model" sub-menu with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂ y tap on the SET key.Choose the model to be erased with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad …

$71Detail program description - Copy / Erase030401 01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededCopy to model:¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿05After conﬁ rming the selected model memory with a tap on the SET key, a conﬁ rmation request will appear:Model reallyUltimateto be copied?NO YES02 05 ¿¿¿ free¿¿¿A NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the fYESresponse is selected and conﬁ rmed with a tap on the SET key then the selected source model will be copied into the selected model memory destination. Note:In addition to model data, binding data is also copied by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated by its copy without establishing the bond again. Exporting to SD cardUse the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Export to SD« sub-menu then tap on the SET key.Copy flight sen kopierenErase modelCopy modeModell –> ModellExport to SDach SD-KarteImport from von SD-Karte=>OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. Choose the model to be exported with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad …03040501¿¿¿ free¿¿¿01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededexport to SD-Card:After conﬁ rming the selected model memory with a tap on the SET key, a conﬁ rmation request will appear:Model reallyUltimateexport?NO YES02A NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the fYESresponse is selected then conﬁ rmed with a tap on the SET key, the selected model will be copied to the SD card.Notes:Should the notice …•SD-CARDINSERTOK… appears instead of a screen for model selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's card slot, see page 23.In addition to model data, binding data is also •copied by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated in the SAME transmitter by its copy without establishing the bond again.An exported ﬁ xed-wing model will be stored on •the memory card in the \\Models\mc-20 folder with a ﬁ lename format of "aModelname.mdl" and a helicopter model with a ﬁ lename format of "hModelname.mdl". On the other hand, if a "nameless" model is exported, its data will be stored on the memory card under "ahNoName.mdl" or "hNoName.mdl", as appropriate.Some special characters that can be used in •model names are subject to speciﬁ c restrictions associated with the FAT or FAT32 ﬁ le system used by the memory cards and these special characters will be replaced during the copy process with a tilde (~).A model ﬁ le already on the memory having •the same name as the ﬁ le to be copied will be overwritten without warning.$

72 Detail program description - Copy / Erasepad then conﬁ rmed with a tap on the SET key, or the process can be canceled with a tap on the ESC key. A memory location which is already occupied can be overwritten.030401 01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededImport to model:¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿05After conﬁ rming the selected model memory with a tap on the SET key, a conﬁ rmation request will appear:modelExtra 300import?NO YES05 ¿¿¿ free¿¿¿A NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the fYESresponse is selected and conﬁ rmed with a tap on the SET key then the selected source model will be imported into the selected destination model memory. Notes:If the message …•SD-CARDINSERTOK… appears instead of a screen for model selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's Importing from SD cardUse the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Import from SD« sub-menu then tap on the SET key.Copy flight sen kopierenErase modelCopy modell –> ModellExport to mnach SD-KarteImport from von SD-Karte=>OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. Select the model to be imported from the SD memory card with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad.030401 11/06/06 06:06Extra 30002Soarmaster11/07/07 07:07T-Rex 250BellCobra11/08/08 08:0811/09/09 09:09import from SD-CARD:Note:The export date posted at the right end of each model name line is represented in the format "year/month/day".After another tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, the "import from SD-CARD" window will appear. Now the destination memory location can be selected with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch card slot, see page 23.In addition to model data, binding data is also •imported by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated in the SAME transmitter by its copy without establishing the bond again. Copy ﬂ ight phaseSelect the »Copy ﬂ ight phase« sub-menu with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap on the SET key.Copy flight phaseErase modelCopy model –> modelExport to SDImport from SD =>In the "Copy ﬂ ight phase" sub-menu …7Copy from phase:35=>=>24618… the ﬂ ight phase to be copied (1 … 8 for ﬁ xed-wing models or 1 … 7 for helicopter models) is selected with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then conﬁ rmed with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad. In the next window to appear …

73Detail program description - Copy / Erase7Copy to phase:35=>=>24618… a destination must be selected and it must be conﬁ rmed too. Another conﬁ rmation request will follow:Phase to:to be copied?NO YES1 normal 2 ThermikA NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the fYESresponse is selected and conﬁ rmed with a tap on the SET key then the selected source model will be imported into the selected destination model memory. Storing changes permanently Undoing changesThese two sub-menus permit programming changes to be backed up immediately or to be undone (restored) to the state when the model was called up or the state of the last backup.Copy flight en kopierenExport to SDImport fromvon SD-Karte=>Store changes ft speichernUndo changesgig machenOFFONPlease selectRF on/off?If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. Data is only backed up by "Store change" or a switch from one model to another in the »Modelselect« menu. Switching the transmitter on or off will not store the permanently. To store changes permanently, select the appropriate line then brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The conﬁ rmation request shown below will appear:Programming changes to beNO YESstore permanently?A NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the fYESresponse is selected and conﬁ rmed with a tap on the SET key then the changes made since the last backup or model change will be stored permanently.If, however, the changes made since the last backup or model change are to be canceled, then select the line "Undo change". Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the conﬁ rmation request shown below will appear:Programming changes to beNO YESreset to original?A NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the fYESresponse is selected and conﬁ rmed with a tap on the SET key then the changes made since the last backup or model change will be stored permanently.Note:When the transmitter is switched off, any changes made will not be lose but they are not permanently stored either. This means that a subsequent "cancel changes" would reset memory to the state of the last "permanent backup" (or model change).

74 Detail program description - Suppress menus Suppress menusSuppression of menus in the multifunction listUse the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Suppress codes« menu …Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter type… then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.Copy / EraseModel selectServo adjustmentStick mode Control adjustDual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curveSuppress models Base setup modelModel typeSuppress : SETCopy / EraseModel selectServo adjustmentStick mode Control adjustDual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curveSuppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeSuppress : SETIn the menu which then appears, menu items which are no longer needed or those which should not be changed, can be blocked from appearing in th multifunction list.The option to be suppressed/displayed is selected with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then its status is switched over with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Copy / EraseModel selectServo adjustmentStick mode Control adjustDual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curveSuppress models Base setup modelModel typeSuppress : SETCopy / EraseModel selectServo adjustmentStick mode Control adjustDual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curveSuppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeSuppress : SETThis can reduce the multi-function list considerably, in some cases to only a few menus, thus substantially improving clarity of the multi-function list. Options are not deactivated by being suppressed. They will simply no longer appear in the list. This also blocks direct access to these functions.Tip:If you wish to forgo access-blockage to the multi-function list altogether, suppress the »Code lock«menu in the multi-function list by way of this menu as a precautionary measure. It is then not so easy for an unauthorized person to lock up the transmitter.

75Detail program description - Suppress models Suppress modelsSuppression of model memory locationsUse the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Suppress models« menu …Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress Models Base setup model Helicopter type… then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.Model memories which are rarely needed or to which access is to be blocked for other reasons can be hidden from the model selection list. This also clariﬁ es the overview layout for model selection.The model to be suppressed/displayed is selected with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then its status is switched over with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.03040501¿¿¿ free ¿¿¿01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededSuppress : SETA model memory which is "stricken through" will no longer appear in the »Model select« menu.0304StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08trim needed¿¿¿free¿¿¿¿¿¿free¿¿¿050601 01:23hR16Graubele 1234g/080811free¿¿¿ ¿¿¿07

$76 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models Base setup modelModel-speciﬁ c base settings for winged aircraft modelsBefore programming speciﬁ c parameters, there are some basic settings to be made which effect the currently active model memory.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Basic settings, model« menu … Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model type… then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Model name Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTChange to the next screen page with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad. This will open a screen of characters for entry of the model's name. A maximum of 13 characters can be used to specify a model name. !"#$%&’()Model name Graub@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¾¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~Now the desired characters can be selected with the selection keys of the left touch pad. Move to the next position to select the next character with a tap on the f selection key of the right touch pad or its center SET key. A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at the current position.Positioning to any character position within the entry ﬁ eld can be done with the ef keys of the right touch pad.A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad.A model name entered in this manner will appear in the base screen of the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item. Info Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTGraubeleEvery model can be given a supplementary note of up to 12 characters (maximum) by following the same procedure as already described for creating a "Model name". This info note will appear as a supplement in the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item. Stick mode “MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)elev. downelev. upleft rudderright rudderfull throttleidleleft aileronright aileronfull throttleleft rudderright rudderidleelev. downelev. upleft aileronright aileronelev. downelev. upleft aileronright aileronMotor Vollgasidleleft rudderright rudderfull throttleidleleft aileronright aileronelev. downelev. upleft rudderright rudderThere are four fundamental options for assigning the four control functions (aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle/brake ﬂ ap) for a winged aircraft model to the two joysticks. Just which of these options is chosen depends on the individual preferences of the individual model pilot. Use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option ﬁ eld will be framed.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTSELGraubele1234g/111111Tap on the SET key. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select from among options 1 through 4.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to stick mode "1".$

77Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsto the transmitter will fall into Fail-safe mode during the transmitter-side "binding" period. "Binding" multiple receivers per modelMultiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, whereby respective mc-20 HoTT programs offer the potential for managing up to four receivers directly and for dividing up the transmitter's 16 control channels (max) in any arrangement among these receivers under menu control. Refer to additional details further down in this section. First bind the receivers individually as described below. However, in subsequent operation only one of these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to the transmitter; the one which was activated in the "TELEMETRY RCV" line of the »Telemetry« menu.TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model should therefore be connected to this receiver because the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from the return channel of the receiver activated on this line. The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel but are fully independent in slave mode. "Binding" transmitter and receiverUse the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the "Module" line. The marker frame will be positioned by default to the column for the next free binding channel. In the example shown in the figure below, the marker frame is positioned above the column label "BD2" because the binding channel in the column labeled "BD1" is already in use by default for the receiver which was delivered with the set.Another tap on the SET key will again deactivate option selection so a change to another line can be affected. Module Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTGraubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4The mc-20 transmitter has a HoTT RF module as standard equipment. In addition to the built-in module, there is a connector for an external RF module behind one of the two front cover ﬂ aps (see page 25) and a switchover to an external module connected there can be affected per software. To do this, use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame left to the "Module" selection ﬁ eld above the "SEL" column label.HoTTGraupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed" to communicate exclusively with a certain model (memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as "binding" and must only be done once for every new receiver/model-memory-location combination (and can be repeated anytime).Important notices:During the binding procedure be sure the •transmitter's antenna is always far enough away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to the return channel and malfunctions will result.When binding additional receivers, note that any •other –switched on– receivers already bound Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTGraubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red LED on the receiver will blink.Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds then, after about another 3 seconds, begins to blink red/green. The SET button on the receiver can now be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode.Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called "receiver binding" process for the receiver to the currently active model memory with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. At this time, the screen's display will blend in a message window for the duration of the "binding" process.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTGraubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4FINDING...If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green, the binding process has been successfully completed. Your model-memory to receiver combination is now operationally ready. At this time the screen will now display " bind " (bound) instead of "n/a" (not attached).

78 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsModel nameStick mode 1bindBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTGraubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding process has failed. In this case the screen will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should happen, try changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire procedure. Binding other receiversThe binding channel you have chosen is already bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with another binding channel. After initiating the RF bind process, instead of displaying "BINDING", the message shown below appears.Model nameStick mode 1geb.BASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule geb.HoTTGraubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 RF offOK is turned Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the RF module as described on the page in section "RF module". Afterward, return again to the "Module" line and restart the binding process as described above.Alternatively, the transmitter can be switched off brieﬂ y then, after switching it back on again, respond to the message window that appears …OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?… with "OFF" …ONPlease selectRF on/off?OFF… then conﬁ rm the selection with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. From the base screen jump again into the "Module" line of the »Basic settings, model« menu and restart the binding process. Dissolving a bondProceed as described above to initiate the binding process but WITHOUT ﬁ rst putting a receiver in binding readiness.EXT. PPMImportant notice:With the activation of the value ﬁ eld in the context of the following described changeover, any existing bonds to HoTT receivers which may be effective for the currently active model memory will be lost.Activate the ﬁ rst value ﬁ eld in the "Module" line with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then use the selection keys to choose "EXT. PPM" instead of "HoTT". In parallel with the selection of "EXT. PPM", the other four value ﬁ elds will be replaced by the type of modulation pre-selected in the line »DSC Output«, see page 81.Model nameStick mode 1BASIC SETTING,MODELInfoModuleGraubele1234g/111111SELPPM10EXT. PPMThis change also suppresses the lines for the options (described below): »HoTT«, »Rcv Ch Map«, »RF module« and »RF range test« and, in the basic display, "PPM" will be displayed instead of "HoTT".#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.0RX VOLT:0.0v000000:00hMVPPMGraubeleH-J Sandbrunner Receiver channel mapping As long as there is at least one "bound" receiver in the "Module" line, the next line down will be the "Rcv Ch map" line.Model nameStick mode 1BASIC SETTING,MODELInfoGraubele1234g/111111SET SET SET SETRcv Ch map R16 R08 n/an/aAs mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding receivers" section, this menu item of the mc-20 HoTT offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the transmitter's control channels within a receiver as well as the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 16

79Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelscontrol channels across as many as four receivers.This redistribution is subsequently referred to as "mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation). Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Channel mapping within a receiverAnalogous to the channel correlation function in the »Telemetry« menu on page 232, described as "Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu item to freely assign the transmitter's control channels present on the receiver's inputs to any speciﬁ c receiver outputs (servo connections) for the bound receiver designated by the column labeled BD1.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND1Rx Input Ch 1Rx Input Ch 2Rx Input Ch 3Rx Input Ch 4Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4After selection of the desired output with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the appropriate value ﬁ eld will be framed. Brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the desired input channel's respective transmitter output, see page 218.Note:The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver.BUT CAUTION: If, for example, "2AIL" has been speciﬁ ed in the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu then the transmitter will have allocated control function 2 (ailerons) to controlchannels 2 & 5 for the left and right ailerons. The corresponding receiver inputs to be assigned in this case would be channels 2 & 5, refer to the example below.Examples:You would like to control each aileron of a large •model with two or more servos. Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo connections) to one and the same input (control channel). In this case, depending on left or right wing, as the respective input to one of the two default aileron control channels (2 or 5).You would like to control the rudder of a large •model with two or more servos. Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo connections) to one and the same input (control channel). In this case, the default rudder channel (4), see ﬁ gure bottom right.Important notice:The mc-20 HoTT transmitter's »Tx. output swap«option permits the transmitter's 16 control functions to be freely swapped in a similar manner or even permits multiple outputs to be assigned to the same control function. To keep controls manageable, however, we strongly recommend using only one of the options at a time. Channel assignment on other receiversAs already mentioned, the "Rcv Ch map" menu option can be used to freely distribute the mc-20HoTT transmitter's 16 control channels across upto four receivers, whereby the numbering of outputs (servo connections) as well as the maximum number of available lines (outputs) will correspond to the maximum number of servo connections available on the given receiver.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4After selection of the desired output with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input ﬁ eld will be framed. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For example, suitable to the above rudder example.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2Rx Input Ch 4Rx Input Ch 4Rx Input Ch 4 Rx Input Ch 4Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4Note:The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver. RF transmit This menu line provides an option for manually switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and off to speciﬁ c models while the transmitter is in operation. For example, to save power while a model is being programmed. If this line option was set to OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next time the transmitter is switched on.If necessary, use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the " RF transmit " line

80 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsthen activate the option with a brief tap on the center SET button of the right touch pad.Stick modeModule1bindbind n/an/aHoTTSET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onBASIC SETTING,MODELThe right selection keys can now be used to choose between OFF and ON. Another tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad will conclude the entry. Range test The built-in range test reduces transmission power to an extent that a functional test can be carried out even within a distance of less than 100 m.Perform a range test on the Graupner HoTT system according to the following instructions. If necessary, have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.Preferably, the receiver already bound to the 1. transmitter should be installed into the model in its intended position.Switch remote control on and wait for the green 2. LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo movements can be observed.Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 3. low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. It may be necessary to put something under the model to raise it up enough for this.Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some 4. distance from one's body. Do not point the antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented vertically during the test.If necessary, use the 5. cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "RF range test" line in the menu then start range test mode with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Module bindbind n/an/aHoTTSET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sBASIC SETTING,MODELLWhen the range test has been initiated, the transmitter's transmission power will be signiﬁ cantly reduced and the LED just to the right of the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF, will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the transmitter's display will start counting down and every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound. Five seconds prior to the end of the range test a three-frequency tone will sound once every second. After expiration of the range test's 99th second the transmitter will again be switched to full output power and the LED just to the right of the main switch on the transmitter will again illuminate constantly.Move away from the model while manipulating 6. the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an interruption anytime while still within a distance of about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessary 7. to switch it on to further check noise immunity.Continue moving away from the model until 8. perfect control is no longer possible. Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 9. period with the still-operationally-ready model to expire. After the range test is ended it should again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. Contact your area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG service partner.Perform the range test before each ﬂ ight and, in 10. doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during ﬂ ight. The range must always be at 50 m on the ground in order to assure safe model operation.Caution:Never start the range test on the transmitter during normal operation of the model. DSC output If necessary, use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the value window:SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10BASIC SETTING,MODELNow you can use the right selection keys to choose between four types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM16", "PPM18" and "PPM24". Touch the center SET key of the right touch pad again to complete the entry.This choice primarily inﬂ uences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a ﬂ ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels 1 … 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 … 8, for "PPM18" channels 1 … 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 … 12.

81Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models Motor cutoff (Thr. CutOff) Note:This menu line is suppressed if "None" or "None/inv" is selected for the "Motor on C1" line.Depending on the "idle forward or back" choice made in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type«menu, this motor "cut off" option can be coupled to a switch for throttling down a speed controller or to move a servo on the carburetor of a motor to the OFF position. This option not only replaces the"Cut-off trim" function known from other Graupner mc and mx transmitters but also serves as an Emergency-OFF function at the same time, which was not possible with the"Cut-off trim" function.This motor OFF position (Thr. CutOff) is speciﬁ ed in the left column ﬁ eld over the column label SEL and its value is to be established through trial and error.A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on this preset position when a certain servo position or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. This is done by setting the desired servo position (threshold value) into the middle column ﬁ eld, directly over the column label STO, then selecting the appropriate ON/OFF switch function in the right column.If the percentage value speciﬁ ed for the middle •column is greater than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo position lies below the threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put into its ON position.If the percentage value speciﬁ ed for the middle •column is less than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo position is above the threshold, the speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo only to the extent dictated by the value in the left column as soon as the servo's position once underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the switch is changed over to its ON position.The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in this cut-off position only until the selected switch is again changed over followed by a one-time throttle servo or speed controller movement beyond the preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick control.The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of +150 % servo position setting in the middle column.BASIC SETTING,MODELSEL SET STO SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––Thr. CutOff +150%–100%Programming procedureTo change the throttle servo's preset "cut-off" position, tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably "off". If a combustion motor is involved, be sure the throttle servo does not perform mechanical runout, e.g. -125 %.BASIC SETTING,MODELSEL SET STO SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––Thr. CutOff +150%–125%The – upper – preset value in the middle column ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the maximum possible positioning range of the servo or speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in the right column. However, if you wish to set a lower threshold, by which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed controller with closed switch to switch into the cut-off position, reduce the preset servo travel from +150 % by placing the throttle servo or speed controller into the desired position with the throttle/brake joystick then touch the center SET key of the right touch pad.BASIC SETTING,MODELSEL SET STO SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––Thr. CutOff +150%–125%Finally, use the column at the right to specify a switch with which you can cut off the motor directly (emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold. BASIC SETTING,MODELSEL SET STO SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10Thr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Notes:Be sure the throttle servo does not run out •mechanically when the cut-off function is activated.A threshold over +100 % is reached by temporarily •increasing the travel for servo 1 in the »Servo adjustment« menu to over 100 % then, after storing the threshold, change servo travel back to

82 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsthe original value. Power-on warning BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10Motor Stop +100%–125% 8Thr. CutOff –––When a switch, a control switch or a logical switch is assigned in this line as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56, the respective switch or control position will be polled and an appropriate warning will be blended into the basic display under some conditions. In combination with logical switches, almost any switch setting can be called up for transmitter switch on.#01 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.04.1V0:00.0000000:00hMV!Warning!GraubeleH-J Sandbrunner Auto trimBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10Thr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Power on warning L1Auto trim –––The "Auto trim" option makes it possible to trim a model quickly and without complications, e.g. in the context of a ﬁ rst-ﬂ ight or even after (major) repairs, etc.Typically such test ﬂ ights are initially ﬂ own with joysticks counter operated until the desired state of ﬂ ight is achieved. This generally involves working the trim controls during the ﬂ ight to "unburden" the joysticks.This is exactly what the "Auto trim" function is for. After the desired ﬂ ight attitude has been achieved via control functions 2 … 4 (aileron, elevator and rudder), the switch assigned to "Auto trim" – ideally one of the standard-equipment momentary switches in the switch panels – is to be activated ONCE. At the instant the switch is activated, the joystick offsets from their neutral positions will be determined and adopted as trim values. However, this does not take place instantaneously but rather within about 1 second. During this period after the switch has been activated, the joysticks should be returned to their normal positions.Notes:Due to the complex interaction inherent to multi-•ﬂ ap models, the Auto trim function for ailerons is deactivated if "2AIL 2FL" and "2AIL 4FL" or "4AIL 2FL" and "4AIL 4FL" is selected in the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu.Be sure that during the switch assignment, the •joysticks for aileron, elevator and rudder are in their neutral positions as otherwise their offsets from neutral will be adopted right away in trim memory as the trim value.Since EVERY activation of the Auto trim switch •has a cumulative effect, after concluding an "auto trim" ﬂ ight, the assigned auto trim switch should be deactivated for reasons of safety. Otherwise there is a residual danger that the "Auto trim" function could be activated accidentally. ext. PPM signalBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Power on warning L1Auto trim –––ext. PPM signal normalSELSome RF modules which can be connected to the external (page 25) or internal (page 26) connectors for other RF modules require an inverted input signal. Be sure to follow the respective module's installation instructions for this.The choice of "inverted" instead of the default preset "normal" allows for appropriate adaptation of the provided PPM signal.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "normal".

83For your notes Auto timer resetBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETPower on warning L1Auto trim –––ext. PPM signal normalSELAuto timer reset yesThe "yes/no" setting made in this line determines whether or not all of the transmitter's timers (except for "Model time" and "Transmitter operating time") are automatically reset to their given starting values when the transmitter is switched on.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "yes".

$84 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsBefore programming speciﬁ c parameters, there are some basic settings to be made which effect the currently active model memory. Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Basic settings, model« menu … Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter type… then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Model nameModel nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTChange to the next screen page with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad. This will open a screen of characters for entry of the model's name. A maximum of 13 characters can be used to specify a model name. !"#$%&’()Model name Starle@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¾¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~Now the desired characters can be selected with the selection keys of the left touch pad. Move to the next position to select the next character with a tap on the f of the right touch pad or its center SET key. A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at the current position.Positioning to any character position within the entry ﬁ eld can be done with the ef keys of the right touch pad.A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad.A model name entered in this manner will appear in the base screen of the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item. InfoModel nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTStarletEvery model can be given a supplementary note of up to 12 characters (maximum) by following the same procedure as already described for creating a "Model name". This info note will appear as a supplement in the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item. Stick mode“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)pitch axistail rotorpitch axistail rotorthrottlerollrollthrottletail rotortail rotorthrottle throttlepitch axispitch axisrollrollpitch axispitch axisrollrollMotor/Pitchthrottletail rotortail rotorthrottlethrottlerollrollpitch axispitch axistail rotortail rotorBasically there are four different ways to assign the four helicopter control functions, roll, nick, tail rotor and throttle/pitch to the two joysticks. Just which of these is used depends on the preferences of the individual model pilot.Use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option ﬁ eld will be framed.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTSELStarlet1234g/111111Tap on the SET key. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select from among options 1 through 4.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to stick mode "1". Base setup modelModel-speciﬁ c base settings for helicopter models$

85Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsAnother tap on the SET key will again deactivate option selection so a change to another line can be affected. ModuleModel nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTStarlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4The mc-20 transmitter has a HoTT RF module as standard equipment. In addition to the built-in module, there is a connector for an external RF module behind one of the two front cover ﬂ aps (see page 25) and a switchover to an external module connected there can be affected per software. To do this, use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame left to the "Module" selection ﬁ eld above the "SEL" column label.HoTT systemGraupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed" to communicate exclusively with a certain model (memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as "binding" and must only be done once for every new receiver/model-memory-location combination (and can be repeated anytime).Important notices:During the binding procedure be sure the •transmitter's antenna is always far enough away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to the return channel and malfunctions will result.When binding additional receivers, note that any •other –switched on– receivers already bound to the transmitter will fall into Fail-safe mode during the transmitter-side "binding" period. "Binding" multiple receivers per modelMultiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, whereby respective mc-20 HoTT programs offer the potential for managing up to four receivers directly and for dividing up the transmitter's 16 control channels (max) in any arrangement among these receivers under menu control. Refer to additional details further down in this section. First bind the receivers individually as described below. However, in subsequent operation only one of these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to the transmitter; the one which was activated in the "TELEMETRY RCV" line of the »Telemetry« menu, for example:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model should therefore be connected to this receiver because the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from the return channel of the receiver activated on this line. The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel but are fully independent in slave mode. "Binding" transmitter and receiverUse the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the "Module" line. The marker frame will be positioned by default to the column for the next free binding channel. In the example shown in the ﬁ gure below, the marker frame is positioned above the column label "BD2" because the binding channel in the column labeled "BD1" is already in use by default for the receiver which was delivered with the set.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTStarlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red LED on the receiver will blink.Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds then, after about another 3 seconds, begins to blink red/green. The SET button on the receiver can now be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode.Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called "receiver binding" process for the receiver to the currently active model memory with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. At this time, the screen's display will blend in a message window for the duration of the "binding" process.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTStarlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4FINDING...If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green, the binding process has been successfully

86 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelscompleted. Your model-memory to receiver combination is now operationally ready. At this time the screen will now display " bind " (bound) instead of "n/a" (not attached).Model nameStick mode 1bindBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTStarlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding process has failed. In this case the screen will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should happen, try changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire procedure. Binding other receiversThe binding channel you have chosen is already bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with another binding channel. If, after initiating the RF bind process, the message shown below appears in the screen instead of displaying "BINDING"Model nameStick mode 1geb.BASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule geb.HoTTStarlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 RF offOK is turned Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the RF module, as described several columns further below in the section "RF module". Afterward, return again to the "Module" line and restart the binding process as described on the previous page.Alternatively you can brieﬂ y switch off the transmitter then, after switching it back on again, respond to the message window that appears …OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?… with "OFF" …ONPlease selectRF on/off?OFF… then conﬁ rm the selection with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. From the base screen jump again into the "Module" line of the »Basic settings, model« menu and restart the binding process. Dissolving a bondProceed as described above to initiate the binding process but WITHOUT ﬁ rst putting a receiver in binding readiness.EXT. PPMImportant notice:With the activation of the value ﬁ eld in the context of the following described changeover, any existing bonds to HoTT receivers which may be effective for the currently active model memory will be lost.Activate the ﬁ rst value ﬁ eld in the "Module" line with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then use the selection keys to choose "EXT. PPM" instead of "HoTT". In parallel with the selection of "EXT. PPM", the other four value ﬁ elds will be replaced by the type of modulation pre-selected in the line »DSC Output«, see page 88.Model nameStick mode 1BASIC SETTING,MODELInfoModuleStarlet1234g/111111SELPPM10EXT. PPMThis change also suppresses the lines for the options (described below): »HoTT«, »Rcv Ch Map«, »RF module« and »RF range test« and, in the basic display, "PPM" will be displayed instead of "HoTT".#02 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.0000000:00hMVStarletPPMH-J Sandbrunner Receiver channel mappingStick ModeModule1bindBASIC SETTING,MODELbindInfon/an/aHoTTSET SET SET SET2345g/090911Rcv Ch Mapgang R16 R08 n/an/aAs mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding receivers" section, this menu item of the mc-20 HoTT offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the transmitter's control channels within a receiver as well

87Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsas the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 16 control channels across as many as four receivers.This redistribution is subsequently referred to as "mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation). Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Channel mapping within a receiverAnalogous to the channel correlation function in the »Telemetry« menu on page 232, described as "Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu item to freely assign the transmitter's control channels present on the receiver's inputs to any speciﬁ c receiver outputs (servo connections) for the bound receiver designated by the column labeled BD1.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND1Rx Input Ch 1Rx Input Ch 2Rx Input Ch 3Rx Input Ch 4Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4After selection of the desired output with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input ﬁ eld will be framed. Brieﬂ y tap the center SETkey of the right touch pad: The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the desired input channel's respective transmitter output, see page 218.Note:The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver.BUT CAUTION: If you wish to operate two servos with one control function, for example such as transmitter control function 2 (roll) which is divided up into control channels 1 & 2 for left and right roll servos for the "3Sv(2Roll)" option in the »Heli type«menu; then "map" the corresponding transmitter outputs, in this case for channels 1 & 2 (= inputs to the receiver) accordingly.Important notice:The mc-20 HoTT transmitter's »Tx. output swap«option permits the transmitter's 16 control functions to be freely swapped in a similar manner or even permits multiple outputs to be assigned to the same control function. To keep controls manageable, however, we strongly recommend using only one of the options at a time. Channel assignment on other receiversAs already mentioned, the "Rcv Ch map" menu option can be used to freely distribute the mc-20HoTT transmitter's 16 control channels across upto four receivers, whereby the numbering of outputs (servo connections) as well as the maximum number of available lines (outputs) will correspond to the maximum number of servo connections available on the given receiver.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4After selection of the desired output with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input ﬁ eld will be framed. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For example, appropriate for the above example with roll servos:RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2Rx Input Ch 1Rx Input Ch 2Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4Note:The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver. RF transmitThis menu line provides an option for manually switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and off to speciﬁ c models while the transmitter is in operation. For example, to save power while a model is being programmed. If this line option was set to OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next time the transmitter is switched on.If necessary, use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the "RF module" line then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the value window:Stick modeModule1bindbind n/an/aHoTTSET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onBASIC SETTING,MODELThe right selection keys can now be used to choose between OFF and ON. Another tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad will conclude the entry.

88 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsof the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF, will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the transmitter's display will start counting down and every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound. Five seconds prior to the end of the range test a three-frequency tone will sound once every second. After expiration of the range test's 99th second the transmitter will again be switched to full output power and the LED just to the right of the main switch on the transmitter will again illuminate constantly.Move away from the model while manipulating 6. the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an interruption anytime while still within a distance of about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.If there is a motor in the model, it may be 7. necessary to switch it on to further check noise immunity.Continue moving away from the model until 8. perfect control is no longer possible. Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 9. period with the still-operationally-ready model to expire. After the range test is ended it should again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. Contact your area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG service partner.Perform the range test before each ﬂ ight and, in 10. doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during ﬂ ight. The range must always be at 50 m on the ground in order to assure safe model operation.Caution:Never start the range test on the transmitter during normal operation of the model. DSC outputIf necessary, use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line then, with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the value window:SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10BASIC SETTING,MODELNow you can use the right selection keys to choose between four types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM16", "PPM18" and "PPM24". Touch the center SET key of the right touch pad again to complete the entry.This choice primarily inﬂ uences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a ﬂ ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels 1 … 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 … 8, for "PPM18" channels 1 … 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 … 12. AutorotationAutorotation is that state of descending ﬂ ight in which the pitch of main rotor blades are set such that the rotor's speed matches the natural forces of air ﬂ owing through, like a windmill. This built-up energy can be used for "recovery" lift to brake a descent by appropriate blade pitch adjustment.Autorotation is a means by which real and model helicopters are able to land safely in emergency situations, e.g. in the event of a motor failure. However, the prerequisite for this is a well-trained pilot familiar with the helicopter's characteristics. Quick reaction and good perceptiveness are necessary because the rotor's inertia can only be used once to generate recovery lift. Range testThe built-in range test reduces transmission power to an extent that a functional test can be carried out even within a distance of less than 100 m.Perform a range test on the Graupner HoTT system according to the following instructions. If necessary, have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.Preferably, the receiver already bound to the 1. transmitter should be installed into the model in its intended position.Switch remote control on and wait for the green 2. LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo movements can be observed.Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 3. low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. It may be necessary to put something under the model to raise it up enough for this.Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some 4. distance from one's body. Do not point the antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented vertically during the test.If necessary, use the 5. cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "RF range test" line in the menu then start range test mode with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Module bindbind n/an/aHoTTSET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sBASIC SETTING,MODELLWhen the range test has been initiated, the transmitter's transmission power will be signiﬁ cantly reduced and the LED just to the right

89Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsWhen this technique is evaluated during competitions, the motor must be switched off for autorotation. On the other hand, for training mode it is advantageous to keep the motor at idle for autorotation.The Autorotation switch causes a switchover to the autorotation ﬂ ight phase in which control of "throttle" and "pitch" are separate and all mixers which have an effect on the throttle servo are switched off. Corresponding parameter settings are made in the »Helicopter mixer« (see text beginning page 176); refer also to the "Principle of the Auto. C1 Pos." topic which follows.The "Autorotation" name is permanently assigned to phase 1 and it is included in the base screen of all ﬂ ight phase dependent menus. This name can NOT be changed. It is only possible to assign a switch to this option at the right of this display, as described on page 56. If a switch is assigned, it will have absolute priority over all other ﬂ ight-phase switches.BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationMore about ﬂ ight-phase programming can be found in the text beginning on page 176 in the»Helicoptermixer« section. Autorotation C1 positionThe autorotation ﬂ ight-phase can alternatively be activated by a threshold point for the C1 throttle/pitch joystick. To do this, use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the "Autorot. C1-Pos." line. As soon as this display line has been selected, its value ﬁ eld, located above the column label STO will be framed.BASIC SETTING,MODELSTO SETRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––Move the C1 joystick into the desired threshold switchover position then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current value will be displayed, e.g.:BASIC SETTING,MODELSTO SETRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. -55% –––After this has been done, use the selection keys to move into the column above the switch symbol then assign a switch to this ﬁ eld, as described on page 56 in section "Switches, controls and control switches". Preferably one of the two self-restoring switchesBASIC SETTING,MODELSTO SETRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. –55% 4IOnce this activation switch is closed, the ﬁ rst occurrence of a threshold underrun will cause the program to switch over to "Autorotation" and then remain independent of C1 position in this ﬂ ight phase until the activating switch, in this example switch 4, is again "OFF"."Autorot. C1-Pos." has precedence over all other ﬂ ight-phase switches.Corresponding parameter settings for …pitch servos•throttle servo•tail rotor servo•swashplate rotation, if available•gyro setting•… are made in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 176. Cut-offWithin the framework of autorotation settings for the mc-20 HoTT transmitter's helicopter program, there are parameters for an emergency "Thr. CutOff" of the throttle servo or motor actuator, refer to the programming proposal on page 314. However, this option is not available if an idle position is speciﬁ ed in the "Throttle position AR" line of the »Helicoptermixer« menu instead of an (emergency) OFF position; for example, to avoid restarting the motor after every landing during autorotation practice. This option not only replaces the"Cut-off trim" function known from other Graupner mc and mx transmitters but also serves as an Emergency-OFF function at the same time, which was not possible with the"Cut-off trim" function.Depending on the "forw./rear" choice made for the "Pitch min" line of the »Helicopter type« menu, this "Thr. CutOff" option can be coupled to a switch for throttling down a speed controller or a carburetor servo to the motor OFF (or idle) position. This cut-off (or idle) position is speciﬁ ed in the left column's ﬁ eld, above the SEL column label, and its value is to be established through trial and error.

90 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsA speed controller or throttle servo will only take on this preset position when a certain servo position or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. This is done by setting the desired servo position (threshold value) into the middle column ﬁ eld, directly over the column label STO, then selecting the appropriate ON/OFF switch function in the right column.If the percentage value speciﬁ ed for the middle •column is greater than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo position lies below the threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put into its ON position.If the percentage value speciﬁ ed for the middle •column is less than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo position is above the threshold, the speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo only to the extent dictated by the value in the left column as soon as the servo's position once underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the switch is changed over to its ON position.The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in this cut-off position only until the selected switch is again changed over followed by a one-time throttle servo or speed controller movement beyond the preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick control.The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of +150 % servo position setting in the middle column.BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STO–––Thr. CutOff +150%–100%Programming procedureTo change the throttle servo's preset "cut-off" position, tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably "off" without a startup of the throttle servo. For example -125 %:BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STO–––Thr. CutOff +150%–125%The – upper – preset value in the middle column ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the maximum possible positioning range of the servo or speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in the right column. However, if a lower threshold is preferred, at which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed controller with closed switch to enter the throttle cut-off position for a closed switch condition – by default the right-side proportional rotary slider – put the throttle/pitch joystick into the desired position then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STO–––Thr. CutOff +150%–125%Finally, use the column at the right to specify a switch with which you can cut off the motor directly (emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold. BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STOThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Notes:Be sure the throttle servo does not run out •mechanically when the cut-off function is activated.A threshold over +100 % is reached by •temporarily increasing the travel for servo 1 in the »Servo adjustment« menu to over 100 % then, after storing the threshold, change servo travel back to the original value.

91Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models MarkingBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SET–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STOThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Marker key –––When activated, the "Marker key" will place a marker in the "Pitch" curve, as well as in the "Channel 1 ¼Throttle" and "Channel 1 ¼ Tail rotor" mixer curves of the »Helicopter mixer« menu, to mark the current pitch joystick position of the pitch joystick and it takes on the form of a vertical dashed line. This marker is helpful for setting curve points at the right places during ﬂ ight testing, e.g. the hovering pointOne of the two standard momentary contact switches mounted into the switch panels should be the preferred choice of switch assignment.Example:The hovering point is to be placed at the midpoint of the throttle/pitch joystick for the «Hover» ﬂ ight phase but it is found to be still located above control middle during ﬂ ight testing. Press the switch in this position and, after the landing, examine, for example, the Pitch curve in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 176.PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –30%–30%?+–100¼O U T P U TThe continuous vertical line shows the joystick's current position. Its position in this example lies at -30 % (= input) of control travel and, because of its (still) linear control curve, produces an output signal which is also -30 % (= output).On the other hand, the dashed vertical line represents the joystick position at which the marker switch was pushed.Move the joystick to this marker line to read the input and output values for the found hovering point. The marker points of the other two mixer curves are read similarly. Now these three curves can be alternately modiﬁ ed as necessary in order to correct the hovering point. Curve point "1" in this simple example can be raised at the curve's midpoint to the output value that was determined to be the hovering point in the Pitch graph. Power-on warning BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SET–––Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STOThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Marker key –––Power on warningWhen a switch, a control switch or a logical switch is assigned in this line, as described on page 56 in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches", the respective switch or control position will be polled when the transmitter is switched on and an appropriate warning will be blended into the basic display under some conditions. In combination with logical switches, almost any switch setting can be called up for transmitter switch on.#02 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.04.1V0:00.0000000:00hMV!Warning!StarletH-J Sandbrunner Auto trimBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SET––––––SEL STOThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Marker key–––Power on warningAuto trimThe "Auto trim" option makes it possible to trim a model quickly and without complications, e.g. in the context of a ﬁ rst-ﬂ ight or even after (major) repairs, etc.Typically such test ﬂ ights are initially ﬂ own with joysticks counter operated until the desired state of ﬂ ight is achieved. This generally involves working the trim controls during the ﬂ ight to "unburden" the joysticks.This is exactly what the "Auto trim" function is for. After the desired ﬂ ight attitude has been achieved via control functions 2 … 4 (aileron, elevator and rudder), the switch assigned to "Auto trim" – ideally one of the standard-equipment momentary switches in the switch panels – is to be activated ONCE. At the instant the switch is activated, the joystick offsets from their neutral positions will be determined and adopted as trim values. However, this does not take place instantaneously but rather within about 1 second. During this period after the switch has been activated, the joysticks should be returned to their normal positions.

92 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsNotes:Be sure that during the switch assignment, the •joysticks for aileron, elevator and rudder are in their neutral positions as otherwise their offsets from neutral will be adopted right away in trim memory as the trim value.Since EVERY activation of the Auto trim switch •has a cumulative effect, after concluding an "auto trim" ﬂ ight, the assigned auto trim switch should be deactivated for reasons of safety. Otherwise there is a residual danger that the "Auto trim" function could be activated accidentally. ext. PPM signalBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETPower on warning –––Auto trim –––ext. PPM signal normalSELMarker key –––Some RF modules which can be connected to the external (page 25) or internal (page 26) connectors for other RF modules require an inverted input signal. Be sure to follow the respective module's installation instructions for this.The choice of "inverted" instead of the default preset "normal" allows for appropriate adaptation of the provided PPM signal.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "normal". Auto timer resetBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETPower on warning –––Auto trim –––ext. PPM signal normalSELAuto timer reset yesThe "yes/no" setting made in this line determines whether or not all of the transmitter's timers (except for "Model time" and "Transmitter operating time") are automatically reset to their given starting values when the transmitter is switched on.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "yes".

94 Detail program description - Model type | Winged modelsThis "Model type" menu is used to establish the type of model to be programmed. This also activates all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. in preparation for subsequent programming of the speciﬁ ed model type.Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: Motor at C1After selecting the "Motor at C1" line with the cdselection keys of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding entry ﬁ eld will be framed. Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select from among the following four options: "none" For operation of a model without a propulsion. The warning "Throttle too high", see page 30, is deactivated andthe "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« (beginning page 172) is available without any restrictions."Thr. min. rear": The idle position for the throttle/brake ﬂ aps joystick (C1) is to the rear, i.e. toward the pilot. The warning "Throttle too high", see page 30, as well as the "Thr. CutOff" option in the »Basic settings, model« menu, see page 81, are activated and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers«menu, beginning page 172, will be available if the entry in the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings«menu, page 142, for the currently active ﬂ ight phase is "none"."Thr. min. fwd.": The idle position for the throttle/brake ﬂ aps control stick (C1) is at the front, i.e. away from the pilot. The warning "Throttle too high", see page 30, as well as the "Thr. CutOff" option in the »Basic settings, model« menu, see page 90, are activated and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers«menu, beginning page 172, will be available if the entry in the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings«menu, page 142, for the currently active ﬂ ight phase is "none".Notes:Be sure to pay attention during the •programming procedures that motors do not start up unintentionally. Disconnect the fuel supply or battery terminals to motors before programming.C1 trimming will operate according to the choice •made between "normal" or only "back" or "fwd.", that is, either over the control's entire travel path or only in the respective idle direction. Tail typeAfter selecting the »Tail type« line with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry ﬁ eld will be framed.Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the type appropriate for the model with the selection keys of the right touch pad."normal": Elevators and rudder are each operated by a single servo."V-tail": Elevator and rudder control is affected by way of two separate, articulated, V-shaped rudders. The coupling function for rudder and elevator control will be automatically taken over by the program. The relationship of rudder-to-elevator proportion is set in the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu, page 120, and servo travel in the »Servo adjustment«menu, page 102.If, beyond this, there is a desire to also make differentiation for rudder throw then the V-tail should be alternatively controlled via the »Dualmixer« menu, page 206. In this case however, the tail type entry speciﬁ ed here must be "normal". "ELEVON": Aileron and elevator control is operated by one or two servos Model typeEstablishing winged aircraft model type

95Detail program description - Model type | Winged modelsper wing half. However, elevator trimming is also affected by selecting the "2AIL 2FL" option – see below – but only on servos 2 & 3. "2ELSv3+8": This option is intended for models with two elevator servos. The servo connected to output 8 will operate in parallel with servo 3 to actuate elevators. Elevator trim affects both servos.Note on "2ELSv3+8":One control, which assigns input 8 by way of the »Control adjust« menu, is then disconnected from servo "8" by software for reasons of safety i.e. it is made ineffective. Aileron/camber ﬂ apsAfter selecting the »Aileron/camber ﬂ aps« line with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry ﬁ eld will be framed.Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the number of wing servos to be programmed for the model.Available Control channel used1AIL 21AIL 1FL 2 | 6In the majority of cases the default setting for "input 1" will remain as it is and the brake will be operated by way of the non-neutralizing C1 joystick.However, use of input 7, 8 or 9 makes it possible to operate the brake in an alternative manner, even by way of a supplementary control, if the C1 stick is to be used for something else.The neutral point (offset) can be set to any desired position. This is done by placing the control for input 1, 7, 8 or 9 into the position at which the landing ﬂ aps are to be retracted, i.e. closed, then setting this "Offset" point in the column above the column label STO.The selection of this offset point in this context determines not only the control position at which the brake system is to be retracted, i.e. closed, but also also the activation direction of the C1 joystick for extending the brake system.Brake offset values with a "+" preﬁ x will cause •ﬂ aps affected by the "Brake settings" option of the »Wing mixers« menu to be extended when the C1 joystick is moved from front to rear, in the direction of the pilot.Brake offset values with a "-" preﬁ x will cause •ﬂ aps affected by the "Brake settings" option of the »Wing mixers« menu to be extended when the C1 joystick is moved from rear to front, in the direction away from the pilot.If the offset point is not set at the far end of control element travel, the remainder of travel to the end point will be "free travel", i.e. this "free travel" will no longer inﬂ uence any mixer available for "Brake settings" in the »Wing mixers« menu. This idle path ensures that all brake settings remain at "neutral", even with minor deviations from the limit of the brake ﬂ ap control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %.2AIL 2 & 52AIL 1FL 2 & 5 | 62AIL 2FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 72AIL 4FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 104QR 2WK 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 74AIL 4FL 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 10Depending on the option selected here, the given mixers needed and their settings will be activated in the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 172.Tips:Settings for all wing ﬂ ap pairs (Al and Al2, FL and •FL2) can be trimmed on a ﬂ ight-phase basis in both the »Phase trim« menu as well as in the Wing mixers« menu, page 172.The functionality of all wing ﬂ ap pairs (Al and Al2, •FL and FL2) can also be operated by way of the "Throttle/brake-ﬂ ap joystick" if this stick has not been assigned to other use, e.g. for certain brake settings, see »Wing mixers« menu, page 172. To conﬁ gure this it is only necessary to assign "Control 1" to input 6 in the »Control adjust«menu, page 108. (If it is preferable to operate ﬂ aps with switches, one of the transmitter's two or three position switches are good for this purpose.) Brake OffsetThis function not only has potential for gliders and electric models but also for models with combustion motors and landing ﬂ aps.The mixers described in the »Brake settings« line of the »Wing mixers« menu can be operated by the C1 joystick ("input 1") or another transmitter operating element which has been assigned to input 7, 8 or 9 in the »Control adjust« menu. In this latter case, retain the "GL" default setting for the "Type" column in the »Control adjust« menu so the selected control can operate independent of ﬂ ight phase.

96 Detail program description - Model type | Winged modelsTail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+90%SELTip:Preferably, the servo intended for operating any airbrake ﬂ aps that may be on the model should be connected to the receiver output operated by the brake input channel, e.g. connect airbrake servo onto (free) receiver output 8 if input 8 has been chosen for the "brake", etc. A second airbrake servo is most conveniently operated by way of a free mixer.

98 Detail program description - Helicopter type Helicopter typeEstablishing helicopter model typeThis "Model type" menu is used to establish the type of model to be programmed. This also activates all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. in preparation for subsequent programming of the speciﬁ ed model type.Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: Swashplate typeControl of the swashplate will require an appropriate program variant which corresponds to the number of servos operating pitch control.In the meantime this selection is also inﬂ uenced by the type of control exercised on swashplate servos. Since Flybar systems generally do not require transmitter-side swashplate mixers, when such a system is in use, "1 Servo" is generally to be selected as the swashplate type, regardless of the actual number of swashplate servos present. In this context, be sure the Flybar system complies with the included adjustment instructions as otherwise there is a risk the helicopter will not ﬂ y.After selecting the »Swashplate type« line with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry ﬁ eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl.Swashplate typeno1 ServoRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting for number of pitch servos will be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant needed with the selection keys of the right touch pad. "1 Servo": A Flybar system is in use or the swashplate is tipped with one servo each for roll and pitch-axis. Pitch control will be affected by oneseparate servo. (Since helicopter models, like Flybar systems, which are operated with only 1 pitch servo, neither need any of the three swashplate servos for pitch, pitch-axis and roll NOR the transmitter's mixer functions for pitch, pitch-axis and roll, the »Swashplate mixer« menu option will be suppressed in the Multi-function menu.)"2 Servo": Two roll servos will displace the swashplate axially to affect pitch control; nick control will be decoupled by a mechanical compensation rocker."3Sv(2Roll)": Symmetric three-point control of the swashplate with three, radially offset articulation points, each offset by 120 °, connected to one pitch-axis servo (front or rear) and two roll servos (left and right). All three servos push the swashplate axially to affect pitch control."3Sv (140°)": Asymmetrical three-point control of the swashplate is affected at three articulation points connected to one nick servo (rear) and two roll servos (front left and right). All three servos push the swashplate axially to affect pitch control."3Sv (2Nick)": Symmetric three-point control as described above but radially offset by 90°, one lateral roll servo and two pitch-axis servos, front and rear."4Sv (90°)": Four-point swashplate control affected by two roll servos and two nick servos.Simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to "1 Servo".Swashplate type: 1 Servo2Swashplate type: 2 Servos21

99Detail program description - Helicopter typeSwashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Roll)312Swashplate type: 3 Servos (140°)312Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Nick)321Swashplate type: 4 Servos (90°) 2 Nick / 2 Roll2513Note:Except for the "1 Servo" choice, swashplate mixer proportions must also be set in the»Swashplatemixer« menu, page 208. Swashplate linearizionAfter selecting the »Linearis. swashpl.« line with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry ﬁ eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl.Swashplate typeno1 ServoRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELThe "yes" entry will prevent undesired side effects such as pitch change due to a roll function or tension between swashplate servo rods.This type of tension can arise when effected servos strain for different displacement positions due to travel which deviates from one another.Linearizing will require a bit of familiarization on the part of the pilot because, in order to linearize the entire rotation travel of the servo arm, servo travel is reduced in small control movements – similar to a pronounced exponential setting. Rotor directionAfter selecting the »Rotor direction« line with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry ﬁ eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl.Swashplate typeno1 ServoRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELAfter a tap on the center SET key, the main rotor's direction of rotation is entered in the »Rotor direction« line with the selection keys of the right touch pad:"right": The main rotor turns clockwise when viewed from above."left": The main rotor turns counter-clockwise when viewed from above.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will set the option to "right". right-turningleft-turningThis entry is necessary for the correct orientation of torque and power compensation mixer settings made in the »Helicopter mixer« menu: Pitch, Channel 1 ¼ Throttle, Channel 1 ¼ Tail rot., Tail rotor ¼ Throttle Roll ¼ Throttle Roll ¼ Tail rot. Pitch ¼ Throttle, Pitch-axis ¼ Throttle Pitch-axis ¼ Tail rotor

100 Detail program description - Helicopter typePitch minAfter selecting the »Pitch min.« (pitch minimum) linewith the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry ﬁ eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl.Swashplate typeno1 ServoRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELThe »Pitch min.« line is used to adapt the actuation direction of the throttle/pitch joystick to personal control preferences. All other helicopter program options which involve throttle and pitch functions, e.g. throttle curve, idle trimming, tail rotor mixer, etc., are dependent on this setting. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The operating direction of the throttle/pitch joystick will be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant needed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.PitchThese mean: "fwd.": minimum pitch setting when the pitch joystick (C1) is "forward", i.e. away from the pilot."rear": minimum pitch setting when the pitch joystick (C1) is "back", i.e. toward the pilot.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will set this option to "rear".Notes:C1 trimming affects only the throttle servo. •The so-called "throttle limit" is set by default, see •text beginning page 117, by way of input "GL16" in the »Control adjust« menu with which the throttle servo can be limited, independent of the pitch servo, in the full throttle direction.Since a given user's models will typically be •operated with the same pitch-min direction, this speciﬁ cation can be conveniently preselected in the "transmitter-speciﬁ c" »General basic settings« menu, page 259. This speciﬁ cation will then be adopted automatically when a new model memory is created in the »Helicopter type« menu but, if desired, can be adapted on a model-speciﬁ c basis as described. Expo throttle limitAfter selecting the »Expo throttle lim.« line with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry ﬁ eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl. noRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELExpo throttle lim. 0%The "Throttle limit" function described in the »Control adjust« menu, see page 117, can be assigned an exponential characteristic curve.A pitch progression rate between -100 % and +100 % can be set with the selection keys.For example, it is practical to have the throttle limit – by default, the right-side proportional rotary slider – also regulate the idle setting. Further details about the throttle limit can be found in the text for the »Control adjust« menu beginning page 112.An example of two exponential throttle limit curve characteristics for 100 % servo travel.continuous line:negative exponential values;dashed line:positive exponential values " $ &    #        "    $   &       Throttle limit warningRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELExpo throttle lim. 0%Thr. limit warning –70%If the carburetor is open too far when the transmitter is switched on, an acoustic warning will be sounded and a warning will be presented in the display.Throttle too high!The »Thr. limit warning« option permits the setting of a variable for the critical position of the throttle servo between 0 % and -100 %, above which the warning will be issued. The reference point for this option is the "fwd." or "rear" Pitch min. joystick position set in this menu.

101Detail program description - Helicopter typeA default value of -70 % control travel is provided.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value back to the default value.

102 Detail program description - Servo adjustmentnormalreversednormalreversedColumn 3 "cent."The servo midpoint (center) setting is intended for adapting a non-standard servo (a servo whose midpoint position does not correspond to a pulse length of 1.5 ms, i.e. 1500 μs), as well as for minoradjustments, e.g. for the ﬁ ne tuning of the neutral position of model rudders.Independent of trim wheels and any mixer settings, the neutral point can be shifted in a range of -125 bis +125 % within a maximum servo travel of ± 150 %. Independent of all other trim and mixer settings, this setting is always based directly on the respective servo. Note that extreme offsets of the neutral point can lead to one-sided restrictions of servo travel because overall travel is limited by both electronic and mechanical aspects to a maximum of ±150 %.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".Brieﬂ y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown highlighted.Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 4. the desired value.Brieﬂ y tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete data entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6. cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value.Important:Servo designation numerals are based on the respective receiver outputs to which they are connected, provided that no swapping of transmitter and/or receiver outputs has been speciﬁ ed. This means that even a change of stick mode will not effect the numbering of servos.Column 2 "rev"The direction in which a servo turns is adapted to the practical reality of the given model so that the assembly of control rods and joints do not need to accommodate a speciﬁ c servo rotation direction. Rotation direction is symbolized by the "=>" and "<=" character combinations. Servo rotation direction must be speciﬁ ed before making settings for the options which follow below.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset rotation direction back to "=>". This menu is used to set the direction, neutralization, travel and limit parameters for a given selected servo exclusively. Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%Begin setting servo parameters in the left column.Basic procedure:Select the desired servo, 1 … 16, with the 1. cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad. If necessary, use the 2. ef selection keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the desired column then, if desired, move the respective control out of its midpoint to make an asymmetric setting. Servo adjustmentServo direction, midpoint, travel and limit

103Detail program description - Servo adjustmentColumn 4, "–travel+"0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is 0 … 150 % of normal servo travel. The values set are based on the settings that have been made for the "midpoint" column. To create a symmetric travel path, i.e. control-side independent travel, the respective control (joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be put into a position which covers travel to both sides of the marked frame. Note:It may be necessary to ﬁ rst assign a control attached to one of the control channels 5 … 16. If necessary, this is to be done in the »Control adjust« menu, see page 108 or 112.To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be moved to the side on which the marked frame only includes the value to be changed.The value setting is activated with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The value ﬁ eld is shown highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad. Complete the entry with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to "100 %".Important:In contrast to settings made with the »Control adjust« menu, all settings made in this menu affect exclusively the respective servo, independent of how the control signal for this servo is produced, i.e. directly by a joystick or by way of any mixer functions.The adjacent ﬁ gure shows and example of a side-dependent servo setting, -50 % and +150 %. Transmitter control travelServo travelColumn 5 "–limit+"The "– limit +" column is reached by moving the marker frame, with the f selection keys of the left or right touch pad, to the right beyond the "– travel +" column.0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%To create a symmetric limit, i.e. control-side independent limit, the respective control (joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be put into a position such that the marker frame covers both sides of the travel setting.To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be moved to the side where it is to be set such that the marker frame only includes the value to be changed.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".Example:A servo is controlled separately by two controls over a mixer and but, for model-speciﬁ c reasons, must only be operated over a servo travel path of 100 % because, for example, the rudder would mechanically collide with the elevator if moved more than 100 %.As long as only one control is used at a time, this is no problem. But this does become a problem when the signals are summed by the simultaneous use of both controls (e.g. aileron and rudder) to total travel in excess of 100 %. The linkage and servos could be strained excessively …To prevent this, the travel should certainly be limited by way of an individual travel limit. In the case of the rudder used in the example, this would be a value slightly less than 100 % – because it is assumed the rudder would collide at 100 %.

104 Detail program description - Joystick setting | Winged modelsBoth joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. When turning trim wheels, every "click" will shift the joystick's neutral position by a certain value. The current position is shown on the screen and the adjustment is also made "audible" with acoustic tones. This makes ﬁ nding the mid-point during ﬂ ight easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made.Furthermore – except for global control function trimming of the throttle/brake joystick, commonly referred to as control function "C1" (channel 1) – digital trimming is effective within a model memory location selectively as either a global parameter (i.e. consistent in all ﬂ ight phases) or as a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c parameter. This speciﬁ cation as "global" or "phase" is made in the »Stick mode«menu described here, whereas software-side C1 trimming is generally set to "global", i.e. independent of ﬂ ight phases.This setting is visualized in the base screen by a "shadow" on trim bars:shadow present = global,•no shadow = ﬂ ight phase dependent.•In two corresponding ﬁ gures below, elevator trim – shown in the middle text column with its default setting "global" – then in the right column set to ﬂ ight "Phase" speciﬁ c.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalRX VOLT:4.9V Joystick setting Setting stick mode 1 through 4Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Stick mode« option in the multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444This menu, adapted for winged models, permits the four digital trim wheels to be set and their trim effects to be assigned, selectively, as a "deceleration" factor to control functions 1 through 4.The desired line can be reached by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the appropriate function ﬁ eld has been selected and then the center SET key of the right touch pad is touched brieﬂ y, the ﬁ eld will appear in inverse video and the desired setting can be made with the selection keys of the right touch pad.TrimExcept for "Channel 1", this column can be used to switchover trim effect from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)" and vice versa. globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sPhase 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444"Global": The position of the respective trim wheel is effective "globally" for all ﬂ ight-phases programmed for the given model, page 140."Phase": The position of the respective trim wheel is effective on a phase-speciﬁ c basis and will be automatically stored upon change of ﬂ ight phase so that the setting is again available following a return to this ﬂ ight phase.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to "Global".Trim stepsThe four digital trim wheels shift the neutral point of the respective joystick in the given direction by one adjustable increment, as set here, for each "click". This is where the increment size (step) can be adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel.After selecting the "Tr. step" column (trim steps) and the desired trim control with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry ﬁ eld will be framed.

105Detail program description - Joystick setting | Winged modelsglobalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sPhase 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired value, between 1 and 10, with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For example:globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sPhase 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4484A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to the active ﬁ eld back to "4".TimeThe rate of control signal change with respect to the speed of joystick motion can be inﬂ uenced by the entries made in the "– time +" column. Each joystick movement direction, i.e. joystick control channels 1 through 4, can be set individually. This means that respective servos will then follow rapid control position changes only at an accordingly delayed rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control function and therefore also any servos controlled by this function.The time can be programmed symmetrically for both sides or separate for each control direction. This setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In the case of side-separate settings, the joystick is to be moved to the respective side so that the inverse video ﬁ eld will switch between sides to the one for which the change is to be made – for example, even to ensure gentle rev-up of the propulsion motor despite a (too) fast motion of the C1 stick.globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTri m1.1sTr. step – time +global 0.0sPhase 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4484On the other hand, for reasons of safety, the motor cut-off should always be "immediate".A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to the active ﬁ eld back to "0.0 s".

106 Detail program description - Joystick setting | HelicoptersBoth joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. When turning trim wheels, every "click" will shift the joystick's neutral position by a certain value. The current position is shown on the screen and the adjustment is also made "audible" with acoustic tones. This makes ﬁ nding the mid-point during ﬂ ight easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made. Furthermore – except for trimming the throttle/brake joystick – digital trimming is effective selectively either as a global parameter, i.e. consistent in all ﬂ ight phases, or as a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c parameter. This speciﬁ cation as "Global" or "Phase" is made in the »Stick mode« menu described here, whereas throttle trimming is always made "global" by software, i.e. independent of ﬂ ight phases.This setting is visualized in the base screen by a "shadow" on trim bars:shadow present = global,•no shadow = ﬂ ight phase dependent.•In the following ﬁ gure, pitch-axis trimming is used as an example of ﬂ ight-phase dependence – presented at the left in its default Mode 1.0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVH-J SandbrunnerNormal#02StarletRX VOLT:4.9VUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Stick mode« option in the multi-function menu: Joystick settingSetting stick mode 1 through 4Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Tri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444This menu, adapted for helicopter models, permits the four digital trim wheels to be set and their trim effects to be assigned, selectively, as a "deceleration" factor to control functions 1 through 4.The desired line can be reached by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the appropriate function ﬁ eld has been selected and then the center SET key of the right touch pad is touched brieﬂ y, the ﬁ eld will appear in inverse video and the desired setting can be made with the selection keys of the right touch pad.TrimThese setting variations are conﬁ gured to accommodate the needs of helicopter models, which is why the following alternative options are available for the "Thr." line:Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Tri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444"Thr trim": (throttle limit) C1 trimming operates as idle trimming when the "throttle limit" function regulates the motor for starting, see »Control adjust« menu, page 117."Throttle AR": (Throttle Autorotation) C1 trim operates as idle trim exclusively in the «Autorot» ﬂ ight phase. This makes it possible to assign a principle (ﬁ xed) preset AR throttle position in the »Helicopter mixer«menu, page 176, e.g. during autorotation practice with the trim wheel "varied". A simultaneous tap on the cd or efkeys of the right touch pad (CLEAR)will reset the option back to "Thr trim"."Pitch": Due to internal coupling, C1 trimming acts equally on all pitch servos available without inﬂ uencing the throttle servo.On the other hand, the trim effects of respective digital trim controls for the lines "Roll", "Pitch ax" and "Tail rot." can be switched over from "Gobal" to "Phase" and vice versa.

107Detail program description - Joystick setting | HelicoptersThr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Tri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sPhase 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444"Global": The position of the respective trim wheel is effective "globally" for all ﬂ ight-phases programmed for the given model, page 140."Phase": The position of the respective trim wheel is effective on a phase-speciﬁ c basis and will be automatically stored upon change of ﬂ ight phase so that the setting is again available following a return to this ﬂ ight phase.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to "Global".Trim stepsThe four digital trim wheels shift the neutral point of the respective joystick in the given direction by one adjustable increment, as set here, for each "click". This is where the increment size (step) can be adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel.After selecting the "Tr. step" column and the desired trim control with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry ﬁ eld will be framed.Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Tri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sPhase 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired value, between 0 and 10, with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For example:Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Tri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sPhase 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4404A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to the active ﬁ eld back to "4".TimeThe rate of control signal change with respect to the speed of joystick motion can be inﬂ uenced by the entries made in the "– time +" column. Each joystick movement direction, i.e. joystick control channels 1 through 4, can be set individually. This means that respective servos will then follow rapid control position changes only at an accordingly delayed rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control signal and therefore also commensurately on any servos controlled by the effected controls.The time can be programmed symmetrically for both sides or separate for each control direction. This setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In this latter case, the given stick control is to be moved to the respective side so that the inverse video ﬁ eld will switch between sides to the one for which the change is to be made. Example:All three servos are to be actuated for swashplate pitch control, e g. a "Pitch" control movement for a "3Sv (2Roll)" swashplate. However, travel for the middle servo is greater than that of the other two servos on the shorter lever.A rash "Pitch" control movement would not operate the nick servo in the middle as quickly as it would the two roll servos on the shorter lever. This would cause a momentary control motion in the "nick" direction. However, if response time for the "pitch" control function were to be reduced by at least the positioning time for the servo in the middle then all three servos would reach their proper positions at the same time. The necessary delay times typically amount to only a few tenths of a second. For example:Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Tri m4.4sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sPhase 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4404A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to the active ﬁ eld back to "0.0 s".

108 Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models Control adjust Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignmentUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Control adjust« option in the multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeTap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalIn addition to the two joysticks for control functions 1 to 4 and their trim wheels, the mc-20 HoTT transmitter also has other controls as standard equipment:two 3-way switches•two 2-way switches•two unlockable 2-way switches•two self-restoring 2-way switches•three proportional sliders on the middle console, •designated SR 1 … 3 in the menutwo side-mounted "rotary sliders", designated SD1 •and 2 in the menutwo depressible "rotary controls", designated DG2 •and 4 in the menuthree roller-shaped rotary controls, designated as •DG1, DG3 and DG5 in the menuIn contrast to the two joysticks which, when initialized for a new model memory as a "Winged aircraft" model type will already be conﬁ gured to operate the servos connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4, these "other" operating elements initially remain inactive. Thus, at least in the system's delivered state – as already mentioned on page 68 – or even after initialization of a new model memory with an "aircraft" model type and its "binding" to the receiver intended for installation, only those servos connected to the two joysticks by way of receiver outputs 1 … 4 are able to be operated; any servos which may be connected to receiver outputs 5 … 16 will initially remain inactive in their middle positions.While this may appear a bit awkward at ﬁ rst glance … this is the only way to ensure a completely free selection from among "additional" operating elements while, at the same time, not requiring the "deactivation" of unused operating elements. This is becausethe only way to ensure an unused operating element can have no effect on the model, even if operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i.e. not assigned to any function.All of the aforementioned operating elements can be freely assigned in this »Control adjust« menu, see page 54, to any function input just to accommodate personal requirements. Equally, this also means that each of these operating elements can also be assigned to to multiple functions at the same time, as needed. For example: the exact same toggle switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the same time, also have an assignment in the »Timers (general)« menu as an "On/Off" switch, etc.Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to globalor ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c operation if they have been deﬁ ned for ﬂ ight-phases in the »Phase settings«menu, page 142, and »Phase assignment« menu, page 148. The names assigned to given ﬂ ight phases then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display line, e.g. «Normal».Basic procedureUse the 1. cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input, "I5 … I16". If necessary, use the 2. ef selection keys of the left or right touch pad to change to the desired column.Brieﬂ y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown highlighted.Operate the chosen operating element or set the 4. desired value with the selection keys of the right touch pad.Brieﬂ y tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete data entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6. cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value. Column 2, "TYP"Similar to the previously described »Stick mode«menu, this column can be used to deﬁ ne whether further settings for the given input are to have a "GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-speciﬁ c)" effect. Do this by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input 5 through 16 in the column labeled "TYP". 0% +100%I5I6I7EITYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal

109Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models"GL": The settings for the input in question affect all ﬂ ight phases programmed (if any) and thus act "globally" on the model memory in question."PH": The settings for this input take effect per ﬂ ight phase and must therefore be conﬁ gured separately for each ﬂ ight phase.Note:See page 140 for more information about ﬂ ight phases.Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch assignment"Select an input, 5 through 16, with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Transmitter control assignment Use the selection keys to move into the column labeled SEL. After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown below will appear in the display:0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalMove desiredcontrol adj.Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The notice window will disappear and the designation of the selected transmitter control will appear in the transmitter control assignment window.0% +100%I5I6I7EITYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalAlternatively, the center SET key of the right touch pad can be tapped for a second time while the notice window, see above, is still on the display:0% +100%I5I6I7EITYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalNow use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input out of the list if the respective plug-in location on the transmitter board is occupied or switch the entry to "fr" if the input is to be decoupled from a transmitter control. In this case, or even when a non-existent transmitter control is assigned, the servo corresponding to this input will be in its neutral position and can only be controlled via mixers.0% +100%I5I6I7EITYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal Switch assignment If the input is to be actuated like a switch module, the input can alternatively be assigned to a switch.A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth between two limit values, for example motor On/Off.A 2-way momentary or toggle switch, see appendix, achieves the same effect as a 2-channel switch module, for example motor Off/Half/Full. Use the selection keys to move into the column above the switch symbol label. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the option for assigning a switch.0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGL---frfrfr---------OffsetGL frNormalMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Actuate the desired toggle switch from its "OFF" to its "ON" position or, for a 3-way switch, beginning from its middle position, assign a switch direction – preferably the "second" direction. This means, if a function is to be switched on by moving the switch forward two positions, i.e. away from the pilot, then begin from the switch's middle position and move the switch away from the pilot. The display will then present the switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction. At the same time, the column label in the footer line will change from SEL into another switch symbol.

110 Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGL ---Normal7Now put the 3-way switch back into its middle position. Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into the column labeled with the new switch symbol, brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then assign the switch's other switch direction by once again starting from the middle position but this time move the switch in the other direction.The display will now present the given switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction.0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78 Erasing a transmitter control or switch assignmentA simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) while on an input line with an active transmitter control or switch assignment – see above ﬁ gures – will reset the given input back to "fr" and "---".Tips:When assigning switches, pay attention to the •desired switching direction and also that all unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to "free". This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused controls cannot cause malfunctions.The travel setting described below allows the •appropriate end state to be established for an assigned switch. Column 4, "Offset"The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -125 % and +125 %.0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %". Column 5, "– travel +"This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ±125 % of normal servo travel.Select an input, 5 through 16, with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad.To set symmetric travel, i.e. control-side independent travel, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a position in which the travel setting will be covered on both sides by the marker frame.0% +100%E5E6E7E8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– Weg + –Zeit+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78To set asymmetric travel, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be moved to the side to be set such that the marker frame only includes the value to be changed.0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78The value setting is activated by brieﬂ y touching the center SET key of the right touch pad. The value ﬁ eld/s will be displayed in inverse video. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.0% +111%I5I6I7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78

111Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models0% +88%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.Negative and positive parameter values are possible in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction or effect.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to "+100 %".Important:In contrast to servo travel settings, changing the control travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer and coupling inputs, i.e. any and all servos actuated by the given transmitter control. Column 6, "–time+"Each of the function inputs 5 … 16 can be assigned a symmetrical or asymmetric time delay of between 0 and 9.9 s.Move the marker frame to the right beyond the column labeled "– travel +" with the f selection key of the left or right touch pad.To set a symmetric, i.e. control-side independent, time delay, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a position in which the time setting is covered on both sides by the marker frame.0% +111%I5I6I7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78To set an asymmetric time delay, move the given transmitter control (proportional control or switch) as necessary to the side to be set such that only the value to be changed is covered.0% +111%I5I6I7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate value setting. The value ﬁ eld will be displayed in inverse video. Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to change the value in a range of 0.0 to 9.9 s.Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0.

112 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters Control adjustBasic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignmentUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Control adjust« option in the multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeTap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetI15 GL 0% +100%+100%0.0 0.0fr ---………………………Tl16 GL 0% +100%+100%0.0 0.0Lv1 ---In addition to the two joysticks for control functions 1 to 4 and their trim wheels, the mc-20 HoTT transmitter also has other controls as standard equipment:two 3-way switches•two 2-way switches•two unlockable 2-way switches•two self-restoring 2-way switches•three proportional sliders on the middle console, •designated SR 1 … 3 in the menutwo side-mounted "rotary sliders", designated SD1 •and 2 in the menutwo depressible "rotary controls", designated DG2 •and 4 in the menuthree roller-shaped rotary controls, designated as •DG1, DG3 and DG5 in the menu In contrast to the two joysticks which, even for a newly initialized "Helicopter" model type will automatically use the servos attached to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and 6, the aforementioned "other" operating elements – except for the standard assignment of servo 6 to the right-side proportional slider, designated in this menu as SD1 (throttle limiter) – are initially inactive. One of the effects of this is that (as already mentioned on page 68) with a factory-fresh system – as with a newly initialized model memory for a "Helicopter" model type following its "binding" to the intended receiver – only those servos connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and – depending on the position of the throttle limiter – servo 6 can be moved by the two joysticks. Any servos connected to plug-in locations 5 and 7 through 15, on the other hand, will simply remain at their center positions.While this may appear a bit awkward at ﬁ rst glance … this is the only way to ensure a completely free selection from among "additional" operating elements while, at the same time, not requiring the "deactivation" of unused operating elements. This is becausethe only way to ensure an unused operating element can have no effect on the model, even if operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i.e. not assigned to any function.All of the aforementioned operating elements can be freely assigned in this »Control adjust« menu, see page 54, to any function input just to accommodate personal requirements. Equally, this also means that each of these operating elements can also be assigned to to multiple functions at the same time, as needed. For example: the exact same toggle switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the same time, also have an assignment in the »Timers (general)« menu as an "On/Off" switch, etc.Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to globalor ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c operation if they have been deﬁ ned for ﬂ ight-phases in the »Phase settings«menu, page 142, and »Phase assignment« menu, page 148. The names assigned to given ﬂ ight phases then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display line, e.g. «Normal».Note:As a rule, input 6 must kept "free" for a helicopter model. On this, see "Throttle" on the next double page.Basic procedureUse the 1. cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 … 15 or Tl16. If necessary, use the 2. ef selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired column.Brieﬂ y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown highlighted.Operate the chosen operating element or set the 4. desired value with the selection keys of the right touch pad.Brieﬂ y tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete data entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6. cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value.

113Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicoptersin its neutral position and can only be controlled via mixers.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7E8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal Switch assignment If the input is to be actuated like a switch module, the input can alternatively be assigned to a switch.A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth between two limit values, for example motor On/Off.A 2-way momentary or toggle switch, see appendix, achieves the same effect as a 2-channel switch module, for example motor Off/Half/Full. Use the selection keys to move into the column above the switch symbol label. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the option for assigning a switch.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGL---frfrfr---------OffsetGL frNormalMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Actuate the desired toggle switch from its "OFF" to its "ON" position or, for a 3-way switch, beginning from its middle position, assign a switch direction – preferably the "second" direction. This means, if a function is to be switched on by moving the switch forward two positions, i.e. away from the pilot, then begin from the switch's middle position and move the switch away from the pilot. Column 2, "typ"Similar to the previously described »Stick mode«menu, this column can be used to deﬁ ne whether further settings for the given input are to have a "GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-speciﬁ c)" effect. Do this by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input 5 through 16 in the column labeled "TYP".0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7E8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal"GL": The settings for the input in question affect all ﬂ ight phases programmed (if any) and thus act "globally" on the model memory in question."PH": The settings for this input take effect per ﬂ ight phase and must therefore be conﬁ gured separately for each ﬂ ight phase.Note:See page 142 for more information about ﬂ ight phases.Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch assignment"Using the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select an input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 … 15 or Tl16. Transmitter control assignmentUse the selection keys to move into the column labeled SEL. After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown below will appear in the display:0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalMove desiredcontrol adj.Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The notice window will disappear and the designation of the selected transmitter control will appear in the transmitter control assignment window.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7E8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalAlternatively, the center SET key of the right touch pad can be tapped for a second time while the notice window, see above, is still on the display:0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7E8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalNow use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input out of the list if the respective plug-in location on the transmitter board is occupied or switch the entry to "fr" if the input is to be decoupled from a transmitter control. In this case, or even when a non-existent transmitter control is assigned, the servo corresponding to this input will be

114 Detail program description - Control adjust | HelicoptersThe display will then present the switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction. At the same time, the column label in the footer line will change from SEL into another switch symbol.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGL ---Normal7Now put the 3-way switch back into its middle position. Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into the column labeled with the new switch symbol, brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then assign the switch's other switch direction by once again starting from the middle position but this time move the switch in the other direction.The display will now present the given switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) while on an input line with an active transmitter switch assignment – see above ﬁ gure – will reset the input back to "fr" and "---".Tips:When assigning switches, pay attention to the •desired switching direction and also that all unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to "free". This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused controls cannot cause malfunctions.The travel setting described below allows the •appropriate end state to be established for an assigned switch. Column 4, "offset"The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -125 % and +125 %.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %". Column 5, "–travel+"This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ±125 % of normal servo travel.Use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select an input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 … 15 or Tl16.To set symmetric travel, i.e. control-side independent, put the respective operating element (proportional control or switch) into a position where the marker frame encloses both sides of the travel setting.0% +88%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (proportional control or switch) is to be moved to the side to be set such that the marker frame only encloses the value to be changed.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate value setting. The value ﬁ eld is shown highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.0% +111%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78

115Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters Thr60% +88%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78In principle, the helicopter program also permits the individual inputs to be assigned to any existing transmitter control (proportional controls and switches).However, please note here that some of the inputs available on this menu are already assigned to helicopter-speciﬁ c functions, and therefore cannot be re-assigned in this way.Nevertheless, the receiver layout on page 65 indicates that the throttle servo or the speed controller of an electrically-powered helicopter must be connected to receiver output "6", since control channel "6" is reserved for motor power regulation.Unlike a ﬁ xed-wing model aircraft, the throttle servo or speed controller is not directly controlled by the joystick or other transmitter control but rather by a complex mixer system, see »Helicopter mixer« menu beginning page 176. Furthermore, the "Throttle limit function" described on the next page also inﬂ uences this mixer system.Assigning a transmitter control or switch on the "Throttle" line, or to its supplementary control signal, would unnecessarily "confuse" this complex mixer system. For this reason the "Throttle" input MUST be left "free".0% +88%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.Negative and positive parameter values are possible in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction or effect.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to "+100 %".Important:In contrast to altering servo travel, changing the control travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer and coupling inputs, i.e. any and all servos that could be actuated by the transmitter controls concerned. Column 6, "– time +"Each of the function inputs, I5 … 16, can be assigned a symmetric or asymmetric time delay of between 0 and 9.9 s.Move the marker frame to the right beyond the column labeled "– travel +" with the f selection key of the left or right touch pad.To set a symmetric time delay, i.e. control-side independent, move the affected transmitter control (proportional control or switch) as necessary to a position such that the marker frame encloses both sides of the time setting.0% +111%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78To set an asymmetric time delay, move the affected operating element (transmitter control or switch) as necessary to a position such that the marker frame encloses only the value to be changed.0% +111%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate value setting. The value ﬁ eld is shown highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0.

116 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters " Gyr7"0% +88%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature inﬁ nitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but also offer a choice of two separate types of gain mode on the transmitter. If the gyro in use also has this feature then this menu option provides the opportunity to specify both a "normal" gyro effect as well as a "heading-lock mode" in the "Offset" column within a range of ±125 %. Such a speciﬁ cation can include a certain effect to ﬂ y normal, slow ﬂ ights with maximum stability or the reduction of the gyro effect for fast circuit ﬂ ights and aerobatics.To proceed as described above, use ﬂ ight phase switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro" line.Important notice:The value of this option is identical to the offset value set in the "Gyro offset" option of the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 185. For this reason, any changes made always affect the other menu directly, and vice versa.Beginning with these preset – static – ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c settings, a transmitter control assigned to the "Gyr7" line, for example one of the middle console sliders, can be used to vary the gyro effect around the respective "offset point". The center point of the control corresponds to the setting speciﬁ ed by the offset. If the transmitter control is moved from this center point in the direction of full travel, gyro gain increases proportionally; it diminishes when moved in the opposite direction. This provides a fast and straightforward method of adjusting gyro effect even in ﬂ ight – e.g. to suit changing weather conditions – or to test-ﬂ y optimal settings. Furthermore, the range of the gyro's effect within transmitter control travel in both directions can be restricted by software. In this context, be sure to comply with the instructions accompanying the gyro, otherwise there is a risk the helicopter will be impossible to ﬂ y.Adjusting the gyro sensorTo achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the vertical axis, observe the following:The controls should have as little friction and •"play" as possible.There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.•Use a strong and – in particular – a fast servo. •When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the faster its response – a corresponding corrective change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causing the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be made – either by using the default value under "Gyro" or the associated transmitter control – to eliminate the oscillation.If the model is ﬂ ying forward at high speed or hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing effect of the vertical ﬁ n combined with the gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, make use of the option to adapt gyro effect with one of the transmitter's proportional controls.

117Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicoptersnot only provides a convenient means to start and stop the motor but may also prove to be more than an insigniﬁ cant safety improvement! For example, just imagine what could happen if, while carrying the helicopter to the take-off site with the motor running, the C1 joystick were to be inadvertently operated … If the carburetor or speed controller is open too far when the transmitter is switched on, an audible warning will be sounded and the basic display will show the message:Throttle too high!Tip:Take advantage of the »Servo display« to observe the inﬂ uence of the throttle limit control. The »Servo display« screen can be reached from almost any menu position with a simultaneous tap on the efselection keys of the left touch pad, Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mc-20 HoTT! Basic idle settingPut the throttle limit into its "full throttle" position by pushing the throttle limit regulator – by default, the right side proportional slider SD1 – all the way to its forward position limit. Set the throttle/pitch joystick to the maximum pitch position and also check the sub-menu "Channel 1 CURVE" of the menu …»Helicopter mixer« (page 176 … 191)… to ensure that a standard throttle curve is active. If, for example, the standard throttle curve has already been changed following the initialization of a model memory then this must be at least temporarily reset to the values "Point L = -100 %", "Point 1 = 0 %" and "Point H = +100 %":"Tl16"The proportional slider SD1, mounted on the right side of the transmitter, is assigned by default to input "Tl16".0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16TYP+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------OffsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---SETThis pre-assignment makes it unnecessary to program the two ﬂ ight phases as may be familiar from use of other remote control systems – one "with idle-up" and one "without idle-up" – because the mc-20HoTT program offers a much more ﬂ exible approach to ﬁ ne-tuning and optimizing increases to system rotational speed below the hover point than the so-called "idle-up". If it is nevertheless preferable for the helicopter to be programmed "with idle-up", then deactivate the "throttle limit" function described below by setting input "Tl16" to "fr". Meaning and application of "throttle limit"As already mentioned under "Throttle", and in contrast to ﬁ xed-wing models, the power output of a helicopter's drive system is not controlled directly with the C1 joystick, but only indirectly via the throttle curve settings in the »Helicopter mixer« menu or – if the model features a speed controller – via that mechanism.Note:Of course for different ﬂ ight phases, ﬂ ight phase programming can be used to set individual throttle curves.Nevertheless, both methods of output control de facto result in the helicopter carburetor never approaching Throttle limit functionanything near its idle speed under "normal" ﬂ ight conditions, and that the motor can therefore neither be started or stopped cleanly without some other means of intervention. The "throttle limit" feature resolves this problem elegantly by using a separate transmitter control – by default the SD1 proportional slider mounted on the right side of the transmitter – to limit the throttle servo or the output level of a speed controller. In this way, it is possible to "throttle back" with the throttle limit control, even as far as the idle setting, at which point the trim control for the throttle/pitch joystick takes over or directly shuts off an electric drive. Conversely, the throttle servo or speed controller can only open up to its full-throttle position if the throttle limit control has also released the full servo travel path.The value set on the (right-hand) plus side of the "travel" column must therefore always be set high enough to ensure that the maximum setting of the throttle limit control never restricts the full-throttle position achievable with throttle curve settings – which typically means setting a value in the range +100 % to 125 %. 0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16TYP+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +125%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------OffsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---SETThe value on the (left-hand) minus side of the "travel" column should be set so that the throttle limit control can safely cut off an electric drive or close a carburetor sufﬁ ciently to cut off a combustion motor in conjunction with – digital – C1 trim. Because of this, leave this value (initially) at +100 %.Furthermore, this variable "limitation" of throttle travel

118 Detail program description - Control adjust | HelicoptersChannel 1 CURVECurveoff PointOutputInput +100%+100%H+–100¼O U T P U T0%+100%Note:Since throttle trim has no effect if the throttle limiter is open, its position here is meaningless.Now – without starting the combustion motor – adjust the throttle servo, preferably mechanically and, if necessary, also by way of the servo 6 travel adjustment option in the »Servo adjustment« menu, so that the carburetor is completely open. Now close the throttle limiter completely by moving the side proportional slider all the way to its rear limit. Use the trim wheel of the Throttle/Pitch joystick to place the trim position marker into the motor OFF position or actuate the "Thr. CutOff" option, see page 90.Note:In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed, the position of the throttle/collective pitch stick is meaningless. It can therefore remain at the maximum collective pitch position so that, when adjusting carburetor linkages, the throttle limiter alone can be used to switch between full throttle (throttle limiter open) and "Motor OFF" (throttle limiter closed).Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the carburetor linkages so that the carburetor is (just) completely closed. Take extreme care to ensure that the throttle servo does not become mechanically blocked in either of its end positions (full throttle/motor OFF).To complete this basic conﬁ guration, the idle trim adjustment range must now be matched against point "L" on the throttle curve. Do this by setting Point "L" of the "Channel 1 CURVE" mixer, in the »Helicoptermixer« menu, to about -65 to -70 %.Channel 1 CURVECurveoff PointOutputInput –100%–66%L+–100¼O U T P U T0%–66%To conﬁ gure a smooth transition from the idle trim to the throttle curve exactly, the collective pitch stick should be moved to and fro slightly at its minimum position with the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully open. The throttle servo must not move as well! Any further adjustments to the throttle curve must of course be made later in ﬂ ight.The motor is always started with the throttle limiter fully closed, whereby idle is set exclusively by using the trim wheel of the throttle/pitch joystick and the motor is shut off by the "Thr. CutOff" option. Notes:Take advantage of the »• Servo display« to observe the inﬂ uence of the throttle limit control. The »Servo display« screen can be reached from almost any menu position with a simultaneous tap on the ef selection keys of the left touch pad, Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mc-20 HoTT!A servo connected to output 16 can be used, •independently of this, for other purposes by means of mixers, provided that this servo is decoupled from the operating element speciﬁ ed by function input 16 via the »Mix only channel«menu; see page 205.The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter •is shown as a horizontal bar in the throttle curve diagram on the second display page of the "Channel 1 CURVE" option in the »Helicoptermixer« menu (see page 180). The output signal for the throttle servo cannot be higher than the level set by the horizontal bar:Channel 1 CURVECurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100¼O U T P U T0%0%actualposition of theThrottle limiterThe above diagram shows precisely this scenario: in the above example, the throttle limit control is set to about -60 % and thus restricts the movement of the throttle servo to about -60 % of full travel.

119Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters Time delay for the throttle limiterTo safely prevent the carburetor from opening too rapidly, assign the throttle limiter input "Tl16" to a time delay that takes effect only in the direction of full throttle. This applies especially if the throttle limiter is controlled by a switch rather than, as preset, with the right-side proportional rotary slider.To set a delay time, push the throttle limit control to its forward limit or move the switch into its full-throttle position then use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the "–time+" column.0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16TYP+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------OffsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---0.0SETAfter a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selection keys of the left or right touch pad can be used to select the desired time delay, e.g. 5 seconds.0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16TYP+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------OffsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---5.0SETA brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will complete the entry.As already explained on page 106, when "Thr AR" is selected in the "Pitch/thr" line of the …»Stick mode« (page 106)Pitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Tri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444Thr AR… menu then digital trim of the throttle/pitch joystick is only active for the «Autorotation» ﬂ ight phase. As a consequence, the motor's idle speed cannot be regulated in the "normal" ﬂ ight phases with the C1 trim control. To ensure the availability of sufﬁ cient setting options, use of the "Expo throttle limiter" is recommended.The exponential curve characteristic offered by the …»Helicopter type« (page 98)Linearis. swashpl. noRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELExpo throttle lim. 0%… menu's sub-menu can be used to alter the control behavior of the throttle limit control such that the latter provides sufﬁ ciently sensitive regulation of the idle setting and can also stop the motor.In this case, with a completely closed throttle limiter – in contrast to the previously described setting – use the »Control adjust« menu set the "-" side of the column labeled "- travel +" for the "Tl16" Throttle limit in combination with "Thr AR" in the »Stick mode«menuline such that the throttle limiter fully closes the carburetor, i.e. the motor is safely switched off at this control position.Following this, move the throttle limit control to its center point and change the % value of the "Expo thro lim." line in the »Helicopter type« menu, page 98, until the carburetor is in a position suitable for starting the motor. Now start the motor, and adjust the value if necessary until the motor idles reliably in this throttle limit control position.The value for the plus side of the "- travel +" column should be increased, as described before, to +125 % so that the full-throttle position of the throttle servo is also reliably released from the throttle limiter.Finally, set an asymmetrical time delay of, say 4.0 seconds, so the motor also picks up speed gradually even if the side proportional slider is pushed forward too quickly. Select the time preset to correlate to how far the carburetor opens up at the minimum collective pitch position. The value set is to be optimized by testing.

120 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models Dual Rate / ExpoConﬁ gurable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudderUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu option in the Multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELThe Dual-Rate-/Expo function permits ﬂ ight-phase dependent switching and control over the deﬂ ection and characteristics of the aileron (Ail), elevator (Ele) and rudder (Rud) (control functions 2 … 4) by way of switches. The »Channel 1 curve« menu, see text beginning page 128, can be used to set an individual curve characteristic for control function 1 (throttle/brake) with up to 8 separately programmable points.Similar to control travel settings in the »Control adjust« menu, Dual Rate operates directly on the respective control function, independent of whether it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected via complex mixer and coupling functions. The control travel for each switch position can be set to between 0 and 125 % of normal full travel. Expo, on the other hand, enables ﬁ ner-grained control of the model for values larger than 0 % around the center position of the primary control function (aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting full movement at the end-points of joystick travel. For values less than 0 %, the reverse is true: control increases around the neutral position and diminishes towards the end-points. The degree of "progression" can therefore be set within a total range of -100 % to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the normal, linear control characteristics.Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, offer another application. This is because the actual control surface movement is not linear: as the rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control surface rate of travel over the control linkage continually decreases – depending on the position of the linkage point on the output disc. This effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater than 0 % such that rotational angle travel increases over-proportionally with increasing joystick throw.The Expo setting also affects the relevant control function directly, whether this controls a single servo or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and coupling functions.For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch assignment can be set up in any way desired, which therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages – particularly for very high-speed models.The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics directly. After selecting the appropriate line, the dotted vertical line will follow the movement of the respective joystick so a better evaluation of the transmitter-control-travel dependent curve value can be made.Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo settingsIf ﬂ ight phases are set up in the »Phase settings«and »Phase assignment« menus and each assigned a name,e.g. "Normal", the name in question will be displayed at the bottom left of the display. Just actuate the respective switch to switch between ﬂ ight phases.Basic procedureSwitch to the desired ﬂ ight phase then use the 1. cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired line: "Aileron", "Elevator" or "Rudder".Use the 2. ef selection keys of the left or right touch pad to change into the column labeled "EXPO".Tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown highlighted.Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 4. the desired value.Tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete the entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6. cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value.Dual Rate functionIf a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56).

121Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged modelsbottom edge of the display in order to separately change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video for each of the two switch positions.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%EXPOSEL3Normal111%0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%EXPOSEL3Normal88%At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video back to "100 %".Caution:For safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should not be less than 20 %.Some examples of Dual Rate values:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionDual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)NormalIf necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of "expanded switches".The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction.In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned in the »Control switch« menu, see page 135, and a logical switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.Whichever switch has been assigned … the respective switch will appear in the display together with a switch symbol indicating the switch's direction if actuated, e.g. in the «Normal» ﬂ ight phase.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSEL3NormalOnce the value ﬁ eld has been activated with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the Dual-Rate value column labeled SEL at the Exponential functionIf a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56).0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Normal3If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of "expanded switches".The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction.In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned in the »Control switch« menu, see page 135, and a logical switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.Whichever switch has been assigned … the respective switch appears on the display together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective direction when moved.

122 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal3Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the display marked with SEL and activate the value ﬁ eld with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selection keys on the left or right touch pad can now be used to alter the Expo value shown in the highlighted ﬁ eld, separately for each of the two switch positions.Now, for example, there is an opportunity to ﬂ y with a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one direction, and to preset a value other than 0 % for the other switch direction:+50%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal3At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the cd or efkeys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".Some examples of Expo values:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionExpo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals 100 %.Combining Dual Rate and ExpoIf values have been entered for both the Dual Rate and the Expo function, the effects of both functions will overlap, for example, as follows:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionExpo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and ExpoTo make an asymmetric setting, i.e. a Dual Rate or Expo setting dependent on the direction of the respective joystick, ﬁ rst access the »Control switch« menu and assign one of the C1 … C8 control switches – "C3", for example – to the desired transmitter control, e.g. control 3 for the elevator function. Do not change the switching point for the joystick's neutral position (0 %). Now return to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the corresponding control function ("Elevator" in this example). Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the switch assignment and change to the expanded switches then use the selection keys to move on to the previously deﬁ ned "C3" control switch.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––t–100%100%100%EXPOSELMoewünschten Schaltertoe die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)NormalControl/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C1 C3A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will conﬁ rm the assignment of this switch.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELG3NormalNow use one of the selection keys to move into the right column then move the elevator joystick into its appropriate end-point to enter a separate Dual Rate value for each direction, e.g. for "Up elevator" … 0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%77%100%EXPOSELG3Normal… and "Down elevator":

123Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%111%100%EXPOSELG3NormalThe vertical dashed line shows the current elevator joystick position.Set the Expo values as necessary in the same manner.

124 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters Dual Rate / ExpoConﬁ gurable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis, tail rotorUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu option in the Multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELThe Dual Rate / Expo function permits switching or controlling of control travels and characteristics for the control functions roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor, i.e. control functions 2 … 4; it is switch-driven and ﬂ ight-phase independent. An individual curve characteristic for control function 1 (motor/collective pitch), featuring up to 8 separately programmable points, can be set either in the »Channel 1 curve« menu or separately for throttle and pitch in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, see text beginning page 176 and 312.Similar to control travel settings in the »Control adjust« menu, Dual Rate operates directly on the respective control function, independent of whether it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected via complex mixer and coupling functions. The control travel for each switch position can be set to between 0 and 125 % of normal full travel. Expo, on the other hand, enables ﬁ ner-grained control of the model for values larger than 0 % around the center position of the primary control function (roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor), without forfeiting full movement at the end-points of joystick travel. For values less than 0 %, the reverse is true: control increases around the neutral position and diminishes towards the end-points. The degree of "progression" can therefore be set within a total range of -100 % to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the normal, linear control characteristics.Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, offer another application. This is because the actual control surface movement is not linear: as the rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control surface rate of travel over the control linkage continually decreases – depending on the position of the linkage point on the output disc. This effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater than 0 % such that rotational angle travel increases over-proportionally with increasing joystick throw.The Expo setting also affects the relevant control function directly, whether this controls a single servo or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and coupling functions.For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch assignment can be set up in any way desired, which therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages – particularly for very high-speed models.The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics directly. Once you select a menu line, the dotted vertical line follows the movement of the respective joystick, so you can clearly see the dependency of the curve value on the transmitter control.Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo settingsIf ﬂ ight phases are set up in the »Phase settings«and »Phase assignment« menus and each assigned a name,e.g. "Normal", the name in question will be displayed at the bottom left of the display. In this scenario, you can operate the corresponding switch to switch between ﬂ ight phases.Basic procedureSwitch to the desired ﬂ ight phase then use the 1. cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired line: "Roll", "Pitch ax" or "Tail rot".Use the 2. ef selection keys of the left or right touch pad to change into the column labeled "EXPO".Tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown highlighted.Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 4. the desired value.Tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete the entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6. cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value.Dual Rate functionIf a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56).

125Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | HelicoptersExponential functionIf a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56). 0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Normal3If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of "expanded switches".The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction.In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned in the »Control switch« menu, see page 119, and a logical switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.Whichever switch has been assigned … the respective switch appears on the display together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective direction when moved.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)NormalIf necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of "expanded switches".The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction.In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned in the »Control switch« menu, see page 119, and a logical switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.Whichever switch has been assigned … the respective switch will appear in the display together with a switch symbol indicating the switch's direction if actuated, e.g. in the «Normal» ﬂ ight phase.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSEL3NormalOnce the value ﬁ eld has been activated with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the Dual-Rate value column labeled SEL at the bottom edge of the display in order to separately change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video for each of the two switch positions.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%EXPOSEL3Normal111%0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%EXPOSEL3Normal88%At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video back to "100 %".Caution:For safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should not be less than 20 %.Some examples of Dual Rate values:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionDual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

126 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal3Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the display marked with SEL and activate the value ﬁ eld with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selection keys on the left or right touch pad can now be used to alter the Expo value shown in the highlighted ﬁ eld, separately for each of the two switch positions.Now, for example, you have the opportunity to ﬂ y with a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one direction, and to pre-set a value other than 0 % in the other switching direction:+50%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal3At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the cd or efkeys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".Some examples of Expo values:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionExpo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals 100 %.Combining Dual Rate and ExpoIf you have entered values for both the Dual Rate and the Expo function, the effect from on function is superimposed on the other, as shown in these examples:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionExpo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and ExpoTo make an asymmetric setting, i.e. a Dual Rate or Expo setting dependent on the direction of the respective joystick, ﬁ rst access the »Control switch« menu and assign one of the C1 … C4 control switches – "C3" for example – to the desired transmitter control, e.g. control 3 for the pitch function. Do not change the switching point for the joystick's neutral position (0 %). Now return to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the corresponding control function ("Pitch ax" in this example). Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the switch assignment and change to the expanded switches then use the selection keys to move on to the previously deﬁ ned "C3" control switch.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMoünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)NormalControl/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C1 C3A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will conﬁ rm the assignment of this switch.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELG3NormalNow use one of the selection keys to move into the right column then move the pitch-axis joystick to the appropriate end-point in order to enter a separate Dual Rate value for each direction, e.g. for "Pitch-axis up" … 0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%77%100%EXPOSELG3Normaland "Pitch-axis down":

127Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters0%0%0%RollNickTailDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%111%100%EXPOSELC3NormalThe vertical dashed line shows the current pitch axis joystick position. Set the Expo values as necessary in the same manner.

128 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models Channel 1 curveControl characteristics for throttle/spoiler joystickUsing the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, scroll to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option in the Multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100¼O U T P U T0%Since the carburetor response or the effect of the airbrakes or spoilers is often non-linear, you can make compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. The menu therefore enables you to change the control characteristics of the throttle / airbrake joystick, regardless of whether this control function affects the servo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers.If ﬂ ight phases have been speciﬁ ed in the »Phasesettings« and »Phase assignment« menus (see pages 142 and 148) this option can be adapted on a ﬂ ight-phase basis. The given ﬂ ight phase name, e.g. «normal», will be shown at the bottom left of the screen.The control curve can be deﬁ ned by up to 8 points (termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen graph considerably simpliﬁ es the process of setting and adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you set fewer reference points to begin with.In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points – namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick travel ("L", low = -100 % travel) and the top end of joystick travel ("H", high = +100 % travel) – deﬁ ne a linear characteristic curve.First, switch to your chosen ﬂ ight phase, if necessary. Setting reference pointsBy moving the transmitter control (throttle/airbrake joystick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The current joystick position is also displayed in numerical form on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point at which this line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125 % to +125 %. The control signal altered in this way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above, the joystick is at 0 % of control travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, since the characteristic curve is linear.Up to 6 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %.Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in the "Point" frame, then the next reference point can be set with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number and the value ﬁ eld to the right of the reference point number will be shown in inverse video.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%+50%2+–100¼O U T P U T1+50%Normal2The order in which you generate the (maximum) 6 reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. Erasing reference pointsTo delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its corresponding value on the "Point" line are displayed in inverse video, see ﬁ gure above, these can be erased with a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). Complete the operation with a brief tap on the center key ESC of the left touch pad. Changing reference point valuesMove the joystick into the range of the reference point that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 … 6 or "H" (high). The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. The reference point value displayed in inverse video can be changed in a range of -125 % to +125 % without inﬂ uencing the neighboring reference points.

129Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged modelsExample:Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–75%2+–100¼O U T P U T1–75%Normal2In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has been set to -75 %.Note:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position. Trim point function Alternatively, jumping through active reference points, in ascending or descending order, can be done with the ef selection keys of the left touch pad. Note that "active" reference points are those which have already been set. When a jump is made from one to another, the point value ﬁ eld for the jump's destination reference point in the screen's Point line will be displayed in inverse video and its position in the graph will be marked with the point's number (L, 1 … max. 6 and H) in inverse video and a small triangle. The selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–75%1+–100¼O U T P U T0% 2NormalTrim point1One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch pad terminates this trim point function. Trim offset function When a value ﬁ eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump to and change a reference point already set with the efselection keys of the left touch pad but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned with the cd keys of the left touch pad within a range of ±25%.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–50%2+–100¼O U T P U T–50%1NormalTrim offset2Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–100%2+–100¼O U T P U T–100%1NormalTrim offset2A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will also terminate this function. Trim x-axis function This function is activated by tapping the left (e) or right (f) selection key of the right touch pad with an active (i.e. inverse video) value ﬁ eld. You can then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–83%2+–100¼O U T P U T–100%1NormalTrim X-axis2Notes:If the point is repositioned horizontally further •away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line Point. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signiﬁ es that a further point can be set at the current control position.Please note that the percentage value on the •"Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point. Smoothing the Channel 1 curveIn the example below, sample reference points have been set: reference point 1 to 0 %,reference point 2 to +25 % andreference point 3 to -75 %as described in the last section.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100¼O U T P U T0%23Normal1This "jagged" curve proﬁ le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button.

130 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged modelsDo this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief tap on the d selection key of the left touch pad. This will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) on" (or vice versa).Channel 1 C U R V ECurveon PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100¼O U T P U T0%Normal231Note:The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real throttle or airbrake curves. A speciﬁ c application example can be found in the programming examples on page 274.

131Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopters Channel 1 curveControl characteristics for throttle/collective pitch stickUsing the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, scroll to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option in the Multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100¼O U T P U T0%Since the carburetor response or the effect of collective pitch is often non-linear, you can make compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. The menu therefore enables modiﬁ cation of the control characteristics of the motor/collective pitch joystick, regardless of whether this control function affects the servo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers.If ﬂ ight phases have been speciﬁ ed in the »Phasesettings« and »Phase assignment« menus (see pages 142 and 148) this option can be adapted on a ﬂ ight-phase basis. The given ﬂ ight phase name, e.g. «normal», will be shown at the bottom left of the screen.The control curve can be deﬁ ned by up to 8 points (termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen graph considerably simpliﬁ es the process of setting and adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you set fewer reference points to begin with.Please note that the curve characteristic you set here acts as the input signal for speciﬁ c mixers in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 176.»Heli-Mixer«C1 ¼C1¼ Tail rotorC-1-curve PitchThrPitch-stickIn the basic software set-up, 2 reference points–namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick travel ("L", low = -100 % travel) and the top end of joystick travel ("H", high = +100 % travel)–deﬁ ne a linear characteristic curve.First, switch to your chosen ﬂ ight phase, if necessary. Setting reference pointsBy moving the transmitter control (motor/collective pitch stick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The current joystick position is also displayed in numerical form on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point at which this line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125 % to +125 %. The control signal altered in this way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above, the joystick is at 0 % of control travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, since the characteristic curve is linear.Up to 6 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %. Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in the "Point" frame, then the next reference point can be set with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number and the value ﬁ eld to the right of the reference point number will be shown in inverse video.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%+50%2+–100¼O U T P U T1+50%Normal2The order in which you generate the (maximum) 8 reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. Erasing reference pointsTo delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its associated value is shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above), following activation of the value ﬁ eld on the "Point" line now in inverse video with a simultaneous tap on thecd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) it can be erased. Complete the operation with a brief tap on the center key ESC of the left touch pad. Changing reference point valuesMove the joystick into the range of the reference point that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 … 6 or "H" (high). The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. Activate the value ﬁ eld with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The point value ﬁ eld is now highlighted and can be set within

132 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicoptersthe range -125 % to +125 %, and without inﬂ uencing the neighboring reference points.Example:Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–75%2+–100¼O U T P U T1–75%Normal2In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has been set to -75 %.Note:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position. Trim point function Alternatively, jumping through set reference points can be done with the ef selection keys of the left touch pad in either ascending or descending order, whereby the number of the jump's destination reference point in the graph will be marked with the point's number, 1 … max. 6, in inverse video. The selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–75%1+–100¼O U T P U T0% 2NormalTrim point1One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch pad terminates this trim point function. Trim offset function When a value ﬁ eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump to and change a reference point already set with the efselection keys of the left touch pad but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned with the cd keys of the left touch pad within a range of ±25%.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–50%2+–100¼O U T P U T–50%1NormalTrim offset2Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–100%2+–100¼O U T P U T–100%1NormalTrim offset2A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will also terminate this function. Trim x-axis function This function is activated by tapping the left (e) or right (f) selection key of the right touch pad with an active (i.e. inverse video) value ﬁ eld. You can then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–83%2+–100¼O U T P U T–100%1NormalTrim X-axis2Notes:If the point is repositioned horizontally further •away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line Point. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signiﬁ es that a further point can be set at the current control position.Please note that the percentage value on the •"Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point. Smoothing the Channel 1 curveIn the example below, sample reference points have been set: reference point 1 to 0 %,reference point 2 to +25 % andreference point 3 to -75 %as described in the last section.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100¼O U T P U T0%23Normal1This "jagged" curve proﬁ le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button.

133Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | HelicoptersDo this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief tap on the d selection key of the left touch pad. This will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) on" (or vice versa).Channel 1 C U R V ECurveon PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100¼O U T P U T0%Normal231Note:The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real throttle curves. For real-world application examples, see the programming examples on pages 274 and 313.

134 Detail program description - Switch display Switch displayDisplaying switch positionsUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Switch display« option in the multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.SwitchContrl1C1 C2 C3 C8234567891011 12 13 14 15 16switchC4 C5 C6 C7This feature is used to check the functions and give an overview of switches 1 … 16 and the programmable control switches C1… C8.If a switch is pressed, the switch number is revealed by one of the display items changing from an OFF to an ON symbol (or vice versa). To improve the legibility of this screen, a closed switch ﬁ eld is also shown in inverse video (i.e. on a dark background).For control switches C1 … C8, activation of the corresponding transmitter control – which must have been previously assigned on the »Control switch«menu – will reveal the control switch number and direction.Note:Switch numbering 1 to 16 as shown here corresponds to the labeling of switch plug-in locations on the transmitter's circuit board. The numbering of the switches has no effect on the programming of the transmitter, however.

135Detail program description - Control switches Control switchesProgramming the control switchesUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Control switch« option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displaySuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeControl switch Logical switchServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch DisplaySuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter typeControl switch Logical switchOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHGeb. 1Geb. 10%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreefreefreeWith many functions, it makes sense not to trigger their actuation by using one of the normal switches, but to trigger them automatically by the speciﬁ c, freely programmable position of a transmitter control or joystick.Typical applications:On/Off switching of an on-board glow plug in •conjunction with the carburetor setting and/or motor speed. (The glow plug heater switch for this will be controlled by a transmitter-side mixer.)Switching a stopwatch on or off to measure the •simple running time of electric motorsAutomated switch-off of a combi "aileron •¼ rudder" mixer when extending the airbrakes, e.g. so as to match the bank attitude of the model to the ground slope when landing on a ridge, without the direction of ﬂ ight also being affected by the rudder (if the mixer were active).Lowering landing ﬂ aps, adjusting elevator trim •and/or executing speciﬁ c Dual Rate, Exponential and Differential switchings when coming in to land, as soon as the throttle joystick is moved beyond the switching point. If required, a control switch can be overridden using a separately assigned switch in the 5th column.The mc-20 HoTT program is equipped with a total of eight so-called control switches ("C1" to "C8").Accordingly, anywhere where switches can be assigned you have the option not only of using the 16 possible transmitter switches, but also of choosing and assigning one of the "C1" … "C8" control switches from the list of expanded switches – as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.Furthermore, combining a control switch with an additional switch (as described later) also permits more complex switching permutations.Basic procedure:If no transmitter control is assigned, the 1. corresponding input ﬁ eld of the column labeled SEL (second column from the left) will be empty.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch 2. pad to select the line for the desired control switch (1 to 8).Brieﬂ y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad.Move your selected transmitter control.4. The associated transmitter control number appears in the input ﬁ eld of the column above the left switch icon.Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 5. to move to the right into the column labeled STO.Move the transmitter control to the desired switching 6. point then brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to save the switching point.Complete the remaining settings such as 7. switching direction, etc.Exit from the menu with a tap on the center 8. ESCkey of the left touch pad. Assigning a transmitter control to a control switchUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, select your chosen line (1 to 8). Following a ﬁ nal tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the control assignment, the message shown below will appear in the display:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHGeb. 10%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freifreefreefrei Move desiredcontrol adj.For example, the right-side proportional slider is now to be assigned to control switch "C1", the default throttle limiter for a helicopter model memory. So just move this control in any direction. As soon as this is detected, the control name appears on the display:

136 Detail program description - Control switchesSEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free0%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeResetting a control switch back to "free"To reset a control switch back to "free", make sure the display is as below …SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free0%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeMove desiredcontrol adj.… then, with a brief simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the entry for a control will be erased. Deﬁ ning the switching pointUsing the f selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame into the column labeled STO (store).Move the selected transmitter control to the position at which the switching point, i.e. the switch between OFF/ON, should trigger and brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current position is displayed, for example "+85 %":SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free+85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeThe switching point can be altered at any time with another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Note:Do not, however, set a switching point at a transmitter control's travel end-point, since this makes reliable switching impossible. If a 2-way or 3-way switch is used to operate a control switch, the switch point should be programmed in advance with one of the transmitter's proportional controls.First, assign the corresponding proportional control in the 2nd column and set the switching point in such a way that will ensure the subsequent conﬁ guration for the 2-way or 3-way switch will reliably exceed this value. If you do not, the switching function will be unreliable, since the control switch triggers only if a value unambiguously fails to meet or exceeds the value set! To complete the procedure, cancel the transmitter control assignment then assign the 2-way or 3-way switch. Setting the switching directionThe switching direction of the control switch is changed as required in the 4th column. Use the fselection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame into the column labeled SEL (select). Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the switch direction can by changed back-and-forth between "normal" and "reversed" with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad.SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free+85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeSEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free+85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeA simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the switch direction back to "=>".The current switch position of the control switch is displayed in the leftmost column by the switch icon next to the number of the control switch.Notes:In this example control switch"C1" is open as long •as transmitter control "Lever 1" (the throttle limiter for a helicopter) is less than +85 % of control travel. It closes once the switching point is exceeded, i.e. by a value over +85 % and up to the upper limit.In the above example with the switching direction •reversed, control switch "C1" remains closed while the transmitter control is at less than +85 % of full travel. As soon as the switching point is exceeded, in this example a value between +85 % and the upper travel end-point , "C3" will open.If a control switch – e.g. "C1" – has multiple •assignments, you should bear in mind that the switching direction set here applies to all C3 switches.

137Detail program description - Control switchesThe switch state can also be inverted by reversing •the control in the »Control adjust« menu. Combining a control switch with a switchThe control switch can be overridden by a further switch, so that e.g. in certain ﬂ ight situations the function to be triggered can be activated independently of the control position and thus the position of the control switch.Change to the value ﬁ eld in the 5th column, the column above the rightmost switch symbol. In the simplest case, select one of the switches mounted in the two switch panels, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56. The number of this switch, e.g. "10", appears on the display in the next-to-the last column at the right, together with a switch icon indicating the switch's current state.While this switch is open, the "C1" control switch is active, i.e. it triggers at the switching point; if the switch is closed, the control switch now remains permanently closed as well, independently of the control position and switching direction:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free+85%STO––––––10SELC1C2C3C4freefreeCombining two control switchesFor more complex applications, however, it can prove necessary to override this control switch with a second control switch.Example:Control switch "C1" will now be assigned to control function 3 (= control 3) instead of its previous assignment "Lever1". The switching point is at its center point, i.e. at 0 %. The switch chosen in the next-to-the-last right column is "C2" from the list of expanded switches. This "C2" control switch will now be allocated in its own line to the middle proportional slider "Slide2", whose switch-point is +50 % liege:SEL+50%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHCnt. 1Slide20%STO––––––C2SELC1C2C3C4freefreeThe switching directions indicated in the fourth column from the left will now show control switch "C2" as being closed as long as joystick (control 3) and/or "Slide 2" are located on the other side of their switch-points.This diversity of switching options certainly offers you enough scope for specialized applications to suit any type of model..

138 Detail program description - Logical switches Logical switchesProgramming logical switchesUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Control switch« option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displaySuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeControl switch Logical switchServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch DisplaySuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter typeControl switch Logical switchOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.ANDANDANDL1L2L3–––L4LOGICAL SWITCHESAND–––––––––SELL1L2L3L4––––––––––––These functions permit two switches, control switches and/or logical switches or any combination of these to be combined with one another to create logical "AND" and "OR" functionality. A total of 8 logical switches, "L1 … L8" can be programmed.The result of such a logical switch function – shown in the display's rightmost column – can be used as another switch function. Allocation of a switch to a logical function is done in the familiar manner in the columns labeled by the two switch symbols, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page56. That is, by moving the respective switch from OFF to ON or, after a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, by selecting one of the expanded switches with the selection keys.UNDUNDANDL1L2L3–––L4LOGICAL SWITCHESUND–––––––––SELL1L2L3L4––––––––––––Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)UNDUNDUNDL1L2L3–––L4LOGICAL SWITCHESUND–––––––––SELG1G2G3L4––––––––––––Mowünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C1 C3Potential applications for this:Multiple functions, which are normally independent •of one another, are to be put into a deﬁ ned state by way of an »Emergency switch«.The establishment of dependencies for initiating a •switch-on warning, see »Basic settings, model«menu."AND" / "OR"Once a given value ﬁ eld has been activated in the column labeled SEL, the "AND" and "OR" logic operator can be selected with the selection keys."AND" function: The logical switch is only closed when both input switches are closed."OR" function: The logical switch is closed when at least one of the input switches is closed.Note:The difference between AND and OR logic switches is made clear by the settings and input states of the display ﬁ gure below.ORANDANDL1L2L3–––L4LOGICAL SWITCHESANDL2I4I2SELL1L2IL3L4–––L131"L3" is only closed when both the "L1" and "L2" switches are closed. This means that both switches, 1 and 2, must be closed and, at the same time, either 3 or 4.In order to make these logical switches usable, they can be speciﬁ ed in those menus which use switches by calling them up via the additional "expanded switches" selection menu.Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will afford access to the expanded switches.M wünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C3C1Now use the selection keys to pick the desired control switch "C1 … C8", ﬁ xed switch "FX" or logical switch "L1 … L8" or the respected inverted switch "C1i … C8i", "FXi" or "L1i … L8i", for example, "L3i":

139Detail program description - Logical switchesMoewünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC8i L2i L4iL5i L6i L7i L1 L2C7i L1iL8iL3iA brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will adopt the selected switch into the menu.Model timeBatt. timeTop :Centr:Stop watchFlight timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0sL3IL3IAlarmTimerRemark about inverted switches:Selection of an inverted switch for a switch assignment, e.g "L1i" instead of "L1", simply speciﬁ es the opposite switch direction (state), i.e. non-inverted usage results in a certain switch activating a particular function when it is in its switched-on state but inverted usage results in a certain switch activating a particular function when it is in its switched-off state. Such applications arise when, for example, one and the same switch is to switch one function on but, at the same time, it is to switch a second function off, and vice versa. Logical switches permit other, quite complex, switching options to be created.

140 How is a ﬂ ight phase programmed? How is a ﬂ ight phase programmed?The concept of ﬂ ight phase programmingGeneral information on ﬂ ight phase programmingDuring a ﬂ ight, you will often want to apply different settings – e.g. ﬂ ap or trim settings for a ﬁ xed-wing aircraft or collective pitch and throttle servo settings for a helicopter – at particular times in the ﬂ ight (e.g. take-off, approach, hover, auto-rotate, etc.). With mc-20 HoTT, you can access such presets automatically using switches or control switches.Flight phases are also of great utility during ﬂ ight testing. You can conﬁ gure various set-ups and then switch between them during the ﬂ ight: this enables you to identify the most appropriate program set-up for your model quickly and easily.The basic programming procedure is a three-stage processFirst, you have to set up the different ﬂ ight phases, 1. i.e. you assign names to phases 1 … max. 8. Each name is then shown in all phase-speciﬁ c menus and also on the basic display. To avoid abrupt transitions when switching between the various phases, you can also program a period of time during which a "soft" transition to the next phase takes place.For ﬁ xed-wing aircraft programs, these settings are made in the »Phase settings« menu. The programming of helicopters begins with either the »Basic settings, model« menu, if you wish to set up autorotation or, otherwise, with the »Phase settings« menu.In the second stage, you use the »2. Phaseassignment« menu to set up the required "phase switches".Once these are set, you can then move to the 3. ﬂ ight phase-dependent menus (see the tables below) to start programming the settings for the individual ﬂ ight phases.List of ﬂ ight phase-relevant menus for ﬁ xed-wing programs:Menu Page»Control adjust« 108»Dual Rate / Expo« 120»Channel 1 curve« 128»Phase settings« 142»Phase assignment« 148»Phase trim« 150»Non-delayed channels« 151»Flight phase timers« 156»Wing mixers« 160»MIX active/phase« 204»Trim memory« 224List of ﬂ ight phase-relevant menus for helicopter programs:Menu Page»Control adjust« 112»Dual Rate / Expo« 124»Channel 1 curve« 131»Phase settings« 146»Phase assignment« 148»Non-delayed channels« 151»Flight phase timers« 156»Helicopter mixer« 176»MIX active/phase« 204»Trim memory« 226All other menus are model-speciﬁ c and thus cannot be programmed separately for each ﬂ ight phase. Accordingly, changes you make in all other menus apply uniformly to all ﬂ ight phases for that speciﬁ c model. In some cases it may be desirable to use the »Suppress codes« menu (see page 74) to remove non-alterable menus from the multi-function list while programming ﬂ ight phases. Two examples of ﬂ ight phase programming can be found in the text beginning on page 288.

142 Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged models Phase settings Setting up ﬂ ight phasesSetting up ﬂ ight phasesWhen you set up ﬂ ight phases for ﬁ xed-wing aircraft models, you start with this menu. You assign individual phases a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft) transition into each phase. Note that – depending on your model and your settings – switch times much longer than the default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can also set up several phases with names and transition times even if you don't currently have a use for them, since the decision as to which of the "occupied" phases you activate is made only on the »Phase assignment«menu (page 148) when setting "phase switches".Whether or not one of the phases 1 … 8 currently has an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be seen in the "status" column at the far right.Symbol Meaning– No switch assigned+ Phase can be accessed via switch¾Indicates the phase currently activeNote:The "Copy ﬂ ight phase" option on the »Copy / Erase«menu is a useful aid when programming the various ﬂ ight phases. First, you need to determine the parameters for a speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phase; these are then copied to the next ﬂ ight phase, where they can then be modiﬁ ed as appropriate."Name" columnBrieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then assign the needed phases (phase 1 up to maximum of 8 phases) by picking their names from the selection list with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. In addition to this standard pool of names, the »General basic settings« menu, page 261, permits up to 10 names of personal preference to be deﬁ ned.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase settings« menu option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayBase setup model Model typeControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentWithin one model memory, the mc-20 HoTT lets you program up to 8 discrete groups of settings for various conditions met during the ﬂ ight. The grouped settings are typically termed "ﬂ ight phases" and are programmed in the corresponding menus.Depending on the setting "Throttle min. forward/back" or "None" in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type« menu, calling up the »Phase settings«menu option will cause the transmitter's display to look like one of the two variants shown below …Motor on C1 "none"•Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 50.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time––––¾Motor on C1 "Throttle min front/rear"•Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw. timeMotoryes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––¾The order in which phases 1 to max. 8 are assigned is entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1", the "Normal phase", which is always active if …… no phase switch is set in the »• Phaseassignment« menu or ifno phase has been assigned to speciﬁ c •combinations of switches.The deﬁ nition of the phase name "Normal" could therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1". The names themselves have absolutely no technical signiﬁ cance for programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify which phase is active at any time and are thus displayed in all ﬂ ight phase-dependent menus and also on the transmitter's basic display.Column "Fl.ph.Tim" or "Timer"In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen display, other timers are also available whose settings are conﬁ gured in the »Flight phase timers« menu, page 156.Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2The ﬂ ight phase timers "Clk 1 … 3" plus "Time1" and "Time2" run only in the ﬂ ight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. During other ﬂ ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped during any ﬂ ight phase via the center ESC key of the left touch pad.While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap" and a switch, the two timers "Time1" and "Time2" have the following meaning:Time 1This timer will only measure time during which the switch or control switch assigned in the "Lap time/Tim tab" line of the »Flight phase timers«menu, page 156, is "closed". The frequency at which the switch is activated is shown on the

143Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged modelsbasic display. This counter ﬁ eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for the "Time1" timer is "opened", i.e. the timer is stopped:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 00 0.0sRX VOLT:4.9V When necessary, the selection keys can be used to access and read the sequence of switching times.Application:Measurement of e.g. motor switch-on times, if the same switch also actuates the motor.Time 2 This timer stores both the "off" and the "on" periods for the associated switch, i.e. every switch actuation in either direction will cause a record to be written for the timer, the timer will be reset then starts incrementing by "1" again as time passes. Each time count can be suspended with the center ESC key of the right touch pad, without actuating the switch itself. Activating the switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts the "Time 2" timer. In order to read out the time memory with the selection keys, the "Time 2" timer must ﬁ rst be suspended by using the ESC key of the right touch pad.Application:In addition to the motor runtimes, for example, the unpowered glide times between these could also be recorded.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset suspended timers shown in the basic display."Motor" columnNote:This column is only available if "forward/back" is present in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type«menu. Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw. timeMotor0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––¾NormalLaunchDist.yes"yes" The motor connected to receiver output 1 will be controlled by the C1 joystick (throttle/brake stick). The brake system to be set up on the »Wingmixers« menu is deactivated:BRAKE SETTINGSNormaloffThe motor connected to receiver output 1 is decoupled from the C1 joystick (throttle/brake stick) and is held in its OFF position – as speciﬁ ed by the setting "Throttle min. forward / back" – automatically. The brake system to be set up in the »Wingmixers« menu is activated and is actuated by the C1 joystick.Elevator curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%WK0%Diff.- reductNote:The settings available depend on the number of control surface servos selected on the line "Ailerons/Camber-changing ﬂ aps in the »Model type« menu."Sw. time" columnWhen you switch between ﬂ ight phases, it is advisable to use this column to program a switch time for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accordingly, there is also an option for specifying a different time for the switchover from any phase to, for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase 1.Use the f selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the right beyond the column labeled "Timer" and, if applicable, also the column labeled "Motor".Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw. timeMotor0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––¾NormalLaunchDist.yesFollowing a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the switchover time value in the ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video can be changed within a range of 0 and 9.9 s.

144 Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged modelsExample:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw. timeMotor0.1syes 0.1syes 1.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––¾NormalLaunchDist.yesThe switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1 «normal» will take 2.2 s. The time for a switchover from, for example, Phase 1 to Phase 3, is set to 1.1 s and the time for a switchover from Phase 1 or 3 to Phase 2 "Launch" is 1.5 s.Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when, e.g. switching between extremely different ﬂ ight phases, such as between aerobatics and normal ﬂ ight.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time in the currently active value ﬁ eld back to 0.1.Note:The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all settings that are speciﬁ c to ﬂ ight phases, and thus to all mixers activated in the »Wing mixers« menu, see page 160. Accordingly, the transition between ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c mixers does not occur abruptly. However, if individual servos are to be switched without a delay then these can be deﬁ ned accordingly in the »Non-delayed chan« menu (see page 151).

146 Detail program description - Phase settings | HelicoptersUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase settings« menu option in the multi-function menu:Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayBase setup model Helicopter typeControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 40.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time––––¾Autorot AutorotWithin one model memory, the mc-20 HoTT lets you program up to 7 discrete groups of settings for various conditions met during the ﬂ ight. These are in addition to the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase that can be set up in the »Basic settings, model« menu. The grouped settings are typically termed "ﬂ ight phases" and are programmed in appropriate menus.Setting up ﬂ ight phasesWhen you set up ﬂ ight phases for helicopter models, you start with this menu. You assign individual phases a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft) transition into each phase. Note that – depending on your model and your settings – switch times much longer than the default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can also set up several phases with names and transition times even if you don't currently have a use for them, since the decision as to which of the Phase settingsSetting up ﬂ ight phases"occupied" phases you activate is made only on the »Phase assignment« menu (page 148) when setting "phase switches".The "Status" column, second from the left, shows which one of the phases 1 … 7, including the autorotation phase this is 8, has already been assigned to a switch, plus the current status of that switch:Symbol Meaning– No switch assigned+ Phase can be accessed via switch¾Indicates the phase currently activeNote:The "Copy ﬂ ight phase" option on the »Copy / Erase« menu is a useful aid when programming the various ﬂ ight phases. First, you need to determine the parameters for a speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phase; these are then copied to the next ﬂ ight phase, where they can then be modiﬁ ed as appropriate."Name" columnThe ﬁ rst line, and thus the ﬁ rst ﬂ ight phase, is reserved for autorotation ﬂ ight, see »Basic settings, model« menu. Accordingly, the predeﬁ ned name cannot be changed.Use the selection keys to move to the line "Phase 1". Brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then assign the needed phase (phase 1 up to maximum of 7 phases) by picking the respective name from the selection list with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. In addition to this standard pool of names, the »General basic settings« menu, page 261, permits up to 10 names of personal preference to be deﬁ ned.The order in which phases 1 to max. 7 are assigned is entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1", the "Normal phase", which is always active if …… no phase switch is set in the »• Phaseassignment« menu or ifno phase has been assigned to speciﬁ c •combinations of switches.The deﬁ nition of the phase name "Normal" could therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1". The names themselves have absolutely no technical signiﬁ cance for programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify which phase is active at any time and are thus displayed in all ﬂ ight phase-dependent menus and also on the transmitter's basic display."ph. Tim." columnIn addition to the standard timers on the basic screen display, other timers are also available whose settings are conﬁ gured in the »Flight phase timers« menu, page 156.Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2The ﬂ ight phase timers "Clk 1 … 3" plus "Time1" and "Time2" run only in the ﬂ ight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. During other ﬂ ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped during any ﬂ ight phase via the center ESC key of the left touch pad.While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap" and a switch, the two timers "Time1" and "Time2" have the following meaning:Time1 This timer will only measure time during which the switch or control switch assigned in the "Lap time/Tim tab" line of the »Flight phase timers« menu, page 156, is "closed". The frequency at which the switch is activated is shown on the basic display. This counter ﬁ eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for the "Time1" timer is "opened", i.e. the timer is stopped:

147Detail program description - Phase settings | Helicopters#02 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVStarletH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 00 0.0sRX VOLT:4.9V When necessary, the selection keys can be used to access and read the sequence of switching times.Application:Measurement of (e.g.) ﬂ ight phases with increased motor speed, if the same switch is used to actuate ﬂ ight phase switching.Time2 This timer stores both the "off" and the "on" periods for the associated switch, i.e. every switch actuation in either direction will cause a record to be written for the timer, the timer will be reset then starts incrementing by "1" again as time passes. Each time count can be suspended with the center ESC key of the right touch pad, without actuating the switch itself. Activating the switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts the "Time2" timer. In order to read out the time memory with the selection keys, the "Time2" timer must ﬁ rst be suspended by using the ESC key of the right touch pad.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset suspended timers shown in the basic display."Sw. time" columnWhen you switch between ﬂ ight phases, it is advisable to use this column to program a switch time for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accordingly, there is also an option for specifying a different time for the switchover from any phase to, for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase 1.However, for reasons of safety, transition into the autorotation ﬂ ight phase should ALWAYS be set to switch without any time delay. The arrow "->" in the column labeled "Sw.time" at the end of the "Autorot" line indicates that a delay can be set when transitioning FROM (!) autorotation INTO (!) another phase.Use the f selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the right beyond the "Sw.time" column.Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 40.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time––––¾Autorot AutorotFollowing a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the switchover time value in the ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video can be changed within a range of 0 and 9.9 s. Example:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 45.5s3.0s2.0s4.0s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time++––¾Autorot AutorotNormalHoverSpeedA delay of 5.5 s applies when switching FROM auto-rotation into any other phase. A delay of 0.0 s always applies when switching TO auto-rotation.The switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1 «normal» will take 3.0 s. When switching from e.g. Phase 1 to Phase 3, the switch time is set to 4.0 s.Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when, e.g. switching between extremely different ﬂ ight phases, such as between aerobatics and normal ﬂ ight.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time in the currently active value ﬁ eld back to 0.1.Note:The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all settings that are speciﬁ c to ﬂ ight phases, and thus to all mixers activated in the »Wing mixers« menu, see page 160. Accordingly, the transition between ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c mixers does not occur abruptly. If you want individual servos to be switched without a delay, however, deﬁ ne these accordingly in the »Non-delayed channels« menu (see page 151).

148 Detail program description - Phase assignment Phase assignmentSetting up ﬂ ight phasesUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase assignment« menu option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayBase setup model Model typeControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayBase setup model Helicopter typeControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.PHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC1 NormalcombiABDEFNote:A phase name appears to the right of the phase number at the bottom right of the display only if you have assigned the name beforehand on the »Phasesettings« menu.In the »Phase settings« menu, described above separately for ﬁ xed-wing and helicopter models, you will have set up names for your phases. On this menu – which is identical for both model types – you must now specify the switches or switch combinations that you want to use to trigger each phase. One exception for helicopter menu: one of the two auto-rotation switches must be set on the menu »Basic settings, model«.Please note the following priorities:If• no ﬂ ight phase switches nor these names have been assigned in this menu, the model is in ﬂ ight phase "1". Accordingly, by the time you start programming ﬂ ight phases, you should therefore have already given this ﬂ ight phase the phase name "Normal".Independent of the phases with allocated switch •settings made in this menu, the autorotation phase (only present for the "Helicopter" model type and to be assigned a switch in the »Basic settings, model« menu) always (!) takes precedence. Accordingly, as soon as the auto-rotation switch in question is activated, the following warning appears:PHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC1 NormalKombinationABDEFAutorotPhase switch "A" is given priority over all •subsequent switch positions, from "B" to "F"Phase switch "B" is given priority over all •subsequent switch positions, from "C" to "F"3-way switches should • always be assigned from the middle position.Therefore use switch "A" and/or switch "B" only if you wish to change from any other ﬂ ight phase – apart from the helicopter's autorotation phase – directly into the phase that is assigned to this switch.Programming ﬂ ight phase switchesOnce you have conﬁ gured your desired switch position, "A" to "F", using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, a switch (whether a "normal" switch or an expanded switch) is then assigned as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).The order in which assignment is made is irrelevant: you must ensure only that you assign what are, for you, the "correct" switches. (In the helicopter program, for example, you should also take care to ensure you do not use this menu to re-assign any auto-rotation switch already assigned on the »Basic settings, model« menu.)Example: 4 ﬂ ight phases with phase priorityPHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC1 NormalcombiABDEF267Assigning ﬂ ight phases to switch positionsNow that names have been assigned to the ﬂ ight phases (1 … max. 8) in the »Phase settings« menu and also programmed switches in this menu, but … at the bottom right of the display screen, you only see <1 Normal > – regardless of the positions the switches are in!?Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame down and to the right and then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

149Detail program description - Phase assignmentPHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC1NormalcombiABDEF267Now close one (or more, as required) of the switches that you have assigned, and assign one of the ﬂ ight phase names from the list you selected beforehand on the »Phase settings« menu to this switch position or combination. Here, for example, we assign the "Launch" phase to the closed ("I") priority switch "A" …PHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC2 LaunchcombiABDEF2I 6 7… if, for example, we wish to switch to this phase regardless of the "C" … "F" switch positions, because the same switch activates an electric motor, etc.Use the same approach to set the other switches or combinations of switches.Theoretically – for the situation where all three are closed – you could use the three single switches shown in the example to deﬁ ne an additional ﬁ fth ﬂ ight phase on the »Phase settings« menu. However, since this example assumes just four ﬂ ight phases, you can leave the default phase name as «1 Normal» for this switch position.Leave this menu in the familiar way, with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad.Tips:If you have named more phases than you •currently have switches deﬁ ned for then this is not really problematic. You can repeat and change your switch assignment as you wish at any point in time. And you can also name additional phases at any time and then assign switches to them.When assigning switches, check whether the •switches are already otherwise assigned to ensure that you avoid duplicate assignments.Important notice:Before a phase switch is assigned, the model settings conﬁ gured are now to be found in the ﬂ ight phase «1 Normal», i.e. all ﬂ ight phase-dependent menus are reset to the standard conﬁ gurations for all other ﬂ ight phases.To avoid having to start from scratch in every ﬂ ight phase, you can copy over these standard settings by using the command "Copy ﬂ ight phase" on the "Copy / Erase" menu to replace them with ﬂ ight data obtained from the «Normal» ﬂ ight phase. You then need only to make further ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c changes to the settings.

150 Detail program description - Phase trim | Winged models Phase trimFlap settings speciﬁ c to ﬂ ight phasesUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase trim« menu option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.¿Normal 0%ELEVDepending on the settings made on the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu, page 94, and in the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, this menu offers at least one control function for ELEV …¿Normal 0%ELEVNormal… and, with the maximum of 4 for ELEV, AI, Al2, FL and FL2 a total of ﬁ ve control functions for ﬂ ight-phase-speciﬁ c trim settings. The setting of the ﬂ ight phase switches, to be deﬁ ned beforehand in the »Phase assignment« menu, determines the line that is chosen. An asterisk marks the ﬂ ight phase currently active. At the same time, the name of the respective ﬂ ight phase is also shown at the bottom left of the screen. You can enter settings only for the currently active ﬂ ight phase, e.g.:¿Normal 0%ELEVNormal0%0%0%AI FL FL2LaunchThermalDist.0% 0%0%0%0% 0%0%0%0% 0%0%0%0%AI20%0%0%In the column labeled "ELEV" a phase-speciﬁ c elevator trim setting can be stored.Important notice:Settings made in this column have an immediate effect on elevator trim and, accordingly, the trim setting display. In turn, the elevator trim control affects the values of this column either "globally" or "phase-speciﬁ cally", depending on the "global/phase" setting made on the "Elev" line of the »Stick mode« menu. Columns "Al", "Al2", "Fl", "Fl2" The values in these columns (max. 4) are identical to those in the "Fl.pos" (ﬂ ap position) line on the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" within the »Wing mixers« menu. For this reason, any changes made always affect the other menu directly – and vice versa.After selecting the appropriate column with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, these values can be entered, independent of one another, with the selection keys within a range of ±150 %. A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in the currently active value ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

151Detail program description - Non-delayed channels Non-delayed channelsChannel-dependent delays to switchingUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase trim« menu option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Open this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.NONDELAYED CHANNELSnon-delayednormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516On the »Phase settings« menu, you will have set the necessary switch times for ﬂ ight phase transitions.In this menu, you can now deactivate the transition delay set previously, per ﬂ ight phase and for individual control channels – e.g. for the motor channel for electric models or heading-lock systems for helicopter gyros, etc.Switch over to the corresponding ﬂ ight phase. This is shown at the bottom left of the display.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move the " " onto the corresponding channel then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.The switch icon changes from "normal" to "non-delay" and vice versa.NONDELAYED CHANNELSnon-delayednormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516Normal

152 Detail program description - Timers (general) Timers (general)Timers on the basic displayThe default transmitter display shows a total of three timers. These are: the transmitter operating time on the left of the display, plus a "Top" and a "Centr" timer on the right of the display:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalRunde 00RX VOLT:4.9VAnother, ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c timer can also be conﬁ gured with settings in the two menus »Flightphase timers«, page 156, and »Phase settings«,pages 142 and 146. This optional ﬂ ight phase timer – such as the lap time timer – appears underneath the "Centr" (ﬂ ight time) timer:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 00 0.0sRX VOLT:4.9VTo conﬁ gure the "Top" and/or "Centr" timer, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to access the menu option »Timers (general)« in the Multi-function menu: Control adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Open this menu option with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad.Model timeBatt. timeTop :Stop watchCentr:Flight timTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––CLR" Model time"This timer shows the currently registered total access time to the currently active model memory location. If necessary, this automatic time acquisition can also be inﬂ uenced by assigning an on/off switch to this "Model time" timer in the rightmost column labeled with the switch symbol. This timer can then be switched on and off as desired. This switch is assigned (and erased again as required) as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time back to "0:00 h"." Batt. time"This operating hours timer records the transmitter's total switch-on time since the last time the battery was charged, thus monitoring the transmitter battery. A switch cannot be assigned to this function.This timer is automatically reset to "0:00 h" when the transmitter detects that the voltage of the battery is signiﬁ cantly higher than the last time it was switched on, e.g. as a result of a charge process or the installation of a replacement battery.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will also reset this time back to "0:00 h". "Top" and "Centr"These two timers are located at the top right of the basic display (see the screen image immediately to the left) and can be assigned a different name; their function and mode of operation varies according to the name you give them. Independently of the name each is given, the "Top" and "Centr" timer can be programmed to run any length of time forwards or backwards – see further below.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the line for the "Top" or "Centr" timer. Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timNow use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select your desired timer and complete your selection with another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad: "Stop watch" or "Motor(run)time"Both of these two timer variants can be started and stopped using any of the available switches.The timer deﬁ ned as "Stopwatch" or "Motor runtime" sums the "ON" times continually, so that once your aircraft has landed, you can read off the sum of all switch "ON" times since the timer was last reset.

153Detail program description - Timers (general) "Flight tim"This timer is especially for measuring ﬂ ight time: it can be started with an assigned switch and stopped (once the switch has been re-opened) on the basic display with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad. Once in a stopped state, it can be reset to its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the cdor ef keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR). If you wish to assign a control switch, you must ﬁ rst deﬁ ne the switch on the»Control switch« menu and specify the switching point along the travel of the transmitter control. As an example, the timer can then be started by "opening the throttle" or by opening the throttle limiter for helicopter models.Note:The combination of the ﬂ ight time timer and stopwatch means that you can glance at the display at any time and see how long you have been ﬂ ying since the timers were started, plus the total motor runtime within this particular period of ﬂ ight time. "Time frame"The time frame timer is intended primarily for use by competition pilots, who are frequently given a timeframe within which they must complete certain tasks. The timer is started in precisely the same way as the ﬂ ight time timer. To stop the timer, ﬁ rst ensure the timer switch is at its OFF position. Then touch and hold the cd or ef selection keys then touch the center ESC key. Switch assignmentUse the f selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame next to the triangle as shown in the screen image shown below to the rightmost column of the relevant line:Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timHere, you assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).Typical application:The "stop watch" and "ﬂ ight timer" are both to be started simultaneously using the C1 stick as soon as a user-deﬁ ned switching point is exceeded.For this purpose, deﬁ ne a control switch, e.g. "C1", in the »Control switch« menu, page 135. To complete the procedure, you select this from the expanded switches (see the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56) and assign it to both these lines:Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0sAlarmTimerG1G1Top : Stop watchCentr: Flight timThe stopwatch will now stop when the stick is below the switching point and resume running above the switching point. The same is not true for the ﬂ ight time timer, however, which also starts the ﬁ rst time the switching point is exceeded. It can be stopped (with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad) only once the stopwatch is stopped; it can then be reset to its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). Switchover between "forward" and "backward"Timer runs forwards (stopwatch function)Following switch assignment, if the stopwatch shown on the basic display is started with the initial value of "0:00", then it will run forwards for max. 180 min and 59 s and then restart from 0:00.Timer runs backwards (countdown function)In the – left – minutes ﬁ eld, select a start time between 0 and 180 min …Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h180:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight tim… and in the – right – seconds ﬁ eld, select a start time between 0 and 59 s (or any combination of these):Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h180:590:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timProcedureSelect the desired input ﬁ eld with the 1. efselection keys of the left or right touch pad.Now tap on 2. SET in the center of the right touch pad.Make a time selection in the inverse video minutes 3. or seconds ﬁ eld with the selection keys of the right touch pad.

154 Detail program description - Timers (general)Complete the entry with a tap on the center 4. SET key.A simultaneous tap on the 5. cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any setting made back to "0" or "00".Following a switch back to the basic display (by 6. tapping the center ESC key of the left touch pad as many times as required), make sure the stopwatch is stopped then simultaneously tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to switchover the stopwatch to the "timer" function. Look at the top right in the following ﬁ gure.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK7810:01.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalRunde 00RX VOLT:4.9VAfter the assigned switch is activated, the stopwatch starts at the initial value set and runs backward("countdown clock function"). Once the timer reaches zero it does not stop, but continues to run to enable you to read off the time elapsed after it reached 0:00. To make this absolutely clear, the timer is shown highlighted. "Alarm" timerThe "Alarm" column is accessed by moving the marker frame to the right with the f selection key of the left or right touch pad until it is over the column labeled "Alarm". In the "Alarm" column a time between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments) can be deﬁ ned. This is the amount of time the timer is to count down before issuing an acoustic signal. This eliminates the need to repeatedly check the display continually during the ﬂ ight.Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h180:590:0090s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timA simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any settings made back to "0 s".Audible signal sequence30 s before zero: Triple beepSingle beep every two seconds 20 s before zero: Double beepSingle beep every two seconds 10 s before zero: Single beepSingle beep every second 5 s before zero: every second a single beep at a higher frequency zero: longer beep signal and changeover of display presentation to inverse video Resetting suspended timersA simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset timers which have already been suspended.Notes:Timers that are running backwards are shown on •the basic display with a ﬂ ashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds ﬁ elds.A typical application, "Timer activation via the C1 •joystick", can be found on page 284.An interim timer function change becomes •active after timer/s have been suspended and subsequently reset by a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).Remember that the timer switches also remain •active during programming. A simultaneous tap on the • cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the previously stopped timer to its programmed initial value, refer to sections "Alarm" and "Timer".

156 Detail program description - Fl. phase timers Fl. phase timersSelecting and settingA description of how timers are assigned to a ﬂ ight phase has already been provided in the text for the »Phase settings« menu, page 142 and 146. The same section has also described the properties of "Time1" and "Time2". This section now proceeds to describe "Timer 1, 2 and 3" and the "lap counter/time table" timer variants.The additional, ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c timer selected is displayed on the basic display underneath the "center" timer, as shown below:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalTimer 100 0:00.0RX VOLT:4.9VOn this menu … Control adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer … you can now program "Clks 1 … 3" as stopwatches (i.e. timers that run forward) or as countdown/alarm timers (i.e. timers that run backwards). You can assign any switch to these timers, and the same is true of the "lap counter/timetable" timer:Timer 1Timer 2Timer 3Lap time/Tim tab–––0:000:000:00Lap display0s0s0s––––––––––––AlarmTimerThe ﬂ ight phase timers "Timer 1 … 3" and the "Time1"/"Time2" timers (described in the »Phasesettings« section, pp. 142 and 146) run only in the ﬂ ight phase to which they have been assigned. They are also shown as appropriate on the basic display. During other ﬂ ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase (as discussed further below), however, although it can be stopped during any ﬂ ight phase via the center ESC key of the left touch pad. Clks 1, 2 and 3These timers are started and stopped via a switch or control switch. To do so, ﬁ rst use the selection keys to select the appropriate column via the switch icon at the bottom right. Then set the switch that you want by brieﬂ y tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (p. 56). Here, too, a control switch offers you the option of activating the timer via one of the joysticks or proportional controls. The switching point along the transmitter control travel is set on the »Control switch« menu (page 135).Remember that the timer switches also remain active in programming mode. Switching between "forwards" and "backwards" Stopwatch mode (timer runs forwards) In this mode, the timer starts at the initial value "0:00" (min:sec) when you operate the assigned switch. If it reaches the maximum time of 180 min. and 59 s, it will re-start at "0:00"."Countdown" (timer runs backwards)Following the activation of the corresponding value ﬁ elds (by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad), if a time in minutes (maximum 180 min) and/or a time in seconds (maximum 59 s, right ﬁ eld) is set, then the timers will run backwards from this initial value following the activation of the assigned switch (see section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56), i.e. a "countdown" function will apply. Once the timer reaches zero it does not stop, however, but continues to run (highlighted) so you can read off the time elapsed after reaching zero.Note:Timers that are running backwards are shown on the basic display with a ﬂ ashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds ﬁ elds.A simultaneous tap on thecd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset entry values in the currently active ﬁ eld back to zero. "Alarm" timer Timer 1Timer 2Timer 3Lap time/Tim tab–––0:000:000:00Lap display0s0s0s––––––––––––AlarmTimer

157Detail program description - Fl. phase timersThe input ﬁ eld in the "Alarm" column is activated with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. In this ﬁ eld, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to deﬁ ne a time between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments) before zero is reached: at this point an audible signal will be emitted, which eliminates the need for you to check the screen continually during the ﬂ ight. Audible signal sequence30 s before zero: Triple beep Single beep every two seconds 20 s before zero: Double beep Single beep every two seconds 10 s before zero: Single beepSingle beep every second 5 s before zero: every second a single beep at a higher frequency zero: longer beep signal and changeover of display presentation to inverse videoA simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset entry values entered in the currently active ﬁ eld to "0 s".Note:If timer functionality has been changed at any point, then the new changes to settings are made active only after the timer(s) have been stopped on the basic display then making a simultaneous tap on thecd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to reset them.Like the two standard timers positioned above it, this third, phase-speciﬁ c timer is reset to its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). It is stopped in all ﬂ ight phases at the same time, even if it has not been stopped separately in the other ﬂ ight phases. Lap counter/timetableTimer 1Timer 2Timer 3Lap time/Tim tab–––0:000:000:00Lap display0s0s0s––––––––––––AlarmTimerOn the "Lap time/tim tab" line, assign a switch only as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56). Preferably, make use of one of the two momentary switches which are included as standard equipment in the switch panels. The lap count is incremented each time by one lap while simultaneously (and automatically) the lap time elapsed during this lap is stopped (and recorded). This momentary switch simultaneously starts the stopwatch for the next lap. As the timer is triggered, the lap or switch impulse counter is shown highlighted.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 11 2:34.5RX VOLT:4.9V"Time1" and "Time2" operate in the same manner; for more details please read the section on the »Phasesettings« menu option.Up to 99 lap times can be recorded and accessed, each with a maximum duration of 99 minutes and 59.9 seconds.To stop the timer in question, tap the center ESC key of the left touch pad on the basic display after the ﬂ ight is over. The lap or switch impulse counter is now shown in "normal" mode:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 12 1:23.4RX VOLT:4.9VA simultaneously tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the counter to "00" and deletes the stored times. However, the timers must have been stopped before this.Notes:If you have selected a normal switch to operate •the lap counter, take care to ensure that this switch is set to "OFF" before touching the center ESC key of the left touch pad.If you should forget to switch off the lap counter in •a phase which is now not currently active, simply touch the center ESC key of the left touch pad.To swap between the basic display and the "Lap Display" …01020304SEL01:23.402:34.503:45.605 SEL04:56.705:67.80708091000:00.000:00.000:00.0111200:00.000:00.000:00.006 06:78.91314151600:00.000:00.000:00.0171800:00.000:00.000:00.0 1/6… go to the line …

158 Detail program description - Fl. phase timers Lap DisplayTimer 1Timer 2Timer 3Lap time/Tim tab–––0:000:000:00Lap display0s0s0s––––––––––––AlarmTimer… and use the switch assigned. You assign this switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).

159What is a mixer? What is a mixer?Basic functionalityWith many models, a mix of the model's functions is often desirable, i.e. coupling aileron to rudder or coupling two servos together, in cases where rudder control surfaces with the same functionality are to be controlled together using a single servo. In all cases, the signal ﬂ ow at the "output" of the control function on the transmitter control-side "branches" – , this also means: "downstream" of transmitter control options such as e.g. »Dual Rate / Expo«, »Control adjust«,»Channel 1 curve« etc. – in order for the signal to have its predeﬁ ned effect on the "input" of another control channel and thus on another receiver output.Example: V-tail mixer334Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41 014V-tail mixerControl function inputsControl channels(receiver outputs)Elevator stickRudder stickRight rudder / elevatorLeft rudder / elevatorRudderElevatorElevatorRudderRudderElevatorThe mc-20 HoTT transmitter software contains a large number of pre-programmed coupling functions as standard, which are designed to mix together two (or more) control channels. Accordingly, the mixer named in the example just above can be activated in the "Tail" line of the »Model type« menu by selecting "V-tail".In addition, for each model memory in the ﬁ xed-wing and helicopter programs , the software makes available a total of eight freely programmable linear mixers, four freely programmable curve mixers and four dual mixers.Also be sure to read the general remarks about "free mixers" in this manual, beginning on page 192.

160 Detail program description - Wing mixers»Mix only channel« (see page 205) and use it for another purpose with the help of a "free mixer" (see page 193).If "2AIL" is set in the »•Model type« menu, page 94, then ﬂ ight-phase dependent ﬂ ap functionality can be achieved with appropriate offset settings for input 5 in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108.For almost any menu option, you have the option •of checking your settings by switching to the servo display screen, which is accessed with a simultaneous tap on the ef selection keys of the left touch pad. Caution:With aileron actuation the bars of the »Servo display« move in the same manner and in the opposite manner with camber changing ﬂ ap actuation.Note that if two ﬂ ap servos have been selected, •any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors in operating the ﬂ aps. The same applies to input 10 and the selection "2AIL 4FL".A range of options are available for positioning •ﬂ aps. You can …a) … simply accept one position per ﬂ ight phase, by setting only the corresponding trim values. b) … vary the ﬂ aps positioned by a) with a transmitter control assigned to "Input 6" in the »Control adjust« menu, (page 108), and if desired by also selecting ﬂ ight-phase dependency "PH" in the "Type" column. The selected transmitter control directly controls the two ﬂ ap servos located on receiver outputs 6 and 7 and, as required, also the two FL2 servos connected to outputs 9 and 10 – assuming that corresponding ﬂ aps have been speciﬁ ed on the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line in the »Model type«menu. This transmitter control indirectly »Phase assignment«, page 148 menus, and these ﬂ ight phases have been given names, the ﬂ ight phase names will appear along the bottom display edge, e.g. «Normal».Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalAll options can then also be programmed speciﬁ c to a ﬂ ight phase.Comments:In the »• Model type« menu, (page 94), control of the brake ﬂ ap mixer can be reprogrammed from control input 1 to 7, 8 or 9 and a corresponding offset point can be set.Braking with raised ailerons and, if present, •lowered ﬂ aps (crow system) can be implemented by making appropriate settings on the "Crow" line of the "Brake settings" sub-menu.If you would like to alternate between the C1 stick •controlling an electric drive system and a butterﬂ y system, then you can use the options in the "Motor" column on the »Phase settings« menu – refer to the example on page 279.You can also use the opportunity to set switch •times for a "soft" transition from ﬂ ight phase to ﬂ ight phase on the »Phase settings« menu (see page 142).If your model features multiple wing ﬂ aps and a •"crow / butterﬂ y system" (see below), but without additional airbrakes, then you can separate output 1 (usually freed up by the above system) from control function input 1 (throttle/brake stick) on the Wing mixersCalibrating the wing ﬂ ap systemWithin the menu tree of the menu …Channel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixers… the sub-menus and options available depend entirely on the number of aileron and ﬂ ap servos set up on the »Model type« menu, page 94 … Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 2AILM O D E L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL… which means that the only settings listed are the ones that can actually be conﬁ gured. The resulting menu structure gains not only in clarity but also prevents potential programming errors.For example, if "2AIL" has been preset, display of the »Wing mixers« menu would appear (without camber ﬂ aps) as shown below:Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345If various ﬂ ight phases are envisioned in the settings of the »Phase settings«, page 142, and

161Detail program description - Wing mixerscontrols the ﬂ ap position of the ailerons via the percentage value entered in the "Ail" (and "Ail2") column on the "FLAP" line of the multi-ﬂ ap menu. However, in order to improve control sensitivity for ﬂ ap settings, travel should be reduced to about 25 % in "Input 6" line of the »Control adjust« menu.c) … alternatively, you can also leave the default entry of "0 %" in the "AILE" (and "AIL2") column on the "FLAP" line of the multi-ﬂ ap menu, and use the »Control adjust« menu to assign both input 6 and input 5 to the same transmitter control. You can then set the degree to which both ﬂ ap pairs are affected, optionally making this ﬂ ight phase-dependent by selecting "PH" in the "Type" column, with the respective travel adjustment.Basic programming procedureSelect the desired line with the 1. cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad.Depending on the line selected, the bottom line of the display will either show the "Next page" icon () or a switch icon.Depending on the line selected, you will either 2. switch to the next page – on which you carry out the same procedure as below – or the desired value ﬁ eld is activated by tapping the center SETkey of the right touch pad.Use the selection keys to set the mixer ratio or 3. degree of differential.To conﬁ gure symmetrical mixer values, move the transmitter control or joystick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value ﬁ elds. To conﬁ gure asymmetric values, move the transmitter control/joystick to the corresponding side.Negative and positive parameter values are possible, in order to be able to adjust the respective function to the direction of servo any mixers on the "Brake settings" sub-menu. Otherwise, the mixer travel is expanded back to 100 % automatically.All other mixers in the »Wing mixers« menu have their neutral point with the control at its center, i.e. they have no effect at this control position. The value set is mixed in at full travel.Mixer functionsThe individual options in the »Wing mixers« menu are discussed below, separately for single-, dual- and multi-ﬂ ap models. Before we start, a number of remarks on the differentials for ailerons and ﬂ aps: Aileron differentialAileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalFl-Pos.Diff.Ail-trAINormal AILE+100%WK2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%0% +100%For aerodynamic reasons, the drag generated on an aileron oriented downwards is greater than that generated by the same aileron when it is oriented upwards by the same amount. One effect of this unequal distribution of drag produces is a yawing motion around the vertical axis and, accordingly, a "turning away" from the intended direction of ﬂ ight, which is why this undesirable side effect is also rotation or ﬂ ap orientation.A simultaneous tap on the 4. cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry value in the given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to its default value.Complete the entry with a tap on the center 5. ESCkey of the left touch pad or the center SET key of the right touch pad. Assigning switchesWing mixers "Aileron 2 ¼ 4 rudder" and "Flaps 6 ¼3 elevator" can be made optionally on/off switchable by way of a switch or expanded switch. Accordingly, when the respective line is selected, the familiar switch symbol ( ) will appear on the lower edge of the screen. Switching delaysThe delay time or switch time conﬁ gured on the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, for the respective ﬂ ight phase also affects all wing mixers and thus avoids abrupt changes to ﬂ ap conﬁ gurations when switching between the ﬂ ight phases. Mixer neutral points (Offset)For all mixers on the "Brake settings" sub-menu, the "brake offset" to be set on the »Model type« menu is to be conﬁ gured to the transmitter control position at which the airbrakes are retracted.Accordingly, in the "Brake offset" line of the »Modeltype« menu, see page 94, specify Input 1, 7, 8 or 9 and the offset to accommodate personal piloting habits. When selecting "input 1", please note also that you may need to specify your desired "Throttle min" position "forward/back" before establishing the offset point in the "Motor at C1" line.Note:If the offset is not set right at the end of the transmitter travel, the rest of the travel is a "dead zone", i.e. the transmitter control does not inﬂ uence

162 Detail program description - Wing mixersused today offers considerable beneﬁ ts.The degree of differential can be changed at any time, for example, and, in extreme circumstances, the downward deﬂ ection of an aileron, in what is termed a "split" position, can be suppressed entirely. This approach not only reduces or even suppresses "adverse yaw", but can, in certain circumstances, even generate a positive yaw: in such cases, an aileron command will generate a yaw about the vertical axis in the direction of the turn. For large glider models in particular, this approach lets such aircraft ﬂ y "clean" turns using just the ailerons, which is not otherwise possible unaided.The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes it possible to set a differential appropriate for each side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. While "0 %" corresponds to a normal linkage, i.e. no differential, "-100 %" or "+100 %" represents the "split" function. For aerobatic ﬂ ying, low absolute values are required to ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting (-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope ﬂ iers, where ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.Note:Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly. Diff. (Differentiation)WK-Pos.Diff.QR-Tr.QRNormal QR+100%WK2WK+100%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%WK +100%0% +100%0%The "cAId" (topmost) line in the Multi-ﬂ ap menu can be used to set the extent to which the ﬂ aps act as ailerons and follow the aileron joystick.; this value is entered as a percentage. The ﬂ aps differential – to be set on the line "Diff." (two lines below) – works in a similar way to the aileron differential, i.e. where an aileron command acts on the ﬂ aps, the respective deﬂ ection downwards can be reduced.The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes it possible to set a differential appropriate for each side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the servos. A value of 0 % is equal to normal linkage, i.e. the servo travel downwards is the same as the travel upwards. A value of -100 % to +100 % means that travel downwards will be reduced to zero for aileron commands affecting the ﬂ aps ("split" mode). A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.Note:Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly.termed "adverse yaw". This effect is naturally greater on the comparably long aerofoils possessed by model gliders, compared to e.g. powered aircraft models, which generally have relatively short moment arms. For the former, it must normally be compensated for by making a simultaneous rudder deﬂ ection in the opposite direction. However, this rudder deﬂ ection also generates drag and therefore further degrades ﬂ ight characteristics. If, on the other hand, a differential is applied to the aileron orientations, by giving the aileron oriented downwards a smaller deﬂ ection than the aileron oriented upwards, the (undesirable) adverse yaw can be reduced – and possibly entirely negated. However, the basic precondition for this is that each aileron must have its own servo present, which can therefore also be embedded straight into the aerofoils. In addition, the shorter linkage paths produce an additional beneﬁ t: reproducible aileron conﬁ gurations that also exhibit less "play".0% (normal)50% (differential)100% (Split)Unlike mechanical solutions, which not only commonly need to be designed and built in when constructing the model but also produce a slightly increased "play" in the control system for strong differentials, the transmitter-based differential typically

163Detail program description - Wing mixers Model type: "1AIL"If you have entered "1AIL" for the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:Brake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalFrom the ﬁ rst line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …Brake settingsNote:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase. Switch the ﬂ ight phase if required:Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalSince you cannot set up a butterﬂ y or aileron differential in a model with only a single aileron servo, this menu offers no further conﬁ guration options with the exception of a "pointer" to the "Elevat curve" sub-menu. Therefore, move ahead from here with another Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is deﬂ ected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will ﬁ nd that setting a value of around 50 % is usually highly appropriate. Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick. A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput –100%0%L+–100¼O U T P U T0%ElevatorNormalIf required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point.For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option text beginning page 128.Aileron 2 ¼ 4 rudderBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalHere, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂ y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the direction of deﬂ ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired.

164 Detail program description - Wing mixersTo conﬁ gure the setting, ﬁ rst position the brake control in the brake position at full travel (i.e. its end-point). Then, brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad and enter a suitable value using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad. To ensure a sufﬁ ciently strong braking effect, note that you should try to lower the ﬂ ap as low as is mechanically possible.From the second line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu "Elevat curve" by brieﬂ y tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad:BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput –100%0%L+–100¼O U T P U T0%ElevatorNormalIf required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point.For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option text beginning page 128.Aileron 2 ¼ 4 rudderBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator flaps 0%0%––––––rudder2346NormalFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂ y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the direction of deﬂ ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired. Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is deﬂ ected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will ﬁ nd that setting a value of around 50 % is usually highly appropriate.Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.Elevator 3 ¼ 6 ﬂ apsBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator flaps 0%0%––––––rudder2346NormalFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63To provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the ﬂ ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the ﬂ aps are deﬂ ected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. This mixer can be made optionally on/off switchable with one of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring.To conﬁ gure symmetrical mixer values, move Model type: "1AIL 1FL"If you have entered "1AIL 1FL" for the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:Brake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator flaps 0%0%––––––rudder2346NormalFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63From the ﬁ rst line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …Brake settingsNote:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phasesettings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase. Switch the ﬂ ight phase if required:Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowQR0%WK20%FLAP0%Appropriate to the model type selected, you can now enter a suitable value in the "Crow" line to lower the ﬂ ap when you activate the brake control – which is typically the C1 joystick.

165Detail program description - Wing mixersthe elevator joystick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value ﬁ elds. To conﬁ gure asymmetric values, move the joystick to the corresponding side.Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible, so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or direction of ﬂ ap deﬂ ection.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.The "typical" values conﬁ gured for this mixer are single-digit or low two-digit values.Flaps 6 ¼ 3 elevatorBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator flaps 0%0%––––––rudder2346NormalFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63This mixer is used to set elevator (pitch-trim) compensation when a ﬂ ap command is given. This typically enables you to adjust the model's airspeed automatically when ﬂ aps are lowered.If you have used the »Control adjust«, page 108, to assign Input 6 to a transmitter control or switch then this also affects this mixer.Depending on the position of the ﬂ ap control, either a symmetrical or asymmetric setting within the range ±150 % is possible.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by assigning a switch in the right column.The values conﬁ gured for this mixer are typically in the single-digit range. Model type: "2AIL"If you have entered "2AIL" for the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalFrom the ﬁ rst line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …Brake settingsNote:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phasesettings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase. Switch the ﬂ ight phase if required:Elevator curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%WK0%Diff.- reductDepending on the model type selected, setting options will now be available in the "Crow" and "Diff(erential)reduct(ion)" lines for the column labeled "AILE". These options should be utilized by …… putting the transmitter control for "Brake" •(refer to the »Model type« menu description on page 94) – typically the C1 joystick – in its limit position in the brake direction. Switch to the "Crow" line, brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad and use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to set a value that moves the aileron upwards as far as possible to brake the model or, if you are using airbrakes as the main braking system, the aileron should be set to elevate only minimally to provide an extra braking effect.Note:To reliably prevent the servos mechanically striking their end-stops – which draws a heavy current – you can set an appropriate limit value in the column labeled "– limit +" in the »Servo adjustment« menu, page 102.… then ﬁ nally, moving to the "Diff. reduct" line, set a •% value there which is greater than or equal to that value set (or to be set) in the "Aileron differential" line of the display screen "before" this one.In this way, you can suppress the aileron differential when braking, thus ensuring that you can count on sufﬁ cient aileron response despite your ailerons being deﬂ ected upwards.From the lowest line, "Elevator curve", you can switch to setting the "Elevator curve" mixer by brieﬂ y tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad:

166 Detail program description - Wing mixersBrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput –100%0%L+–100¼O U T P U T0%ElevatorNormalIf required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point.For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option text beginning page 128.Aileron differentialAileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalThe adjustment range of ±100 % makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential, regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. While "0 %" corresponds to a normal linkage, i.e. no transmitter-side differential, "-100 %" or "+100 %" represents the "split" function.For aerobatic ﬂ ying, low absolute values are required to ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting (-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope ﬂ iers, where ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.0% (normal)50% (differential)100% (Split)A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.Note:Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly.Aileron 2 ¼ 4 rudderAileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalHere, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂ y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the direction of deﬂ ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired. Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is deﬂ ected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will ﬁ nd that setting a value of around 50 % is usually highly appropriate.Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.Elevator 3 ¼ 5 aileronAileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalTo provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the aileron function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the ﬂ aps are deﬂ ected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. This mixer can be made optionally on/off switchable with one of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring.To conﬁ gure symmetrical mixer values, move the elevator joystick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value ﬁ elds. To conﬁ gure asymmetric values, move the transmitter control to the corresponding side.

167Detail program description - Wing mixersValues in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible, so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or direction of aileron deﬂ ection.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-digit range. Model type: "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL"If you have entered "2AIL 1FL" for the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSFlaps elevator 0%0%––––––rudder2643NormalMulti-flap menuIf, on the other hand, "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL" has been entered for the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu, page 94, then the "Wing mixers menu" on the transmitter should correspond to the ﬁ gure below:Brake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSFlaps elevator 0%0%––––––rudder2643NormalMulti-flap menuRegardless of the combination of aileron and ﬂ ap servos you choose, all of the parameters available can be adjusted separately for each ﬂ ight phase.Note:For almost any menu option, you have the option of checking your settings by switching to the servo display screen, which is accessed with a simultaneous tap on the ef selection keys of the left touch pad. If you do, note however that the vertical lines on the »Servo display« move in the same direction for ailerons and in the opposite direction for ﬂ aps.Before we address the details of this menu we would like to provide a brief explanation of the different display modes for the multi-ﬂap menu:Model type: "2 AIL 1 FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations "AILE" and "FLAP" refer to the following ﬂ aps:AIleftFL FL AIrightSince the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed on the »Model type« menu, page 94, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model.Therefore, with a preset to "2AIL 1FL", the options for setting aileron functions to ﬂ aps will be suppressed, as will all setting options throughout the (right-side) column labeled "FL2".Fl.posAILEFL0%NormalHR WKWK2FLAP+100%0% 0%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0%In addition, the settings for "Aile(ron) diff(erential)" are not found on the "multi-ﬂ ap menu", as with "2AIL 2/4FL", but one level higher in the "Wing mixers" menu, see the screenshot at top left.

168 Detail program description - Wing mixersModel type: "2AIL 2FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations "AILE" and "FLAP" refer to the following ﬂ aps:AIleftFLleftFLrightAIrightSince the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed on the »Model type« menu, page 94, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model.Therefore, with a preset to "2AIL 2FL", all options for setting options for a second set of ﬂ ap pairs will be suppressed throughout the (right-side) column labeled "FL2".Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%WK2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEl Fl+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Model type: "2AIL 4FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations "AILE", "FLAP" and "FL2" refer to the following ﬂ aps:AIleftFLleftFL2leftFL2rightFLrightAIrightSince the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed on the »Model type« menu, page 94, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model.Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAINormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEl Fl+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Model type: "4AIL 2FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94 , then the abbreviations "AILE", "AILE2" and "FL" refer to the following ﬂ aps:AIleftAI2leftFLleftFLrightAI2rightAIrightSince the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed on the »Model type« menu, page 94, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model.Therefore, with a preset to "4AIL 2FL", all options for setting options for the ﬁ rst and second set of aileron pairs as well as those for the ﬂ ap pair will be displayed throughout.FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AlNormal AILE+100%FLAILE20%+100% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% +100% 0%0%FLEl Fl+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Model type: "4AIL 4FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94 , then the abbreviations "AILE", "AILE2", "FLAP" and "FL2" refer to the following ﬂ aps:AIleftAI2leftFLleftFL2leftFL2rightFLrightAI2rightAIrightSince the "4AIL 4FL" selection represents the maximum possible number of wing servos, in addition to the columns labeled "AILE" and "AILE2" there will now also be columns available labeled "FLAP" and "FL2.

169Detail program description - Wing mixersFl.posDiff.Ail-trAINormal AILE+100%FL20 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%0% 0%0%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLAILE2 FLAP+100%+100%0%0%El Fl 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%Delta/ﬂ ying wing type models with more than two wing ﬂ apsIf the "ELEVON" tail type (for a delta-wing or ﬂ ying wing model) has been selected and number of wing ﬂ aps in the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu conforms to that menu's description, then activation of the elevator joystick will normally result in as little movement for both ailerons as for the inside ﬂ aps (FL) and, if present, (FL2). The reason for this is the default mixer ratio of 0 % for all wing ﬂ aps set for the "EL¼FL" mixer found in the "Multi-ﬂ ap" menu:Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEl Fl+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Accordingly, you must ﬁ rst specify your desired elevator control on the "EL ¼ FL" line. Take care to ensure that up/down activation occurs in the right sequence.Note:The "Brake settings" sub-menu (see next double page) is also suitable for setting up the butterﬂ y (crow) function with delta and ﬂ ying wing models. In ﬁ ne-tuning the deﬂ ection of the ﬂ ap pairs AIL, FL and (if present) FL2, however, ensure that the moments created by one pair of ﬂ aps compensate the moments created by the other pair of ﬂ aps in each case. For example: the "up" effect of ailerons when deﬂ ected up should be compensated by a "down" effect from ﬂ aps when they are lowered. Multi-ﬂ ap menuVAIW (Aileron ¼camber ﬂ aps)(suppressed by "2AIL 1FL")Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%The "VAIW" line can be used to make ﬂ ight-phase dependent settings for the percentage of aileron action to result for the camber ﬂ ap pair "FLAP" and, if present, also "FL2" when aileron control is exercised. (In the "AILE" column it is also possible to adjust the deﬂ ection of the aileron pair, if required.) Normally, however, the ﬂ aps should follow the ailerons with less of a deﬂ ection, i. e. the mixer ratio should be smaller than 100 %. The adjustment range of -150 % to +150 % means the direction of deﬂ ection can be adjusted, depending on the direction of rotation of the servos, to suit the ailerons.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the ﬁ gure.

170 Detail program description - Wing mixersAiI-tr. (aileron trim)(suppressed by "2AIL 1FL")Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%In this line, you specify the percentage rate with which aileron trim is to affect "AILE", "FLAP" and – if present – "FLAP2".The available range of values is -150 % to +150 %, relative to the adjustment range of the trim wheel.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the ﬁ gure.Diff. (Differential for aileron function)(With "2AIL 1FL", at one level higher in the »Wing mixers« menu, see ﬁ gure on the previous double page.)Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%On this line, you set the aileron differential, plus the differential for the FLAP and FLAP2 wing ﬂ aps – if the latter are being activated as ailerons.0% (normal)50% (differential)100% (split)AI FL FL2 FL2 FL AIIf you are unsure about the meaning of differential travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the start of this section on page 161.The setting range of -100 % to +150 % permits correct differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of aileron and ﬂ ap servos.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the ﬁ gure.Fl.pos (ﬂ ap position)Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%Here, you set the ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c wing ﬂ ap positions for all of the ﬂ aps present on the model in question. In this way, you can specify the ﬂ ap positions that apply to each ﬂ ight phase. The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes it possible to set the correct direction of travel regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and ﬂ ap servos.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the ﬁ gures.VFLV(effect of ﬂ aps)This line speciﬁ es the percentage of effect produced on aileron and ﬂ aps by the settings (if applicable, also ﬂ ight-phase dependent settings) made for Input 6 in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108.Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%For each ﬂ ap pair, you can deﬁ ne either a symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or to the relevant side.If each travel adjustment is left at +100 % on the »Control adjust« menu, page 108, then values between 5 % and 20 % should generally be sufﬁ cient here.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the ﬁ gures. Note:By default, NO transmitter control is assigned to input 6 on the »Control adjust« menu. However, you can

171Detail program description - Wing mixersassign a transmitter control or switch to this input at any time – also in a ﬂ ight phase-dependent way – thus enabling different ﬂ ap settings within a ﬂ ight phase; see also example 2 on page 292.El ¼ Fl (elevator ¼ﬂ ap) To provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the ﬂ ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the ﬂ aps are deﬂ ected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions.For each ﬂ ap pair, you can deﬁ ne either a symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or to the relevant side. Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible:Fl.posDiff.Ail-trNormal AILE FL2FLAP0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%El Fl +100%+100%0%0%0%0%A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the ﬁ gures. The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-digit range.If a switch is assigned in the next line, "El ¼ FL"then the effect produced on ﬂ aps can be switched on and off with the elevator. Important general notice:Do not let control surfaces and servos strike their mechanical end-stops when large deﬂ ections are set! This is especially relevant in relation to the functions "VAIW", "VFLW" and possibly "VFL2W". Use the "- limit +" option (travel limit) available in the "Servo adjustments" menu (page 102), as required.El ¼ Fl offset (elevator) Fl.posDiff.Ail-trNormal AILE FL2FLAP0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%El Fl +100%+100%0%0%0%0%A value entered into the "El" ¼ Fl" line offers support to the elevator during tight curves and aerobatics. This "El" ¼ Fl offset" line determines the offset value introductory point where this percentage of effect on ﬂ aps is to take place for elevator action. • With an offset value of 0%, ﬂ aps will be affected by elevator action beginning with the neutral position of the elevator joystick by the percentage set in the "El" ¼ Fl".• With an offset value other than 0 %, ﬂ aps will be affected by movement of the elevator joystick, in either the "up" or "down" direction, only after reaching the preset offset point.To set this offset point, put the elevator joystick at the offset point to be set (in either of the two possible directions). A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will store this position.Tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad with the elevator joystick in its centered position to set the offset value back to 0 % again. If a switch is assigned in column "Switch", the effect produced on ﬂ aps can be switched on and off with the elevator. Brake settingsNotes:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: •"Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type«menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase. Switch the ﬂ ight phase if required:The "brake mixers" described below can also – •and should also – be conﬁ gured to be speciﬁ c to individual ﬂ ight phases. CrowElevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%FLAP0%Diff. reductFL20% 0%0%The "Crow" mixer function is actuated by control function 1, 7, 8 or 9, depending on the input assigned on the "Brake Offset" line in the »Model type« menu (see page 94).Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 2AIL2FLM O D E L T Y PEBrake Offset +100%SELInput 1

172 Detail program description - Wing mixersNote:The Offset, i.e. the activation direction, is also set in the »Model type« menu, pager 94. This offset should be set to about +90 % of stick travel (if the C1 joystick is used, this is generally located at the forward position of the stick). To extend the ﬂ aps, the stick must therefore be moved back towards the pilot. The remaining joystick travel of around 10 % then has no effect, although it is not "lost", since the control travel is automatically expanded back to 100 %.Use the select ﬁ elds of the columns labeled "AILE", "FLAP", "FL" and, if present, "FL2" to specify the extent and the direction that corresponding ﬂ ap pairs are to follow when the airbrake control (control function 1, 7, 8 or 9) is operated. If the model has no airbrakes, leave the corresponding receiver output free or set it in the »Mix only channel« menu to "MIXonly" to be able to use it elsewhere.Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the ﬁ gure. "AILE" column•When braking the model as it comes in to land, neither of the two aileron ﬂ aps should ever be deﬂ ected more than half of the possible travel upwards, to ensure that enough travel is available to control the model along its longitudinal axis (aileron function).AIFLFL2FL2FLAI"FLAP" (and "FLAP2") column•As the model is braked on the landing approach, both pairs of ﬂ aps can be set to deﬂ ect by different amounts, e.g.:AIFLFL2FL2FLAIAIFLFL2FL2FLAICombining AILE and FLAP for "Crow"•AIFLFL2FL2FLAIThough the airbrake mixers are set as described above, there is a special ﬂ ap constellation, called "crow position" or "butterﬂ y", that can also be set. This airbrake setting causes both ailerons move moderately upward while the ﬂ aps move downward as far as possible. Another mixer – see below, under the section "Elevat. curve" – is then used to trim the elevator such that the ﬂ ight speed does not change signiﬁ cantly in comparison to the normal ﬂ ight position. Otherwise, there is a danger that the model loses too much speed and then, after the braking system is retracted (e.g. to extend a landing approach that was too short, for example), pancakes or even stalls.A tip for "seeing" the effect of brakes:lift the ﬂ aps and look over and under the surface from the front. The larger the surface projected by the lifted ﬂ ap, the greater the braking effect achieved.Tips for activating airbrakes:When, in addition to aileron and camber ﬂ ap •servos, there is also a built-in servo for actuating wing airbrakes, it can be most simply connected to that receiver output – if free – whose input has been selected for the brake function, i.e. either on 1, 7, 8 or 9. If this is not possible then, as an alternative, use a free mixer to connect the selected brake control channel with the airbrake servo.To activate two airbrake servos, the best approach •is to leave one servo on output 1 and to connect the second servo to a free output of your choice – for example, output 9. You then also assign this output to transmitter control 1 (as standard) on the »Control adjust« menu, page 108, see ﬁ gure.0% +100%I9I10I11I12Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLCn1 ---frfrfr---------offsetGLNormalAs you do, leave the settings for offset, travel, etc. at their default values. Also leave the default "GL" value in the column labeled "TYP" so that the second airbrake, like the ﬁ rst, operates in the same way across all ﬂ ight phases.

173Detail program description - Wing mixersAIFLFLAIServo 1Servo 9You can assure yourself that this works as stated by accessing the »Servo display« menu, accessible from almost any menu level with a brief simultaneous tap on the ef keys on the left touch pad (see page 262):1357911131500000000+100000+100000246810121416If this relatively simply variant should prove impossible for whichever reasons, then the alternative is a solution with two free mixers – and potentially involving the »Mix only channel«menu, page 205.In either case, however, the airbrake travels must then be ﬁ ne-tuned on the »Servo adjustment«menu, page 102.Diff. reductElevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%FLAP0%Diff. reductFL20% 0%0%Earlier, we discussed the problems with the butterﬂ y (crow) conﬁ guration. Namely: that with the use of aileron differential, the aileron effect can be strongly (negatively) affected by the aileron elevation. This is ﬁ rstly because further deﬂ ection of the one aileron upwards is (almost) no longer possible and secondly because the downward-deﬂ ected aileron – depending on the elevation and degree of differential conﬁ gured – is often unable to achieve even its "normal" position.To be able to restore the effect of the aileron altered in this way as far as possible, you should ensure that you make use of the automated "Differential reduction" feature. This feature continuously reduces the degree of aileron differential as the airbrake system is extended. The feature is conﬁ gurable and can even be set to suppress differential entirely. A value of 0 % means that the "aileron differential" set at the transmitter remains fully in force. An entry that equals the % value set for aileron differential means the differential is fully eliminated once the butterﬂ y function is at maximum travel, i.e. with ﬂ aps fully extended. Setting a reduction value greater than the aileron differential conﬁ gured will eliminate the latter even before the full travel of the airbrake joystick.Values can be set in the range 0 to 150 %.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %. Elevat. curve (Brake ¼ Elevator)Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%FLAP0%Diff. reductFL20% 0%0%If the airbrake control – to be set to 1, 7, 8 or 9 on the "Brake Offset" line of the »Model type« menu, page 95 – is used to extend the ﬂ aps as described previously for the "Brake settings" menu, this will often have a negative effect on the aircraft model's airspeed. This mixer can be used to compensate this type of effect by applying a corrective value to the elevator. A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will switch to the display screen shown below:BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput –100%0%L+–100¼O U T P U T0%ElevatorNormalSetting notices for "Elevat. curve" (Brake ¼Elevator)The offset set in the »Model type« menu, page 94, affects this mixer.The vertical line on the display that indicates the position of the airbrake control only moves from the edge of the graph when the conﬁ gured offset is exceeded. In doing so, airbrake control travel is automatically expanded back to 100 %, as described in the »Model type« menu.Accordingly, the mixer's neutral point always lies on the left edge, independently of the offset conﬁ gured.Now adjust the elevator curve in the direction of the opposite end-point in accordance with requirements. Note that this method for setting the 5-point curve mixer follows the same principles that are applicable to the curve mixers, already described on page 128 in the context of the »Channel 1 curve« menu.

174 Detail program description - Wing mixersA simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.Aileron 2 ¼ 4 rudderBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalMulti-flap menuFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂ y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The mixer direction is typically chosen to ensure that the rudder moves in the direction of the aileron that is deﬂ ected upwards.Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick.The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the direction of deﬂ ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired. A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.A value of around 50 % is generally an excellent starting point.Flaps 6 ¼ 3 elevatorBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalMulti-flap menuFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63When setting camber-changing ﬂ aps, one side-effect can be to generate moments causing movement around the transverse axis. Equally, however, it may also be desirable that e.g. your aircraft model opts for a more pacey ﬂ ight style with the ﬂ aps slightly raised. This mixer can be used to achieve both results.With this mixer, the extension of the ﬂ aps – depending on the value conﬁ gured – automatically ensures the elevator position follows suit. Symmetrical or asymmetrical settings relative to the neutral point of the ﬂ ap control are possible.If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by assigning a switch in the right column.Values can be set in the range 150 to 150 %. The "typical" values conﬁ gured for this mixer are single-digit or low two-digit values.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.Note:If a transmitter control or switch has been assigned in the »Control adjust« menu, as described under "VFLW" on page 171, then that setting will also have an effect on this mixer. BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput +100%–25%H+–100¼O U T P U T–25%ElevatorNormalThe selected setting should certainly be tried out in sufﬁ cient altitude and, if necessary, readjusted. When doing this, be sure to pay attention that the model does not slow down too much while the brake system is extended! Otherwise, you run the risk that, after the braking system is retracted, e.g. to extend a landing approach that was too short, for example, your model pancakes or even stalls.Aileron differential(Only for "2AIL 1FL". For the "2AIL 2/4 FL" selection, this is included on the Multi-ﬂ ap menu, see page170.)Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalMulti-flap menuOn this line you can set the aileron differential for the two aileron servos.If you are unsure about the meaning of differential travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the start of this section on page 161.The setting range of -100 % to +150 % permits correct differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of aileron and ﬂ ap servos.

176 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer Helicopter mixerFlight phase-speciﬁ c setting of collective pitch, throttle and tail rotorIn this menu …Control adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchesPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer… all of the ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c helicopter mixers are described, with the exception of the mixers for auto-rotation ﬂ ight (discussed from page 190 onward.) These mixers are used for the basic set-up of a model helicopter.For ﬂ ight phase programming, see the menus:»• Basic settings, model«, page 84»• Phase settings«, page 146»• Phase assignment«, page 148When the switch for a speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phase is actuated, then the name of the given ﬂ ight phase, e.g. «Normal», will be displayed at the lower left edge of the display screen:Channel 1Channel 1PitchGasHeckrotorTail rot. 0%Roll 0%GasRollGasHeckrotorNickNickGasHeckrotorSwashplate rotationSwashplate limiter0%0%0%0°OffGyro suppression 0%Gyro offset 0%NormalIn each of these ﬂ ight phases – with the exception of the auto-rotation phase – the typical helicopter mixing and coupling functions shown in the screen-shot above are available for setting up the model helicopter. These functions are described in the ﬁ rst part of this comprehensive chapter.General information on mixers, (see also pages 159 and 192)An arrow "¼" indicates a mixer. A mixer "branches off" the signal ﬂ ow of a control function at a particular point, in order to use this ﬂ ow to cause a predetermined effect on a further control channel and, ultimately, the receiver output. "Pitch ax ¼ Tail rot" mixer means, for example, that when the pitch-axis joystick is actuated, the tail rotor servo must also react within the scope of its setting.Basic programming procedure:Select the mixer by using the selection keys of the 1. left or right touch pad.Depending on the mixer involved, the bottom display line will show either SEL or the ¨ (indicating a change to a second page is necessary).A brief tap on the center 2. SET key of the right touch pad will permit direct settings for linear mixer ratios. Use the selection keys to set the mixer ratio.Otherwise you will need to switch to the second screen page where you can set up the appropriate curve mixer.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.Another tap on the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.A tap on the center 4. ESC key of the left touch pad will cause a return to the previous display page.Description of helicopter mixersTo set collective pitch curves as well as the two mixers, "Channel 1 ¼ Throttle" and "Channel 1 ¼Tail rotor", there are curve mixers available in all ﬂ ight phases. Accordingly, these mixers also permit the programming of non-linear mixing ratios along the path of joystick travel, if required. Switch to the display screen for curve settings with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, see description below.The curve is set up basically in the same way as the Channel 1 curve for helicopters, but we will describe it again here in detail using pitch conﬁ guration as an example, to save you having to leaf through the manual.In the remaining lines, ﬁ rst activate the value ﬁ eld and then use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to set a mixer value in the value ﬁ eld (inverse video).The settings available are rounded off with the "Swashplate limiter" option: This option can be set to restrict maximum deﬂ ection of the swashplate servo in the sense of a limiter. Together, these settings conﬁ gure the basic set-up of the helicopter model. In the "Autorotation" ﬂ ight phase as described on page 190, however, the mixers "Channel 1 ¼Throttle" and "Channel 1 ¼ Tail rot" are not needed and therefore switched to a conﬁ gurable default value.Changed parameters can be reset to their respective default values at any time with a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). Pitch (Pitch curve (Channel 1 ¼ Pitch))If necessary, use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move to the "Pitch" line then tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

177Detail program description - Helicopter mixerPitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –50%–50%?+–100¼O U T P U T0%NormalUnlike the »Channel 1 curve« menu, this display is only associated with the control curve of pitch servos, whereas the the "Channel 1 curve" affects all servos controlled by the throttle/pitch joystick.Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" option thus functions as an input signal for the collective pitch curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick and therefore follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.The control curve can be deﬁ ned (separately per ﬂ ight phase) by up to 8 points, termed "reference points", placed at any point along the joystick travel.Initially, however, fewer reference points are adequate for setting up the collective pitch curve. We recommend beginning with three reference points to start with. These three points, namely the two end-points "Pitch low (L)" (= -100 % control travel) and "Pitch high (H)" (= +100 % control travel) plus a point at the center of control travel still to be set, deﬁ ne an initially linear proﬁ le for the pitch curve.Programming detailsFirst, switch to your chosen ﬂ ight phase, e.g. «Normal».The throttle/collective pitch stick is used to move the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points "Point L" (minimum pitch at -100 %) and "Point H" (maximum pitch at +100 % control travel): at the same time, the current joystick position is shown numerically on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point at which the vertical line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at the maximum of 8 reference points within the range -125 % to +125 %. A control signal modiﬁ ed in this way affects only the collective pitch servos. In the example to the left, the joystick is at exactly 0 % of control travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, since the characteristic curve is linear.Up to six additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %.Setting reference pointsMove the joystick. If the display shows a framed question mark, then you can set the next reference point with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by its number and the value ﬁ eld to the right of the reference point number is highlighted:PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%1+–100¼O U T P U T0%Normal1The order in which up to six reference points are generated between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant since these reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered.Conﬁ guring reference pointsTo conﬁ gure a point, use the joystick to move the vertical line onto the point you wish to change. The number and current curve value of this point are displayed on the left side of the display, on the "Point" line. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to change the current curve value shown in the highlighted ﬁ eld. The possible range is -125 % to +125 % and changes do not affect neighboring reference points. PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%+75%1+–100¼O U T P U T+75%Normal1In this sample screen image, reference point "1" has been set to +75 %. If you wish, however, other points can also be set. At -50 %, for example …PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –50%–12%1+–100¼O U T P U T–12%Normal21… and/or a further point at +50 %:

178 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerPitchCurveoff PointOutputInput +50%+88%3+–100¼O U T P U T2+88%Normal13To do so, use the joystick to move to the corresponding area. As soon as a "?" appears in the marker frame on the "Point" line, the respective point can be set by touching the selection keys of the right touch pad. Just as with other points, this can be set …PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput +50%0%3+–100¼O U T P U T20%Normal13… or, reset again with a simultaneous tap on the cdor ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). The "L" and "H" points, on the other hand, CANNOT be deleted. Trim point functionAlternatively, a jump up or down to reference points already set, L, 1 … max. 6 and H, can be accomplished by using the ef selection keys on the left touch pad. The selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position.PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –50%–25%1+–100¼O U T P U T+50%NormalTrim point 1In this simple example, the pitch joystick – represented by the vertical line – is halfway between "Pitch minimum" and the midpoint of control travel (input = -50 %). However, "Point 1" will be relocated to control center at a point value of +50 %, resulting in a momentary output value of -25 %.One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch pad terminates this trim point function.Trim offset functionWhen a value ﬁ eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump up or down to reference points already set with the ef selection keys of the left touch pad and to make a change with the selection keys of the right touch pad, but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of the cd keys on the left touch pad. Starting with a point value for "Point 1" at 0 %, the control curves in both of the following ﬁ gures have been vertically shifted within the ±25 % range by the trim offset function:PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%–25%1+–100¼O U T P U T–25%NormalTrim offset1PitchCurveoff PointOutputgInput 0%+25%1+–100¼O U T P U T+25%NormalTrim offset1A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will also terminate this function.Trim x-axis functionThis function is activated by tapping the left (e) or right (f) selection key of the right touch pad with an active (i.e. inverse video) value ﬁ eld. You can then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish. In the ﬁ gure below, "Point 1" which was just shifted to +50 % with the trim point function, will now be shifted to the left:PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%+67%?+–100¼O U T P U T+50%NormalTrim X-axis 1Notes:If the point is repositioned horizontally further •away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line Point. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signiﬁ es that a further point can be set at the current control position.

179Detail program description - Helicopter mixerPlease note that the percentage value on the •"Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point.Smoothing the collective pitch curveIn the example below, sample reference points have been set …reference point 1 to +50 %,reference point 2 to +75 % andreference point 3 to -50 %… as described in the last section.PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–50%3+–100¼O U T P U T2–50%Normal13This "jagged" curve proﬁ le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief tap on the d selection key of the left touch pad. This will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) on" (or vice versa).PitchCurveon PointOutputInput +50%–50%3+–100¼O U T P U T2–50%Normal13Notes:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact •reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position.The ﬁ gures on these pages show control curves •created only for the purpose of illustration. Please note, therefore, that the curve characteristics displayed do not in any way represent real-life collective pitch curves. A speciﬁ c application example can be found in the programming examples on page 312.The following three graphs show typical 3-point pitch curves for various ﬂ ight phases, such as hovering, aerobatics and 3D ﬂ ight.The vertical bar depicts the current joystick position. Please note that trim values greater than +100 % and less than -100 % cannot be presented in the display.Sample collective pitch curves for various ﬂ ight phases:OutputOutputOutputControl travel Control travel Control travelAerobatics 3DHoverNotice about marker keys:If marker keys have been set in the »Basic settings, model« menu, page 91, touching a key while in this graph will set a dashed vertical line to show the position of the C1 joystick at the time the key was pressed.PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100¼O U T P U T10%NormalMove the C1 joystick (continuous line) to the marker line in order to read out the input and output values.If the marker line, for example, indicates momentary hovering ﬂ ight and this is to be put exactly in control center then it is only necessary to transfer the "output" value of the marker line, in this example, shift control center to reference point "1".Erasing reference pointsTo delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its associated value is shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above), following activation of the value ﬁ eld on the "Point" line now in inverse video with a simultaneous tap on thecd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) it can be erased. Complete the operation with a brief tap on the center key ESC of the left touch pad. Channel 1 ¼ Throttle (Throttle curve)Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput +25%+25%?+–100¼O U T P U T+50%ThrottleNormalUnlike the »Channel 1 curve« menu, this display is only associated with the control curve of the throttle servo, whereas the the "Channel 1 curve" affects all servos controlled by the throttle/pitch joystick.Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" menu thus functions as an input signal for the throttle curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick and therefore follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.The throttle curve can also be deﬁ ned (separately

180 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerper ﬂ ight phase) by up to 8 points, termed "reference points", placed at any point along the joystick travel.The reference points are deﬁ ned, adjusted and erased in the usual way, as explained in the previous section on the collective pitch curve. Start by deﬁ ning the throttle curve with three points, namely the points "L" and "H" at the extremes, plus the Point "1" still to be set in the control center in order to match the motor power curve to the collective pitch curve.Helicopter with carburetor or electric drive system with speed CONTROLLERThis setting relates only to the control curve of the throttle servo or the speed controller.Setting the throttle curve to suit a helicopter equipped with a speed controller is discussed in the following section.As with the conﬁ guration of the collective pitch curve (see previous page), the throttle curve can also be deﬁ ned by up to 8 points.In each case, set the control curve so that •when the throttle/collective pitch stick is in its end position, the carburetor is fully open or the controller of an electrically-powered helicopter is set to maximum (except for auto-rotation ﬂ ight, see page 190).For the hover point, which is normally at the •control center, the carburetor setting or power control for the speed controller must be matched to the collective pitch curve so that the correct system rotational speed is obtained. At the minimum position of the throttle/collective •pitch stick, the throttle curve must ﬁ rst be conﬁ gured so that a glow motor runs at a speed considerably higher than idle speed and the clutch is ﬁ rmly engaged.Starting and stopping of the motor – whether combustion or electric drive – always takes place within the given ﬂ ight phase as a consequence of the throttle limiter and the "Thr. CutOff" option (see below).This makes it unnecessary to program the two ﬂ ight phases that may be familiar to you from using other remote control systems – namely "with idle-up" and "without idle-up", and with the associated "waste" of a ﬂ ight phase for this purpose – since the mc-20 HoTT program offers a much more ﬂ exible approach to ﬁ ne-tuning and optimizing increases to system rotational speed below the hover point than the "idle-up" approach taken by older mc remote control systems.Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before starting a motor with carburetor, i.e. so that the carburetor can be adjusted within the idle range only with trim. Ensure that you follow the safety instructions on page 189 at all times. If the throttle is set too high when switching on the transmitter, you will receive audible and visible warnings!#02 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.04.1V0:00.0000000:00hMVStarlet Thr toohigh!H-J SandbrunnerNormalThe following three graphs show (typical) 3-point throttle curves for various ﬂ ight phases, such as hovering aerobatics and 3D ﬂ ight.Sample throttle curves for various ﬂ ight phases:+100% +100% +100%-100%-100%-100%OutputOutputOutput234 51234 51234 51Control travel Control travel Control travelHover Aerobatics 3DNotes on using the "throttle limit" function:The throttle limit function should be used in any •case (»Control adjust« menu, page 117). At the rear limit of the default transmitter control, the right-side throttle limit proportional rotary slider, the throttle servo is completely decoupled from the throttle curve, the motor is at idle and will respond only to C1 trim. This option permits the motor to be started in any ﬂ ight phase and to shut the motor off with the "Thr. CutOff" option.

181Detail program description - Helicopter mixerOnce the motor has started, push the throttle limiter s l o wly in the direction of the opposite end-point to put actuation of the throttle servo fully under the control of the throttle/collective pitch joystick once again. In order to prevent the throttle servo from being restricted by the throttle limiter in the full throttle direction, set control travel on the plus-side of the column labeled "travel" to +125 % in the "Tl16" line of the »Control adjust« menu. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to conﬁ gure this setting globally for all ﬂ ight phases.For a more ﬁ nely-tuned control travel curve for the throttle limit control, you can also use the "Expo throttle limiter" (page 100). This gives you the option of deﬁ ning the idle setting at the throttle limit control's center position, as readily determined both visually and audibly.Set the throttle limiter to its center position and adjust the "EXPO thro lim." value as far as is needed until the motor is idling smoothly with the throttle limit control set at its center point. In this position, the motor will then start without any problems. To switch off, turn or push the throttle limit control – that is, without C1 cutoff trim – to its rearmost end-point. As you do, ensure that the affected servo cannot hit an end-stop mechanically.The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter is made visible as a horizontal bar in the diagram:Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput +50%+50%?+–100¼O U T P U T+50%ThrottleNormalThe output signal for the throttle servo can never be higher than that set by the horizontal bar. In this example, about a maximum of +25 %.Since electric drive systems have no need for an •idle setting, the basic conﬁ guration of settings for an electrically-powered helicopter merely involves making sure that the control range of the throttle limiter is both higher and lower than the adjustment range of the speed controller (usually -100 % to +100 %) by a safe margin. If necessary, therefore, adjust the "travel" setting of the throttle limiter as appropriate on the "Tl16" line of the »Control adjust« menu. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to conﬁ gure this setting globally for all ﬂ ight phases. Fine-tuning of the throttle curve itself, however, must take place in ﬂ ight – as with a glow-powered helicopter.If you wish to record the ﬂ ight time of a (glow-•powered) helicopter, you can assign a control switch to the throttle limit slider, and then use this to switch a timer on and off; see page 135.For auto-rotation ﬂ ight, an automatic switch-over is made from this mixer to a conﬁ gurable default value; see page 190. Helicopter with speed CONTROLLERUnlike speed controllers, which merely adjust output level in a manner similar to a carburetor, a speed regulator keeps speed in the system it monitors constant by regulating its output autonomously. In the case of combustion motor powered helicopters, the regulator therefore controls the throttle servo itself as appropriate or, for an electric helicopter, the motor's speed controller. Therefore, speed regulators do not need a traditional throttle curve but rather only a speed setting. A deviation from the preset speed will therefore only take place if the level of output required exceeds the maximum level available.Usually, receiver output 8 is reserved for connecting a speed regulator; refer to the receiver layout on page 65. However, if this connection is used there will be no throttle limit function because the throttle limit function can only be implemented via the "Channel 1 ¼Throttle" mixer which is on the – then unused – output 6.To make the comfort and safety features of a throttle limiter available, a speed regulator should be connected to receiver output 6 (contrary to the general connection notices) and only requires appropriate adaptation to the throttle curve so it can take over the task of the "conventional" transmitter control. Since in this case the "throttle curve" only regulates the target speed of the motor controller and this target motor speed should typically remain constant over the entire collective pitch adjustment range, the "Channel 1¼ Throttle" mixer must be used to set a horizontal line – i.e. every (pitch) input value will result in the same ("throttle") output value – whose "height" is deﬁ ned by the target motor speed. First, therefore, the reference points "1" to "6" – if present and set – are erased. Following this, the reference points "L" (input = -100 %) and "H" (input = +100 %) are then each set to the same value, for example:

182 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerChannel 1 Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%+66%L+–100¼O U T P U T+66%ThrottleNormalThe value to be set depends both on the speed controller used and on the target motor speed that is desired, and can, of course, be varied according to the ﬂ ight phase.For auto-rotation ﬂ ight, an automatic switch-over is made from this mixer to a conﬁ gurable default value; see page 190.Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput +100%+30%H+–100¼O U T P U T+30%Tail rot.NormalStarting with values of -30 % for point "L" and +30 % for point "H", the mixer is to be conﬁ gured in such a way that the helicopter, even during prolonged vertically ascending or descending ﬂ ights, does not deviate from the yaw axis as a result of the main rotor's altered torque while hovering. For hovered ﬂ ight, trim should only be affected by way of the (digital) tail rotor trim wheel. For a reliable torque compensation setting, it is essential that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been set up correctly, i.e. that the rotor speed remains constant over the collective pitch's full adjustment range.This third curve mixer applies only to the control curve of the tail rotor servo when the throttle/collective pitch stick is moved, whereas the "Channel 1 curve" (see page 131) acts on all servos that are affected by the throttle/collective pitch stick. Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" option also functions as an input signal for the tail rotor curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick and follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic from the »Channel 1 curve« menu.In the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase this mixer is automatically switched off. Channel 1 ¼Tail rot. (static torque compensation)Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%+–100¼O U T P U T0%Tail rot.?NormalThe default approach here is to preset a torque compensation curve with a linear mixer ratio of a uniform 0 %, as is required for a gyro sensor working in "heading lock mode" – see the screen image above. Important notice:In this context, ensure that you comply with the instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, you risk making adjustments that render your helicopter impossible to ﬂ y.If, on the other hand, you use your gyro sensor in the "normal" operating mode, or if it only has what is termed "normal mode", then conﬁ gure the mixer as follows:As with the conﬁ guration of the collective pitch curve (see page 176), the control curve of the tail rotor can also be deﬁ ned by up to 6 points. If required, therefore, you can modify the mixer at any time and preset both symmetrical and asymmetric mixer ratios both above and below the hover point. Before you do, however, ensure you have entered the correct direction of rotation for the main rotor on the »Helicopter type« menu.

183Detail program description - Helicopter mixer Tail rotor ¼ throttleChannel 1Channel 1PitchThrottleTail rot.Tail rot. 0%Roll 0%ThrottleThrottleSELNormalWhile the tail rotor normally compensates for the effect of main rotor torque on the fuselage, it is also used to control the helicopter around the vertical axis. Increasing tail rotor thrust requires a corresponding adjustment to motor power, however, to avoid a fall-off in system rotational speed.This mixer sets the extent to which the throttle follows the tail rotor. The throttle will follow on one side only, to the side on which the tail rotor thrust is increased. The setting range is therefore 0 to +100 %. The direction depends on the main rotor's direction of rotation (left or right), and this must ﬁ rst be set correctly on the »Helicopter type« menu. For left-hand rotation systems, the throttle follows the tail rotor when the tail rotor joystick is moved to the left, and vice versa for right-hand rotation systems.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.In the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase this mixer is automatically switched off.Set-up notes:To set the mixer value accurately you should either ﬁ rst ﬂ y several high-speed pirouettes against the direction of main rotor rotation or, if a strong wind is blowing, hover at right angles to the wind with a sufﬁ ciently large tail rotor deﬂ ection. Set the mixer value so that there is no fall-off in system rotational speed.Increasing pitch is not the only change that requires a corresponding torque compensation via the tail rotor: major cyclic control movements also require this, e.g. if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. Here, too, the mc-20 HoTT program lets you conﬁ gure settings for both types of tilt movement (roll and pitch-axis) separately.For advanced aerobatics in particular, which involve very large control deﬂ ections in the pitch-axis controls, e.g. the "Bo-turn" (vertical pull-up followed by tipping over around the pitch-axis) and tight loops, the uncompensated torque present in these ﬂ ights causes the model to turn to a greater or lesser degree around the yaw axis. This spoils the appearance of the maneuver.These two mixers permit static torque compensation to be activated by the swashplate tilting in any direction. The mixers work by always increasing tail rotor thrust, starting from the center point of the roll and pitch-axis sticks, i.e. they always generate a tail rotor deﬂ ection in the same direction regardless of the direction of the command.The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to +100 %.The mixer direction is determined automatically by your deﬁ nition of the direction of main rotor rotation on the »Helicopter type« menu, page 98.In the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase this mixer is automatically switched off. Gyro suppressionRoll 0%ThrottleSELRoll Tail rot.Nick Throttle0%0%Nick Tail rot. 0%Gyro suppression 0%Normal Roll ¼ Throttle and Pitch axis ¼ ThrottleChannel 1 Tail rot.Tail rot. 0%Roll 0%ThrottleThrottleSELRoll Tail rot.Nick Throttle0%0%NormalIncreasing collective pitch is not the only change that requires the throttle to follow suit: major cyclic control movements also require this, i.e. if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. The mc-20 HoTT program lets you adjust the degree of throttle follow separately for roll and pitch-axis controls.This offers particular advantages in aerobatic ﬂ ying, e.g. when ﬂ ying a roll: here, with moderate collective pitch values and the carburetor only about half-open, cyclic control travels are nonetheless executed that require much higher performance from the motor.The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to +100 %. The correct mixer direction is automatically taken into account.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.In the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase this mixer is automatically switched off. Roll ¼ Tail rot. and Pitch axis ¼ Tail rot.Tail rot. 0%Roll 0%ThrottleThrottleSELRoll Tail rot.Nick Throttle0%0%Nick Tail rot. 0%Normal

184 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerImportant: in normal situations, this function should not be used if your model is ﬁ tted with a modern gyro system. In this context, ensure that you comply with the instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, you risk making adjustments that render your helicopter impossible to ﬂ y. This menu has nonetheless been retained in order to cater to a full range of requirements and ﬂ ying habits.With this option, the effect of the gyro sensor ("gyro") can be varied according to the tail rotor joystick position; this assumes the use of a gyro system whose gyro gain can be controlled from the transmitter via an auxiliary channel. This channel will be channel 7 for Graupner remote control systems. The gyro suppression function reduces gyro gain in a linear progression as the pilot increases the tail rotor deﬂ ection. Without gyro suppression – i.e. when set to 0 % – the gyro effect is constant, regardless of the joystick position.With a transmitter control assigned on the "Gyr7" line on the »Control adjust« menu (page 116), e.g. one of the proportional sliders mounted in the middle console; as applicable, also made ﬂ ight-phase dependent and/or with inﬁ nitely variable gyro effect between minimum and maximum. In this case, gyro gain is maximum at full deﬂ ection of the slider, and zero at the opposite end-point.Of course, the software lets you limit the gyro gain range on both sides by altering the transmitter control travel.Depending on the transmitter control's position, the gyro gain at full travel on the tail rotor joystick is:"current control positionminusgyro suppression value".Accordingly, if the transmitter control is at the neutral point, and gyro suppression is set to 100 %, the gyro gain is reduced to zero as the tail rotor if the assigned transmitter control is moved to the +50 % position (as shown here); and only at >150 % suppression is gain reduced to zero with the slider at this position, well before full tail rotor deﬂ ection.Exemple:+50 %Í Gyro gain ÎleftStick deflection tail rotorcentre rightRange of transmittercontrol 7Linear gyro suppression with reduced control •travel, e.g. -50 % to +80 % of full travel. Gyro gain is inﬁ nitely variable within these transmitter control limits. Here too, for purposes of illustration, we plot gyro gain values in relation to tail rotor deﬂ ection for various parameter values of gyro suppression.Exemple:+80 %Í Gyro gain ÎleftStick deflection tail rotorcentre rightRange oftransmittercontrol 7Adjusting the gyro sensorTo achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the deﬂ ection increases. For values between 100 % and the maximum value of 199 %, the gyro can be fully suppressed – depending on the transmitter control position – well before full deﬂ ection of the tail rotor; see the diagram on the next page.For the Graupner/JR gyro NEJ-120 BB, order no. 3277, both the upper and the lower values are set via rotary controls: control 1 sets the minimum gyro gain at the bottom position of the slider; control 2 sets the maximum gain at the top end-point of the slider; the transition between these two values occurs roughly in the middle of the slider travel. In contrast, the PIEZO 900, PIEZO 2000 and PIEZO 3000 gyro systems feature proportional, inﬁ nitely variable adjustment of gyro gain; see below for typical diagrams.As an example, the option to conﬁ gure ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c – and static – gyro gain gives you the opportunity to exploit maximum stabilization for normal, slow ﬂ ying, but to reduce gyro gain for fast circuits and aerobatics.Samples of various gyro settings and conﬁ guration notesLinear gyro suppression: 0 % to 199 %. •With the tail rotor joystick in the center position, the resulting gyro effect is set using the selected transmitter control. Using a proportional rotary control or slider, the effect is inﬁ nitely variable between zero ("min") and maximum ("max"), provided transmitter control travel is not restricted. With full tail rotor deﬂ ection, the effective gyro gain is as follows:"current control positionminusgyro suppression value".This means that at 0 % gyro suppression, gyro gain is constant for tail rotor joystick movement; at 50 % suppression, gyro gain is reduced to half

185Detail program description - Helicopter mixervertical axis, observe the following:The controls should have as little friction and •"play" as possible.There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.•Use a strong and comparably fast servo. •When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the faster its response – a corresponding corrective change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causing the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be made to eliminate the oscillation.If the model is ﬂ ying forward at high speed or hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing effect of the vertical ﬁ n combined with the gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, you can make use of the option to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter using a transmitter control assigned to input "7", in connection with gyro suppression and/or the two settings on the Gyro NEJ-120 BB. Further notes on gyros with conﬁ gurable multilevel gyro gain (e.g. NEJ-120 BB)Since you cannot specify the gyro gain from the transmitter proportionally via the transmitter control, the gyro's own control 1 must be used to set the (weaker) gyro gain (e.g. for aerobatics) and control 2 the stronger gyro gain (e.g. for hovered ﬂ ight). Even though a proportional control is used for control function 7, only a switch-over between these two values takes place and the setting is therefore not proportional. You should therefore advance control 2 to the point where the model is on the brink of oscillating when hovering in calm conditions, and advance control 1 to SELRoll Tail rot.Nick Throttle0%0%Nick Tail rot. 0%Gyro suppression 0%Gyro offset 0%NormalBased on these ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c (offset) settings, gyro gain can also be inﬁ nitely varied by a transmitter control assigned in the "Gyr7" line of the »Control adjust« menu, page 116. Swashplate rotationSELNick Throttle 0%0%Nick Tail rot.0%Gyro suppression0%Swashplate rotation 0°Gyro offsetNormalSome rotor head control systems make it necessary to incline the swashplate in a different direction from the intended inclination of the rotor plane when a cyclic control command is given. If your model features a four-bladed main rotor, for example, you may need to use this menu to set up a software-driven 45° rotation of the control linkage to the right, so that the pushrods from the swashplate to the rotor head can be set exactly vertical, ensuring that the blade control system works correctly, without unwanted differential effects. This eliminates the need to make mechanical changes to the control linkages. Negative angles equate to a virtual rotation of the rotor head to the left; positive angles a virtual rotation to the right.the point where the model does not oscillate with its tail even when ﬂ ying at maximum speed into a strong headwind. Depending on the state of the weather and the ﬂ ight program planned, you can also switch over the gyro gain from the transmitter – also with gyro suppression dependent on tail rotor deﬂ ection if required. Gyro offsetImportant notice:The value of this option is identical to the offset value set in the "Gyr7" line of the »Control adjust« menu, page 116. For this reason, any changes made always affect the other menu directly – and vice versa.Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature inﬁ nitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but also offer a choice of two separate types of gain mode on the transmitter. If the gyro in use has at least one of these features then this alternative offset setting provides an opportunity to preset both "normal" gyro gain as well as, as appropriate, to specify a "heading-lock mode" whereby, even within this pre-selection, gyro gain can be reduced by a particular gain type for normal, slow ﬂ ight with maximum ﬂ ight stabilization, fast circuit ﬂ ights and aerobatics. To proceed as described above, use ﬂ ight phase switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro offset" line. Values between -125 % and +125 % are possible:

186 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer Swashplate limiterSEL0%Nick Tail rot.0%Gyro suppression0%Swashplate rotation 0°Swashplate limiter offGyro offsetNormalThis function works like a circular mechanical surround acting upon the stick which controls the swashplate, restricting the normally square stick travel to a circular range. In fact, if the helicopter is set up in such a way that the deﬂ ections for roll and/or pitch-axis exploit the maximum travel mechanically possible, e.g. for 3D helicopters, then the total tilt applied to the swashplate if full roll and pitch-axis commands are applied simultaneously will be considerably greater (141 % in numerical terms). The swashplate mechanism may then strike its end-stops and, in the worst case, the ball-links could even be disengaged.The mc-20 HoTT transmitter contains a conﬁ gurable software function for limiting the total swashplate travel, i.e. it restricts the tilt angle of the swashplate from 100 % (the travel is limited to the value obtainable either with roll or pitch-axis alone) to 149 % (no effective limit). In addition, the function can be set to "Off" and hence completely deactivated. The swash limiter can also be conﬁ gured per model and per ﬂ ight phase. This software solution is therefore much more ﬂ exible than a physical circular surround attached to the stick unit: the latter can, in any case, only be used if the roll and pitch-axis functions are controlled by a common stick unit.The adjacent sketch illustrates the effect for a 100 % setting. the cross-hatched area of travel is curtailed and appears as a "dead zone".If this function is used, "Dual Rate" should be set to 100 % and Dual Rate values above 100 % should also not be used. If not, and you set a swashplate limit of 100 %, for example, then swashplate movement will be restricted even if roll and pitch-axis commands are given separately.Setting range: 100 … 149 % and "off".

187Detail program description - Helicopter mixer Fine-tuning the throttle and collective pitch curvePractical approachAlthough the throttle and collective pitch control systems are based on separate servos, they are always operated together by the throttle/pitch joystick (except during autorotation ﬂ ight). This coupling is performed by the helicopter program automatically. In the mc-20 HoTT program, the trim wheel of control function 1 acts principally only on the throttle servo. However, in the »Stick mode« menu (see page 106) a decision can be made if this should be used for idle trimming as part of the throttle limit function, or for idle trimming during the auto-rotation phase ("throttle AR").The process of ﬁ ne-tuning throttle and collective pitch, i.e. setting the motor power curve to match the collective blade pitch setting, is the most important aspect of setting up a model helicopter. The mc-20 HoTT software provides for independent conﬁ guration of the throttle, collective pitch and torque compensation curves, in addition to the C1 control curve (»Channel 1 curve« menu, page 131). While these curves can be modeled using up to six points, fewer points are generally sufﬁ cient. We recommend starting with three-point curves to begin with. This involves setting individual values for the center point and other (optional) reference points, and for the two end-points ("L", "low", and "H", "high") of the throttle/collective pitch stick: together, these deﬁ ne the control curves. Before setting the throttle and collective pitch function, the rods of all servos should be mechanically pre-adjusted correctly according to the set-up instructions for the given helicopter.Note:The hover point should normally be set to the center position of the throttle / collective pitch stick. In special cases, e.g. for "3D" ﬂ ight, deviating hover points can also be programmed. For example, one point for normal ﬂ ight attitude above the center and one point for inverted ﬂ ight attitude below the center. Idle setting and throttle curveNote:Since electric drive systems have no need for an idle setting, motor idling does not need to be calibrated. Fine-tuning of the throttle and collective pitch curve(s), however, must take place as for glow-powered helicopters.The idle setting, whose detailed description begins on page 117, always takes place with the throttle limiter closed – normally with the trim wheel of the C1 function and only in special cases is the throttle limiter itself also utilized (as standard, the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control). The programming of a corresponding value for the "L" point of the throttle curve acts to set the descent speed of the motor, without inﬂ uencing the hover conﬁ guration.Here, for example, ﬂ ight phase programming can be used to set different throttle curves. This increased system rotational speed below the hover point proves to be useful in certain circumstances, e. g. for fast, steep landing approaches with greatly reduced collective pitch, and for aerobatics.The ﬁ gure depicts a curve with a slightly changeable throttle setting below the hover point at the control center. +100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelDifferent throttle curves are programmed to be ﬂ ight-phase dependent in order to achieve the given optimal adaptation to hovering ﬂ ight as well as aerobatics:Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle •control response and low noise when hoveringHigher rotor speed for aerobatics with motor power •set close to the maximum. In this case, the throttle curve must also be adjusted in the hover range. Basic set-up procedureEven though pitch and throttle curves can be set electronically over a wide range with the mc-20 HoTT transmitter, all linkage in the model should already be mechanically pre-adjusted correctly according to the instructions for the given helicopter. Experienced helicopter pilots will be glad to help with this basic set-up.The carburetor linkage must be set so that the throttle is just past the fully open setting with collective pitch set to maximum or, for electric helicopters, with the speed controller set to full. When the throttle limiter is closed, however, it must be possible to just close off the carburetor using the C1 trim wheel (rapid throttle setting of the "digital trim", see page 58 ), without the servo mechanically striking its end-stop. For electric helicopters, it must be possible to cut the electric motor's speed controller safely with the throttle limiter closed.Take great care when conﬁ guring these settings, by adjusting the control linkage as required and/or altering the linkage point on the servo or carburetor lever. Only then should the throttle servo's ﬁ ne-tuning be electronically optimized.Caution:Inform yourself thoroughly about the dangers and safety precautions applicable to handling motors and helicopters before starting the motor for the ﬁ rst time!With this basic set-up complete, the motor should be started in accordance with the motor operating instructions: idling can then be conﬁ gured using the trim wheel of the throttle/collective pitch stick. The preset idle position will be displayed on the transmitter's basic display by a horizontal bar next to the C1 trim wheel position indicator. Refer to the description of digital trim on page 58 of this manual.

188 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerthe collective pitch stick to its end-point. Compared to the hover conﬁ guration, motor speed should remain unchanged. If motor speed falls off in the climb, even with the drive system working at full power and therefore no further power increase is possible, then reduce maximum blade pitch angle at full deﬂ ection of the collective pitch stick, i.e. the value of point "H". Conversely, the attack angle should be increased if motor speed is to increase while climbing. Therefore, on the "Pitch" graph page, put the vertical line on Point "H" by moving the pitch joystick then change this point's value appropriately with the cd selection keys of the right touch pad. This diagram shows only the changes when setting the maximum collective pitch value.+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointThen bring the model back to hover, which should, in turn, be achieved with the C1 stick at its center point. If the hover ﬂ ight point is now achieved only by moving the pitch joystick away from its center point toward "higher" values then this deviation should be compensated by increasing the hover-ﬂ ight pitch value – i.e. for point "1" – a little until the model once again hovers with the joystick at its center point. Conversely, if the model hovers below the mid-point, correct this by reducing the angle of attack appropriately.It may also be necessary to correct the carburetor opening for the hover point (point "1") with "C1 ¼throttle".The model should lift off the ground with the collective pitch stick roughly at its center point and hover roughly at the expected rotational speed. If this is not the case, proceed as follows:1. The model does not lift off until the collective pitch stick is above the center point.a) Rotational speed is too lowRemedy: On the graph page for "Channel 1 ¼Throttle"increase the value for point "1".+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointb) Rotational speed is too high Remedy: Increase the blade angle of attack pitch by increasing the value of point "1" on the "Pitch" graph page.+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpoint2. The model lifts off before the center point is reached.a) Rotational speed is too high Remedy: Decrease the carburetor opening by reducing the value of point "1" on the graph page for "Channel 1 ¼Throttle".+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointb) Rotational speed is too low Remedy: Decrease the blade angle of attack pitch by reducing the value of point "1" on the graph page for "Pitch".+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointImportant:These settings must be reconﬁ gured until the model hovers at the correct rotational speed with the throttle/collective pitch stick at its center point. The conﬁ guration of all other model parameters depends on these settings being made correctly! Standard set-upStandard set-up is completed on the basis of the basic set-up described above, whereby the model hovers in normal ﬂ ight at the correct rotational speed with the throttle/collective pitch stick set to its center point: This means a set-up with which the model is capable of both hovering and ﬂ ying circuits in all phases while maintaining a constant rotational speed. Climb settingsThe combination of throttle hover setting, collective pitch setting for the hover and the maximum collective pitch setting (point "H") now permits, in a simple manner, a means of attaining a constant rotational speed from hovering right through to maximum climb.First, perform a prolonged, vertical climb by moving

189Detail program description - Helicopter mixerTherefore, after the motor is started, system rotational speed should be increased s l o wly by way of thethrottle limiter. If a switch has been assigned to the throttle limiter, always ensure the »Control adjust«"menu (page 112) is used to program a time constant of about 5 seconds to run up system rotational speed (opening the throttle limiter). Do not, however, program a delay for closing the throttle limiter. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to conﬁ gure this setting globally for all ﬂ ight phases.be a visual and an acoustic warning if the carburetor is open too wide when the transmitter is switched on. Otherwise, if the carburetor or speed controller is open too far when the motor starts, there is a danger that the motor will run up to speed immediately after starting, and the centrifugal clutch will engage immediately.Accordingly,always hold the rotor headﬁ rmly when starting.Nevertheless, if the motor is accidentally started with the carburetor too wide open, the golden rule is this:Don't panic!Hold the rotor head securely!Don't let go! Instead, close the throttle limiter immediately, even if this risks damaging the drive system (in the worst case scenario).YOU must ensurethe helicopter never movesin an uncontrolled manner. The costs of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the motor itself are negligible in comparison to the injuries and damage that an uncontrolled model helicopter can cause if it is allowed to thrash about with spinning rotor blades.Always make sure no other personis present in thehelicopter's hazard area.The switchover from idle to a ﬂ ight setting with increased system rotational speed must not take place abruptly. This will cause the rotor to accelerate very quickly, resulting in premature wear to the clutch and gear train. Since the main rotor blades are generally mounted on a freewheeling unit, they will be unable to keep pace with such rapid acceleration; they will respond by swinging far out of their normal position and may even cause a boom strike.This diagram shows only the change to the hover point, i. e. collective pitch minimum and maximum are both left at -100 % or +100 %.+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelModify these settings until they really result in a constant rotational speed over the full control range between hovering and climbing ﬂ ight. Descent settingThe descent setting should now be conﬁ gured by placing the model in a steady descent from forward ﬂ ight at a considerable altitude by fully reducing collective pitch; adjust the collective pitch minimum value (point "L") so that the model descends at an angle of 60° … 70 °. Therefore, on the "Pitch" graph page, put the vertical line on Point "L" by moving the pitch joystick then change this point's value appropriately with the selection keys of the right touch pad.This diagram shows only the changes when setting the minimum collective pitch value.+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointOnce the model can ﬂ y this maneuver properly, set the value for "Throttle min" – the value for point "L" on the graph page for "C1 ¼ throttle" – so that the rotational speed neither increases nor decreases. This completes the set-up procedure for throttle and collective pitch. Some important closing remarksBefore starting the motor, ensure that the throttle limiter is fully closed: this ensures that the carburetor now responds only to the C1 trim wheel. There will

190 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation settings Helicopter mixers Auto-rotation settingAuto-rotation permits both full-size and model helicopters to land safely in a crisis, e. g. if the motor should fail. Moreover, if the tail rotor should fail, cutting the motor and landing using auto-rotation is also the only possible way to avoid a high-speed, uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis and a resulting catastrophic crash – which is why a switchover TO the auto-rotation phase takes place immediately.When the switchover to the auto-rotation phase is made, the Helicopter mixer menu screen changes as follows:Pitch–90%Tail rot. offset AR 0%Thr. position ARGyro suppressionSwashplate rotationSwashplate limiter0%0°AUSGyro offset 0%AutorotDuring auto-rotation ﬂ ight, the main rotor is no longer driven by the motor but only by its own momentum and the the airﬂ ow through the rotor plane during descent. Since the energy stored by a rotor kept spinning in this way is rapidly consumed if the helicopter ﬂ ares, pilots must not only have experience in handling helicopter models but must also consider carefully how the relevant functions should be conﬁ gured.The advanced pilot should therefore practice auto-rotation landings at regular intervals. Not only to be able to demonstrate mastery of the maneuver at competitions, but also to ensure the pilot can can land the helicopter undamaged from a great height if the motor should fail. For this purpose, the program provides a range of adjustment options designed to help the pilot ﬂ y a motorized model in its unpowered state. Note that the auto-rotation settings comprise a complete seventh ﬂ ight phase, which provides access to all the ﬂ ight phase- speciﬁ c conﬁ guration options, and to trims, collective pitch curve settings, etc., in particular. The following functions have special features not present in the powered ﬂ ight phases:Pitch (Collective pitch curve (C1 ¼ Pitch))In powered ﬂ ight, the maximum blade pitch angle is limited by available motor power. In auto-rotation, however, it is limited only by the point at which airﬂ ow ceases over the main rotor blades. Greater maximum collective pitch must therefore be set to ensure sufﬁ cient thrust when ﬂ aring the helicopter even as rotational speed is falling off. To do so, brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to switch to the "Pitch" graph page and then use the joystick to move the vertical line to point "H". Start by setting a value that is about 10 to 20 % greater than your "normal" maximum value for collective pitch. Initially, however, do NOT set a value that is considerably greater than for normal ﬂ ight, since, if this is done, the behavior of the collective pitch controls may then be very unfamiliar following the switchover. Indeed, there is a danger that the pilot will oversteer during the ﬂ are and the model will balloon: this will case the rotor speed to collapse at a considerable altitude and the model will then crash to the ground. The value can always be readjusted later after ﬂ ying some test auto-rotations.The minimum value for collective pitch can differ from that set for normal ﬂ ight. This depends on the pilot's usual style for normal ﬂ ight. For auto-rotation, however, always set a sufﬁ ciently generous minimum value for collective pitch at point "L" to ensure the model can be brought out of forward ﬂ ight at moderate speed into a descent at an angle of around 60 … 70 degrees when collective pitch is reduced to a minimum. If, like most helicopter pilots, you have used this kind of setting for normal ﬂ ight anyway, then this value can simply be transferred.If, however, you normally let your model "fall" at a shallower angle, then you should increase the value at point "L", and vice versa.Approach angle for various wind conditionsApproach anglein moderate windno wind45°60°75°in strong windAs a rule, the collective pitch stick itself is not positioned right at the bottom of its travel for auto-rotation. Instead, it is typically between the hover position and the bottom end-point. This offers the pilot an option for further adjustment, e. g. via pitch inclination through pitch-axis controls.The approach can be shortened by pulling back slightly on the pitch-axis joystick and gently reducing pitch or by extending the approach by pushing forward on the pitch-axis joystick and carefully increasing pitch.Throttle setting AR Although pilots will be expected to cut the glow motor completely during competitions, This is rather inconvenient during training sessions because the motor must be restarted after every practice auto-rotation landing.Therefore, for training sessions, set this line's value such that a combustion motor is held at a safe idle without the clutch engaging during the auto-rotation phase; electric drive systems should be set safely to "Off". Note:The "Motor Stop" option in the »Base setup model«menu offers an alternative "Emergency STOP"

191Detail program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation settingsfunction.Tail rotor ARIn normal ﬂ ight, the tail rotor is set so that it compensates for motor torque while the model is hovering. It therefore generates some a certain amount of thrust even in its normal position. The level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control system, and also by the various mixers which provide all manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor trim is also used to compensate for varying weather conditions, ﬂ uctuations in system rotational speed and other inﬂ uences.For auto-rotation, however, the main rotor is not driven by the motor, but by the "windmill" principle. Since this, in turn, does not generate any torque for which the tail rotor must compensate, all corresponding mixers are switched off automatically.Since the absence of torque in auto-rotation also means the above-mentioned thrust is superﬂ uous, however, a different tail rotor conﬁ guration is also required:Cut the motor and place the helicopter on the ground in a level attitude. With the transmitter and receiving system switched on, select the ﬂ ight phase "Auto-rotation" and then fold the tail rotor blades down. Now change the value on the "Tail rotor" line until the tail rotor blade angle of attack is zero degrees. Viewed from the tail, the tail rotor blades should be parallel to one another. Depending on the friction and running resistance of the gearbox, the fuselage may still yaw slightly, however. This relatively slight torque must then be corrected if necessary by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle. This value will always be a ﬁ gure between zero degrees and a pitch angle opposed to the pitch angle in normal ﬂ ight.

192 General notes on freely programmable mixersThe previous pages have described a wealth of ready-to-use built-in coupling functions, in the context of the two menus »Wing mixers« and »Helicoptermixers«. The fundamental signiﬁ cance of mixers and the principle by which they work are described on page 159. The following section provides information about the so-called "free mixers". In addition to the pre-programmed mixers mentioned above, the mc-20 HoTT also offers a number of freely programmable mixers in every model memory location, whose inputs, outputs and mixer ratios can be deﬁ ned to meet one's own requirements. These include: 8 linear mixers, numbered 1 through 8•4 curve mixers, numbered 9 through 12•These 12 mixers are certainly adequate for most applications and are certainly sufﬁ cient when the potential of the pre-programmed coupling functions are utilized. In the »Mix active/phase« menu (see page 204), each of these 12 mixers can be activated or deactivated separately for each ﬂ ight phase.For the "free mixers", the signal present at any control function (1 to 16) can be assigned as the input signalor,for a so-called "switch channel" (see further below), the signal from any switch can be utilized. The signal that is present at the control channel and passed to the mixer input is always inﬂ uenced by its own transmitter control and by any control characteristic that may have been set, e. g. those speciﬁ ed by the »Dual Rate / Expo«, »Channel 1 curve« and »Control adjust« menus. The mixer output acts on a control channel (1 to – depending on receiver type – a maximum of 16) that can also be assigned freely. Before this channel routes the signal to the servo, it can only still be inﬂ uenced by the »Servo adjustments« menu, i.e. by the the servo reverse, neutral point offset, servo travel and servo travel limit functions, and possibly by »Tx. output swap«.One control function can be used for any number of mix inputs simultaneously: if, for example, several mixers are to be switched to act in parallel. Conversely, it is possible for any number of mixers to affect one and the same control channel. Particularly in the latter case, however, it is very important to ensure that the servo concerned does not strike its mechanical end-stops when several mixer signals accumulate excessively. For safety's sake, it may therefore be necessary to set an appropriate travel limit in the »Servo adjustments« menu.For more complex applications, mixers can be switched in sequence. In this case, it is not the (transmitter) signal at the "output" of a control function which forms the input signal of the "series-wired" mixer, but the (mixed) signal "further back" at the "input" of a control channel. The following description of the free mixers includes several examples of this type.In the software, one "free mixer" is always initially activated. Optionally the mixer can also be assigned to an ON/OFF switch. Since there are so many functions to which switches can be assigned, be careful to avoid (undesired) multiple assignments to a single switch.The two key mixer parameters are: … the • mixer ratio, which deﬁ nes the extent to which the input signal acts on the output of the control channel connected to the mixer output. The mixer ratio for linear mixers can be set as symmetrical or asymmetric. Curve mixers can also be conﬁ gured with up to 8 points to suit one's own application and even implement extremely non-linear curves.…• the neutral point of a mixer, which is also referred to as the "offset". The offset is that speciﬁ c point along the movement of a transmitter control (joystick, proportional control or switch) at which the mixer no longer inﬂ uences the control channel connected to its output. Normally, the neutral point is the center point of the transmitter control. However, the offset can also be set at any other point along the control travel. Since there are no restrictions on the design of the curve mixers, setting a mixer neutral point only makes sense for the 8 linear mixers.Switch channel "S" as a mixer inputOccasionally, however, only a constant control signal is required at the mixer output, e.g. for a slightly increased "up-elevator" trim when the aero-tow release is closed – fully independently of its normal trim setting.In this case a switch is assigned both to the aero-tow release and the mixer; it is then used not only to open and close the release, but also to pass the desired trim signal to the elevator via the mixer ratio. To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input control function in the program is designated "S" for "Switch channel". In addition, if the corresponding "target channel" should now no longer be inﬂ uenced by its "normal" transmitter control, isolate the latter from the function input of the affected control channel by way of the »MIX-only channel« menu (page 205). Here too, for clariﬁ cation of this there is an example of the function provided in the following menu description. General notes on freely programmable mixers

193Detail program description - Free mixersUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Channel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX aktiv / Phase… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.Regardless of the model type selected, each of the 80 model memory locations offers eight linear mixers (LinearMIX 1 …8) …??LinearMIX 1Mitte??––––from – Begr. +????––––????––––????––––????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5… and 4 curve mixers (CurveMIX 9 … 12), which also offer non-linear control characteristics:??LinearMIX 8Mitte??––––from – Begr. +????––––????––––????––––????––––CurveMIX 9CurveMIX10CurveMIX11CurveMIX12In addition, the »MIX active/phase« menu (page 204) permits the independent activation and deactivation of only particular mixers for speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phases. On the "Free mixers" menu, the blocked mixers are then suppressed in the corresponding ﬂ ight phase. If you are hunting for a mixer that is not shown, you should therefore switch to the appropriate ﬂ ight phase!In this ﬁ rst section, however, we will concentrate on how to program the ﬁ rst screen page of the "free mixers". We will then move on to the method of programming mixer ratios, both for linear mixers and curve mixers, as found on the second screen page of this menu.Basic programming procedureSelect the mixer you want by using the 1. cdselection keys on the left or right touch pad.Tap the center 2. SET key of the right touch pad. The input ﬁ eld on the line marked "fr" at the lower edge of the screen is now shown highlighted.Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 3. select the "fr" mixer input.Tap the center 4. SET key of the right touch pad; using the f selection key of the left or right touch pad, switch to the column marked "to" at the lower edge of the screen then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad once again. The input ﬁ eld "to" is shown highlighted.Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 5. select the "to" mixer output.Tap the center 6. SET key of the right touch pad. Optionally use the eselection key of the left or right touch pad to switch to the column marked "ty" at the lower edge of the screen in order to include the trim of the respective joystick in the mixer input signal ("Tr" for trim or "P" for phase) and/or to add series switching for mixers …… and/or use the f selection key of the left or right touch pad to change the column marked with the switch icon on the lower edge of the screen. To do this, tap the center SET key of the right touch pad once again and assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).Using the 7. f selection key of the left or right touch pad, switch to the column "Settings" then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Deﬁ ne the mixer ratios on the second screen 8. page.Return to the ﬁ rst page by using the center 9. ESCkey of the left touch pad. " fr"After selecting a mixer line and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, select one of the control functions, 1 … 16 or S, for the value ﬁ eld now in inverse video with the selection keys of the right touch.For the sake of clarity, control functions 1 … 4 are marked as follows when setting wing mixers:C1 Throttle/airbrake stickAI Aileron stickEL Elevator stickRU Rudder stick… and, for the helicopter program: Free mixersFreely-programmable linear and curve mixers

194 Detail program description - Free mixers Mixer switchesIn the sample screen image shown above, switches "4" and "2" have been assigned to linear mixers 1 and 4 and to mixer 2 of the control switch "G4".The switch symbol to the right of the switch number shows the current switch state.Any mixers not assigned to a switch, as indicated by an empty cell for the column marked by the switch icon on the screen's bottom line, are fundamentally active!A switch must be assigned to LinearMIX 4 if you wish to switch between two ﬁ xed mixer values (still to be set) that correspond to the two end-points of a (proportional) transmitter control. Accordingly, the "switch channel" mixer cannot also be switched "on" or "off" as with the other mixers.If you intend to assign a control switch (G1 … G4) as a switch, then please note that you must deﬁ ne this appropriately BEFOREHAND in the »Control switch« menu. If you do not, you will assign an undeﬁ ned control switch and therefore one that functions as a ﬁ xed switch. " Ty" Including the trimFor control functions 1 … 4, you can also allow trimming of the digital trim wheel for the given joystick effect the mixer's input. In this case, brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad then use the selection keys to select "Tr" in the inverse video ﬁ eld:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42Troffoffoff1 Throttle/collective pitch stick2 Roll stick3 Pitch-axis stick4 Tail rotor stickNote:If you select any of the control functions 5 … 16 for ﬁ xed-wing models or 5, 7 … 16 for helicopter models, do not forget to assign a transmitter control for each of these in the »Control adjust« menu! "S" as switch channelSelecting "S" (switch channel) in the fr column has the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer input, e.g. in order to add a little more "up-elevator" trim when the aero-tow release is closed, as mentioned on the previous page.After assigning a control function or the "S" switch channel in the "fr" column, the following is also displayed … " to "… on the lower edge of the screen. Use this column's input ﬁ eld to specify the destination of the mixer, i.e. assign mixer output, to one of the control channels. At the same time, additional ﬁ elds will appear in the bottom line of the screen:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoffIn this example, four mixers have already been deﬁ ned. The second mixer is already familiar in principle as "Elevat curve" from the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu and the third is familiar from the line "Tail" ("2ELSv3+8") of the »Model type« menu. As a general rule, however, you should ﬁ rst make use of the pre-programmed mixers. However, if you need asymmetric mixer ratios, want to program non-linear curves or need to offset the mixer neutral point, then you should set or leave the pre-programmed mixers at "0 %" and replace these with free mixers. Erasing mixersTo erase a previously-deﬁ ned mixer, select the appropriate line with the cd selection keys on the left or right touch pad , switch to the "fr" column, if necessary, with the ef selection keys then brieﬂ y tap the center SET button on the right touch pad:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoffThe ﬁ eld in the " fr " column for the mixer you want to delete will now be shown in inverse video: tap both cd selection keys or ef on the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR):ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 ?? ??ELS????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoff––––

195Detail program description - Free mixersExample:Two mixers (MIX 6 ¼ 7 and 7 ¼ 8):a) WITHOUT series switching:6 67Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41 01Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41 0178Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41 01MIX 1MIX 2b) The same mixers WITH series switching:6 67Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41 01Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41 0178Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41 01MIX 1MIX 2In this highly simpliﬁ ed example, if mixer 2 is switched in series, then it does not "take over" solely the transmitter signal of control function 7 – as shown under a) – but, instead, the entire (mixed) signal present at the servo side of control channel 7, as shown under b). It then directs this in accordance with its conﬁ gured mixer ratio forwards to control channel 8. In this case, the effect of transmitter control "6" extends as far as output "8". This kind of serial linkage can be extended as far as you wish. For example, another mixer "8 ¼ 12" can be used to route the control signal from "6" as far as output "12", taking into consideration the associated mixer ratios. Of course, even with an active serial link, each separate mixer can still be controlled via the transmitter control assigned to the mixer input. Fixed-wing and helicopter mixers also work in the same way, when set up to switch "in sequence". Including phase trimIf you wish to apply the FLAP channel ("6") or FLAP2 channel ("9") trim values stored in the »Phase trim«"menu – ﬂ ight phase dependent – then ﬁ rst tap the center SET key of the right touch pad and use its selection keys to select "P":11LinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to AdjustTr––––––––????––––PDepending on the mixer value conﬁ gured, a mixer can, as shown in the example above, route the signal from a ﬂ ap control present (e.g.) on input 6 to control channel 11, while also applying the FLAP trim value set on the »Phase trim« menu (page 150) for the respective ﬂ ight phase. Other special features of free mixers Mixer input = mixer outputIf you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its output, e.g. "C1 ¼ C1", you can achieve some very special effects in conjunction with the option of switching a free mixer on and off in any way you like. A typical application of this can be found at the end of this section, as Example 2 on page 202.Tip:If you separate a control function, e.g. "9", from control channel 9" using the »MIX-only channel«menu (see page 205), then servo response is deﬁ ned only by the mixer ratio (yet to be speciﬁ ed) The effect of the C1 trim wheel on mixer output will depend on the function assigned in the »Model type«menu (page 94), in the "Motor on C1" column for ﬁ xed-wing models …Trim Effect on mixer outputNone linear over full trim wheel travelForward Only effective if C1 stick is forwardBack Only effective if C1 stick is back… or on the "Pitch" line of the »Stick mode« menu for helicopter models:Trim Effect on mixer outputAR(Thr-AR)linear over full trim wheel travelTL(throttlelimit)only effective at minimum position of the assigned throttle limit control (the right side proportional rotary control as standard) Switching mixers in seriesAs already explained on page 192, you can also switch mixers in series: Where mixers are switched in "sequence", the "input signal" of a control channel already on its way to the servo "branches off" and is directed to a further channel. In the "ty" column, select the right angle bracket " " or "Tr ", if the trim should also act simultaneously on the mixer input: 7LinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +87????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to AdjustTr––––––––

196 Detail program description - Free mixersN.N.* ¼ 7 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with an aileron functionN.N.* ¼ 9 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with a ﬂ ap functionN.N.* ¼ 10 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with an aileron functionN.N.* ¼ 11 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with a ﬂ ap functionN.N.* ¼ 12 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with an aileron functionModel helicopters:•With helicopter mixers, collective pitch control may be provided by up to 4 servos connected to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3 and 5, depending on helicopter type. The software links these together to control collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis.Other than within the »Helicopter mixers«menu, it is not advisable to mix a free mixer into these channels because this can lead to very complex interactions. One of the few exceptions is "Collective pitch trim using a separate transmitter control" – see example 3 on page202.Important notices:With serial links in particular, remember that •that the travels of the individual mixers are cumulative if multiple stick commands are made simultaneously: there is a risk that the servo(s) may strike a mechanical end-stop. If necessary, reduce "servo travel" to avoid this; alternatively, set "Travel limit" on the "Servo adjustments" menu and/or reduce mixer values.Take advantage of the ever-present option •to switch over to the transmitter's »Servo display«" menu (see page 262). This menu is reached from almost any menu with a of the mixer programmed on the same channel. Thus, with linear mixers LinearMIX 1 … 8 or curve mixers CurveMIX 9 … 12, 8-point control curves can be deﬁ ned for any transmitter control in a manner analogous to that described in the »Channel 1 curve« menu and these can also be used in ﬂ ight phase switching if needed. This method of "linking" is not only also switchable but can even be subject to a delay by assigning an appropriate delay in the "– time +" column of the »Control adjust« menu. Mixer output affecting default software coupling of aileron, camber-changing ﬂ ap or collective pitch servosBefore we start specifying the mixer ratio, we must ﬁ rst give some thought to what happens if we permit a mixer to affect the default software coupling of aileron, camber-changing ﬂ ap or collective pitch servos:Fixed-wing models:•Depending on the number of wing servos available on the "Aile/ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu, control channels 2 and 5 are connected via special mixers for the "aileron" function, 6 and 7 for the "ﬂ ap" function, outputs 9 and 10 (if present) for the FLAP2 servos and 11 and 12 for AI2 servos.If mixer outputs are programmed to affect these kinds of couplings, then their effect on the respective ﬂ ap pair derived from the "receiving" control channel must be accounted for:Mixer EffectN.N.* ¼ 2 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with an aileron functionN.N.* ¼ 5 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with a ﬂ ap functionN.N.* ¼ 6 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with a ﬂ ap functionbrief, simultaneous tap on the ef keys of the left touch pad. This menu gives you the opportunity to check the effects of all of your settings on a single screen. Mixer ratios and mixer neutral pointNow that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of the mixer functions, the following section describes how to program linear and non-linear mixer curves. For each of the 12 available mixers, the mixer curves are programmed on a second page of the screen display. Use the selection keys cd on the left or right touch pad to select the desired mixer line. If necessary, use the touch pad's selection keys to move to the right column (= ) then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to access the graph page. LinearMIX 1 … 8: Setting linear mixer valuesAs a practical example, we will now deﬁ ne a linear mixer curve to resolve the following problem:For a motorized aircraft model, the two servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 – deﬁ ned on the "Aile/ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu as "… 2FL" – are to be used for actuating landing ﬂ aps. That is; when a transmitter control is moved, they must deﬂ ect downwards only. This requires a simultaneous elevator trim, however.First allocate, for example, input 6 to the leftmost slider control SR1 located in the middle of the console by making settings in the »Control adjust« menu. A transmitter control on input 6, – as shown in the above table – will control the two servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 by default as ﬂ aps. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to conﬁ gure this setting globally for all ﬂ ight phases – as is the case for the free mixer.* N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)

197Detail program description - Free mixers»Control adjust« menu0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------offsetGLNormalNote:Note that if two ﬂ ap servos have been selected, any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors in operating the ﬂ aps. However, in the interests of safety, you should make a habit of leaving all inputs not currently required to "free", or of resetting these back to "free"!Start by moving this transmitter control to its forward limit and adjust the landing ﬂ aps so that they are retracted or closed in this position. If you now move the dial to the rear, the ﬂ aps should move downward; if not the direction of servo rotation must be adapted.We now turn our attention to the ﬁ rst mixer shown in the screen image on page 194 ("6 ¼ EL"), to which switch 4 was assigned:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoffBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open the second screen page:Linear MIX 1 EL 6offIf this screen appears, the mixer has not yet been activated in combination with the assigned toggle switch – "4", in this example. If so, operate the switch:6Mix input0%Offset0%ELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY SETSTOThe continuous vertical line represents the current position of the transmitter control linked to input 6. (However, it is not visible in the above graphic because it is at the left edge since slider control SR1, in this example assigned to input 6 (see previous page), is at its forward limit.) The dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of the mixer neutral point – see under "Offset", below. The solid horizontal line shows the mixer ratio, which currently has the value zero over the entire stick travel; accordingly, the elevator will not yet follow the movement of the ﬂ aps.First, the … Offset (mixer neutral point)… should be deﬁ ned. Switch over to STO for this by using the f selection key of the left or right touch pad:6Mix input0%Offset0%ELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY SETSTOThe dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of the mixer neutral point ("Offset"), i.e. the speciﬁ c point along the control travel at which the mixer does NOT inﬂ uence the control channel connected to its output. The default position for this point is at the control center.However, since in our example the ﬂ aps should be closed or retracted with the slider control at its forward limit and therefore the elevator should not be further inﬂ uenced in this position, the mixer neutral point must be relocated to precisely this point. To do so, push the slider control used (in this example, slider control SR1) to its forward limit if you have not already done so, then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The dotted vertical line moves across to this point, the new mixer neutral point, which by deﬁ nition always retains the "initial" value of zero. However, to better illustrate our example, we now wish to set this "Offset" value to only -75 %.6Mix input0%Offset–75%ELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY SETSTO

198 Detail program description - Free mixersNotes:By selecting • SET with the f selection key of the left or right touch pad followed by a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …6Mix input0%OffsetELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY SETSTO–75%… the offset value can be set manually or adjusted in 1 % increments with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad.By selecting • SET …6Mix input0%OffsetELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY STO–75%SET… – see previous ﬁ gure – set the mixer's neutral •point automatically back to control center with a simultaneous tap on both the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). Symmetrical mixer ratiosThe next task is to deﬁ ne the mixer values above and below the mixer neutral point – starting from its current position. If necessary, use selection keys ef on the left or right touch pad to select the SYM ﬁ eld in order to establish a mixer value which is symmetric to the offset point just set. Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, set both SYMﬁ elds (now in inverse video) via the selection keys of the right touch pad to values between -150 % and +150 %. Note that the mixer value set always refers to the input signal of the respective transmitter control (control signal)! Negative mixer values reverse the direction of the mixer.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will erase the mixer ratio in the inverse video ﬁ eld.The "optimum" value in our example will certainly need ﬂ ight-testing.6Mix input OffsetELLinear MIX 1SYM ASY STO–75%SET–20% –20%Earlier, we set the mixer neutral point at -75 % of control travel: as a result, the elevator ("EL") will exhibit a (slight) down-elevator effect even at the neutral point of the landing ﬂ aps and this is naturally undesirable. Accordingly, you should reposition the mixer neutral point to -100 % of control travel, as described earlier.6Mix input+20%OffsetELLinear MIX 1+20%SYM ASY SETSTO–100%If the offset, now -100 %, is reset to 0 % of control travel by using selection key f on the left or right touch pad to select the SET ﬁ eld then tapping either the selection key combination cd or ef on the right touch pad (CLEAR), the following screen will appear:6Mix input+20%OffsetELLinear MIX 1+20%SYM ASY STO0%SET Asymmetric mixer ratiosIn many cases, however, we require different mixer values on each side of the mixer neutral point. Do this by ﬁ rst resetting the offset of the mixer used in the example, "6 ¼ EL" again to 0 %,if necessary, refer to the ﬁ gure above. Now select the ASY ﬁ eld with the selection key f on the left or right touch pad then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. If slider control SR1, assigned to input 6 in this example, is now moved in each corresponding direction, the mixer ratios for each of the two control directions, i.e. left and right of the established offset point, can be adjusted with the selection keys of the right touch pad:

199Detail program description - Free mixers6Mix input OffsetELLinear MIX 1SYM ASY STO0%SET–55% –20%Note:If you are using a type "S ¼ N.N.*" switch channel mixer you will need to actuate the assigned switch. The vertical line then jumps between the left and right side. Setting curve mixers 9 … 12These four curve mixers allow the deﬁ nition of extremely non-linear mixer curves by placing up to six freely positionable points between the two endpoints "L" (low = -100 % control travel) and "H" (high = +100 % control travel) along the control travel.If you have already read the »Channel 1 curve« menu description or about programming 8-point curves in the »Helicopter mixers« menu, you can safely skip the following description.Programming detailsThe control curve is deﬁ ned by up to 8 points, known as "reference points". In the default software conﬁ guration, 2 reference points are already deﬁ ned, namely only the two end-points, "L" and "H"; see the next screen image.The following section applies to "any" mixer to which we wish to assign a non-linear curve characteristic.The examples shown in the following section are merely illustrative, however, and they do not represent real-life mixer curves. Setting reference pointsWhen you move the transmitter control assigned to the mixer input – here control function 8 – a vertical line in the graph follows the movement between the two end-points. The current control position is also shown numerically on the "Input" line. The point at which this line intersects with the curve in question is named the "Output" and can be varied between -125 % and +125 % by setting reference points; see further below. This control signal acts on the mixer output.In the above example, the transmitter control is on input 8 at -50 % of control travel. The output signal continue to show 0 %, however, since no value has yet been entered.Up to six additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %.Curve MIX 9Curveoff PointOutputInput –50%0%?+–100¼O U T P U T0%810When you now brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad, the "?" is replaced by a point number and the value ﬁ eld to the right is activated, i.e. presented in inverse video:Curve MIX 9Curveoff PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100¼O U T P U T0%8101Using the selection keys on the right touch pad you can now change the point value within a range of ±125 %, e.g.::Curve MIX 9Curveoff PointOutputInput –50%+50%1+–100¼O U T P U T+50%8101Note:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position.Continue in this way to set other reference points. Note that the order in which you generate the (maximum) four reference points between end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. Erasing reference pointsTo erase one of the reference points between "L" and "H", use the transmitter control in question to move the vertical line onto or into the vicinity of the reference point in question. The reference point number and associated reference point value * N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)

200 Detail program description - Free mixersare shown on the "Point" line. The value ﬁ eld is highlighted, see screen image above. Now tap the two selection keys cd or ef on the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR). The selected reference point is erased, and the numbering of the remaining reference points is updated as required. Brieﬂ y tap the center ESC key of the left touch pad to complete the procedure.Note that the reference points "L" and "H" cannot be erased. Changing reference point valuesTo change reference point values, use the associated transmitter control to move the vertical line onto the point you wish to change: "L", 1 … 6 or "H". The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. After activating the value ﬁ eld on the "Point" line by brieﬂ y tapping the center SET key, use the selection keys on the right touch pad to change the current curve value shown in the highlighted ﬁ eld. The possible range is -125 % to +125 % and changes do not affect neighboring reference points. Brieﬂ y tap the center ESC key of the left touch pad to complete the procedure.Note:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position. Trim point functionAlternatively, a jump up or down to reference points already set, L, 1 … max. 6 and H, can be accomplished by using the ef selection keys on the left touch pad. The selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position. Curveoff PointOutputInput –50%–25%1+–100¼O U T P U T+50%NormalTrim pointCurve MIX 9 8101In this simple example, slider control SD1 – represented by the vertical line – is halfway between the forward limit and the midpoint of control travel (input = -50 %). However, "Point 1" will be relocated to control center at a point value of +50 %, resulting in a momentary output value of -25 %.One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will terminate this trim point function. Trim offset functionWhen a value ﬁ eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump up or down to reference points already set with the ef selection keys of the left touch pad and to make a change with the selection keys of the right touch pad, but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of the cd keys on the left touch pad. Starting with a point value for "Point 1" at 0 %, the control curves in both of the following ﬁ gures have been vertically shifted within the ±25 % range by the trim offset function:Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%–25%1+–100¼O U T P U T–25%NormalTrim offsetCurve MIX 9 8101Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%+25%1+–100¼O U T P U T+25%NormalTrim offsetCurve MIX 9 8101You can also exit this function by tapping the center ESC key of the left touch pad. Trim x-axis functionThis function is activated by tapping the left (e) or right (f) selection key of the right touch pad with an active (i.e. inverse video) value ﬁ eld. You can then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish. In the ﬁ gure below, "Point 1" which was just shifted to +50 % with the trim point function, will now be shifted to the left:Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%+67%?+–100¼O U T P U T+50%NormalTrim X-axisCurve MIX 9 8101Notes:If the point is repositioned horizontally further •away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line Point. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signiﬁ es that a further point can be set at the current control position.

201Detail program description - Free mixersPlease note that the percentage value on the •"Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point. Smoothing the curveCurve MIX 9CurvePointOutputInput +50%–75%3+–100¼O U T P U T2–75%8101off 3This "angular" curve proﬁ le created in the example can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief tap on the d selection key of the left touch pad. This will result in a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) on" (or vice versa):Curve MIX 9CurvePointOutputInput +50%–75%3+–100¼O U T P U T–75%810on213Note:The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real mixer curves. For real-world application examples, see the programming examples on pages 274 and 313. Examples:To open and close an aero-tow, a switch, e.g. SW 1. 2, has already been assigned to control channel 8 in the »Control adjust« menu:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGL---Normal2Subsequent aero-tow ﬂ ying has proven that you always have to ﬂ y with the up-elevator held slightly in during the tow. The solution will be to set up a mixer that applies slight up-elevator trim to the elevator servo connected to receiver output 3 when the aero-tow release is closed. The screen-shot will be familiar from page 194: here, the fourth linear mixer has been set up for this function, with the switch channel "S" as mixer input: Move the selected switch to the OFF position and then switch … ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoff… to the mixer conﬁ guration page. Here select STO under "Offset" then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad brieﬂ y … depending on the selected travel setting in the »Control adjust« menu and the switch setting, the offset value will jump to +X % or -X %, for example:SMix input0%OffsetELLinear MIX 40%SYM ASY STO–100%SETNow change left to SYM under "Mixer ratio" then tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The value ﬁ elds are now highlighted. After you have moved the selected switch to the mixer ON position, use the selection keys on the right touch pad to set the required symmetrical mixer ratio, for example:SMix input OffsetELLinear MIX 4SYM ASY STO–100%SET+10% +10%2. If a multi- ﬂ ap wing featuring a "crow or butterﬂ y system" with (additional) airbrakes is intended, and this brake system is to be tested with and without airbrakes, then simply set channel 1 to "MIX-only" …MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516… and follow this by programming a free mixer "C1 ¼ C1" to restore control over the airbrakes

202 Detail program description - Free mixersvia servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on and off as you please.3. The ﬁ nal example applies to model helicopters:In the helicopter program, if you wish affect pitch trim with a proportional control, e.g. one of the slider controls in the middle of the console, then assign one of these controls to this function in the »Control adjust« menu; for example the "I9" input. (However, leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column as it is so this conﬁ guration, analogous to the free mixer yet to be programmed, will be applicable globally for all ﬂ ight phases.) Finally, simply deﬁ ne a LinearMIX "9 ¼ 1" with a symmetric mixer ratio of, for example, 25 %. Due to the internal coupling, this transmitter control then acts equally on all of the model's collective pitch servos without affecting the throttle servo. 9Mix input Offset1Linear MIX 5SYM ASY STO0%SET+25% +25%Decouple the assigned transmitter control from control channel 9 in the »MIX-only channel«menu to ensure that any servo connected to receiver output 9 can no longer be operated by this transmitter control; see also page 205.

204 Detail program description - MIX active/phase MIX active/phaseSelecting mixers for ﬂ ight phasesUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Control switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX only channelChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phase… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.LinearMIX 1LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 36ELC1 ELLinearMIX 43 8SELyesSELyesyesyesMIX ACTIVE IN PHASEThe "free mixers" on the previous menu can be enabled and disabled for speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phases. You therefore have complete freedom in assigning speciﬁ c mixers only to speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phases.Switch to your chosen ﬂ ight phase and use the selection keys to page through this menu. The mixers on the »Free mixers« menu are displayed in the center column.Following the activation of the value ﬁ eld by brieﬂ y tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad, if the respective mixer is set to "no" by using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, then this mixer is deactivated in the ﬂ ight phase shown at the bottom of the display and, simultaneously, removed from the »Free mixers« menu list:LinearMIX 1LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 36ELC1 ELLinearMIX 43 8SELyesSELyesyesMIX ACTIVE IN PHASEnoIf a mixer is "lost" in the »Free mixers« menu …ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1ELS????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5LinearMIX 6to Adjust 4C47offoffoff????––––… then you should either switch through the ﬂ ight phases until it appears again … or, alternatively, switch to this menu and temporarily reactivate the mixer you are looking for:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C47offoffoff

205Detail program description - MIX-only channel MIX-only channelSeparating control functions from control channels for all ﬂ ight phasesUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Control switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX only channelControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixer… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516This menu can be used to interrupt the normal signal ﬂ ow between the input side control function and the output side control channel, therefore the "classic" control-to-servo connection is actually separated.Use the potential offered by this ﬂ ight phase independent menu, particularly to keep one of the control channels "free" in all ﬂ ight phases from assignment to a transmitter control or switch for speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phases in the »Control adjust« menu.Conversely of course, such a joystick, transmitter control or switch "robbed" of its servo can still be used freely as a control in other way – indeed even in ﬂ ight phase dependence – , refer to the programming examples at the end of this section.A joystick, transmitter control or switch robbed of its servo by setting the channel to "MIX only" will then namely affect mixer inputs only …… and the servo connected to a channel set to "MIX only" is then also only accessible from the mixers programmed to its control channel, i.e. "(with) MIX(ers) only".Accordingly, for any channel set to "MIX only", you can utilize both its control function and its control channel entirely independently of one another for any special functions you need; see the examples at the end of this section.Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to select the desired channel from 1 to 16 ( ) then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad, to switch at will between "normal" ( ) and "MIX only" () modes: MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516Examples:For model glider aircraft without airbrakes, the •butterﬂ y function (page 172) is generally used as a landing aid. Just as with "normal" airbrakes, this is generally controlled using the C1 stick. While the (airbrakes) servo typically connected to channel 1 is then generally absent as a rule, receiver output 1 is still not "free", since the control signal of the brake stick is still present at this location.Its control signal – which in this speciﬁ c case is not desired – can be decoupled from control channel "1" to thus "free up" this channel from the C1 joystick signal by setting channel 1 to "MIX only" in the »MIX-only channel« menu. This makes it possible to use control channel "1", together with receiver connection "1", at any time for other purposes, via freely-programmable mixers – e.g. to connect up a speed controller.If your model has built-in airbrakes, however, and •you would like to perhaps test the performance of a butterﬂ y system with and without airbrakes, simply set channel 1 to "MIX only" and program a free mixer "C1 ¼ C1", so as to restore your ability to control the airbrakes via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on and off as you please.

206 Detail program description - Dual mixers Dual mixersSame-sense/opposite-sense mixing of two control channelsUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Phase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixer… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.Diff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 2?? ??Mixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??0%0%0%0%The four ﬂ ight phase independent dual mixers couple a V-tail mixer in a similar manner …334Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41 014V-tail mixerControl function inputsControl channels(receiver outputs)Elevator stickRudder stickRight rudder / elevatorLeft rudder / elevatorRudderElevatorElevatorRudderRudderElevator… a same-sense "cc" and an opposite-sense "cd" control function, although they permit any channel to be used and offer differential travel for the opposing function.Important notice:Since the same and opposite sense inﬂ uences of the given input on the two servos or rudder ﬂ aps – coupled to one another by the dual mixer – are determined by, among other things, their installation situation and the direction of rotation speciﬁ ed in the »Servo adjustment« menu, the symbols "cc"and "cd" are to be perceived more as synonyms rather than as consistently appropriate deﬁ nitions! Accordingly, if wing ﬂ aps are deﬂ ected in the wrong direction, simply swap the two inputs or use the "servo reverse" option in the »Servo adjustment«menu; see page 102. In the software, the V-tail mixer already mentioned is supplemented by other "dual mixers" for realization of the two aileron servos on receiver outputs 2 and 5 and for the ﬂ ap pairs on outputs 6 and 7, possibly also 9 and 10. These are activated via the aileron stick and the transmitter control that has been assigned to input "6" on the »Control adjust« menu.In the same way, the four freely-programmable dual mixers on this menu can be used to couple two further control functions, a feature that would otherwise only be possible with time-consuming programming of free mixers.Here, we will use a "V-tail with rudder differential" as our example to explain the programming of a dual mixer (see also the examples on page 286):Diff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 2EL RUMixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??+25%0%0%0%Depending on activation, both servos move in the sense of elevators or rudder ﬂ aps. The differentiation, according to dual mixer conﬁ guration, is only effective for rudder activation. In this case, both corresponding trim wheels are effective. No additional free mixers are required for this arrangement. When using this mixer, however, the tail type MUST be entered as "normal" on the "Model type" menu.Tip:All settings can be checked directly in the »Servo display« menu, which can be accessed from almost any other menu by simultaneously tapping the efkeys on the left touch pad.Example:Model with two rudders, with differential travel and outward movement (e.g. swept-back ﬂ ying wing):

207Detail program description - Dual mixersDiff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 2 8 RUMixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??+75%0%0%0%When a rudder command is given, the second servo connected to output 8 follows suit. (With this type of programming, differential travel can be conﬁ gured for the rudders.) In this case, too, trim from the rudder stick affects both servos. If the rudders are also required to deﬂ ect outwards when the airbrakes are activated, then you should assign the C1 stick (transmitter control 1) to input 8 on the »Control adjust«" menu. Afterwards, change to the "Offset" column then modify the offset value until both rudders are again in their neutral positions. It may be necessary to "play" a bit with the offset and travel adjustments.

208 Detail program description - Swashplate mixer and Fail-safeUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Phase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree Mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:SWASH MIXERPitchRollPitch ax.+61%+61%+61%SELNote:If "1 servo" is selected on the "Swashplate" line of the »Helicopter type«" menu, this option is not shown on the multi-function menu.The number of servos installed in your helicopter for pitch control was established in the Swashplate line of the »Helicopter type« menu, see page 98. This information is used to automatically couple together the functions for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch, so that you do not need to deﬁ ne any other mixers yourself.For helicopter models with only a single collective pitch servo, this "Swashplate mixer" menu option is of course superﬂ uous because the software controls a total of three swashplate servos for pitch, nick and roll independently of one another, i.e. without a mixer. In Swashplate mixerCollective pitch, roll, pitch-axis mixerthis scenario, this menu option is therefore no longer available to you from the multi-function menu. With all other swashplate linkages employing 2 … 4 pitch servos, mixer ratios and mixer directions are set up by default as shown above. The default is +61 % in each case but the value can be varied from -100 % to +100 % if required by brieﬂ y tapping the center SETkey of the right touch pad and its selection keys. Simultaneously tapping both cd or ef selection keys on the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the mixer ration in inverse video again to the +61 % default value. If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis) does not respond to the joysticks properly, you should alter the mixer directions ("+" or "-") before trying to correct the directions of servo rotation.Note:Ensure that changed mixer values do not result in the servos mechanically striking their end-stops.Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Phase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree Mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:FAIL SAFEPoshold1234567 8 9 10111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STOThe higher level of operating safety exhibited by the HoTT system when compared to traditional PPM technology results from the fact that the microprocessor built into the HoTT receiver not only exclusively processes the signals of "its" transmitter, but can also clean up "dirty" control signals that it receives. Only when these signals become too error-prone or garbled due to outside interference does the processor automatically replace the disrupted signals Fail-safeFault condition setpoints

209Detail program description - Swashplate mixer and Fail-safewith the last received correct signal, temporarily stored in the receiver. This feature is conﬁ gured by the settings as described below. This feature also suppresses brief interference caused by e.g. local drops in ﬁ eld strength, which otherwise result in the familiar "glitches". In this case, the red LED lights up on the receiver.If you have selected a PCM transmission mode for the active model memory but have not yet carried out the fail-safe programming, you will see a warning message on the screen when you switch on the transmitter:Fail Safe setup t.b.d.Programming procedureThe "Fail Safe" function determines the behavior of the receiver if communication between the transmitter and the receiver is disrupted. Receiver outputs 1 … 16 can optionally …preserve the current position ("hold"):1. if communication is disrupted, all servos programmed to "hold" mode remain at the positions judged to be the last valid positions by the receiver until the receiver picks up another valid control signal, ormove to a freely selectable position ("Pos") if 2. interference should occur, following the expiry of the "time delay". Use selection keys ef on the left or right touch pad to select the desired servo connection 1 bis 16 ( )then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to freely switch between "hold" ( ) and "Pos" mode ( ):FAIL SAFEPoshold1234567 8 9 10111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STOFollowing this, use the selection keys ef on the left or right touch pad to select the "DELAY" option shown at the bottom of the display …FAIL SAFEPoshold1234567 8 9 10111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STO… and then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Now use the touch pad's selection keys to make your choice from the four possible time delays (0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.75 s and 1 s) offered.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video ﬁ eld to its default value 0.25 s.Afterwards, select the STO ﬁ eld at the bottom right of the display with the ef selection keys on the left or right touch pad. Now put the servos which have been switched into position mode into their desired positions SIMULTANEOUSLY with the respective operating elements.Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to store these positions as the fail-safe setting for the receiver, so that it can revert back to them if interference is experienced. Successful storage of the positions is conﬁ rmed brieﬂ y on the screen:FAIL SAFEPoshold1234567 8 9 10111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STOPosition storedAttention:Please note that decisive fail-safe settings are •stored in the receiver! Therefore, following a change of receivers, these fail-safe settings should be renewed and in the previous receiver they should be erased, if necessary per Reset, see page 46.Ensure you make use of this safety net by •at least programming the following for a fail-safe incident: for glow-powered models, set the motor throttle position to idle; for electric models, set the motor function to stop, or "Hold" for helicopter models. If interference should occur, the model is then less likely to ﬂ y off on its own and cause damage to property or even personal injury. Consider asking an experienced pilot for advice.

210 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil Teacher/pupil Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode with a trainer leadThe mc-20 HoTT transmitter is equipped standard – as viewed from the front, under the left front ﬂ ap – with a DSC socket. This is not only usable for connecting ﬂ ight simulators – as described on page 22 – but also to integrate the transmitter into a cable-coupled teacher/pupil system. To accommodate the settings necessary for this, scroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to the »Teacher/pupil« menu option in the Multifunction menu: Phase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a67891011 12Note:The screen image shown above shows the menu in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been released by the pupil ( ) and no switch is assigned("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image).When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed:Channel Function1 Motor throttle/collective pitch2 Aileron/roll3 Elevator/pitch-axis4 Rudder/tail rotorTeacher-pupil settingsUp to twelve function inputs (see "Term deﬁ nitions" on page 54) of the teacher transmitter "T" can be individually or in any combination transferred to the pupil transmitter "P".The lower display line, designated with "T", therefore indicates the function inputs with which control functions 1 … 4 (joystick functions for ﬁ xed-wing and helicopter models) are permanently connected as well as inputs 5 … 12, which can be freely assigned in the »Control adjust« menu. Note:Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turned over to the pupil is basically of no consequence. However, their assignment in the »Control adjust«menu is possible only when the trainer mode connection is inactive.Use the ef selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the function inputs 1 through 12 for transfer to the pupil( ) then brieﬂ y tap center SETkey of the right touch pad for each switch to be switched between "T(eacher)"( ) and "P(upil)" ( ):TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a67891011 12To be able to carry out the transfer, you must then assign a trainer mode switch on the left of the display. Do this by placing the marker just to the right of the "P"at the bottom left of the screen display by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56. Preferably you should utilize one of the two standard momentary switches on the switchboard to allow a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any time.TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a67891011 12–No pupil signalSince at this early stage of programming a trainer system it is unlikely that an operational pupil transmitter is connected to the teacher transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to the switches closed during the switch assignment process with appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you have just assigned:

211Detail program description - Teacher/pupilTRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1n/a67891011 129ÄNote:The switch assignment just described also determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this menu. The header line therefore also switches from "Teacher / Pupil" to "Teacher / Teach" once a switch has been assigned.The model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely – i.e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions – in one of the model memories of the mc-20 HoTT teacher transmitter. The HoTT receiver of the model in question must also be "bound" to the teacher transmitter, since the latter ultimately controls the model, even in pupil mode.ALWAYS ENSURE YOU SWITCH ON THE mc-20HoTT teacher transmitter FIRST BEFORE PLUGGING THE CONNECTION CABLE INTO THIS UNIT. Otherwise the RF module will not be activated.The mc-20 HoTT teacher transmitter can be connected to any suitable pupil transmitter, even transmitters using the "traditional" 35/40 MHz range. This means, for example, that a mc-20 HoTT teacher transmitter can indeed also be connected to amc-24 pupil transmitter. However, if the pupil-side connection is NOT made via a two-pole DSC socket but rather via a three-pole trainer socket (for example, out of the Graupnerproduct line), then the basic prerequisite for a correct connection to a pupil transmitter which is completely independent of the type of modulation used in the teacher transmitter must ALWAYS be set to modulation type PPM (10, 16, 18 or 24) in the pupil transmitter. Pupil transmitter set-upThe model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely, i.e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions, in one of the model memories of the teacher transmitter and, if applicable, the HoTT receiver of the model in question must also be "bound" to the teachertransmitter. In principle, a mc-20 HoTT pupil transmitter can also be connected to a teacher transmitter operating on the "traditional" 35/40 MHz bands. This is possible because the PPM signal required by the teacher transmitter is available in the (pupil) transmitter's DSC socket.Almost any transmitter with at least four control functions from previous and current Graupner series can be used as a pupil transmitter. More detailed information can be found in the RC main catalog and on the www.graupner.de website.If required, the pupil transmitter should be ﬁ tted with the connection module for pupil transmitters. This is to be connected to the transmitter board in accordance with the supplied installation instructions. Information on the pupil modules required in each case can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog and on the www.graupner.de website.The connection to the teacher transmitter is made using the appropriate lead; see the following double page.The control functions of the pupil transmitter MUST act directly on the control channels, i.e. the receiver outputs, without intermediary mixers. If you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter, it is best to activate a free model memory with the required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode (mode 1 … 4) and "Throttle min. forward/back" to suit the pupil's preferences. All other settings are left at their default values, however. If you have selected the "Helicopter" model type, you must also set the throttle/ collective pitch direction and idle trim on the pupil transmitter. All other settings, including mixer and coupling functions, are conﬁ gured exclusively on the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them to the model.If the pupil transmitter is a mx-20 HoTT or mc-20HoTT series model then it may also be necessary to adapt the type of modulation in the "DSC output" line of the »Base setup model« menu in order to accommodate the number of control channels to be transmitted. For example, the signal packet for modulation type "PPM10" contains only control channels 1 … 5 but not channel 6. However, if this channel is to be used by the pupil then a modulation type must be selected in which it is included.For transmitters of type "D" and "FM" it is necessary to check servo operating directions and their control correlations. It may be necessary to reconnect cables appropriately. All mixers must also be switched off or set to "zero".When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed:Channel Function1 Motor throttle/collective pitch2 Aileron/roll3 Elevator/pitch-axis4 Rudder/tail rotorIf other control functions are to be transferred to the pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two

212 Detail program description - Teacher/pupildual axis sticks (1 … 4), access the »Control adjust«menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputswhich correspond to enabled function inputs 5 … 12 as shown in the »Teacher/pupil« menu of the teacher transmitter. Afterwards, assign the operating elements appropriately.Important:If you should forget to assign a transmitter •control on the pupil side, then the affected servo or servos will remain in the center position when the transfer is made to the pupil transmitter.The pupil transmitter must always be operated •in PPM mode, regardless of the RF connection type used between the teacher transmitter and the model.If the transmitter is connected using a DSC •socket on the pupil side, ALWAYS leave the pupil transmitter's On/Off switch in the "OFF"position: this is the only way to guarantee that no RF signal is sent from the pupil transmitter's transmitter module, even after the DSC lead has been plugged in.Trainer mode operationsBoth transmitters are connected to one another using a suitable lead (see summary on next page): The plug marked "M" (master) must be inserted into the socket on the teacher transmitter, and the plug marked "S" (student) into the pupil transmitter's socket. (Note that not all leads may have such "M" and "S" labeling.) Important notices:Check that the model aircraft is operational •and check that all functions issue the correct commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.The ends of the trainer lead, usually marked •as either "S" or "M", terminate in a three-pole TRS jack. Do not insert these jacks into a DSC system socket, as it is not suitable for this application. The DSC socket is exclusively designed for cables with 2-pole TRS jacks.Checking functionalityActivate the assigned trainer mode switch:The trainer mode system is working properly if the •display now changes from "¾ L" to "¾ S".However, if the •WARNING LED at the right, next to the transmitter's On/Off switch, blinks and an acoustic signal sounds off at the same time, then the connection between pupil and teacher transmitters is faulty. The basic display also displays the following warning notice …No pupil signal… and the left side of the screen display for the »Teacher/pupil« menu will change to show "-Pupil". In this case, all control functions are retained by the teacher transmitter automatically, regardless of switch position: this ensures the model is always under control.Possible faults:Pupil transmitter not ready•Interface in pupil transmitter not correctly •connected in place of the RF moduleCables connected wrongly: see right for cable •connectionsPupil transmitter not switched over to PPM (10, •16, 18, 24) modeOther possible faults:Teacher transmitter not properly "bound" to HoTT •receiver in training modelTrainer cables4179.1 for trainer operation between any two Graupner transmitters equipped with DSC sockets – distinguished by a two-pole TRS jack at both ends.3290.7 trainer cable for connecting a teacher transmitter with DSC socket (e.g. mc-20HoTT) or a transmitter retroﬁ tted with an optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24) to aGraupner pupil transmitter with an opto-electronic system pupil socket – identiﬁ able by the mark "S" on the side of the three-pole TRS jack.3290.8 trainer cable for connecting a pupil transmitter with DSC socket (e.g. mc-20HoTT) or a transmitter retroﬁ tted with an optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24)to a Graupner teacher transmitter with an opto-electronic system teacher socket – identiﬁ able by the mark "M" on the side of the three-pole TRS jack.Further details about the cables and modules mentioned in this section for teacher and pupil transmitters can be found in the respective transmitter handbook, in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de.

213Detail program description - Teacher/pupil Trainer mode with the mc-20 HoTT transmitterDue to the continuous improvements made to the product range, please consult our website at www.graupner.de for the latest informationTeacher transmitterwith DSC socketTeacher transmitter with teacher module, order no. 3290.2, 3290.19, 3290.22Teacher/pupil cable, order no. 3290.8MPupil transmitter mc-20 HoTT mx-12 HoTT,mx-16 HoTT, mx-20 HoTT and mc-20 HoTTmc-19 through mc-24,mx-22(iFS), mx-24sPupil transmitterwith DSC socketPupil transmitter with pupil module, order no. 3290.3, 3290.10, 3290.33D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM 6014, mc-10 … mc-24,mx-22(iFS), mx-24sSTeacher transmitter mc-20 HoTTmx-12 HoTT,mx-16 HoTT, mx-20 HoTT and mc-20 HoTTNote:The lists present the possible transmitters/transmitter combinations at the time of going to press.Teacher/pupil cable, order no. 4179.1Teacher/pupil cable, order no. 3290.7Teacher/pupil cable, order no. 4179.1

214 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil Wireless HoTT systemWireless operation of the mc-20 HoTT trainer mode system is also possible. To do so, the teacher transmitter must be "connected" to a pupil transmitter as described below. Prior to this, however, the training model's receiver must be bound to the PUPIL transmitter. This conﬁ guration is possible between transmitters which have the "BIND:" option in the »Teacher/pupil« menu.Preparing for training modeTeacher transmitterThe training model must be programmed completely,i.e. with all of its functions including trims and any mixer functions, in one model memory of the HoTT teacher transmitter. The model to be used for training must therefore be under the complete control of the teacher transmitter. The ﬁ nal step in preparation, however, is to bind the training model to the pupil transmitter. For a detailed description of the binding process, please consult pages 77 and 85. Pupil transmitterIf you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter, it is best to activate a free model memory with the required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode (mode 1 … 4) and "Throttle (or collective pitch) min. forward/back" to suit the pupil's preferences. All other options are left at their default values. All other settings, including all mixer and coupling functions, are conﬁ gured exclusively on the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them to the model.When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed:Channel Function1 Motor throttle/collective pitch2 Aileron/roll3 Elevator/pitch-axis4 Rudder/tail rotorIf other control functions are to be transferred to the pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two dual axis sticks (1 … 4), access the »Control adjust«menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputswhich correspond to enabled function or transmitter control inputs 5 … 12 as shown in the »Teacher/pupil« menu of the teacher transmitter. Afterwards, assign the operating elements appropriately. Important:If you should forget to assign a transmitter control on the pupil side, then the affected servo or servos will remain in the center position when the transfer is made to the pupil transmitter.Preparing the teacher and pupil transmittersOnce you have bound the training model to the pupil transmitter, now switch on the teacher transmitter. On both transmitters, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the »Teacher/pupil« menu option on the multi-function menu:Phase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a67891011 12Note:The screen image shown above shows the menu in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been released to the pupil ( ) and no switch has been assigned("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image).Pupil transmitterUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the "BIND" input ﬁ eld. If there is a switch shown at the right of "S:" then this must ﬁ rst be erased, see screen image:TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW:1n/a67891011 12Ä–––

215Detail program description - Teacher/pupilTeacher transmitterUp to twelve function inputs (see "Term deﬁ nitions" on page 54) of the teacher transmitter "T" can be individually or in any combination transferred to the pupil transmitter "P". The lower display line, designated with "T", therefore indicates the function inputs with which control functions 1 … 4 (joystick functions for ﬁ xed-wing and helicopter models) are permanently connected as well as inputs 5 … 12, which can be freely assigned in the »Control adjust« menu. Note:Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turned over to the pupil is basically of no consequence. However, their assignment in the »Control adjust«menu is possible only when the trainer mode connection is inactive.Use the ef selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the function inputs 1 through 12 for transfer to the pupil ( ) then brieﬂ y tap center SETkey of the right touch pad for each switch to be switched between "T(eacher)"( ) and "P(upil)" ( ):TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a67891011 12To be able to carry out the transfer, you must now assign a trainer mode switch. Do this by placing the marker frame just to the right of the "P" at the bottom left of the screen display by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.Preferably you should utilize one of the two standard momentary switches on the switchboard to allow a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any time:TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a67891011 12–No pupil signalSince at this stage of programming the wireless trainer system no connection yet exists to a pupil transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to the switches closed during the switch assignment process with appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you have just assigned:TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1n/a67891011 129ÄNote:The switch assignment just described also determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this menu. The header line therefore also switches from "Teacher / Pupil" to "Teacher / Teach" once a switch has been assigned.Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, now move the marker frame to the right, to "BIND: n/a":TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1n/a67891011 129ÄBinding the pupil transmitter to the teacher transmitterNote:The distance between the two transmitters should not be too great during the binding process. If necessary, change the positions of the transmitters and initiate the binding process again.Initiate the "BINDING" process from the pupil transmitter by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad …TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW:1Binding67891011 12Ä–––… and repeat this immediately on the teacher transmitter:TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1Binding67891011 129Ä

216 Detail program description - Teacher/pupilAs soon as this process is complete, both screens will show "ON" instead of the ﬂ ashing "BINDING":TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW:1on67891011 12Ä–––TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1on67891011 129ÄYou can return to the basic display on both screens and start the training session after carefully checking all of the relevant functions. If neither transmitter or only one transmitter displays "ON", this means the binding process has failed: try changing the positions of both transmitters and then repeat the entire procedure.Important notice:Check that the model aircraft is operational and check that all functions issue the correct commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.During the …Training session… the teacher and pupil can maintain a variable distance from one another. The "reach of signal" (max. 50 m) should not be exceeded under any circumstances, however, no one else should be standing between the teacher and the pupil since these persons could reduce the connection range of the return channel used by the two transmitters. In this operating mode, the basic display of the teacher transmitter is as shown below …#01 0:24hStop watchFlight timK780:00.03.9V0:00.000001:23hPVRFC–TeacherGraubele… and the pupil transmitter's display will look something like this:#01 0:24hStop watchFlight timK780:00.03.7V0:00.000004:32hRFC–studentSchülerIf, however, the connection between the teacher and pupil transmitters should be lost during the training session, then the teacher transmitter will automatically assume control of the model.If the trainer mode switch is in the "Pupil" position when connectivity is lost, the Warning LED on the teacher transmitter will blink and audible warning signals will also be sounded for as long as the signal is lost. The basic display also displays the following warning notice:No pupil signalHowever, if only the character string "HF –" blinks on the transmitter's basic display accompanied by the audible warning signals, the pupil signal has been lost but the trainer mode switch is set to the "Teacher" position.In both cases, your ﬁ rst step should be to reduce the distance between the two transmitters. If this does not help, then you should land immediately and establish the cause.If both transmitters are operational and the receiver system is switched off, then the teacher transmitter's basic display will show the icons instead of the "familiar" . The antenna icon will also ﬂ ash and an audible warning signal will sound twice per second.Resuming trainer modeIf you switch off one or both transmitters during the session – for whatever reason – then the basic display of the transmitter(s) shows the following question after being switched back on:ACTTRAINERWireless LinkINHIf "INH" (set) is conﬁ rmed by tapping the center SETkey of the right touch pad or, alternatively, by waiting for approx. two seconds until the message disappears. then you will reset the transmitter in question back to its "normal" operating mode. You will then have to re-establish a connection between the teacher and pupil transmitters.If, on the other hand, the selection keys on the left or right touch pad are used to select "ACT" …

217Detail program description - Teacher/pupilPlease selectTrainer link?INHACT… and this selection is conﬁ rmed by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad, then the existing teacher connection is restored. The same approach is used if the transmitter is conﬁ gured as a pupil transmitter.

218 Detail program description - Tx. output swapUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option »Tx. output swap« Tx. output swap on the multi-function menu: Phase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.Tx. output swapTo achieve maximum ﬂ exibility regarding receiver socket assignment, the mc-20 HoTT program offers you the option of swapping servo outputs 1 to 16 as you please.This option lets you distribute the transmitter's 16 "control channels" to any of the transmitter outputs1 … 16. If you do, you must remember that the »Servo display« screen – accessible from almost any menu option by simultaneously tapping the e and fkeys on the left touch pad – refers exclusively to the "control channels" as preset by the receiver socket assignment: it therefore does NOT take any output swaps into account. Tx. output swapSwapping the outputs on the transmitterServoServoServoServo12341234OutputOutputOutputOutputTRANSFER OUTPUTSELUse the cd selection keys on the left or right touch pad to select the channel/output combination to be changed then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. You can now use the right selection keys to assign your selected (control) channel to the desired output, conﬁ rming this with the SET key … ServoServoServoServo62341234OutputOutputOutputOutputTRANSFER OUTPUTSEL… or, by tapping the cd or ef selection keys on the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR), you can restore the original assignment. Any subsequent changes, such as servo travel adjustments, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers etc., must always be performed in accordance with the original receiver socket assignment!Example:In the mc-20 HoTT helicopter program, the outputs for a collective pitch servo and the throttle servo are swapped around, compared to some older GRAUPNER/JR mc units. The throttle servo now occupies transmitter output "6" and the collective pitch servo output "1". Perhaps, however, you wish to retain the previous conﬁ guration? In this case, you will swap over channels 1 and 6 as appropriate, so that (control) channel 6 is located on output 1 and vice versa – as shown above:Note:"Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) is the receiver-side channel correlation function integrated into the mc-20 HoTT transmitter's telemetry menu. With channel mapping, the transmitter's control channels (16 maximum) can be freely distributed to multiple receivers or receiver outputs having the same control function, for example to operate two servo controls per aileron surface instead of just being able to control one servo, etc. To keep controls manageable, however, we strongly recommend using only one of the options at a time.

220 Detail program description - Proﬁ -trim | Winged models Proﬁ -trim Flaps and aileron trimmingThe mc-20 HoTT transmitter has an integrated software function for direct trimming of all ﬂ aps and ailerons. Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the »Proﬁ -trim« menu option in the multi-function menu …Timers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free MixerMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memory… then open this menu option with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.PRO TRIMAIAI FLFLTri m off off off offctl sw freeon/off –––SET SET SET SETfree free freeTo set the desired option, move the marker frame onto the desired line or column with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Select the desired entry in the ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse video with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad or move the desired transmitter control. Conclude the procedure with a tap on the ESC key.Programming is done in three steps.First of all, in the "Trim" line it will be established just which ﬂ ap pair is to be trimmed as "AI" and/or "FL". The "Control" line speciﬁ es the control channel over which the given trim function is to be performed and, ﬁ nally, a switch is deﬁ ned in the "ON/OFF" line by which this proﬁ -trim function can be switched on or off globally.TrimNotes:Please note that, depending on the number of •aileron and ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed in the »Modeltype« menu (page 95), some settings cannot be used. For example, with only 1 aileron and/or 1 ﬂ ap servo there is no aileron ﬂ ap activation possible, and the opposite is also true. Since this is the case, a number of settings in various columns remain ineffective.Pay attention to potential double-assignments •when making trim control choices.The trim functions which can be activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF) on the ﬁ rst line of this menu, either individually or in any combination, make pre-ﬂ ight corrections to aileron and ﬂ ap settings quick and easy, without the complexity of having to call up individual setting options. Individually, these are functions for …Trim of the • aileron function for aileron ("cAId")Trim of the • ﬂ ap function for aileron ("cAIc")Trim of the • aileron function for ﬂ aps ("cFLd")Trim of the • ﬂ ap function for ﬂ aps ("cFLc")Tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) to reset the value of the ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video back to "OFF".Note:Regardless of a switch's ON/OFF setting (see further below), the reset of a value ﬁ eld in the "Trim" line has the effect an immediate return of the affected trim function to its original reference point.

221Detail program description - Proﬁ -trim | Winged modelsControlPRO TRIMAIAI FLFLTri m act act off offctl sw freeon/off –––SET SET SET SETfree free freeThe second line of this menu is for selecting transmitter control assignments which appear advantageous from the many controls available on the transmitter. To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys to navigate to the desired column then tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad …:PRO TRIMQRAI FLWKTri m actN AUS AUS offctl sw Lever1on/off –––SET SET SET SETfree free freeMove desiredcontrol adj.… and move the desired transmitter control:PRO TRIMAIAI FLFLTri m act act off offctl sw Tvr1on/off –––SET SET SET SETTvr2 free freeThe mid-point position of enabled proportional controls corresponds to the programmed ﬂ ap setting.The trim range for a given transmitter control is about ±25 %. However, these "trim" controls are only effective when, as described in section "ON/OFF" further below, has been assigned to a proﬁ -trim switch and switched on.With trims switched on, make a test ﬂ ight to determine the optimal setting then open the ON/OFF switch to secure the setting against inadvertent maladjustment. Now as long as the ON/OFF switch remains open or is erased, the located trim values will retain their settings. An active transmitter control assignment can be erased with a simultaneous tap on the cd or efselection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).Note:Trim values retain their settings until the next closure of the ON/OFF switch, even then when the trim functions in the "Control" line have been temporally reset to "free". ON/OFFThe "ON/OFF" line is used to assign a switch which permits the proﬁ -trim function to be switched on/off globally. This assignment is done in the manner described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.In this context, pay attention to the following dependencies:Only when the ON/OFF switch in the "Trim" line is •set to "ON" will the trim functions assigned to trim controls in the "Transm. controls" line be able to affect trim within a range of ±25 %. As soon as the ON/OFF switch is opened or •erased, the current trim positions will be stored and the selected trim controls become ineffective. A tap, at the same time, on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) when a switch assignment is active will reset a ﬁ eld's value back to "---":PRO TRIMAIAI FLFLTri m act act off offctl sw Tvr1on/off –––SET SET SET SETTvr2 free free

222 Detail program description - Proﬁ -trim | Helicopters Proﬁ trimPitch, throttle, tail-rotor, and C1 curve trimmingThe mc-20 HoTT transmitter's software has an integrated function for additional trimming of 8-point curves; in Heli programs »Channel 1 curve« page 131, and »Helicopter mixer« page 176. These are intended for "Pitch" curves "Channel 1 ¼ Throttle" and "Channel 1 ¼ Tail. rot.".This feature, named »Proﬁ trimm« because of its functional similarity to the Proﬁ -Trim module for the mc-24 but only available on that transmitter as a retroﬁ t option. Select this feature from the multi-function menu with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad … Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixer MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memory… then open this menu option with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Mixer Point PhasefreefreefreefreeNoneNoneNoneNoneL1111LLL"Trim control" columnNote:Pay attention to potential double-assignments when making trim control choices.This menu's ﬁ rst line is for assigning those transmitter controls (from the many available on the transmitter) which appear most advantageous for this purpose. To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys to navigate to the desired line then tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad …Mixer Point PhasefreefreefreefreeNonekeinerkeinerNoneL1111LLLMove desiredcontrol adj.… then move the desired transmitter control:Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneNoneL1111LLLErase trim controlSelect the transmitter control assignment in the appropriate line as already described, e.g.:Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNonekeinerkeinerNoneL1111LLLMove desiredcontrol adj.A tap, at the same time, on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will now reset the ﬁ eld's value back to "free"."Mixer" columnThere are a total of four value ﬁ elds in this column. For each of these ﬁ elds a helicopter mixer can be selected, individually or in any combination, from a list.To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to change to the desired value ﬁ eld. Then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad …Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneL1111NoneLLL… and select the desired mixer with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad:Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneL1111PitchLLLAnother tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will conclude the entry. This procedure is the same for the other menus.A tap, at the same time, on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video back to "None".

223Detail program description - Proﬁ -trim | Helicopters"Point" columnThe lines of the column "Mixer" were used to select one or mixers. Now, in the "Point" column, the reference points to be trimmed will be set. To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the desired value ﬁ eld. Then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad …Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneL1111PitchLLLIf a undeﬁ ned point is selected – in the basic version, only points "L" and "H" are set – the respective regulator will remain ineffective.The point offset (in a maximum range of about ±12 %) for the selected mixer will simultaneously be displayed in the curve diagrams of the »Helicoptermixer« menu so that the offset can also be checked visually.PhaseThe rightmost column is used, if desired, to determine which programmed ﬂ ight phase the given regulator is to be active. The number preceding ﬂ ight phase names, in the example "1" (Normal)", are based on the phase numbers as found in the »Phaseassignment« menu on page 148:Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneL1111PitchLLLHowever, the current position of the regulator will be – contrary to the corresponding ﬁ xed-wing program – set to a new zero point when …by a change of ﬂ ight phase, individual or all trim •controls become active orthe given trim control is erased or•meanwhile the function assigned in the "Mixer" •column is to be changed.In all of these cases, the current regulator position will be stored and automatically overridden, i.e. adopted into the curve characteristic, by the pre-programmed curve points speciﬁ ed by the »Channel 1 curve«and »Helicopter mixer« menus. In this manner it is possible to simultaneously optimize up to four arbitrary curve points during the ﬂ ight.The memory storage option described here is, for example, useful during the ﬁ rst test ﬂ ights of a new model as this permits the "ﬂ own" ﬂ ight corrections to be immediately recorded in the program.However, in order to have a clearly deﬁ ned reference point prior to the ﬁ rst time a store is done, it is important to put all regulators into their middle positions. But always be careful that, after repeated stores, servo travel is not too severely restricted on one side. Check and correct the control linkage if necessary.Sometimes, despite an optimal basic setting for the model, it becomes necessary to temporarily change reference points, for example, when the weather has changed and the motor requires a short-term correction or even when the mufﬂ er gets a leak unexpectedly, etc. Of course, in all of these cases, the corrected settings should not be stored via the Proﬁ trim option. Storage can be prevented by ensuring that the regulator is in its middle position before activation or deactivation.Note:Yet another point, independent of this, can be regulated via the "Trim function" through use of the selection keys. This is described in detail along with the programming of 8-point curves in section »Channel 1 curve« on page 131.

224 Detail program description - Trim memory | Winged models Trim memory Storing the current trim positionUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Trim memory« menu option in the multi-function menu: Timers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free MixerMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator0%0%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.0%0%0%0%0%SETThis menu permits selective storage of the given current position for the four digital trim controls in order to return them afterward to their visual middle points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the respective middle positions of trim wheels for control functions 1 … 4 available again following a model memory location change or after long ﬂ ight pauses.This memory store process is effective on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis for the currently active model memory location and is not to be stored globally. Therefore, as soon as ﬂ ight phases have been deﬁ ned in the »Phase settings« and »Phaseassignment menus, the given active ﬂ ight phase will be displayed on the screen's bottom line. For example:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator0%0%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.0%0%0%0%0%SETNormalStoring trim positionsThe model has been ﬂ ight tested and trimmed during the test ﬂ ights. Current trim positions are now displayed in the column "Trim Pos." located approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim range is about ±30 % of total control travel.) The right column displays trim memory content, currently ﬁ lled uniformly with 0 % because values have not yet been stored. Therefore, the display appears as follows:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the line where a trim value is to be written into trim memory, e.g. the elevator trim value:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the SET column's selected value ﬁ eld. The message "Please press trim"TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal0%Pleasepress trimwill then appear brieﬂ y in the display.TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal0%Now brieﬂ y press the trim wheel for the elevator's joystick to accept the trim value.TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%0%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal+3%Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad will ﬁ nish the procedure.Now, if desired, change the ﬂ ight phase and repeat the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the other control functions, as necessary.

225Detail program description - Trim memory | Winged modelsErasing stored trim positionsUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased from trim memory, e.g.:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%0%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal+3%Now brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the value ﬁ eld.TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal+3%Pleasepress trimAs previously described, the message "Please press trim" will appear brieﬂ y. After his message has disappeared, simultaneously tap on the cd or efselection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to reset the value ﬁ eld again back to "0 %".However, if you do not erase a trim memory before storing a new value, the new value will be added to the stored value. Although this an "elegant" way to effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim range of about ±30 %, do keep in mind that excessive offsets for servo travel can lead to anomalies including one-sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control linkages and make corrections as necessary.

226 Detail program description - Trim memory | HelicoptersUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Trim memory« menu option in the multi-function menu: Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixer MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:TRIM MEMORYRollPitch ax.0%0%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.0%0%0%0%0%SETThis menu permits selective storage of the given current position for the four digital trim controls in order to return them afterward to their visual middle points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the respective middle positions of trim wheels for control functions 1 … 4 available again following a model memory location change or after long ﬂ ight pauses.This memory store process is effective on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis for the currently active model memory location and is not to be stored globally. Therefore, as soon as ﬂ ight phases have been deﬁ ned in the »Phase settings« and »Phaseassignment menus, the given active ﬂ ight phase will be displayed on the screen's bottom line. For example:TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.0%0%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.0%0%0%0%0%SETNormalStoring trim positionsThe model has been ﬂ ight tested and trimmed during the test ﬂ ights. Current trim positions are now displayed in the column "Trim Pos." located approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim range is about ±30 % of total control travel.) The right column displays trim memory content, currently ﬁ lled uniformly with 0 % because values have not yet been stored. Therefore, the display appears as follows:TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%+3%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the line whose trim value is to be written into trim memory, e.g. the pitch-axis trim value:TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%+3%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the SET column's selected value ﬁ eld. The message "Please press trim"TRIM MEMORY+5%+3%0%Trim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal0%Pleasepress trimRollRoll ax.Pitch/thrTail rot.will then appear brieﬂ y in the display.TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%+3%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow brieﬂ y press the trim wheel for the elevator's joystick to accept the trim value. Trim memoryStoring the current trim position

227Detail program description - Trim memory | HelicoptersTRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%0%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%+3%0%SETNormalAnother brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad will ﬁ nish the procedure.Now, if desired, change the ﬂ ight phase and repeat the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the other control functions, as necessary.Erasing stored trim positionsUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased from trim memory, e.g.:TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%0%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%+3%0%SETNormalNow brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the value ﬁ eld.TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal+3%Pleasepress trimAs previously described, the message "Please press trim" will appear brieﬂ y. After his message has disappeared, simultaneously tap on the cd or efselection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to reset the value ﬁ eld again back to "0 %".However, if you do not erase a trim memory before storing a new value, the new value will be added to the stored value. Although this an "elegant" way to effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim range of about ±30 %, do keep in mind that excessive offsets for servo travel can lead to anomalies including one-sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control linkages and make corrections as necessary.

228 Detail program description - Telemetry TelemetryRead-in and settings for telemetry dataThe receiver's settings, as well as optional telemetry sensor settings, can be called up and programmed in real-time by way of the »Telemetry« menu. Communication with the transmitter is accomplished over the return channel built into the HoTT receiver.As many as four sensors can be attached, if necessary via V or Y adapter cables, to receivers with current ﬁ rmware of types: GR-12S HoTT (order no. 33505), GR-12 HoTT (order no. 33506),GR-16 (order no. 33508), GR-24 HoTT (order no. 33512) and GR-32 DUAL (order no. 33516).The update capability of these and future receivers, which can be performed by the user, will keep the respective »Telemetry« menu up to date with the latest version and ensure enhancement with future functions or languages.Note:After registering your product at https://www.graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung you are automatically informed of new updates. Important notices:This manual is based on the functions available at •the time of printing.As already indicated in the section "Binding •multiple receivers" on page 77 and 85, multiple receivers per model can be bound into the system as necessary. However, only the receiver selected in the line "TELEMETRY RCV" of the "Telemetry" menu is able to establish a telemetry connection to the transmitter! However, that also means the inverse, that only this receiver can be addressed through the Telemetry menu! If necessary, therefore, the selection must be changed before settings can be made on a speciﬁ c receiver:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1When adjusting the settings of the remote •control, make absolutely sure that the transmitter antenna is always far enough away from the receiver antennae! To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to the return channel and malfunctions will result.Since the telemetric data between transmitter •and receiver is only exchanged after the fourth data package, the data transmission requires a certain amount of time for technical reasons, so the reaction to the operating keys and changes to settings take place with a delay. Therefore, the delay is not due to an error.Programming on the model or on sensors may •only take place if the model is on the ground. Only carry out the settings with the motor switched off and the battery disconnected! Otherwise, undesired programming cannot be ruled out.For example, a servo test initiated accidentally could cause the model to crash and cause personal injury and/or property damage. Observe the safety instructions on pages 4 … 7 of this manual and the respective separate manuals.All settings (such as fail-safe, servo direction •reversal, servo travel, mixer and curve settings, etc.) made through the »Telemetry« menu are stored only in the receiver and therefore are adopted along with it if it is implemented as a receiver in another model. Therefore, to be on the safe side, re-initialize your HoTT receiver if you want to use the receiver in a different model; see "Reset" on page 46.Only program the servo direction reversal, •servo travel, mixer and curve settings through the mc-20-speciﬁ c standard menus »Servo adjustment« page 102, »Dual Rate / Expo«page 120 or page 124, »Channel 1 curve«page 128 or 131, and so on. Otherwise, the settings superimpose one another, which can lead to complexity or even problems in the later operation.The channel assignment function, called "Channel •mapping", integrated into the »Telemetry« menu of the mc-20 HoTT transmitter can also freely distribute control functions over multiple receivers or even distribute a single control function over multiple receiver outputs, such as two servos per aileron instead of only one individual servo, etc. We also recommend exercising extreme during the programming.

229Detail program description - TelemetryTelemetryThe menus gathered under the heading »Telemetry«can be called up from the mc-20 HoTT transmitter's basic display with a tap of about one second duration on the center ESC key of the left touch pad. The same menus can, like other transmitter menus, also be opened in the multifunction menu with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:Wing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequence Basic operationOperating the »Telemetry« menu is essentially the same as for the remaining mc-20 HoTT transmitter menus. The few differences are described in the following:The ef selection keys of the left or right touch pad can be used to switch between individual pages of the Telemetry menu. Corresponding directional indicators can be found at top right of each display page in the form of angled brackets ( ), refer to the ﬁ gures below. If only one angled bracket is visible, you are on either the ﬁ rst or last respective page. In this case, changing pages is only possible in the indicated direction.Menu lines in which parameters can be changed are identiﬁ ed with the aforementioned angled bracket ( ). The " " pointer will jump a line forward or back with a tap on the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Lines to which a jump cannot be made are unalterable.In order to change a parameter, brieﬂ y touch the center SET key of the right touch pad (the parameter will be displayed in inverse video), change the value within the permissible adjustment range via the selection keys of the right touch pad and adopt the value with another tap on the SET key. A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left 4-way pad will cause a return to the starting position again.Now use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to pick the desired sub-menu. However, if the message …OKCAN NOTRECEIVEDATA… appears instead of the desired sub-menu after touching the center SET key of the right touch pad then no connection has been established with a receiver. Therefore, switch on your receiver system or, if applicable reconnect the addressed receiver as described on page 77 or 85 or activate it as described under "Important Notices" on the previous page.On the ﬁ rst display page of the sub-menu overwritten with … RX DATAVIEW…TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1… no settings can be made. This page is only provided for information:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1RX DATAVIEWS–STR100% R–TEM.+28°CL PACK TIME 00010msecR-VOLT :05.0VL.R-VOLT:04.5VS–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBMSENSOR1 :00.0V 00°CSENSOR2 :00.0V 00°CValue ExplanationS-QUA signal quality in %S-dBm Reception power in dBmS-STR signal strength in %R-TEM. Receiver temperature in °CL PACK TIMEIndicates the time in ms in which the longest data package is lost during the transmission from the transmitter to the receiverR-VOLT Current operating voltage of the receiver in volts SETTINGS/DISPLAYS

230 Detail program description - TelemetryL.R-VOLT Lowest operating voltage of the receiver since it was last turned on, in voltsSENSOR1 Indicates values of optional telemetric sensor 1, in volts and °CSENSOR2 Indicates values of optional telemetric sensor 2, in volts and °CSignal quality (S-QUA)The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent "live" over the receiver's return channel to the transmitter and indicates the signal strength in %. Reception power (S-dbm)Reception power (S-dbm) is indicated with negative values, which means a value of zero is the maximum value (= best reception) and the lower the values are, the poorer the reception power! The range test before operation, among other things, is important for this.Note:With negative numbers the evaluation of a number is reversed: The higher the number following the minus symbol, the lower the value is. Therefore, a reception power of -80 dBm, for example , is poorer than one of -70 dBm.Perform the range test as described on page 80 and 88 before each ﬂ ight and, in doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during the ﬂ ight. The range must be at least 50 m on the ground with the range test activated. At this distance, the value shown under "S-dBm" in the "RX DATAVIEW"display may not be greater than -80 dBm in order to guarantee safe operation. The model should never be operated with a lower value (e.g. -85 dBm). Check the installation of the receiver system and the position of the antenna.The reception power should not drop below -90 dBm during operation. Otherwise, reduce the distance of the model. Normally, however, the acoustic range warning (peep tone interval 1 s) is triggered before this value is reached in order to guarantee safe operation.Signal strength (S-STR)The signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %. In general, an acoustic range warning (peep tone interval 1 s) is issued as soon as the receiver signal becomes too week in the return channel. However, since the transmitter has a signiﬁ cantly higher transmission power than the receiver, the model can still be safely operated. For the sake of safety, the distance to the model should be reduced until the warning tone goes silent again.Receiver temperature (R-TEM.)Make sure the receiver remains within the permissible temperature range during all ﬂ ight conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C).The receiver temperature limit, at which a warning is issued, can be adjusted in the sub-menu »RX SERVO TEST« under "ALARM TEMP+" (50 … 80 °C and "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 … +10 °C). When the value is under-run or over-run, an acoustic signal sounds (continuous peep tone) and "TEMP.E" will appear at the top right of all "RX" receiver sub-menus. Additionally, the parameter "R-TEM" will be displayed in inverse video on the »RX DATAVIEW« display page.Data packages (L PACK TIME)Indicates the longest time span in ms in which data packages are lost in the transmission from the transmitter to the receiver. In practice, that is the longest time span in which the remove control system has entered into fail-safe mode.Receiver operating voltage (R-VOLT)Always check the operating voltage of the receiver. Never operate or even start your model if the operating voltage is too low.The receiver low voltage warning can be adjusted between 3.0 and 6.0 volts in "ALARM VOLT" of the »RX SERVO TEST« sub-menu. If this range is under-run, an acoustic signal is sounded (repetitive double peep tone (long/short)) and "VOLT.E" will appear at the top right of all »RX …« receiver sub-menus.| In addition, the parameter "R-VOLT" will be displayed in inverse video in the »RX DATAVIEW« sub-menu.The current receiver battery voltage is also displayed in the default display, see page 28.Minimum receiver operating voltage (L.R-VOLT)"L.R-VOLT" indicates the minimum operating voltage of the receiver since the last time it was switched on.If this voltage should deviate signiﬁ cantly from the current "R-VOLT" operating voltage, the receiver battery may be too heavily encumbered by the servos. The consequence is voltage drops. In this case, use a more powerful voltage supply in order to achieve maximum operational safety.Sensor 1 + 2Indicates the values of optional telemetric sensors 1and 2, if present, in volts and °C. A description of these sensors can be found in the appendix. RX SERVOTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVOREVERSE : OFFCENTER : 1500secTRIM : –000secLIMIT– : 150%OUTPUT CH: 01LIMIT+ : 150%PERIOD : 20msecIt is very important that you read the notices on page 228 before doing any programming on this display

231Detail program description - Telemetrypage.Value Explanation PossiblesettingsOUTPUTCHChannel selection 1 … depending on receiverREVERSE Servo reversal OFF / ONCENTER Servo center in μs if active (inverse), dependent on control positionTRIM Trim position in μs deviating from the CENTER position-120 … +120 μsLIMIT– Travel limit on the "–" side of servo travel in % servo travel30 … 150 %LIMIT+ Travel limit on the "+" side of servo travel in % servo travel30 … 150 %PERIOD Cycle time in ms 10 or 20 msOUTPUT CH (channel selection)If applicable, select the line "OUTPUT CH" with the selection keys. Touch the SET key of the right touch pad. The value ﬁ eld is shown highlighted. Now set the desired channel (e.g. 01) with the selection keys on the right touch pad. The following parameters are always based on the channel set here.Reverse (servo reversal)Set the rotational direction of the servo connected to the selected servo channel: ON / OFFCENTER (servo center)The active value ﬁ eld (inverse video) in the "CENTER" line shows the current impulse time in μs for the control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line. The displayed value depends on the current position of the control inﬂ uencing this control channel and, if applicable, the position of its trimming.A channel impulse time of 1500 μs corresponds to the standard center position and thus the conventional servo center.In order to change this value, select the "CENTER" line then touch the SET key. Now move the respective transmitter control, joystick and/or trim wheel to the desired position and store the current control's position with another tap on the SET key. This position is saved as the new neutral position.TRIM (trim position)In the "TRIM" line" you can carry out the ﬁ ne adjustment of the neutral position of a servo connected to the control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line using the selection keys of the right touch pad in 1 μs increments. The value in the "CENTER" line can be adjusted by the TRIM value set here in a range of ± 120 μs. Factory setting: 0 μs.LIMIT–/+ (side dependent travel limit -/+)This option is provided for the adjustment of a side-dependent limit (limiting) of the servo travel (rudder throw) of the servo connected to the control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line. The settings for both directions are separate but both are in a range of 30 … 150 %.Factory setting: 150 % each. PERIOD (cycle time)In this line you determine the time interval of the individual channel impulse. This setting is adopted for all control channels.With the use of only digital servos, a cycle time of 10 ms can be set.. In mixed operation or with use of only analog servos, 20 ms should absolutely be set, because the latter can otherwise be "over-strained" and react with "shaking" or "quivering" as a result. RX FAIL SAFETELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 01MODE : HOLDF.S.POS. : 1500secDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 01FAIL SAFE ALL: NOPOSITION : 1500secThe description of this menus necessitates a few words of warning in advance:"Do nothing" is the absolute worst thing to be done in this regard. "HOLD" is prescribed in the base setup model of the HoTT receiver.In the event of a failure, in the best case scenario the model ﬂ ies straight ahead for an indeﬁ nite amount of time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without causing signiﬁ cant damage! However, if something like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the model may become uncontrollable and "tear" across the ﬂ ight ﬁ eld completely out of control, putting the pilot and spectators at risk.Therefore, it would obviously be beneﬁ cial to program the the function "Motor off" at the very least, in order to prevent such risks. If necessary, seek the advice of an experienced pilot in order to ﬁ ne a "logical" setting for your model.And then another brief notice regarding the three possible versions of the mc-20 HoTT transmitter for the setting of Fail Safe:The easiest, and recommended, way to fail-safe settings is the use of the »Fail Safe« menu, which can be reached from the multifunction menu, see page 208.Similarly, in order to achieve the same result somewhat more laboriously, the "FAIL SAFE ALL" option described on the following pages is also available.

232 Detail program description - TelemetryIn addition, there are the relatively elaborate methods of the of the individual adjustment using the options "MODE", "F.S.Pos." and "DELAY". The description of these variants begins with the "MODE" option further below.Value Explanation PossiblesettingsOUTPUTCHOutput channel (servo connection of the receiver)1 … depending on receiverINPUT CH Input channel (channelcoming from the transmitter)1 … 16 %MODE Fail-Safe mode HOLDFAIL SAFEOFFF.S.POS. Fail-safe position 1000 … 2000 μsDELAY Reaction time (delay)0.25, 0.50, 0.75 and 1.00 sFAIL SAFE ALLSave of the Fail-safePositions of all control channelsNO / SAVEPOSITION Display of the saved Fail-safe positionBetween approx 1000 and 2000 μsOUTPUT CH (servo connection)In this line you select the respective OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the receiver) to be set.INPUT CH (selection of the input channel)As already mentioned on page 228, the 16 control functions of the mc-20 HoTT transmitter can be arbitrarily distributed to multiple receivers, if necessary, or even assigned to multiple receiver outputs with the same control function. For example, this might be used in order to be able to control two servers for each aileron ﬂ ap or an oversize rudder with linked servos instead of an individual servo. Distribution to multiple HoTT receivers, in turn, offers the advantage of not having to use a long servo cable, e.g. for large models. In this case, bear in mind that only the receiver selected in the line "TEL.EMPF." through the »Telemetry« menu can be addressed!The 16 control channels (INPUT CH) of the mc-20HoTT can be appropriately managed through so-called " Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) whereby a different control channel is assigned to the servo connection selected in the OUTPUT CH line for the receiver in the INPUT CH line. BUT CAUTION: If, for example, "2AIL" is speciﬁ ed in the transmitter on the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Base setup, model« menu then control function 2 (Aileron) willalready be assigned in the transmitter to controlchannels 2 and 5 for distribution to the left and right ailerons. The receiver's corresponding INPUT CH,which must also be mapped, would be the channels 02 and 05 in this case; see the following example.Examples:You would like to control each aileron of a large •model with two or more servos. You would like to control each aileron of a large •model with two or more servos. Assign one of the two standard aileron control channels 2 or 5 as INPUT CH to the corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections) depending on the left or right bearing surface. You would like to control the rudder of a large •model with two or more servos. Assign the same INPUT CH (control channel) to the corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections). In this case, this is the standard rudder channel 4.MODEThe settings of the options "MODE", "F.S.Pos." and "DELAY" determine the behavior of the receiver in the event of a failure in the transmission from transmitter to receiver.The setting programmed under "MODE" is alwaysbased on the channel set in the OUTPUT CH line.The factory setting for all servos is "HOLD".For each selected OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the receiver) you can choose between:FAI(L) SAFE•With this selection, in the event of a failure the corresponding servo moves to the position shown in the "POSITION" line for the remainder of the failure until the "Delay time" set in the "DELAY" line has lapsed.HOLD•With a setting of "HOLD", in the event of a failure the servo maintains the last correctly received servo position for the duration of the failure.OFF•With a setting of "OFF", in the event of a failure the receiver discontinues the retransmission of (temporarily stored) control impulses for the respective servo output for the duration of the failure. In other words, the receiver switches the impulse line "off".BUT CAUTION: Analog servos and even some digital servos no longer put up any resistance against the previous control pressure during the failure of the control impulse and are more or less pushed out of their position as a result.F.S.POS. (Fail-safe position)For each OUTPUT CH (receiver servo connection), set the position the given servo should assume in "FAI(L) SAFE" mode, i.e. in the event of a failure, via

233Detail program description - Telemetrythe "F.S.POS." line. This is done by ﬁ rst activating the value ﬁ eld (inverse representation) with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad then using the selection keys of the right touch pad to choose the servo position. The adjustment takes place in 10-μs increments.Factory setting: 1500 μs (servo center).Important notice:The function "F.S.POS." has an additional meaning in all three modes, "OFF", "HOLD" and "FAI(L) SAFE" in the event that the receiver is switched on, but (still) does not receive a valid signal. The servo immediately travels to the fail-safe position predeﬁ ned in the "Position" line. In doing so, the landing gear, for example, is is prevented from retracting of the receiver is accidentally switched on while the transmitter is switched off. In normal model mode, on the other hand, the corresponding servo behaves in accordance with the set "MODE" in the event of a failure.DELAY (fail-safe reaction time or delay)Here you adjust the delay time after which the servos should move to their predetermined positions in the event of a signal interruption. This setting is adopted for all channels and only pertains to the servos programmed to the "FAIL SAFE" mode. Factory setting: 0.75 s.FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting)This sub-menu allows servo fail-safe positions to be established at the "push of a button" in a similar manner to that described on page 208 for the »Fail Safe« menu.Switch to the "FAIL SAFE ALL" line and activate the value ﬁ eld by touching the center SET key of the right touch pad. "NO" will be displayed in inverse video. Then adjust the parameter to "SAVE" with one of the selection keys of the right touch pad. Now, using the operating elements of the transmitter, move all servos to the desired fail-safe position you assigned or want to assign in the line "MODE" "FAI(L) SAFE". The current position of the control for the channel which was just set is shown in the bottom "Position" line:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 01MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1670secDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 01POSITION : 1670secFAIL SAFE ALL: SAVEAfter a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the display will change again, from "SAVE" to "NO". The saved the positions of all servos affected by this measure and adopted them in parallel to the line "F.S.Pos." and the display then immediately shows the following for the current OUTPUT CH (servo connection):TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 01MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1670secDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 01POSITION : 1670secFAIL SAFE ALL: NOSwitch off the transmitter and check the fail-safe positions based on the servo throws. "Fail Safe" in combination with "Channel Mapping"In order to ensure that the mapped servos – that is to say servos which are controlled from a common control channel (INPUT CH) – react the same way even in the event of a failure, the corresponding settings of the INPUT CH determine the behavior of the mapped servos!!! Therefore, the servo connections 6, 7 and 8 of a receiver are mapped with one another, whereby the OUTPUT CH (servo connections) 06, 07 and 08 are assigned as INPUT CH of the same respective control channel "04" …TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 04MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1670secDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 06POSITION : 1670secFAIL SAFE ALL: NOTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 04MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1230secDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 07POSITION : 1670secFAIL SAFE ALL: NOTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 04MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1770secDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 08POSITION : 1670secFAIL SAFE ALL: NO… the INPUT CH 04 determines the fail-safe behavior of these three servos connected to the control channel 4 completely independently of the individual settings of the respective OUTPUT CH:

234 Detail program description - TelemetryTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 04MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1500secDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 04POSITION : 1670secFAIL SAFE ALL: NOThis is also the case, for example, if this is mapped with INPUT CH 01:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 01MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1420secDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 04POSITION : 1670secFAIL SAFE ALL: NOIn this case, the servo connection 04 would, in turn, react according to the fail-safe settings of CH 01.The reaction or delay time set in the "DELAY" line, on the other hand, always applies uniformly for all channels set to "FAI(L) SAFE". RX FREE MIXERTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FREE MIXERMASTER CH: 00SLAVE CH : 00S–TRAVEL–: 100S–TRAVEL+: 100MIXER : 1RX WING MIXERTAIL TYPE: NORMALValue Explanation Possible settingsMIXER Mixer selection 1 … 5MASTERCHSignal source or source channel0, 1 … depending on receiverValue Explanation Possible settingsSLAVE CH Target channel 0, 1 … depending on receiverS-TRAVEL– Admix negative 0 … 100 %S-TRAVEL+ Admix positive 0 … 100 %RX WING MIXERTAIL TYPEtail type NORMAL,V-TAIL (V-LW)ELEVON(vertical/horizontal mixer for delta and ﬂ ying wing)MIXERUp to three mixers can be programmed simultaneously. Use "MIXER" to switch between mixers 1 … 5.The following settings in this display always for just the mixer selected in the "MIXER" line.Important notice:If you have already programmed mixer functions in the »Wing mixer« or »Free mixer«" Free mixer " menus, make absolutely sure that these mixers do not overlap with those in the menu "RX FREE MIXER"!MASTER CH ("from")According to the same principles described in the section "Free mixer" on page 192, the signal applied at the MASTER CH (signal source or source channel) is mixed to a variable extent to the SLAVE CH (target channel). Select "00" if no mixer should be set.SLAVE CH ("to")The signal of the MASTER CH (source channel) is mixed proportionally to the SLAVE CH (target channel). The mix ratio will be determined by the percentages entered in the lines "TRAVEL–" and "TRAVEL +".Select "00" if no mixer should be set.TRAVEL–/+ (proportion of the admix in %)With the settings of these two lines the percentage of the admix is speciﬁ ed in relation to the MASTER signal separately for each direction.RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE (tail unit type)The following model types are also available in the "Tail" line of the »Model type« menu, on page 94 and should, preferentially, be preset there. In this case, always leave the TAIL TYPE set to NORMAL.However, if you would prefer to use the mixer integrated in the receiver, you can select the already pre-adjusted mixer functions for the corresponding model type:NORMAL•This setting corresponds to the classic aircraft type with rear tail unit and separate rudder and elevator. No mixer function is necessary for this model type.V-TAIL (V-tail unit)•With this model type the elevator and rudder control functions are connected, so that each of the two tail unit ﬂ aps – each controlled with a separate servo – assume both the elevator and rudder function. The servos are normally connected to the receiver as follows:OUTPUT CH 3: Left V-tail servoOUTPUT CH 4: Right V-tail servoIf the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, please observe the notices on page 62.ELEVON (delta/ﬂ ying wing models)•The servos connect at the outputs 2 and 3 assume the aileron and elevator function. The servos are normally connected to the receiver as follows:OUTPUT CH 2: Left horizontal/vertical

235Detail program description - TelemetryOUTPUT CH 3: Right horizontal/verticalIf the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, please observe the notices on page 62. RX CURVE (EXPO)TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : BCURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : BCURVE2 CH : 03 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 04Value Explanation Possible settingsCURVE1, 2 or 3 CHChannelassignment of the respective curve setting1 … depending on receiverTYPE Curve type A, B, Csee ﬁ gureExpo = +100%–100% +100%0–100% +100%0Expo = –100%TYPE A–100% +100%0–100% +100%0linear–100% +100%0–100% +100%0TYPE BTYPE CDR = 125% DR = 70%Servo travelControl travelServo travelControl travelServo travelControl travelNormally a non-linear control function, if applicable, is used for the aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3) and rudder (channel 4). These channel defaults also correspond to the factory settings. BUT CAUTION: This assignment only applies when, on the transmitter side, neither "2HRSv3+8" is speciﬁ ed in the "Tail type" line nor is "2AIL" or 2AIL 2FL" speciﬁ ed in the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Base settings«menu. Otherwise, assignments will have already been made in the transmitter for control function 3(elevator), which will then be split between controlchannels 3 & 8, or control function 2 (aileron), which will then be split between control channels 2 & 5 for the left and right ailerons. The corresponding controlchannels (INPUT CH) in the receiver would in both cases be channels 03 & 08 or 02 & 05.Therefore if, for example, "2AIL" has been speciﬁ ed on the transmitter side and the intent here is to utilize the RX CURVE option instead of the mc-20 HoTT transmitter's individually adjustable »Dual Rate / Expo« menu (see page 120 or 124), then two curves must be set:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : BCURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : BCURVE2 CH : 05 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 04Otherwise, the left and right ailerons have different control characteristics.With the RX CURVE function you can manage the control characteristics for up to three servos:CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH•Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) of the ﬁ rst servo.The following setting in TYPE only pertains to the channel selected here.TYPESelect the servo curve:A: EXPO = -100 % and DUAL RATE = 125 % The servo reacts strongly to movements of the joystick around the neutral position. As the rudder throw increases, the curve becomes ﬂ atter.B: Linear setting. The servo follows the joystick movement linearly.C: EXPO = +100 % and DUAL RATE = 70 %The servo reacts weakly to the joystick movements around the neutral position. As the rudder throw increases, the curve becomes steeper.Note:The control characteristics programmed here also affect the mapped receiver outputs.5CH FUNCTION: "SERVO" or "SENSOR"TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : ACURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : ACURVE2 CH : 03 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 045CH FUNCTION:SERVOSome receivers have a speciﬁ c servo connection which has been made switchable rather than an independent telemetry connection. Thus, for example, on the GR-12 receiver included with the mx-12 HoTT set, order no. 33112, , servo connector 5 has an extra "T" mark and can be alternatively connected …Servo Sensor OR… not only via an order no. 7168.6Aadaper cable to upgrade the receiver but also connected to a telemetry sensor. However, in order for the receiver to correctly recognize the given connected device correctly, servo connection 5 (in this case) MUST be appropriately set

236 Detail program description - Telemetryfor either "SERVO" or "SENSOR".This switchover is accomplished by moving the dwith the selection key of the left or right touch pad until the " " symbol is at the left margin of the bottom line then tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad. TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : ACURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : ACURVE2 CH : 03 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 045CH FUNCTION:SERVONow use one of the cd selection keys on the right touch pad to select the alternative setting "SENSOR".TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : ACURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : ACURVE2 CH : 03 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 045CH FUNCTION:SENSORAnother tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will close the selection and, with appropriate repetitive taps on the center ESC key of the left touch pad, a return to the transmitter's basic display is accomplished. RX SERVO TESTTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VTEST : STOPALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CCH OUT TYPE:ONCEValue Explanation PossiblesettingsALL-MAX Servo travel on the "+" side for all servo outputs for the servo test1500 … 2000 μsALL-MIN Servo travel on the "-" side for all servo outputs for the servo test1500 … 1000 μsTEST Test procedure START / STOPALARMVOLTAlarm threshold of the receiver undervoltage warning3.0 … 6.0 Vfactory setting: 3.8 V ALARMTEMP+Alarm threshold for excessively high temperature of the receiver50 … 80 °CFactory setting: 70 °CALARMTEMP–Alarm threshold for excessively low temperature of the receiver-20 … +10 °CFactory setting: -10 °CCHOUTPUTTYPEChannel sequence ONCE, SAME, SUMI, SUMOALL-MAX (servo travel on the "+" side)In this line you set the maximum servo travel on the plus side of the control travel for the servo test.2000 μs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μs corresponds to the neutral position.Make sure that the servos do not overrun mechanically during the test routine.ALL-MIN (servo travel on the "-" side)You adjust the maximum servo travel on the minus side of the control path for the servo test in this line.1000 μs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μs corresponds to the neutral position.TESTYou start and stop the servo test integrated in the receivers in this line.A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the entry ﬁ eld:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CCH OUT TYPE:ONCETEST : STOPNow, with one of the selection keys of the right touch pad, select START:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CCH OUT TYPE:ONCETEST : STARTA brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will now start the test run. The input ﬁ eld is

237Detail program description - Telemetryshown as "normal" again:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CCH OUT TYPE:ONCETEST : STARTTo stop the servo test, reactivate the entry ﬁ eld as described above, select STOP and conﬁ rm this selection with the SET key of the right touch pad.ALARM VOLT (receiver undervoltage warning)The receiver voltage is monitored through ALARM VOLT. The interval can be adjusted between 3.0 and 6.0 Volt. If the set alarm threshold is undercut, an acoustic signal is issued (interval peep tone long/short) and "VOLT.E" blinks in the top right of all »RX…« displays:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVOREVERSE : OFFCENTER : 1500secTRIM : –000secTRAVEL– : 150%OUTPUT CH: 01TRAVEL+ : 150%PERIOD : 20msecVOLT.EThe parameter "R-VOLT" is also represented inversely in the »RX DATAVIEW« display:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ES–STR100% R–TEM.+28°CL PACK TIME 00010msecL.R-VOLT:03.5VS–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBMSENSOR1 :00.0V 00°CSENSOR2 :00.0V 00°CR-VOLT :03.7VRX DATAVIEW VOLT.EALARM TEMP +/- (recommended temperature monitoring)These two options monitor the receiver temperature. A lower threshold "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 … +10 °C) and an upper threshold "ALARM TEMP+" (50 … 80 °C) can be programmed. When these speciﬁ cations are exceeded or undercut, an acoustic signal (continuous peep tone) sounds and "TEMP.E" appears in the top right of all receiver displays. In addition, the parameter "R-TEM" is shown inversely on the "»RX DATAVIEW«" display page.Make sure that your receiver remains within the permissible temperature range during all ﬂ ight conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C).CH OUTPUT TYPE (connection type)Here you select how the receiver outputs are controlled.• ONCETELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:ONCEThe servo connections of the receiver are controlled successively. This is recommended for analog servos. This setting automatically operates servos in a 20 ms cycle – or in a 30 ms cycle for a 12 channel receiver (order no. 33512) – , regardless of what is set or displayed in the "PERIOD" line of the »RXSERVO« screen!• SAMETELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:SAMEThe servo connections of the receiver are controlled in parallel in blocks of four. This means channels 1 through 4, 5 through 8 and 9 through 12 each receive the control signals simultaneously.This is recommended for digital servos when multiple servos are used for one function (e.g. aileron), so that the servos can run absolutely synchronized.When only using digital servos, we recommend setting the "PERIOD" line of the »RX SERVO« to 10 ms in order to be able to utilize the fast reaction of digital servos. With the use of analog servos or in mixer mode, "20 ms" must be selected!With this setting, pay particular attention to the sufﬁ cient dimensioning of the receiver current supply. Since up to four servos can always operate simultaneously, the requirement is higher.• SUMO (sum signal OUT)A HoTT receiver conﬁ gured as SUMO permanently generates a so-called sum signal from the control signals of all of its control channels and provides this by default to the accompanying GR-32 DUAL receiver on servo connection 8.On receivers whose display shows "SUMO" at the top right, an additional two-digit number appears …

238 Detail program description - TelemetryTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:SUMO 12… after conﬁ rmation of "SUMO" with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the active ﬁ eld changes to the right for channel selection. With this selection you specify the highest of the transmitter channels contained in the SUMO signal:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:SUMO 12Either conﬁ rm the default with another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or use the selection keys to pick another channel between 04 and 16 and conﬁ rm that with SET.Receiver outputs will be controlled successively in a 20 ms cycle (30 ms with the GR-32 DUAL receiver, order no. 33516), even if 10 ms is set in the "PERIOD" line of the the »RX SERVO« screen.Primarily intended for the "Satellite mode" of two HoTT receivers, as described below, the sum signal generated by the SUMO-designated receiver can also be used, for example, tocontrol of Flybar systems (provided they have an appropriate input) or to control ﬂ ight simulators via an adapter cable, order no. 33310In … Satellite mode … two HoTT receivers are connected to one another through a three-wire connecting cable (order no. 33700.1 (300 mm) or 33700.2 (100 mm)) at receiver-type-speciﬁ c servo connections. Type GR-16 and GR-32 DUAL receivers, for example, are to be connected with one another at servo output 8. More detailed information can be found on the Internet at www.graupner.de.This connection transmits all channels of the HoTT receiver conﬁ gured as SUMO as well as those of the receivers designated as satellites continuously to the second HoTT receiver, which is to be programmed as …• SUMI (sum signal IN)… the designation for the main receiver. Therefore, the signal always goes toward SUMI:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:SUMIThe receiver deﬁ ned as SUMI, however, only uses the sum signal coming from SUMO in the event of a failure of receipt if at least one channel in SUMI is programmed to fail-safe. If the receiver programmed as the SUMO satellite receiver has a reception outage, the servos connected to this receiver assume the fail-safe positions which were programmed into the satellite receiver, completely independent of the main receiver.On the other hand, if two receivers have a reception outage simultaneously, the fail-safe settings in the current receiver software at the time this manual went to print (in principle, the SUMO's fail-safe settings) become effective. In the individual case, however, interactions cannot be ruled out, which is why we urgently recommend performing an appropriate test BEFORE commissioning a model.This receiver combination is recommended if, for example, one of the two receivers is installed in the model at an unfavorable position for receiving or as a result of nozzles, carbon ﬁ ber material or the like, there is the danger that the receipt signal is weakened due to the ﬂ ight position, so that interruptions of the range must be taken into account.Therefore, make sure to connect the most important control functions to the main receiver programmed as SUMI, so that, in the event of a failure, the model remains controllable when the SUMO satellite receiver no longer receives a signal.Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the on-board electricity supply, on the other hand, is only sent to the transmitter by the satellite receiver conﬁ gured as SUMO. Therefore, telemetry sensors are to be connected to the satellite receiver (SUMO).Each receiver should be connected with its own supply line from the common voltage supply. With receivers with a high current load, it may even be beneﬁ cial to connect them with two supply lines to the same current supply. On the other hand, if each of the two receiversshould be supplied from its own voltage source, the center cable must be removed from one of the two plugs of the satellite cable; see ﬁ gure.rot123If you would like to carry out additional

239Detail program description - Telemetryprogramming, such as fail-safe settings, disconnect the three-pole satellite connection between the two receivers and switch on only the relevant receiver. It may be necessary to also change the connection sequence. Setting/displaying sensorsIf, in addition to a "receiver", at least one sensor is selected in the »Telemetry« menu's »SENSORSELECT« sub-menu (described below) then its settings can be read in and changed on the previously described receiver screens. However, to actually gain access to this data, the selected sensor/s must be connected to the receiver system and this receiver system must have an active telemetry connection. If, as described in the next section, there is at least one sensor activated which has the support of current ﬁ rmware, then it is possible to directly switch between individual modules. However, if sensors with older ﬁ rmware are in use, it may be necessary to select "etc." instead of the direct sensor selection. In either case, tap the c or d selection key of the lefttouch pad … RECEIVERVARIOetc.… then use the same keys to select up or down for the desired module, for example:VARIOGPSReceiverIf the selected module, in this case a Vario module, is active then on the last receiver screen ("RX SERVO TEST"), at the top right there will also be an additional " " symbol pointing to the right. This symbol is located just to the right of the left-pointing "" symbol and is the visible indicator that additional display screens can be accessed.TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000secALL–MAX : 2000secALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:ONCENow use one of the f selection keys on the left or right touch pad to switch to the selected sensor's displays and check or change its settings as described in the manual delivered with the sensor.

240 Detail program description - Telemetry SENSOR SELECTSelecting sensorsAfter selection of the desired menu line with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad …TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1VOLT.E… and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selected sub-menu will open.SENSOR SELECTRECEIVERGENERAL MODULEVARIO MODULEELECTRIC AIR.MODGPSThis menu option can be used to determine which of the graphic displays described on page 36, as well as those described previously for sub-menu »SETTINGS/DISPLAYS«, can be selected and which remain hidden. Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of respective sensors by selecting the desired lines with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad, e.g.:SENSOR SELECTRECEIVERGENERAL MODULEVARIO MODULEELECTRIC AIR.MODGPS

241Detail program description - TelemetryAfter selection of the desired menu line with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad …TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1VOLT.E… and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu. This provides a visualization of the quality of the connection of transmitter and receiver:E100%SL 22P 10RL 414.8RSS 95%4.8RM0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D ETop row: Reception power of the channels 1 … 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming from the receiver to the transmitter.Bottom row: Reception power of the channels 1 … 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming from the transmitter to the receiver.Comments:Since reception power is measured and presented •in dBm, reception power is increasingly worse the higher the bar is and vice versa; refer also to "Reception power (S-dBm)" on page 230 about RF STATUS VIEWthis. The points above the bars mark the poorest •reception since switching on the transmitter or the last reset of the display with a simultaneous tap on thecd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).Additional ﬁ gures are shown to the left of the graphic representation of the reception power. These mean:Value ExplanationE Signal quality in % of the signal received from the receiverS Signal quality in % of the signal received by the receiverSL Reception power in dBmP Number of lost data packages of the receiverRL Reception power in dBM of the signal received by the receiverRS Current operating voltage of the receiver in voltsRM Lowest receiver operating voltage since last startup, in volts

242 Detail program description - TelemetryAfter selection of the desired menu line with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad …TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1VOLT.Eand a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu. REPEATVOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMIT––––––VARIO –––1secIn order to be able to start the voice output through the headphone connection, at the very least the "REPEAT" line must be assigned to a switch. The takes place as described in the section "Switch and control switch assignments" on page 56:VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMIT––––––VARIO –––1SECMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMIT–––VARIO –––1sec 3With this switch you can have the last respective voice trigger repeated for the duration of the time set to the left of the switch, as long as the assigned switch is closed: TRIGWith a switch assigned to this line, preferably one of the two pushbuttons, switch the selected voice messages in rotation on to the next voice message for the below-described "TRANSMITTER", "RECEIVER" and "SENSOR" options, as described below. VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMITVARIO –––1sec 31 VARIOIf the "VARIO MODULE" line is activated ( ) in the »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu, as described on page 240, a switch assigned to one of these lines can be used to call up vario-speciﬁ c voice messages for the headset connection which are completely independent of other voice messages, i.e. voice messages triggered by altitude changes, such as the message "slowly ascend/descend".VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMITVARIO1sec 318 TRANSMITTERAfter selection of the desired menu line with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad …VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMITVARIO1sec 318and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu.VOLT:MODELTIME:BATTERYTIME:TIMER(GE.)CENTER:TIMER(GE.)TOP:TIME:PHASE TIMER:Here, after selection of the desired line with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selected voice message can be activated ( ) or deactivated ( ). VOICE TRIGGER

243Detail program description - TelemetryVOLT:MODELTIME:BATTERYTIME:TIMER(GE.)CENTER:TIMER(GE.)TOP:TIME:PHASE TIMER: RECEIVERAfter selection of the desired menu line with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad …VOICE TRIGGERTRIGTRANSMITVARIO18RECEIVER… and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu:TEMP:STRENGHT:VOLT:FLUGZEITUHR:LOWVOLT:UHRZEIT:Here, after selection of the desired line with the cdselection keys of the left or right touch pad and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selected voice message can be activated ( ) or deactivated ( ). SENSORThis line only appears if a sensor was ﬁ rst activated in the »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu. For example, if the »VARIO« sensor is selected then the selections for the "VARIO" line will be opened …VOICE TRIGGERTRANSMITVARIO 8RECEIVERVARIOwhen a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad calls up the sub-menu.ALT:MAXALT:MINALT:FLUGZEITUHR:VOLT MINIMUM:UHRZEIT:As described in the column at the left, these menus also allow every offered voice message to be activated ( ) or deactivated ( ) by selecting the desired line followed by a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Note:The selection made here is completely independent of the "VARIO" voice triggers.

244 Detail program description - Channel sequencer Channel sequencerProgramming the motion sequences of up to 3 servosUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Channel sequence« menu option in the multi-function menu: Wing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceTap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:CHANNEL SEQUENCERChannelChannelINACTINACTSETChannelchannelINACT141516The »Channel sequence« menu option can be used to execute up to 9 exactly coordinated steps for up to three servos over a period of up to 30 seconds. Such a sequence can be triggered by a single switch and begin at an initial servo position which is freely adjustable. For example, this makes the opening of undercarriage doors, complete with subsequent extension of the retractable gear, just as simple to program as opening a wheel well with renewed closing of one undercarriage door once the landing gear has been lowered or to program the raising of a cockpit canopy with subsequent head turns and waving performed by the pilot. However, the prerequisite for all these actions is the "parsing" of the desired motion sequence into practical, individual steps.Programming procedureOn this menu option's ﬁ rst display page, see ﬁ gure below left, either accept the three preset channels, 14 … 16, or select an available channel, 5 … 16, for each line to form any other desired combination, e.g.:CHANNEL SEQUENCERChannelChannelINACTINACTSETChannelchannelINACT101112With a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given channel is reset back to 5, 6 or 7.The next step makes the control channels needed for the channel sequence available. This is done in the "SET" column by changing settings from "INACT" to "ACT" and thus making the individual channels "available" to the program for sequencing. Conversely, this also means that channels deﬁ ned as "active" in the »Channel sequence« menu are notavailable for other purposes.CHANNEL SEQUENCERChannelChannelACTACTSETChannelchannelACT101112With a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given channel is reset back to "INACT".Once control channels and their activity statuses have been set, switch to the right column then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to reach the second page, the »Channel sequence« menu's choreography page. Since the call-up of the second page in this example was issued from the "Servo 12" line, this servo remains the object of focus after the page change.Channel sequencerTIMESTEP1011120POS–––0%The previous display page permitted the selection of participating servos and their incorporation into the sequence. This display page will now be used to establish the sequence of steps for participating servos, beginning with initial positions yet to be deﬁ ned. The step number, from "0f" to a maximum of "e9", will be shown in the column labeled "STEP" near the bottom left of the display.Step 0: Setting initial positionKeep the focus of attention on "Servo 12" or change to any other of the three servos by using the cdkeys of the left touch pad, e.g. upward to "Servo 10".

245Detail program description - Channel sequencerChannel sequencerTIMESTEP11120POS–––0%10Use one of the cf selection keys of the right touch pad, as necessary, to shift the marker frame to the right from the column "TIME" to the value ﬁ eld above the column labeled "POS" then, after a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, alter this value within a range of ±100 % until the servo is in the desired initial position. For example:Channell sequencerTIMESTEP11120POS–––10+90%Repeat this procedure as necessary for the other two servos.With a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given position value will be reset back to"0 %".Step 1: ﬁ rst eventNow that initial positions have been established, the ﬁ rst step can be set. This is a matter of deﬁ ning what is to be done, or not done, ﬁ rst, following a certain span of time.Do this by ﬁ rst using the cd selection keys of the lefttouch pad to select one of the servos. Now tap the f key of the left touch pad. The step number, which was previously indicated by a "0" is now replaced by a "1" and the value "0.0s" will appear in the ﬁ eld above "TIME".Channel sequencer TIMESTEP11121POS–––10+90%0.0sUse the selection keys of the right touch pad as necessary to shift the marker frame to the "TIME" column.Now brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to set the activation time into the value ﬁ eld for the "TIME" column, e.g. 1.5 s. The current position in time is represented in the graphic by the dotted vertical line. It will move to the right according to the time setting and, at the same time, the course of servo positions will be presented as dotted lines between time-point "0" and time-point "1".Channel sequencerTIMESTEP11121POS–––10+90%1.5sNow set the desired servo positions for the end of the ﬁ rst time span (with the same procedure as already described for "Step 0") or leave one or more of these servos in the same position they were in for the previous step.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video value displayed if the TIME ﬁ eld back to "blank" and erase the current sequence, in this example only Step "1".Channel sequencerTIMESTEP11120POS–––10+90%0.0sStep 2 …Repeat the previously described procedure for every other step to be deﬁ ned until the servos have reached their terminal positions.Switch assignmentIn conclusion, assign the sequence of events created to a switch (as described on page 56 in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches") with which the servos can be switched between their initial and terminal positions.Channel sequencerTIMESTEP11128POS100%0.0s 2As soon as this switch is closed, the servos' sequence of movements can be followed in the graphic. The servo curves will be shown in inverse video according to the preset time windows. All movements will sequence in reverse when the switch is opened again.Important notices:The sequence shown is only for demonstration •purposes and is not at all representative of a real sequence of servo movements.

246 Detail program description - Channel sequencerThe settings made in the "POS" value ﬁ eld •replace the otherwise "conventional" transmitter control signal. Therefore it is necessary, before programming such a sequence, to check in the »Servo display« menu to make sure none of the channels planned for the sequence are actuated by any other transmitter operating element. If this were to be the case, it could lead to unpredictable excursions in the motion sequence. The settings made in the »• Servo adjustment«and »Tx. output swap« menus are not affected by settings in this menu.When preparing and creating a sequence, •be absolutely sure the servos do not collide mechanically. If necessary, use the "Travel limit" option in the »Servo adjustment« menu. Multi-channelChannel multiplier for special functionsThe mc-20 HoTT transmitter has an integrated multi-function channel built into the transmitter's software. This facility permits up to two control channels to be used for up to four or eight special functions Every available switch (including the so-called expansion switches, see page 56) or transmitter control can be assigned on the transmitter side.On the receiver side, the following modules are available as accessories, whereby at one time a maximum of two modules can be operated via the »Multi-channel« menu.NAUTIC-Expert, switching module, order no. 4159The NAUTIC-Expert switching module expands a servo's functionality to 16 switched functions. By appropriately wiring the connecting cable, loads can either be operated from a common power supply or also separately by multiple power sources.NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder order no. 4142.NThe 1/4 C-NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder expands a proportional function to four proportional functions.Light module order no. 2381A module for switching the light signals of rail, road and airborne vehicles with true authenticity.Sound switch for vehicle models order no. 2382.Fstart, stop and supplementary sounds as well as typical vehicle signalsSound switch for ship models order no. 2382.Sstart, stop and supplementary sounds as well as typical ship signalsFurther information can be found in Internet at www.graupner.de. Use the search mask by entering the respective order no. Alternatively, contact or visit your local dealer.Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Multichannel« menu option in the multi-function menu:

247Detail program description - Multi-channelMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiter… then open this menu option with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Here, in the second column from the left, each of the two multi-channel functions can be activated ("ACT") or deactivated ("INACT") as desired and in the third column the given function can be assigned to one of the transmitter channels, C5 through C8, in a list.MULTICHANNELMULTIC1MULTIC2INACTINACTC5C6SET SEL MULTIC 4CHMULTIC 4CHSELNote:When a changeover is made to the »Servo display«or if »Servo adjustment« is used to select the "-travel+" or "-lim +" columns for these previously set channels, their respective cells will ﬂ ash to indicate that these channels have been activated in the »Multichannel« menu. The preset values of 100 % or 150 % should not be changed.Prior to channel selection, please observe the following notices:Switch to the 1. "SETTINGS/DISPLAYS" line of the »Telemetry« menu and tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:on the "RX SERVO" page, select the "20 msec" •setting in the last line "PERIOD", see page 231.On the "RX SERVO TEST" display page, •select the "SAME" option for the last line "CH OUT TYPE", see page 238.The control channel used may not be used as an 2. input nor as an output channel for any mixer! For example, if C5 is selected, be sure that the "Aile/ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu is preset to "1AIL" or that the "Swashplate type" line of the »Helicopter type« menu is preset to "1 servo".The channel settings intended for NAUTIC control 3. channel purposes in the »Control adjust« and »Servo adjustment« menus are to be left as they are or reset back to their original settings. Do not assign any transmitter control or switch to the respective input either. Also be sure that the servo's direction of rotation is not reversed. Leave the servo middle at 0%.MULTICHANNELMULTIC1MULTIC2ACTACTC5C6SET SEL MULTIC 4CHMULTIC 4CHSELIn the next column to the right, make a separate channel count speciﬁ cation for each of the two multi-channels; "MULTIC 4C." for the NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini decoder, order no. 4142.N or "MULTIC 8C." for the NAUTIC-Expert switching module, order no. 4159.MULTICHANNELMULTIC1MULTIC2ACTACTC5C6SET SEL MULTIC 4CHSELMULTIC 8CHAfterward, use the right arrow symbol at the bottom line's right end to switch over to the second page of settings for the »Multichannel« menu:MULTICH 2–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4Input 5Input 6Input 7Input 8frfrfrfrfrfrfrfr–––––––––––––––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +This menu page is now used for making individual settings for "MULTICH 1" and "MULTICH 2".Column 2, "Control"–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel+frMULTICH 2Use the arrow keys to move to the column over SEL.

248 Detail program description - Multi-channeland then connected as necessary.)If a Nautic-Expert switching module (order no. 4159) is present, the assigned proportional control will function like a switch when it is put near its limit position.Column 3, "Switch"–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +frMULTICH 2This column is used to assign each of the inputs used, 1 through 8 (maximum), to any switch available on the transmitter. These assignments are done as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56:Any controls which were previously assigned in the second column will be erased. In this case, instead of SEL, the switch symbol will be displayed at the bottom of the 2nd column such that now a second "normal" switch, or even a transmitter control switch, logical switch, … can be assigned as needed from the group of "expanded switches". In general it is sufﬁ cient to assign a simple switch or transmitter control.–––OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +3MULTICH 2Column 3, "Offset"–––OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +3MULTICH 2The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -100 % and +100 %.Simultaneously tapping on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the value displayed in inverse video back to its "0 %" value.Leave the offset setting at 0 % while making switch assignments.Column 3, "–travel+"–––offsetINPUT 1INPUT 2INPUT 3INPUT 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +3MULTICH 2Finally, transmitter control travel is set for both sides in the rightmost column "-travel+". The range for this lies between -100 % and +100 %. To accomplish this, push or turn the respective transmitter control in the given direction. This will set the "travel" for each given direction individually.If the assignment is for a switch, leave the setting at the default value of 100 %.After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown below will appear in the display:–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +frMULTICH 2Move desiredcontrol adj.Alternatively, the center SET key of the right touch pad can be tapped for a second time while this message is on display:–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +frMULTICH 2Now the desired transmitter control can be selected with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad. If the selected control has an assignment, it can be disconnected from a transmitter control switching its ﬁ eld to "fr".:transmitter control 1 … 4 (CH 1 …4)•slider control 1 … 3 in the middle of the console •(SR1 … 3)depressible, roller-shaped proportional speed •control (DG1 … 5)side proportional control control (SD1 and SD2)•(Function inputs "UV1" through "UV8", which are also in the selection list, can be selected at a later time

249Detail program description - Multi-channelNote:Due to technical reasons, servos connected to a 1/4 C NAUTIC Multi-Prop mini decoder may operate somewhat hesitatingly. This is not a fault.Connection notes for the Nautic-Expert switching module, order no. 4159As many as 16 switched functions can be controlled per switching module. Eight loads, like lamps, LEDs, etc. – but not electric motors – , with a load current of up to 0.7 A each can be connected directly. Two switch functions per connector socket are possible via the three conductor cable, order no. 3941.6 , see bottom right ﬁ gure.Electric motors and loads drawing substantial current should be connected by other means, e.g. via switching modules. Ask your dealer about this.M6 (output: 5 ... 8)5 (output 5 ... 8)(Receiver power supply to the „B + -“ marked terminals)Best.-Nr. 4159Max. 8 x 0,7 ABatt. 3...30VNAUTIC - ExpertSchaltbaustein2 - 16 KEmpfänger1- H -21- G -21- F -21- E -21- D -21- C -21- A -21- B -2Best.-Nr. 4142.N1/4 K NAUTICMulti-Prop-Mini-DecoderRXS 4S 3S 2S 1external power-supply 3 ... 30 V- ++-Current consumption of directly connected consumer units (but no electric motors) max. 0,7 A (total max. 8 x 0,7 A).Wiring for direct connection of two consumer units at one output3-pole cable with flat connector Order No. 3941.6redbrownorangeconsumerunitmax. 0,7 Aconsumerunitmax. 0,7 Aadditional modules e.g....Switching module high voltage SXH Order No. 3970Switching module multi function SXM Order No. 3971Switching module high voltage SXH Order No. 3970SwitchingmoduleSXHSwitchingmoduleSXMSwitching modulemulti function SXM Order No. 3971SoundswitchOrder No. 2382Light module Order No. 23817 (output: 5 ... 8)8 (output: 5 ... 8)additional servos, speed controller, sail winch, ... also on this sideThe figure shows an example of the connectivity of the ' 2-16 C NAUTIC Expert Switch building block "," 1/4 K NAUTIC Multi-Prop Mini-Decoder "," light module "and" sound switch ". Two of these modules in parallel can be operated using the menu »Multi channel« on output 5 ... 8.Before first time operation of the NAUTIC modules make the above described settings.Connection example with the Graupner HoTT GR-16 receiver

250 Detail program description - Ring limiterRing LimiterControl of Voith Schneider propellers in model shipsScroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to the menu option »Ring limiter« in the multi-function menu: MIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterTap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:RING LIMIT44911SET4Input3333XY41012XOutputYOFFOFFOFFThis »Ring limiter« is primarily intended for the control of up to three so-called Voith Schneider propellers in ship models. These are positioned beneath the ship where they are exposed to a free ﬂ ow of water in all directions. The control of these drives and turning their vertically oriented propeller blades is done with two servos per Voith Schneider propulsion unit whereby, for mechanical reasons, the propellers of this type offered by Graupner under order nos. 2358 and 2358.BL have a maximum control travel limitation of 4 mm each. As long as the joysticks for forward/reverse and left/right are operated individually (see section "Column Input") this is no problem because travel for the two servos can be appropriately adjusted, both mechanically as well as in the »Servo adjustment«menu. However, this becomes problematic when, for example, one joystick is 100 % forward and, at the same time, the other joystick is pushed completely to the right to arithmetically produce a 141 % sum for the two servo travel vectors. The mechanical controls of the Voith Schneider propellers will collide with their limits; in best case only drawing an unnecessary amount of electric current, in worst case causing damage or even bursting the linkage..In order to avoid this problem, the mc-20 HoTT transmitter has a maximum of three "ring limiters" available in the "SET" column of this option's ﬁ rst display page (see ﬁ gure at left) that can be switched "ON" or "OFF" individually. In the ﬁ rst line on the setting page for a given "ring limiter", its maximum travel can then be set for a range of between 25 and 125 %. The second line provides a setting for the size of limitation of overall deﬂ ection between: 0 % circular limit ( )100 % no limit ( )(limitation is strictly a matter of the given joystick's mechanical stop)Important notice:When this function is used, leave the respective setting values in the »Dual Rate / Expo« and »Servo adjustment» menus at 0 and 100 % or reset them back to their default values.The adjacent sketch illustrates the effect for a 0 % setting. The cross-hatched area of travel is curtailed and appears as a "dead zone".Column, "Input"With the standard preset control mode 1, all three ring limiters are pre-assigned to inputs 3 (forward/reverse) and 4 (left/right) which are actuated by the left joystick. However, this pre-assignment can be replaced anytime by any other transmitter control combination. Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the desired value ﬁ eld then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:RING LIMIT4911SET4Input3333XY41012XOutputYOFFOFFOFF4Select the desired control channel (1 … 12) for the value ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse video by using the cd or ef selection keys. However, do not forget that if a control channel in the range of 5 … 12 is selected, it must also be assigned to a control in the »Control adjust« menu, see page 108. Brieﬂ y tap the center ESC of the left touch pad or the center SET key of the right touch pad to conclude your entry.In principle, the other inputs are to be handled in the same manner.A tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the active value ﬁ eld back to its given default value.

251Detail program description - Ring limiterColumn, "Output"The three ring limiters are pre-assigned to receiver outputs 3/4, 9/10 and 11/12 by default, whereby the outputs in column "X" are for the forward/reverse function and the outputs in column "Y" are for the left/right function. However, this preset combination of receiver outputs can be replaced as necessary by any other combination at any time. This is essentially done in the same manner as described previously under "Input", for example:RING LIMIT49SET4Input3333XY4106XOutputYOFFOFFOFF47Note:Watch out for undesirable overlaps if you use one of the outputs within a mixer.Column, "SET"The SET column is used to determine just which of the ring limiters is to be "OFF" and which are to be "ON", i.e. active. Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the desired value ﬁ eld in the SET column then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:RING LIMIT49SET4Input3333XY4106XOutputYOFFOFF47OFFIn the value ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse video, make a choice between the two options, "ON" and "OFF", with the cd or ef selection keys then conclude the entry with a brief tap on the center ESCkey of the left touch pad or on the center SET key of the right touch pad.A tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the active value ﬁ eld back to its "OFF" default value.Column¨RING LIMIT49SET4Input3333XY4106XOutputYONON47ONFollowing a selection of one of the three lines with the selection keys, switch to the settings page for the selected ring limiter (1 … 3) with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.0%Ring Limit 1max-X0%100% 100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%CH 3If, however, the small diamond at the center of the circle in the ﬁ gure above (which represents the current joystick position) is not visible …0%Ring Limit 1max-X0%100% 100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%CH 3… then the respective ring limiter is still switched "OFF". In this case, switch back to the previous page with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad then switch the respective ring limiter "ON" as previously described.Programming procedureThe two upper value ﬁ elds – labeled at the bottom left of the display as "max-X" or "max-Y", depending on the position of the marker frame – are used to specify separate settings for each of the two control functions, "left/right" and "forward/reverse" within a range of 25 … 0%Ring Limit 1max-X0%100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%25%CH 3… and 125 %:0%Ring Limit 1max-X0%100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%125%CH 3

252 Detail program description - Ring limiterIn practice, the setting is made by changing the given value until the respective servos in the model just reach the point where they no longer move.A tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the changed value in the active value ﬁ eld back to its "100 %" default value.In the next line down – labeled at the bottom left of the display as " <=> -X" or " <=> -Y", depending on the position of the marker frame – the setting values, in a range from 0 % and a maximum of 125 %, affect the form of limitation between "circular" and "rectangular", whereby a setting value here may never be greater than the value of the ﬁ eld above it.Ring Limit 10%100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%100%{–X0%CH 3Ring Limit 10%100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%100%{–X100%CH 3A tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the changed value in the active value ﬁ eld back to its "0 %" default value.When ﬁ nished with these settings, switch back to the ﬁ rst display page for this option then repeat this procedure, as applicable, for the lines of ring limiter 2 or 3.Final note:This option can, of course, also be used as necessary and applicable for ﬁ xed-wing models.

254 Detail program description - MP3 player MP3 playerReplay program for MP3 ﬁ les, such as music ﬁ lesScroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to the menu option »Ring limiter« in the multi-function menu: Dual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapgProfi trim Trim memeoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsTap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM00/00TRACK00/00No files 0kbpsESCA15If the message "No ﬁ les" appears near the middle of the display when this menu option is called then the transmitter has been unable to ﬁ nd any suitable MP3 ﬁ les on the SD card. If this should happen, use a PC or laptop to check the content of the "MP3" directory on the SD card and copy suitable MP3 ﬁ les into this directory if it is empty.Therefore, insert a SD card containing MP3 ﬁ les in a directory named "MP3" and, after switching the transmitter on, open the »MP3-Player« menu option.MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM00/00TRACK00/000kbpsESCA15Brieﬂ y tap the d key of the left touch pad to start replay of the ﬁ rst MP3 ﬁ le of album 1. The replay will start immediately, however, the display of data about the number of albums and titles as well as playing time for the current MP3 ﬁ le – depending on the size of the MP3 ﬁ le – will only appear after some delay.MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM01/04TRACK01/020kbpsESCA15The automatic replay of album 1 will continue to run until it is stopped with a tap on the d key of the left touch pad …MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM01/04TRACK01/026:54/12:21 128kbpsESCA15sing, sing.mp3 … or the the transmitter is switched off.During ongoing replay, the menu can be exited at any time and the transmitter can be used without restriction. The ongoing MP3 replay is visualized in the transmitter's basic display by virtue of a "MP3" display label shown at the left of the SD card symbol and an animated triangle beneath that display label.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVRX VOLT:4.8VMP3Note:If voice output is activated it will be blended in with the playing MP3 ﬁ le.VolumeMP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM01/04TRACK01/026:54/12:21 128kbpsESCASing, sing, sing.mp3 15After a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the value ﬁ eld, the volume of replay can be regulated within a range of "0" (= mute) to "30" (very loud).AlbumUse the selection keys of the right touch pad to move to the value ﬁ eld above "ALBUM" and brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

255Detail program description - MP3 playerMP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM TRACK01/026:54/12:21 128kbpsESCA15sing, sing.mp3 02/04Use the cd selection keys of the right touch pad to select the desired album number (from 1 to a maximum of 10) in this value ﬁ eld. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to conﬁ rm the selection.Note:The number of albums is a consequence of the number of ﬁ les present in subdirectories of the "MP3" directory on the SD card, not the sum of album names which may be stored in identically named meta-data ﬁ elds of the MP3 ﬁ le.TitleUse the selection keys of the right touch pad to move to the value ﬁ eld above "TRACK" and brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM TRACK0:00/2:34 128kbpsESCA15Track01.mp3 02/04 01/02Now select the desire title by using the cd selection keys on the right touch pad. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to start this selection.MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM TRACK0:00/3:45 128kbpsESCA15Track01.mp3 01/23 02/23Notes:The title displayed will be the ﬁ lename of the MP3 •ﬁ le, not any identically named title which may be stored in the MP3 ﬁ le as a meta-data ﬁ eld.The number of the title per album is a consequence •of the number of MP3 ﬁ les per directory.MP3 player operator ﬁ eldMP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM TRACK0:00/3:45 128kbpsESCA15Track01.mp3 01/23 02/23•Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and other players, jump one title forward or back for each tap on one of the ef selection keys of the left touch pad.• / Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and other players, start and stop the MP3 player with a tap on the d selection keys of the left touch pad.A• / 1 / 1Switch between these three options with the cselection keys of the left touch pad.AReplay of the selected album will repeat in an endless loop until it is either stopped or the transmitter is switched off.1Replay of the current title will repeat in an endless loop until it is either stopped or the transmitter is switched off.1 Replay will stop automatically at the end of play for the current title.ESC A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will exit the menu option withoutstopping any replay that may be running.

256 Detail program description - Basic settingsUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Basic settings« menu option in the multi-function menu: Dual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapgProfi trim Trim memeoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsTap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:Battery typeBattery warningTouch SenseTop LCD ContrastLi-IoDisplay lightRegion23.60V0EUROunlim.GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners name H-J SandbrunnerPre-set stick mode 1Pre-set DSC Output PPM10Pre-set Pitch min rearStick warning: unlim.Pre-set modulationOwn phase nameOwn phase nameHoTT210Bottom LCD Contrast 0Own phase name 1Voice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7fr –––SEL SEL7fr –––7fr –––Power-on/off beep yesBasic settings are made in this menu. Transmitter-speciﬁ c settings, such as volume regulation for acoustic signals and voice messages output via the built-in speaker or headset connector, the owner's name, country setting and even speciﬁ cations for new model memories. The settings made in this menu on the lines …"Pre-set stick mode",•"Pre-set modulation",•"Pre-set DSC Output" and•"Pre-set Pitch min"•… therefore have no inﬂ uence whatsoever on already existing model memories; instead, they are only defaults which are automatically adopted into newly initialized model memories and can be changed there individually at any time in the »Basic settings, model« and »Helicopter type« menus. A change to the "Pre-set" settings in value ﬁ elds of this menu therefore only affects those model memories created new at a later time.Note:The settings in this menu are only speciﬁ ed once in the entire transmitter. Therefore, after opening this menu in another model memory, the last valid settings always appear.Select the desired line with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap the center SETkey of the right touch pad. The value in the ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse video can be changed. After a change has been made, the entry can be concluded with another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad. Voice volume / Vario volume / Touch-beeps vol.H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7 fr –––7fr –––7fr –––SEL SELThese three lines can be used to individually set the volume of the three groups of acoustic signals and voice messages. This involves selection from among a total of three variants, whereby each of the variants offer two or three options for individually regulating volume even after leaving this menu. Basic settingsBasic transmitter settings

$257Detail program description - Basic settingsPre-setting a valueUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the desired value ﬁ eld in the column above the left SEL at the display's lower edge then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The desired volume for the selected group can be speciﬁ ed in increments between 0 and 10 in the value ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse video by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will conclude the process.Following a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return to its "7" default value.via rotary controlUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the desired value ﬁ eld in the column above the right SEL label at the display's lower edge then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The message shown below will then appear in the display:H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoive volumeVario voluTouch-beeps vol.7 fr –––7fr –––7fr –––SEL SELMove desiredcontrol adj.Now turn the desired rotary control, for example, the right retractable knob DG2. Afterward, this knob can be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for the selected group between 0 and 10.Following a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return to its "fr" default value.via three position switchUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the column above the switch symbol at the display's lower edge then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The message shown below will then appear in the display:H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoice volume SpracheVario volumetöneTouch-beeps7 fr –––7fr –––7fr –––SEL SELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Now, assign a switch as described on page 56 in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches". Ideally a self-neutralizing three position switch, e.g. like that offered by Graupnerunder order no. 33001.5. Afterward, this switch can be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for the selected group between 0 and 10.Following a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return to its "---" default value. OwnerH-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7 fr –––7fr –––7fr –––SEL SELUp to 15 characters can be used to specify the owner's name. Change to the next screen page (¨)with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad: !"#$%&’()Owners name@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¾¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~H-J SandbSelect the desired characters with the selection keys of the left touch pad. With a brief tap on the fselection key of the right touch pad or its center SETkey, move to the next position in which a character can be selected. A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at the current position.Positioning to any character position within the entry ﬁ eld can be done with the ef keys of the right touch pad.A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will cause a return to the previous menu page. Pre-set stick modeAs a basic principle, there are four different ways to assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle or brake ﬂ aps for winged models as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch for helicopter models to the two joysticks. Just which of these options is chosen depends on the individual preferences of the individual model pilot.Use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option ﬁ eld will be framed.$

258 Detail program description - Basic settingsH-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoice volumeVario volume 7fr –––7fr –––Pre-set stick mode 1H-J SandbrunnerSELTap on the SET key brieﬂ y. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the variant, from 1 to 4, you most frequently use. In the future this will be used for newly initialized model memories, but can be changed on an individual basis for up to 80 model memories.Following a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return to stick mode "1".With another tap on the SET key, the selection ﬁ eld will be deactivated again to permit a change to another line. Winged model stick mode“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)elev. downelev. upleft rudderright rudderfull throttleidleleft aileronright aileronfull throttleleft rudderright rudderidleelev. downelev. upleft aileronright aileronelev. downelev. upleft aileronright aileronMotor Vollgasidleleft rudderright rudderfull throttleidleleft aileronright aileronelev. downelev. upleft rudderright rudderHelicopter model stick mode“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)pitch axistail rotorpitch axistail rotorthrottlerollrollthrottletail rotortail rotorthrottle throttlepitch axispitch axisrollrollpitch axispitch axisrollrollMotor/Pitchthrottletail rotortail rotorthrottlethrottlerollrollpitch axispitch axistail rotortail rotor Pre-set modulationStandard equipment for the mc-20 transmitter includes a HoTT transmitter module and, under the right front cover – as viewed from the front – a connector socket for an external RF module, see page 25. Additionally, a transmitter-internal iFS RF module can be installed and connected. On a model-speciﬁ c basis, the transmitter can be set to use the modulation of any one of these three RF modules by appropriately selecting "HoTT", "EXT. PPM" or "INT. PPM" in the "Pre-set modulation" line of the »Basicsettings, model« menu. The most frequently used variant should logically be selected for the "Pre-set modulation" line in the "General Basic Settings" menu. In the future this will be used for newly initialized model memories, but can be changed on an individual basis for up to 80 model memories.Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameTouch-beeps vol. 7fr –––Pre-set stick mode 1H-J SandbrunnerPre-set modulation HoTTSELNow use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the variant from among "HoTT", "EXT. PPM" and "INT. PPM".A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will return the display back to modulation "HoTT".With a brief tap on the SET or ESC key, the selected ﬁ eld is deactivated to permit a switch to another line. Pre-set DSC OutputIn the line with the same name in the »Basicsettings, model« menu, a separate speciﬁ cation can be made from among the available modulation types which is speciﬁ c to each model memory and will then provided at the DSC socket. This choice primarily inﬂ uences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a ﬂ ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels 1 … 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 … 8, for "PPM18" channels 1 … 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 … 12.SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10BASIC SETTING,MODEL

259Detail program description - Basic settingsIn a manner similar to "Pre-set stick mode, in this»General basic settings« menu the selection made for the "Pre-set DSC Output" line will determine which of the four possible modulation types will be adopted as the default variant for a newly initialized model memory.If necessary, use the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the value window:H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners namePre-set stick mode 1H-J SandbrunnerPre-set modulation HoTTSELPre-set DSC Output PPM10Now a choice can be made from among the four possible modulation types: "PPM10", "PPM16", "PPM18" and "PPM24", with the selection keys of the right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will conclude the entry.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset this option back to "PPM10". Pre-set Pitch min(only relevant to helicopter models)In a manner similar to the previously described options "Stick mode" and "DSC Output", enter the preferred actuation direction for the throttle/pitch joystick on this line so the choice will already be present by default for model memories newly initialized in the future. The functionality of all other helicopter program options (to the extent they affect throttle and/or pitch) are dependent on this setting; in other words the throttle curve, idle trim, Channel 1 ¼tail rotor mixer, etc.This means:"fwd.": minimum front pitch setting, the pitch joystick (C1) points away from the pilot."back": minimum rear pitch setting, the pitch joystick (C1) points towards the pilot.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will set this option to "rear".Note:The C1 joystick's control direction for "Throttle min front/rear" in the ﬁ xed-wing program can be changed individually in the »Model type« menu. Contrast, upper display / lower displayIn assure optimal legibility of mc-20 HoTT displays under all weather and temperature conditions, their contrast settings can be adjusted separately. Contrast for the forward display, located between the switch panels, is adjusted by selecting the "Top LCD contrast" line with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂ y tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Pre-set DSC Output PPM10SELTop LCD contrast 0Bottom LCD contrast 0GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSPre-set Pitch min. rearNow display contrast can be adjusted in the value ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20 by using the selection keys of the right touch pad.RX–S QUA: 100%RX–S STR: 100%TX–dBm: 33dBmRX–dBm: 33dBmRX–VOLT:4.8 TMPL–PACK: 10msCH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCER-LOW V:4.6 +22°CRX–S QUA: 100%RX–S STR: 100%TX–dBm: 33dBmRX–dBm: 33dBmRX–VOLT:4.8 TMPL–PACK: 10msCH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCER-LOW V:4.6 +22°CContrast for the rear display, located between the touch pads, is adjusted by selecting the "Bottom LCD contrast" line with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂ y tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Pre-set DSC Output PPM10SELTop LCD contrast 0Bottom LCD contrast 0GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSPre-set Pitch min. rearNow display contrast can be adjusted in the value ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20 by using the selection keys of the right touch pad.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVH-J SandbrunnerGraubeleRX VOLT:4.9V

260 Detail program description - Basic settings#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVH-J SandbrunnerGraubeleRX VOLT:4.9VSimultaneously tapping the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video ﬁ eld back to "0". Display lightThis line determines how long the transmitter display's backlight illumination is to remain on after switching the transmitter on or after the last activation of a transmitter operating element.Available options are "unlim(ited)", "30 s", "60 s", "120 s" and "off".A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video ﬁ eld to "unlimited". Power on/off beepA power on/off beep for the transmitter can be switched on ("yes") and off ("no") in this line.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch this option shown in inverse video back to "yes". Battery typeSELBottom LCD contrast 0Battery type Li-IoDisplay light unlim.Power-on/off beep yesGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSThis line speciﬁ es whether transmitter power is provided by a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell LiPo battery. As a consequence of this setting, the next line will offer a suitable voltage range for the "Battery warning" threshold.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch this option shown in inverse video back to "Lith.". Battery warning thresholdSELBattery type Li-IoDisplay light unlim.Power-on/off beep yesGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSBattery warning 3.60VYou can arbitrarily specify the warning threshold for the display …Batt. mustbe re-charged!!… – contingent on the battery type selection in the line above – in increments of 0.01 volt between 4.50 and 5.50 V (NimH battery) or 3.40 and 4.20 V (LiIo/LiPo battery). Make sure that you do not enter a value which is too low, so that you still have sufﬁ cient time to safely land your model in the event of a battery warning.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch the ﬁ eld shown in inverse video back to its factory setting, 4.70 V (NiMh) or 3.60 V (Lith.). Power-on warningSELBattery type Li-IoPower-on/off beep yesGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSBattery warning 3.60VStick warning unlimIn this line you can determine how long the transmitter should wait after the last actuation of an operating element until the activation of an optical and acoustic power-on warning before the transmitter switches off automatically one minute later.The values "unlim(ited)", "30 s" and 1, 5, 10, 20, 30 and 60 minutes are optional selections.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video ﬁ eld to "unlimited".Note:To restart the transmitter after an automatic shut-off, ﬁ rst push the transmitter's power switch to the right into its "OFF" position then, after about ﬁ ve seconds, again into its "ON" position (toward the antenna). Touch SenseSELBattery type Li-IoGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSBattery warning 3.60VStick warning unlimTouch Sense 2In this line you can select the touch sensitivity of the touch pads in a range from 1 to 10. The lower this number is, the more sensitive the touch pad will be to taps and vice versa.

$261Detail program description - Basic settingsA simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the ﬁ eld shown in inverse video back to "2". RegionSELGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSBattery warning 3.60VStick warning unlimTouch sense 2Region EUROThe region is needed for compliance with various regulations (FCC, ETSI, IC etc.). In France, for example, the operation of a remote control is only permitted within a limited frequency band. Therefore, region MUST be changed to "France" for the transmitter whenever it is operated in France. In no case may the Universal/EURO mode be used in France!A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the ﬁ eld shown in inverse video back to "Euro". Own phase name 1 … 10GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSStick warning unlimTouch sense 2Region EUROOwn phase name 1Up to ten phase names can be freely speciﬁ ed for one's own use. Each of these can be up to 7 characters long. The characters of the name are assembled by selecting them from a list. In addition to the standard names, these additional names will then also be available in all model memory locations.If possible, new phase name entries should begin with the "Own phase name 1" line.Change to the character table with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad: !"#$%&’()Own phase name@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¾¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~ANow the desired characters can be selected with the selection keys of the left touch pad. With a brief tap on the f selection key of the right touch pad or its center SET key, move to the next position in which a character can be selected. A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at the current position.Positioning to any character position within the entry ﬁ eld can be done with the ef keys of the right touch pad.A return to the previous menu page is accomplished with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad.$

262 Detail program description - Servo display Servo displayDisplay of the servo positionUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Servo display« menu option in the multi-function menu: Teacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsServo display Servo testBrieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.135791113150000–100000–100000+100000246810121416However, the visual display of current servo positions can not only be opened by selecting this menu, but also – directly from the transmitter's base screen as well as nearly all other menu positions – with a simultaneous tap on the ef keys of the left touch pad. A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will cause a return to the respective point from which it was called. The current position of each servo is displayed in a bar diagram between -150 % and +150 % of normal travel with consideration for the control and servo settings, the dual-rate/expo functions, the interplay of all active linear and curve mixers, etc. 0 % corresponds precisely to the servo center position. This way, you can quickly check your settings without having to switch on the receiver. However, this does not absolve you from ﬁ rst carefully testing all program steps, as well as on the model, prior to the ﬁ rst operation of the model in order to eliminate errors!For winged models the display takes place according to the following scheme:Bar 1 = Throttle/brake servoBar 2 = Aileron or left aileronBar 3 = ElevatorBar 4 = RudderBar 5 = Right aileronBar 6 = Camber-changing ﬂ ap (left) / free channelBar 7 = Right camber-changing ﬂ ap / free channelBar 8 = Free channel / second elevator servoBar 9 = Free channel / Left FL2Bar 10 = Free channel / Right FL2Bar 11 = Free channel / Left AI2Bar 12 = Free channel / Right AI2Bar 13 = Free channelBar 14 = Free channelBar 15 = Free channelBar 16 = Free channel… and for helicopter models:Bar 1 = Pitch or roll (2) or pitch (2) servoBar 2 = Roll (1) servoBar 3 = Pitch (1) servoBar 4 = Tail servo (gyro)Bar 5 = Pitch (2) servo / free channelBar 6 = Throttle servo or speed controllerBar 7 = Gyro sensitivity / free channelBar 8 = Speed controller / free channelBar 9 = Free channelBar 10 = Free channelBar 11 = Free channelBar 12 = Free channelBar 13 = Free channelBar 14 = Free channelBar 15 = Free channelBar 16 = Free channelNotes:However, please note that the servo display is •only based on the original sequence of servos. This means that any swapping of outputs which may have been implemented, in either the »Transmitter output« menu or »Receiveroutput« menu, is not taken into account.Please also note that, by default, bar diagram •tracking is opposite to the left/right movements of a joystick.The number of channels shown in this menu •correspond to the 16 control channels available in the mc-20 HoTT transmitter. However, the number of actually usable channels depends on the receiver type as well as the number of servos connected to it and, therefore, may be considerably lower under certain circumstances.Use this display during the model programming, •because you can immediately check all settings on the transmitter. However, this does not absolve you from ﬁ rst carefully testing all program steps, as well as on the model, prior to the ﬁ rst operation of the model in order to eliminate errors!

263Detail program description - Servo test Servo testFunction test of Servo 1 … 16Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Servo test« menu option in the multi-function menu: Teacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsServo display Servo testTap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516: 0.5sAny of the inputs 1 … 16 can be activated for the servo test by selecting with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad and then brieﬂ y tapping the SET key of the right touch pad. As soon as you have set only one of the inputs 1 … 16 to "active", the following notice appears at the bottom of the display screen:SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516: 0.5sCLR = act./deact.A simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) would now start and stop, for example, a servo test of input "1" with a cycle time of 0.5 s.To change cycle time, select the loop symbol at the bottom right of the display with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad.SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516: 0.5sCLR = act./deact.Once this value ﬁ eld has been activated with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516CLR = act./deact. :0.5s… the motion cycle can be changed for the value ﬁ eld shown in inverse video within a range of 0.5 s and 3.0 s in 0.5 s increments. Brieﬂ y tap the center SETkey of the right touch pad to close time selection.Important notice:The shut-off of the transmitter does not automatically end an active servo test. Therefore, always stop a servo test manually BEFORE SHUTTING OFF the transmitter, because the servo test is otherwise restarted after switching on the transmitter again.SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516CLR = act./deact. : 2.5sThe "servo test" function, started with a simultaneous tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), automatically operates the servos as though the corresponding transmitter controls were being simultaneously and continuously moved back and forth between -100 % and +100 % during the preset time. All active mixing and coupling functions in the respective model memory, therefore, are effective and the servos move within the speciﬁ ed servo paths and servo delimitations.As soon as the servo test has been started by a simultaneously tap on the cd or ef selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) a window will open:SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516CLR = act./deact. : 2.5sServo test act.Another tap simultaneously on the cd or efselection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will terminate the test.

264 Detail program description - Entry lockout Entry lockoutLocking the multifunction menuUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to menu option …Profi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsServo display Servo testCode lock Info display… in the multi-function menu. Tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (_ )SET321 3 4Access to the multifunction menu can be locked against unauthorized use by a four-digit secret code comprised of the numbers 1 to 4. This code lock is entered by way of the selection keys of the left touch pad according to the scheme shown in the display, for example :CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (123_)CLR321 3 4As soon as another tap of a left touch pad selection key occurs after the fourth number has been entered, the message shown below will appear in the display:CODE LOCKBitte Geheimzasccess code: (1234)CLR321 3 4Memorise access code carefullyA brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will conﬁ rm the entered secret code and exit the menu.On the contrary, a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will conﬁ rm the currently active CLR ﬁ eld at the bottom right of the display and thus erase the entered digits.Make note of the secret code and keep it safe. Otherwise, the transmitter must be sent in to Graupner service for decoding.The lock becomes active the next time the transmitter is switched on. However, the control remains ready for operation. However, a call-up of the multi-function menu, and thus also a model change, can no longer be accomplished without entering the correct number combination.CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (_ )SET321 3 4A renewed attempt following an incorrect entry is only possible after the lapse of a time-out.CODE LOCKBitte Geheimzacccess code: (4321)CLR321 3 4Input errorTime lockDeletion of the secret codeIf the secret code is to be erased later on, tap twiceon the center SET key of the right touch pad right after calling up this menu option.CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (1234)CLR321 3 4The ﬁ rst activation of the center SET key of the right touch pad will erase the secret code (CLR):CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (_ )SET321 3 4and the second activation will conﬁ rm the empty entry ﬁ eld (SET). The message shown will appear in the display:

265Detail program description - Entry lockoutCODE LOCKBitte Geheimzaccess code: (_ )SET321 3 4Memorise access¾¾¾¾¾ ¾¾¾¾¾noneNow exit the menu with a brief tap on the ESC key of the left touch pad. Leaving the menu without input of a secret codeTo leave the menu opened out of curiosity or by accident when no other key has been touched. Therefore, the display appears as follows:CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (_ )SET321 3 4Tap once on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The following display appears:CODE LOCKBitte Geheimzaccess code: (_ )SET321 3 4Memorise access¾¾¾¾¾ ¾¾¾¾¾noneNow exit the menu with a brief tap on the ESC key of the left touch pad.Tip:If you generally want to dispense with a programming lock, that option should be removed from the multifunction menu by way of »Suppress menus«. This will prevent unauthorized persons from entering a secret code "on the sly".

266 Detail program description - Info display Info displayTransmitter ID, date, time and memory cardUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to menu option … Profi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsServo display Servo testCode lock Info display… in the multi-function list. A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open this menu:RFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARDavailable1.2341933MB99%ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBTransmitter-speciﬁ c information is shown in this menu and – insofar as necessary and beneﬁ cial – can also be changed.Select the appropriate line with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The given default value in the value ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video can now be changed – insofar possible and necessary – with the selection keys of the right touch pad followed by another tap on the center SET key to conclude the entry. RFIDRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBThe RF identiﬁ cation number of the transmitter is shown in this line. It is transmitter-speciﬁ c, is only issued once per transmitter and cannot be changed. During the connection process, this is sent to the receiver, among other things, so that it is always capable of identifying the radio signals of "its" transmitter. Firmware VersionRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBThe current version number of the transmitter software is shown in this line. Through a comparison of the number shown here with the update version offered on the Internet download page of the corresponding product under www.graupner.de, you can determine whether a current update of the transmitter operating system is available.If applicable, the version number is also required for inquiries with the service department. DateRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBIf necessary, select this line with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad and, as necessary, select the month or date ﬁ eld. After activating the respective value ﬁ eld with a tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad, the year, month or day can be set with the selection keys of the right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will close the given entry. Years ranging from 2000 through 2135 are available for selection.The abbreviated day of the week to the right outside in brackets is automatically generated from the respective date.Notes:If the transmitter is connected to a PC as •described on page 43, the date and time can also be set through the PC program provided for the respective product via the Internet page at www.graupner.de.The date and time are protected against data •loss due to power failure by a buffer battery for situations like a battery change, see page 18.

267Detail program description - Info display TimeRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBIf necessary, select this line with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad and, as applicable, the minute ﬁ eld. After activation of the respective value ﬁ eld by a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the hour or minute can be adjusted with the selection keys of the right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will close the given entry. In contrast, the seconds display cannot be set directly; it can only be restarted at "00" with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Note:If the transmitter is connected to a PC as •described on page 43, the date and time can also be set through the PC program provided for the respective product via the Internet page at www.graupner.de.The date and time are protected against data •loss due to power failure by a buffer battery for situations like a battery change, see page 18. SD cardRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBIn this line the memory capacity of a memory card inserted in the transmitter, if applicable, is shown in MB.Depending on the memory capacity of the inserted micro SD or micro SDHC memory card, it may take several minutes until the correct value is shown after switching on the transmitter. availableFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.2342011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBavailable 1933MBDisplay of the available storage space in MB.As mentioned before, display of the available storage space – depending on the capacity of the inserted memory card – does not appear until some time has passed after switching on the transmitter.The display of the available storage space in relation to the total memory capacity is shown in the line below:datetimeSD-CARD2011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBavailable 1933MB99%As mentioned before, display of the available storage space – depending on the capacity of the inserted memory card – does not appear until some time has passed after switching on the transmitter.

268 Programming examples - Winged modelsmc-20 HoTT programming Preparatory measures based on the example of a winged modelProgramming models in an mc-20 HoTT …… is easier than it may appear at ﬁ rst!The primary prerequisite for "clean" programming, and this applies not only to the mc-20 HoTT but is also a principle for all programmable transmitters, is a mechanically correct installation of all remote control components in the model! Therefore, it should be ensured no later than on connection of the linkages that the servos are in their respective neutral position and their rudder lever is also in the desired position. Otherwise you should loosen the rudder and re-fasten it with an offset of a few lobes. If servos are positioned with the help of a servo tester, e.g. RC tester, order no. 2894.12, then the "correct" positions can be determined very easily. The possibility of changing the neutral position of a servo in practically every modern transmitter is only intended for ﬁ ne-tuning. Greater deviations from "0" can result to further asymmetries in the course of the further signal processing in the transmitter. In the same manner: A car with a bent chassis does not get any straighter if only the steering wheel is trimmed to "straight"!An additional important point is the adjustment of the rudder paths: This should take place through a corresponding adjustment of the steering points, insofar as possible. Ultimately this is far more efﬁ cient than extensive efforts with the path adjustments in the transmitter! In this case: Path adjustments serve ﬁ rst and foremost for to compensate for the manufacturer-stipulated tolerances for the servos and their ﬁ ne-tuning, and less for the compensation of carelessness.If two separate aileron servos are used for a winged model, the ailerons, controlled through the corresponding activated wing mixer – see the following pages – can be assigned with both the ﬂ ap function and raised with the brake ﬂ aps – however this would make more sense in a glider or electro glider than in a motor model.In this case the rudder arms – starting from the neutral position – should be tilted forward one lobe, pointing toward the nose, set to the respective servo. The mechanical differentiation achieved through this asymmetric assembly contributes to the fact that the brake effect of the elevated ailerons increases with their deﬂ ection and, therefore, does not normally require a greater path upward than downward.Correspondingly, when planning to operated separately controlled ﬂ ap servos, they should also be integrated into a crow system. Since the brake effect of this ﬂ ap position referred to as a "crow position" is inﬂ uenced less by the elevated ailerons than the downward deﬂ ection of the ﬂ aps, the rudder arms should be installed somewhat toward the rear in this case, tilted toward the trailing edge. As a result, there is a greater available path for the downward deﬂ ection. With such a combination of lowered ﬂ aps with raised ailerons, however, the latter should only be elevated moderately, because they have more of a stabilizing and controlling function than a braking function in this type of crow system.A "tip" for seeing the brake effect in this connection: lift the ﬂ aps and look over and under the surface from the front. The greater the projected surface of the protruding rudder, the greater the brake effect.Outboard aileronsInboard camber-changing flaps(Similar asymmetric installation of rudder arms can be meaningful, e.g. for open-cowl ﬂ aps or landing ﬂ aps, even in a motorized model.)If a model is completed and mechanically attuned in this respect, you can basically begin with the programming of the transmitter. The following examples, an attempt is made to follow the practice of ﬁ rst describing the general basic settings and then ﬁ ne-tuning or specializing them in the subsequent steps. After the initial ﬂ ight and over the course of the further ﬂ ying in of a model, it may be necessary to occasionally adjust some of the settings. As a pilot's experience increases, however, so does the desire for enhancements and expansions of settings. For this reason, the sequence of options is not always adhered to or some options are even mentioned multiple times.Of course, just the opposite can also be the case, that not everyone of the described steps is relevant for a certain model, just as some users may miss the description of a certain step for their model …whatever the case may be, you should consider a logical assignment of the control mechanisms before you begin with the model programming.For models in which the emphasis is on the "motor", regardless of whether it is powered by an electric or combustion motor, there should be no problem in this respect, because the assignment of the two joystick units essentially lies in the four basic functions "Power regulation (= throttle)", "Side", "Altitude" and "Transverse"! However, in the menu …

269Programming examples - Winged models»Model type« (beginning on page 94)Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL… you should determine whether you would like the minimum throttle position in the "front" or "rear", because "none (motor)" is entered by the program in the creation of a model memory as a basic principle.The difference between "none" and "idle front/rear" is not only the effect on C1 trimming, which covers the entire scope of joystick travel with "none" but with "idle front/rear" only has an effect in the idle direction. In the process, the "effective direction" of the C1 joystick is adapted accordingly, so that with a change from "front" to "rear" or vice versa, the rotational direction of the throttle servo or brake system do not have to be adapted as well. In addition, with an "idle front/rear" setting, a warning indication appears in the display for safety reasons and issues a warning beep, if the throttle joystick is too far in the full-throttle direction:#01 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVThrottletoohigh!H-J SandbrunnerGraubeleRX VOLT:4.9VIn any case, it will be necessary to give some thought to "special functions". With electro gliders, on the other hand, it is only occasionally different. In this regard, one must ask how the drive and brake system are actuated. Certain solutions have shown to be practical and others have shown to be less practical.For example, it is certainly less practical, if you have to release a joystick for the approach of a glider model in order to be able to appropriately control the spoilers or a crow position using one of the other controls. It may be more advantageous to either design the function of the C1 joystick to be switchable (see Example 4, beginning on page 279) or to leave the control of the brake system at the joystick and to control the motor through one of the other controls or even with a switch! Since this type of model does not normally have a motor, and just a "start assistance" function to either "lift" the model in the sky with full force or, in any case, to "tow" it with "half" force by a wind ﬁ eld, When this is also mounted in a convenient to grip location, the motor can be switched on and off without letting loose of one of the joysticks – even during the landing approach.If you cannot decide to have your Graupner service location retroﬁ t a three-function control switch, order no. 33000.13, for this purpose then use preferably the single-pole, three-function switch, order no. 33001.25, and mount it to the side of the sender opposite from the hand in which you hold the model. In other words: If the model is started from the right hand, the motor switch should be mounted on the left side and vice versa.The idea is the same for the control of ﬂ aps, regardless of whether only ailerons or ﬂ aps covering the entire wingspan (combinations) are raised or lowered. A 3-position switch with a long grip generally sufﬁ ces for control of camber ﬂ aps, preferably mounted outboard on the throttle/brake joystick side There it is always accessible without having to let loose of the joystick.If everything is now in order, you can begin with the programming.

270 Programming examples - Winged models Initial steps for the programming of a new modelExample: Winged model with two ailerons and – initially – without motor propulsionIn the context of initial commissioning a new transmitter, in the selection menu …»General basic settings« (page 256)Battery typeBattery warningTouch SenseTop LCD contrastLi-IoDisplay lightRegion23.60V0EUROunlimGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners name H-J SandbrunnerPre-set stick mode 1Pre-set DSC Output PPM10Pre-set Pitch min rearStick warning unlimPre-set modulationOwn phase nameOwn phase nameHoTT210Bottom LCD contrast 0Own phase name 1Voice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7fr –––SEL SEL7fr –––7fr –––Power-on/off beep yes… some basic information should be entered. This serves various purposes:The ﬁ rst three lines of this menu can be used to individually regulate, in increments between 0 and 10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via the built-in loudspeakers or the transmitter's headset connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to record the transmitter owner's name and the lines "Pre-set stick mode", "Pre-set modulation", "Pre-set DSC Output" and "Pre-set Pitch min" are for the storage of pre-set values used as defaults for new models. These are then adopted on the activation of a new model memory in its basic settings, but can be changed there at any time.The "Top / Bottom LCD Contrast" lines can be used to adapt the contrast of respective displays to ambient light conditions as necessary by changing the standard pre-set "0" in a range of ±20 (as an alternative to the line with the same name in the »Secret mode« menu page 32). The setting in the "Display light" line determines how long display lighting remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched on or after the last key actuation.The selection of "yes/no" in the "Power-on/off beep"line determines whether the "recognition melody" is to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on again.The "Battery type" line indicates to the transmitter whether its power comes from a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell LiPo battery and the "Battery warning" line can be used to individually set the threshold for the battery warning. Make sure that you do not enter a value which is too low, so that you still have sufﬁ cient time to safely land your model in the event of a battery warning.If necessary, the "Stick warning" line can be used to determine how long the transmitter should wait after the last activation of an operating element before issuing a visual and acoustic stick warning, followed about a minute later by the transmitter switching itself off. On the other hand, the setting made in the "Touch Sense" line is merely a personal comfort setting. The lower this number is, the more sensitive the touch pad will be to taps and vice versa.In contrast, the setting in the "Region" line is anything but a matter of taste and is determined by statutory regulations: Therefore, when in France, only commission the transmitter with the "France" setting.The ten "Own phase name" lines can be used to create one's own phase names, which are then valid throughout the transmitter, if none of the pre-set phase names appear appropriate. An entry itself is accomplished – as also for owner's name – by switching to a second display page and selecting the necessary characters from a character list.This menu can be exited after completing "general settings" with a return to the multi-function menu by way of the center ESC key of the left touch pad.To program a new model, now use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the menu …"Model select" (page 69)…, and use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select a free model memory location.0304050106R16¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿00:12h¿¿¿ free¿¿¿02Right after a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to conﬁ rm this selection, the type of model to be programmed will be requested:

$271Programming examples - Winged modelsSelect model type ( free model memory )Since the objective is to work with a winged model in this section, the symbol for a winged model is to be conﬁ rmed with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The display switches back to the base screen.Notes:Of course, you can also use the predeﬁ ned default •"winged model" supplied with the receiver as model memory 01 for the programming of your ﬁ rst model.Once the "Select model type" option has been •opened, the process can no longer be canceled! Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection must be made! After a selection has been made, the selected model memory can only be made "free" again by subsequent erasing.If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover •cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen:not possible nowvoltage too lowOnce this ﬁ rst hurdle has been taken, the binding of the receiver built into the model to this model memory can be done in the menu …»Basic settings, model« (page 76 … 83). To this end, switch to the line "Module".Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS, MODELInfon/an/aModule n/aHoTTSEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4Note:After conﬁ rmation of the model selection in the base screen, if you conﬁ rm the message appearing in the screen for a few seconds …BIND. N/AOK… with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, this line is accessed automatically.In this line the binding process between model memory and receiver is initiated, as described in detail on page 77. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver.Afterward, use the c selection key of the left or right four-way pad to move up to the ﬁ rst line and begin with the actual model programming in the "Modelname" line.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTTThe "Model name" can now be entered here and, on the next line, an informative note about the model can be entered if necessary in the same manner, by a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to switch to the character table. !"#$%&’()Model name Graub@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¾¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~The pre-sets for "Stick mode", "Modulation" and "DSC Output" are adopted from data stored in the »General basic settings« menu and these should be reviewed and changed as necessary.In the menu …Model typeTail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL… the principle arrangement of the servos in the model is selected and communicated to the transmitter. The following selections are available:"Motor at C1""none"•Trimming works independently of the joystick position and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 160", is available without limitation.The "Throttle too high" warning message, see page 30 and/or 94, and the "Motor stop" option are deactivated.$

272 Programming examples - Winged models"(Idle) front or rear“•C1 trimming is affected in the front or rear and the "Motor stop" option is activated.If the throttle joystick is too far in the full throttle direction when the transmitter is switched on, this will be indicated with the warning message "Throttle too high".In parallel with this, the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 160, will only then be available if the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, has the entry "none" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase.In the next two lines, the principle arrangement of the servos in the model is selected and communicated to the transmitter:Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELTail type: "normal", "V-tail", "Delt/ﬂ .wing" or "2 Sv EL 3+8"Aileron/camber ﬂ aps: 1, 2 or 4 AI servos and 0, 1, 2 or 4 FL servosSince we want to actuate the brake system of the "Brake settings" sub-menu under the »Wing mixers«menu with the C1 joystick, we will leave the outer right setting in the "Brake Offset" line with "Input 1". With the "Offset value" to the left of this, you should only place the mixer neutral point at the point where the brake system is retracted or inactive. If, in the process, the offset is not place completely at the end of the control path, the rest of the path is "idle travel", which means the mixer is not inﬂ uenced in this range of the joystick movement.By now at the latest, servos should be plugged into the receiver in the standard Graupner’ish sequence:Empfängerstromversorgungfrei oder QR2 links oder Sonderfunktionfrei oder QR2 rechts oder SonderfunktionSeitenruderQuerruder oder Querruder linksHöhenruder oder 1. Höhenruderfrei oder 2. Höhenruder od. SonderfunktionEmpfängerstromversorgungBremsklappen- oder Motorservooder Regler bei ElektroantriebQuerruder rechts oder Sonderfunkt.Wölbklappe oder Wölbklappe linksWölbklappe rechts od. frei oder Sonderf.frei oder WK2 links oder Sonderfunktionfrei oder WK2 rechts oder Sonderfunktion13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Empfängerstromversorgungfrei oder Sonderfunktionfrei oder SonderfunktionTelemetrieanschlussEmpfängerstromversorgungfrei oder Sonderfunktionfrei oder SonderfunktionAnschluss für SUMO / SUMI-VerbindungEmpfängerstromversorgungEmpfängerstromversorgungComments:If a V-tail unit should move incorrectly either "high/•low" or "left/right", please observe the information in the table on page 62 in the right column. The same process applies for the ailerons and ﬂ aps.The settings described in the following are based •on a model with "normal" tail unit and "none (motor)". The settings are adopted for models with a V-tail with practically no changes at all. However, the transfer of this information is not so simple for delta/ﬂ ying-wing models. Therefore, a special programming example for this model type is provided on page 301.In the menu …»Servo adjustment« (page 102)0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%… servos can now be adapted for appropriate "direction of rotation", "neutral position", "travel"and "limitation" to the requirements of the model.In this sense, all settings which serve to compensate servos and make minor adaptations to the model are "necessary".Notes:The maximum possible throw of a Graupner servo •is 150 % per side, based on both mechanical and electrical reasons. For example, if the the sum of the values of the columns "Center" and "Servo travel" exceed this limit, the respective servo can no longer follow the control commands starting from this point. Therefore, please bear in mind that mixers and settings in the »Dual Rate / EXPO«menu also have an inﬂ uence on servo travel. The settings options provided in this menu •for asymmetric servo travel do NOT serve for achieving differentiations for ailerons and/or ﬂ aps. There are options better suited for this purpose in the »Wing mixers« menu.In the last column, "- limit +", the basic settings of 150 % can, and perhaps should be, signiﬁ cantly reduced.

273Programming examples - Winged modelsThe values entered in this position act as a quasi "limiter", whereby the setting is actually for which point of travel the respective servo may not exceed, so that it does not start up mechanically and thus unnecessarily draw current. In this case it is the endof available mechanical play on the servo, rudder and/or steering which is decisive for the value to be set.An example of this would be the selection of a model with cruciform tail, with which the rudder moves in a wedge-shaped cutout of the elevator. In order to prevent the rudder on the elevator starting up and possibly blocking it, the travel is normally mechanically adjusted (at the linkage) so that the rudder does not start with the full throw of the joystick. As long as the rudder is only controlled with the corresponding joystick, there will not be any further problems with this. But at the moment, when in addition to the normal rudder signal a mixer also inﬂ uences the rudder, such as an "aileron 2 ¼4 rudder" mixer (aileron to rudder), it is possible that the two signals can sum to an excessive extent. A correctly set limit of travel intercedes precisely at this point and thus reliably prevents the mechanical starting of the rudder. The limit of travel should, however, not be too small, so that the rudder throw is permanently and excessively limited.Of course, the travel on both sides could, of course, also be reduced to the that a start-up would not even occur with an addition of the maximum values. With this method, however, the prevention of an actually occurring event would result in a permanent reduction of the normal rudder throw.The menu …»Stick mode« (page 104)globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444In addition to the generally interesting adjustment of the increments in the column "Tr. step" (number of trim increments for each "trim wheel click") for digital trimming – separate adjustments for each of the four trim wheels – in the case of the (later) programming of ﬂ ight phases in the second column of this menu you can select whether the trimming of transverse, altitude and side should operate "globally" in equal measure over all ﬂ ight phases or separately in each (ﬂ ight) "phase".The "Time" column, on the other hand, is not of interest for this initial programming.The settings made up to this point are sufﬁ cient to permit basic ﬂ ight of winged and motorized models – though the latter does require a correctly set idle joystick direction in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type« menu. However, the "ﬁ ne-tuning" is still missing. The ﬁ ne-tuning certainly adds to the enjoyment of ﬂ ying over the course of time. Therefore, if you can already ﬂ y your model safely, you should delve into the menu…»Wing mixers« (page 160 … 175)… where various options are available, depending on the speciﬁ cations made in the »Model type« menu, page 94.Since this section deals with a model having only 2 servos in the wings, the Multi-ﬂ ap menu beginning on page 170 is not shown.Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345Therefore, we begin with the "Brake settings" sub-menu:offBRAKE SETTINGSIf this display appears, you model is equipped with a motor, contrary to the assumption of this section, and therefore you have selected "front/rear" instead of "none" in the line "Motor on C1" of the »Modeltype« menu, page 94. Therefore, change this setting temporarily or change the "yes" entry in the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, to "no" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase – Phase 1 in this case.Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw.timeMotor0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––¾no…

274 Programming examples - Winged modelsElevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%WK0%Diff. reductAfter this statement about mutual dependencies, back to the topic:If the ailerons are to be elevated for braking, an appropriate value is entered into the "Crow" line after activating the "AILE" column's value ﬁ eld. In addition, a value should always be entered in the line below it, "Diff.Reduct" (differentiation reduction), which corresponds to the value you entered or would like to enter on the ﬁ rst page of the »Wing mixers« menu in the line "Aile.diff." (see ﬁ gure above)! With this entry, on actuation of the brake joystick, the set aileron differentiation is hidden again proportionally in order to increase the downward the throw of the raised ailerons and thus signiﬁ cantly improve its effect in the braking phase.A setting of the " Elevat. curve" mixer is then only necessary if the ﬂ ight speed of the model changes too dramatically on actuation of the brake system. In any case, you should try out the setting at a sufﬁ cient and readjust, if necessary, whereby you should focus less on the ﬂ ight position than on maintaining the "normal" ﬂ ight speed of the model. Otherwise there is the risk that the model plunges when engaging the brake system, because it became too slow in the meantime:BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput +100%–25%H+–100¼O U T P U T–25%ElevatorNormalAfter exiting the "Brake settings", the "Aileron differentiation can be set:This serves to eliminate the negative torque. The downward deﬂ ected aileron normally generates a higher level of resistance during the ﬂ ight than when deﬂ ected upward the same distance, whereby the model is pulled to the "wrong" side. In order to prevent this, with the input of a differentiation of the travel of the respective servo deﬂ ected downward is reduced accordingly. A value between 20 and 40 %, in this case, seldom arises, however, the "correct" setting must be sought.The option "AI 2 ¼ 4 RU" (aileron ¼ rudder) also serves a similar purpose, as well as for the comfortable control of a model. A value of about 50 % is a practical initial value. However, this function should be made switchable with the assignment of a switch if you ever have aerobatic ﬂ ight ambitions. (The author, for example, switches off this mixer "automatically" when switching to the "Speed" ﬂ ight phase, in which he assigns both options to the same switch accordingly.)The last option in the »Wing mixers« menu, the "El 3 ¼6 Fl" mixer, is not yet of interest at the moment.If the model-speciﬁ c settings were made thus far, the initial start can be considered. If course, at ﬁ rst you should perform a "dry run", meaning you should carefully check all the settings once again on the ground. Incorrect programming can damage more than just the model! In case of doubt, ask the advice of an experienced model pilot.If you should ﬁ nd during the testing that one or multiple settings must be made for the adjustment of the rudder effects to your control habits, the control throws are too long or short on the whole, you should adjust this in the … »Dual Rate / Expo« (page 120)… to your own requirements and habits."Dual Rate" establishes a relationship between joystick travel and control travel, see page 120:0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELOn the other hand, if the maximum throws are OK and only the reactions around the center position are to strong for more sensitive controls, then the "exponential" functions comes (additionally) into play: 0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Normal3If a switch is also assigned, switching can even take place between two dual-rate/expo settings during the ﬂ ight.

275Programming examples - Winged modelsThis is similar for the option …»Channel 1 curve« (page 128)Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100¼O U T P U T0%With this option, one or multiple points of the control curve of the throttle/brake joystick can be inﬂ uenced in such a way that a pleasant or even purposeful behavior is guaranteed.An example of this would be the "dead" travel of spoilers. The ﬂ aps ﬁ rst pass through this after a certain "idle travel" of the brake joystick from the wing. With a corresponding "bending" of the curve, the "dead' travel is covered more quickly. The spoilers come out from the wing earlier and then the remaining travel can be controlled with greater sensitivity. (This also applies for the control of a motor in the same manner, which can be controlled through C1 as an alternative.)Finally, the receiver's behavior in the event of a failure should certainly be established in the menu…»Fail Safe« (page 208)FAIL SAFEPoshold1234567 8 9 10111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STO… because "doing nothing" is the worst thing which can be done for a winged model.In the transmitter's home position, "Hold" is speciﬁ ed and "Hold" means that the receiver continuously sends the last correctly recognized control impulse to the servos in the model. In the best case scenario the model ﬂ ies straight ahead for an indeﬁ nite amount of time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without causing signiﬁ cant damage! However, if something like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the model may become uncontrollable and "tear" across the ﬂ ight ﬁ eld completely out of control, putting the pilot and/or spectators at risk. Therefore, it would obviously be beneﬁ cial to program the the function "Motor off" at the very least, in order to prevent such risks.With electro gliders, on the other hand, the fail-safe setting "motor off" can also be used, for example, for outlanding, to reliably stop the motor or its propeller by immediately switching off the transmitter after the landing.The author usually prefers a "braking ﬁ nish" within eyeshot to ﬂ oating off "somewhere else".

276 Programming examples - Winged models Integration of an electric drive into the model programmingAn electric drive can be controlled in different ways: The simplest method to integrate one such drive into the model programming is with the use of a throttle/brake joystick (C1). However, since this is already speciﬁ ed for the brake system in the course of the model programming described above, either the switchable solution described beginning on page 279 or even the use of an alternative control is possible. As a suitable alternative, one of the two 3-position switches would be better than one of the proportionals controls. However, either one of the two side proportional rotary controls are also well suited to activation of a motor without having to let go of the joystick. An alternative would also be one of the two-stage switches. Basically, whatever switch is used should be located where it is within convenient reach.Before we turn to the individual examples, it is important must be noted that all inputs in the »Control adjust« menu can be selectively programmed as ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c ("PH" in the "Type" column) or model memory speciﬁ c ("GL" in the "Type" column)!However, since the drive should usually be available depending on the current ﬂ ight phase, we recommend leaving the standard default "GL" ("global") in the "Type" column which your are using.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------offsetGLNormalA common option in the following examples 1 … 5, the automatic tracking of the elevator trimming in the power ﬂ ight, should also be mentioned at the beginning of this section:If it becomes apparent after the initial power ﬂ ights that the model must be continuously corrected with the elevator while the motor is switched on, this situation can be corrected by setting a free mixer and adjusting it accordingly. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Free mixers«… and program one of the linear mixers, Linear MIX 1 … 8, or even one of the curve mixers, Curve MIX 9 … 12, from "channel controlling the motor" according to "Ele", for example:ELLinearMIX 1Typ 8from – Begr. +????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust––––––––????––––On its second screen page, the required – usually low – correction value is entered:8Mix input Offset+–100¼O U T P U T0%ELLinear MIX 1+4%SYM ASY SETSTO+4%Note:The adjustment of a curve mixer is described in detail in the section »Channel 1 curve« starting on page 128. Example 1Proportional control usageIf one of these controls is used, the connection is very simple. Only the motor controller (speed control) has to be connected to a free servo connection 5 … 16 of the receiver. Bear in mind that, depending on the model type and number of aileron and ﬂ ap servos, the output 2 + 5 or 6 + 7 are already linked. Therefore connect your speed controller to the next free input and assign the selected input – for example, "Inp. 8" – to one of the transmitter's proportional controls, for example the left-side proportional rotary control. This is done in the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)Select the desired line with the cd selection keys of the left or right touch pad. A tap on the the center SET key of the right touch pad will activate "Switch and control assignment". Now move the selected proportional control. After a short time, an entry, e.g. "Cn2", will appear in the inverse video ﬁ eld.

277Programming examples - Winged modelsone column to the right, to the "- time +" column then move the selected control close to "full throttle" so the marker frame is only placed around one value ﬁ eld. Now enter a value of at least 1 s …0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrCn2---------offsetGLNormal1.0… with which a movement of the proportional control in the "ON" on direction which is too fast is processes move gently, and you can check immediately this by switching to the »Servo display«.Note:No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This does not additionally stress the drive, because it merely "runs down".The adjustment of the appropriate control travel and directions for the motor control (speed control) is normally carried out in the »Control adjust« menu in the "- travel +" column. Alternatively, these settings can also be made in the menu … »Servo adjustment« (page 102)+100% 100%Servo 4Servo 5Servo 6Servo 7Servo 8Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit ++100% 100%100%150% 150%+100% 100%100%150% 150%+100% 100%100%150% 150%+100% 100%100%150% 150%.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrCn2---------offsetGLNormalHowever, since propulsion must usually be available, independent of the current ﬂ ight phase, leave the default value "GL" in the "Typ" column – as already mentioned earlier in this section.If applicable, for necessary adjustment of appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control), use one of the arrow keys to switch to the right into the "- travel +" column.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrCn2---------offsetGLNormalThis ﬁ elds of this column can be use to set the travel required, even asymmetric if necessary.A simultaneous tap on the ef keys of the left touch pad now will switch over to the »Servo display« where the selected proportional control can be activated to watch the the bars for channel 8 "wander" from one side to the other and back.However, if the proportional control is moved too fast – in practice – the resulting sudden motor acceleration can brieﬂ y strain the entire drive train (too much). In this case, be sure to enter a value in the "- time +" column to counteract such a condition.Therefore, using one of the selection keys, switch Example 22-way switch usageThis variant realizes a purely ON/OFF function.On the receiver side, either a simple electronic switch or – if a gentle motor start-up, for example, is desired – an appropriate motor control (speed control) is required.With the exception of assigning a different operating element, the settings required for this are essentially the same as those described under Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply. Apart from the inﬁ nitely variable motor control under Example 1 and the two-stage motor control in this example, the selection of the two transmitter control types only has an effect on the type of timer control, see page 284.Only the nature of the assignment and representation of the selected switch in the display of the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)As in example 1, change over to the line of a free input, activate the "Switch and control assignment" in the second column, page 56, then move the selected switch, in this case for example switch 2, from the desired motor OFF position in the direction of motor ON.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormal2---Here again – as already mentioned earlier in this section – leave the standard default "GL" in the "Typ" column.

278 Programming examples - Winged modelsThe setting of the appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control) is made in the "- Travel +" column. If the motor should up gently with the use of a motor control (speed control), an appropriate delay time can be set – as described in Example 1 – in the "- time +" column:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormal2--- 1.1All other settings – as already mentioned earlier in the example – are made analogous to Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply.Note:No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This does not additionally stress the drive, because it merely "runs down". Example 33-way switch usageThis variant realizes a three-stage speed setting, such as Motor OFF, "half" and full power.A corresponding motor control (speed control) is required on the receiver side.The required settings are basically the same as those described under Example 1 and 2. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply.Apart from the inﬁ nitely variable motor control under Example 1 and the three-stage motor control in this example, the selection of the operating element only has an effect on the type of clock control, see page 284, and the nature of the assignment.Here again – as already mentioned earlier in this section – leave the standard default "GL" in the "Typ" column.Put the desired 3-way switch into its middle position then activate "Switch and control assignment" above the column with the switch symbol, as described on page 56. Now put the selected 3-way switch forward, out of its middle position:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormal7---Now put the activated switch from its forward position back into its middle position.Now move the marker frame to the left and into the column above the column now labeled with a second switch symbol instead of the previous label SEL.Reactivate "Switch and control assignment" for this column then move the 3-way switch out of its middle position toward the rear:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormal78The setting of the appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control) is made in the "- travel +" column. The motor should rev up gently with a motor control (speed control), to this end a suitable delay time can be set – as described in examples 1 and 2 – in the "- time +" column:All other settings–as already mentioned earlier in the example–are made analogous to Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply.Note:By shifting the neutral position and subsequent adjustment of travel, the "half throttle position" can be inﬂ uenced in the »Control adjust« menu by reducing travel from the offset value on the side to which the neutral point has been shifted and adding it to the other side. For example, an offset value of -20 % results in +80 % on the minus side of the travel setting and +120 % on the plus side, and vice versa.

279Programming examples - Winged modelsTail typeMotor on C1NormalAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1-90%SELThr. min frontThis idle path ensures that all brake settings remain at "neutral", even with minor deviations from the limit of the brake ﬂ ap control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %.For this reason, in the next step it must be ensured that the inﬂ uence of the C1 joystick on the motor can be inﬂ uenced. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Phase settings« (page 142)... and assign a meaningful name, such as "Normal", from the list for "Phase 1" after activation of the selection ﬁ eld in the "Name" column. The asterisk in the second column indicates which phase is currently active. As long as no phase switch has been assigned, this is always Phase 1. "Phase 2" can be given, appropriate to the example, the name «Landing».In the "Ph.Tim" column you can assign a so-called ﬂ ight phase timer for the measurement of the motor running time and/or the gliding times as necessary for each phase. You could, for example, assign one of the "Timers 1 … 3" to the "Normal" ﬂ ight phase in order to measure the total motor runtime via the C1 joystick:»Model type« (beginning page 94)Here you ﬁ rst specify in the "motor" line whether the throttle minimum position (= Motor "OFF" position) should be at the "front" or "rear" - as already discussed: In the following programming example, "Motor OFF" and "Brake OFF" are combined at "front":Tail typeMotor on C1NormalAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELThr. min frontNote:With the selection of "Throttle min front/rear" the trimming will then only have an effect in the "idle" direction of the motor and is not the same as with the "none" entry, having the same effect at every position of the C1 joystick. Since the C1 trimming is not normally used with electric drives, however, this has no further relevance.You adjust the "according to your model, in this case "normal".In the "Aileron/ﬂ aps" line you enter the correct number of aileron and ﬂ ap servos – in this example "2 AIL".In the last line you leave the standard entries for the selection of "Brake retracted = front". On the other hand, if the preference is for "Brake retracted = rear", select the "Brake offset" line and deﬁ ne the offset point – as described on page 95 – as "rear". In the process, if the offset point is not placed completely at the end of the control travel, the remainder of the travel is "idle" up to this limit. Control E-motor and crow alternately with C1 joystickExample 4Before we discuss the programming of this fourth example or turn the to the expansion of the previously described basic programming, a few words should be said about the position of the throttle/brake joystick with "Motor OFF" or "Brake OFF". Normally the C1 control joystick is moved forward for the throttle control and backward for the extension of the brake. However, if for this type of "traditional" assignment, for example, a switchover of the brake system is to take place for the "Motor OFF" condition (joystick "back") then a switchover to "full brake" would take place immediately after the pre-set switchover time speciﬁ ed in the »Phase settings« menu, and the opposite will take place when "brakes retracted" is switched over to propulsion causing the motor to switch over to "full power" within this time range …A "glider pilot" can make the best of this "Emergency" – normally with "brake retracted = front" – by switching to motor "ON" only if necessary so that power decreases, if applicable (and hopefully not forgetting to push the C1 joystick "forward" again when switching back). A typical "motor pilot", on the other hand, operates in the opposite manner, only switching to the brake if necessary, etc... You can also combine the "Zero point" of both systems to avoid confusion, whereby a "glider pilot" would tend prefer the "front" and a "motor pilot", on the other hand", would likely prefer the "rear". Whichever the case may be, the mc-20 HoTT transmitter permits both variants. In the following text, however, the combination of the two "OFF" positions to "front" is assumed. However, if you have a different preference, it is not a problem: The only difference from the described version lies in the logical selection of "Throttle min rear/front" and, if applicable, of a corresponding brake offset in the menu …

280 Programming examples - Winged modelsthe phase for the front switch position "normal" and "landing" for the rear position (or vice versa):PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF2722LandingThese phase names then appear in all ﬂ ight-phase dependent menus and, of course, also in the base screen of the transmitter.Now switch to the «Landing» ﬂ ight phase and in the "Crow" line of the sub-menu …»Brake settings« (page 172)Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSLandingCrowQRWK20%WK0%Diff. reduct.0%… of the »Wing mixers« menu, set the desired throw of the ailerons by actuation of the C1 joystick ("brake") upward. Then, if applicable, switch to the "FL" column in order to specify the desired through of the ﬂ aps with C1 actuation downward (hidden in the ﬁ gure above). This ﬂ ap position is referred to as "Crow position" or "Butterﬂ y; see also page 172.In the line "Diff. reduct." (differentiation reduction), enter a value which corresponds to the value entered or want to enter on the ﬁ rst page of the »Wingmixers« menu in the "Aile.diff." line.With the "Elevat curve" mixer the normally occurring "Upward tilting" of the model on the raising of the Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw.timeMotoryes 1.1sno 1.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––¾Normal Clk1LandingThen you must assigned these two ﬂ ight phases to a switch with which you can switch between the two ﬂ ight phases during the ﬂ ight. In this case, a single switch is sufﬁ cient. It should be easy to reach, however, so that you can still switch between "motor" and "brake" during a landing approach, for example, without having to release a joystick.The assignment of the selected switch takes place in the menu …»Phase assignment« (page 148)Select the switch symbol under "C" with one of the selection keys. Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, actuate the desired switch, e.g "2".PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF272Both switch positions, in other words ON (I) and OFF ( ), are initially assigned at the bottom right of the display to phase «1 Normal». Select this value ﬁ eld with one of the selection keys then activate the phase selection list that was set up in the »Phasesettings« menu with a brief tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad. For example, you name Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw.timeMotoryes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––¾Normal Clk1LandingThen the timer is controlled through a corresponding control switch to be deﬁ ned on the C1 joystick. As soon as you switch to the "Landing" ﬂ ight phase, this ﬂ ight phase timer is automatically stopped and hidden in the base screen. More about this can be found on page 156.Now move the marker frame over the "Ph.Tim" column to the "Motor" column to the right. Here you can decide with "yes/no" in which phase the motor is controlled by the throttle/brake joystick and the brake system to be adjusted in the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu should be shut off (= "yes") and vice versa (= "no"):Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw.timeMotoryes 0.1sno 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––¾Normal Clk1LandingNow move the marker frame once more to the right and enter an appropriate switching time after activation of the value ﬁ eld of the "Sw.Time" column; for example:

281Programming examples - Winged modelsailerons can be automatically suppressed. The suitable correction values for the respective value must be tested out through ﬂ ight. Set this mixer so that the ﬂ ight speed of the model does not change too much with the brake system extended in comparison with the "normal" ﬂ ight speed. Otherwise, there is the risk, among other things, that the model plunges when the brake system is retracted, e.g. for the extension of a landing approach which is too short.If everything is correctly set so far, only the motor is controlled with the C1 joystick in the "Normal" ﬂ ight phase, whereas this should be switched off in the ﬂ ight phase "landing" (Servo 1 in »Servo display«independent of "Throttle min front/rear" to -100 % or adequately for a servo travel setting deviating by 100 %, if necessary). In this ﬂ ight phase the C1 joystick then only controls the raising of the ailerons and, if applicable, the lowering of the ﬂ aps with the neutral point in the C1 control position selected per offset.

282 Programming examples - Winged models C1 joystick switchable between E-motor and spoilerExample 5If, contrary to the assumptions of the preceding Example 4, the model has additional spoilers or only spoilers, they can be incorporated into the control of the model by means of the following programming.Do this by programming the menus »Model type«,»Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« in the same manner as described under Example 4. The settings described there in the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu are only then relevant if an additional crow system is to be employed in parallel with the spoilers.With the settings described under Example 4, the control of the E-motor and, if applicable, that of a crow system will function as usual. Only the control of a spoiler connected to Output 8, for example, must additionally be programmed. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… and switch into the «normal» ﬂ ight phase.Now use the selection keys to switch to the left into the "Typ" column to set the parameter in this line, e.g. "I8" from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)", so that the settings too follow become effective on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormalPHSELfr ---Afterward, switch to the "Offset" column and, following activation of the value ﬁ eld with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, change the offset value for this Input 8 value ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse video until the spoilers are again "retracted", e.g.:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0-95% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormalPHSELfr ---Conﬁ rm this setting with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left key pad or the center SET key of the right touch pad then switch to the left into the column above SEL. Now switch to the ﬂ ight phase «Landing» then brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The display shows the window …0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0+100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLLandingPHSELfr --- 0%Move desiredcontrol adj.Now move the C1 joystick As soon as this is recognized, "Cn1" will appear in the display instead of "fr":0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0+100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLLandingPHSELCn1 --- 0%Leave the offset value in this ﬂ ight phaseat "0 %". It may be necessary to change the leading symbol of the travel setting to reverse the control direction. Do this by switching the travel setting from +100 % to -100 % in the "travel" column.Now we are practically ﬁ nished. Check the programming in the »Servo display« menu, which you can reach from the base screen of the transmitter as well as nearly every other menu position with a simultaneous tap on ef keys of the left touch pad. You will discover that "Servo 1" (motor control) is controlled in the "Normal" phase and in the "landing" phase only the spoiler is controlled at "Servo 8" and, if applicable the aileron and ﬂ ap servos – just as we intended.

284 Programming examples - Timer conﬁ rmation with control or switchSEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHCnt. 1free–85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeIn order to assign the control switch you just crated to the desired timer, switch to the menu …»Timers (in general)« (page 152 … 154)… and select the line "Top" with the selection keys. This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch. In this line, move the marker frame over the "Timer" column to the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left or right touch pad. Now tap twice on the center SETkey of the right touch pad: The ﬁ rst tap will activate the switch assignment, the second tap will call up the list of "expanded switches":Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop :StoppuhrCentr.Mitte :FlugzeitMovwünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C3C1Now select the previously programmed control switch, C1 in the example, and assign it to the timer with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:ModeltimeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s –––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timC1The timer in the base screen now starts with movement of the C1 joystick toward full throttle and stops if you pull the C1 joystick back over the switching point. Example 1 of the preceding pagesIf you have decided to continue with the model programming described on the previous pages in Example 1 on page 276, ﬁ rst switch to the menu …»Control switch« (page 135)… and select the line of a control switch which has not been assigned yet with the selection keys. After activation of the control assignment with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the following window will appear:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHGeb. 10%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freifreefreefrei Move desiredcontrol adj.Now simply move the respective proportional control, e.g. the left side proportional rotary control from its motor "OFF" position toward the motor "ON" direction.Thereafter, change to the column above STO by using the appropriate selection key, move the selected control near its motor "OFF" position then Examples 4 and 5 of the preceding pagesIf model programming is to be continued for Example 4, page 279 or Example 5, page 282 as described on previous pages or, completely independent of this example programming, the C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick) is to be used for power regulation, then a control switch can be used to automatically start and stop the stopwatch. For this purpose, ﬁ rst switch to the menu …»Control switch« (page 135)… and select the line of a control switch which has not been assigned yet with the selection keys. After activation of the control assignment with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the following window will appear:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHGeb. 10%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freifreefreefrei Move desiredcontrol adj.Now simply move the C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick) from the motor "OFF" position in the motor "ON" direction.Thereafter, change to the column above STO by using the appropriate selection key, move the C1 joystick close to its motor "OFF" position then set the switch-point at the selected position with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The switch's state will be displayed at the right of the control number, e.g.: Timer conﬁ rmation with control or switch

285Programming examples - Timer conﬁ rmation with control or switchset the switch-point at the selected position with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The switch status is shown to the right of the control number:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHSlide2free–85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeNote:Now place the switching point; but do not put it at the limit position of the control, because safe switching is not assured when doing so.Ct1 used in the example here should be "closed" in the "full throttle" direction and "open" below the switching point. Now switch to the menu …»Timers (in general)« (page 152 … 154)… and select the line "Top"with the selection keys. This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch. In this line, move the marker frame over the "Timer" column to the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left or right touch pad. Now tap twice on the center SETkey of the right touch: The ﬁ rst tap will activate the switch assignment, the second tap will call up the list of "expanded switches":Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop :StoppuhrCentr.Mitte :FlugzeitMovwünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C3C1Now select the previously programmed control switch "C1" then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.ModeltimeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s –––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timC1The stopwatch in the basic display now starts with movement of the proportional rotary control toward full throttle and stops if it is turned back again over the switch-point. Examples 2 and 3 of the preceding pagesIf you control your motor with a switch, on the other hand, you do not need the described control switch described above. It is completely sufﬁ cient if you assign the same switch to the timer, so that it also begins to run when you switch on the motor.Tip:If the motor run time for an E-model is limited by the battery capacity, you can have the stopwatch count down. Enter the maximum permissible motor run time in the "Timer" column, e.g. "5 min", and shortly before expiration of permissible time, e.g. "30 s" before, have the transmitter issue an acoustic warning signal:Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h5:000:0030s0s –––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight tim7

286 Programming examples - Parallel operating servos Parallel operating servosA second servo running in parallel is often required, such as when brake ﬂ aps or spoilers installed in the wings or the left and right elevator or a double ﬁ n should be actuated by a servo or a large rudder ﬂ ap should be simultaneously controlled by two servos due to high throw forces.In principle, this task could also be solved by connecting the servos together on the model side using V-cable. However, the disadvantage here is that servos combined in this manner can no longer be adjusted individually and separately from the transmitter – thus negating the potential for ﬁ nely tuning respective servos to one another with a computerized remote control system. A similar situation is given for the so-called "Channel mapping" feature of the »Telemetry« menu. Here too there are certain limitations involved when compared to the transmitter's adjustment possibilities.The ﬁ rst example, therefore, describes the coupling of two brake or spoiler servos, the second describes the operation of two or more throttle servos and the third describes the coupling of two elevator servos.The "two rudder servos" example on the next page describes the coupling of two rudder servos, whereas Variant 1 is preferable for applications of this type because the use of a cross-mixer« is quicker and easier to program. In contrast, the second variant, also described on the next page, additionally permits asymmetric and/or non-linear curves through use of the »Free mixer« menu.Two brake or spoiler servosIn a situation where there is one installed servo for operation of brake ﬂ aps and/or spoilers in each wing half then the pre-set linear control characteristics for the »Channel 1 curve« menu should remain unchanged.Then connect one of the two servos to Output 1, provided for this purpose by standard, and the second to an arbitrary free receiver connection 5 … 16, such as Output "8". Subsequently switch to the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… and, using the selection keys, assign "Control 1" in the Input 8 line :0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrCn1---------offsetGLNormalSince the spoiler on Output 1 can normally only be operated on a ﬂ ight-phase dependent basis, it is strongly recommended that the "Typ" column for the input used is left at its "GL" default setting.Also the remaining values should be left at their default settings. If necessary, carry out the required servo travel adjustments in the »Servo adjustment«menu. There you can also adjust the travel of servo 1 and 8 to one another, if necessary.Multiple-motor aircraftAs described above, a model can also be operated with two or more motors.The ﬁ rst throttle servo and/or the ﬁ rst motor control is connected as usual to (receiver) Output 1 and each additional throttle servo and/or each additional motor control is connected to a free (receiver) Output 6 … 12. The inputs of respective assigned control channels are then each assigned to Control 1; for example :0% +100%I9I10I11I12Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGL---Cn1---------offsetGLNormalCn1Cn1Cn1Important notice:Since the motor control unit should be available regardless of a currently active ﬂ ight phase, make sure to leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column.Two elevator servosTwo elevator servos should be switched in parallel. According to the receiver assignment plan, see page 61, the receiver output 8 is intended for the connection of the second elevator servo.This would be taken into account on the software side in the pre-conﬁ guration of a corresponding mixer. You can ﬁ nd this in the …"Model type" (page 94)In this menu, switch to the "Tail" line using the selection keys, activate the value ﬁ eld with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right key pad then select the entry "2ELSv3+8":

287Programming examples - Parallel operating servosTail typeMotor on C1 noneAileron/camber flaps 1 QRM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL2 EL Sv 3+8Then do the ﬁ ne-tuning for travel of the two servos "in the now familiar manner" in the »Servo adjustment« menu.Two ruddersWe want to switch two rudders "in parallel". The second rudder is located at the free receiver output 8.Variant 1In the menu …»Dual mixer« (page 206)… select one of the cross-mixers and enter "8" and "RU" in its left and center value ﬁ elds, as shown in the ﬁ gure:Diff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 28RUMixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??0%0%0%0%The same deﬂ ection "cc", which would take place through "Input 8" must not have an effect here. Therefore, you should make absolutely sure in the …»Control adjust« (page 108)0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------offsetGLNormal… that "Input 8" "GL(obal)" is set to "free" so the control function is separate from the control channel over all ﬂ ight phases.Alternatively, Input 8 can be set to "no control" in the »Mix only channel« menu on a ﬂ ight-phase independent basis by setting Channel 8 to "MIXonly".MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516Variant 2This variant uses the …»Free mixers« (beginning page 193)… menu to set a "Tr RU ¼ 8". In the "Type" column, select the setting "Tr" so that the rudder trimming affects both rudder servos:8LinearMIX 1type RUfrom – Begr. +????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust––––––––????––––TrAfterwards, switch to the graphic screen and set a symmetric mix of +100 %.RUMix input Offset8Linear MIX 1SYM ASY STO0%SET+100% +100%Here too, "Input 8" should also be programmed – if applicable, for all ﬂ ight phases – to "free" by way of the »Control adjust« menu. However, control function "8" can be separated from control channel "8" more easily in the ﬂ ight-phase independent »Mixonly channel« menu, page 205:MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516

288 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases Using ﬂ ight phasesUp to 8 different ﬂ ight phases (ﬂ ight conditions) can be programmed with settings independent of one another within each the model memory.Each of these ﬂ ight phases can be called with a switch or a switch combination. This makes it possible to program different settings for various ﬂ ight states, such as «Normal», «Thermal», «Speed», «Distance», etc., then make in-ﬂ ight changeovers in a most convenient manner. However, with the ﬂ ight phase programming you can also make slight modiﬁ cations, e.g. of mixers, to try out by switching during the ﬂ ight in order to ﬁ nd the optimal settings for each model more easily.Before actual programming of ﬂ ight phases can begin, consideration should be given to whether the digital trimming of transverse, altitude and side should be "GL(obal)" – in other words, applicable to all ﬂ ight phases – or per "PH(ase)" – in other words, each ﬂ ight phase individually variable.If you decide in favor of a phase-speciﬁ c trimming of the elevator, for example, switch the menu …»Stick mode« (page 104)… and change the standard "global" default accordingly.The same applies for the number of trimming steps in the "Tr. step" column:globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTri m0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444 Example 1 …… continuing with the previous programming of an electric glider with 2 aileron servos.AIAIELRUControl of the electric motor is accomplished, independent of the C1 joystick, with one of the two side proportional rotary controls or one of the two standard 3-way switches mounted into the switch panels. The motor's speed control is connected to receiver output 8 as described on page 276 and continued in Examples 1 and 2 This is why "none" was selected for the "Motor on C1" line in the »Modeltype« menu. This not only causes the column "Motor" in the »Phase settings« menu to be unavailable but also allows all options to be available without restriction in the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu.1st Step »Phase settings« (page 142)Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 50.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Timer Sw.time––––¾NormalThermalSpeedLaunchInitially, one or multiple ﬂ ight phases are provided with a speciﬁ c identiﬁ cation ("Name") for the respective ﬂ ight status. This identiﬁ cation has no inﬂ uence on the programming of the transmitter; it only serves for an improved differentiation of the individual ﬂ ight phases and is shown later in all ﬂ ight-phase dependent menus and in the base screen.The selection of the respective line, a name and the setting of the switchover time is done in the "usual" manner, with a tap on the appropriate key(s) of the two four-way touch pads.Note:With the exception of Phase 1, which should always be assigned with the name "Normal" since it is always active, if the ﬂ ight phases are deactivated, it is completely irrelevant which name is assigned to which phase!In everyday use by a model pilot, three to a maximum of four ﬂ ight phases are usually completely sufﬁ cient: "Start" with the climb settings•"Thermal" for "Flying high",•"Normal" for normal conditions and •"Speed" for high gear.•In the "Sw.time" column (switching time) …Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 51.0s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Timer Sw.time––––¾NormalThermalSpeedLaunch… a "blend-in" time can be established for the time in which a changeover from any other ﬂ ight phase into this given ﬂ ight-phase is to be accomplished in order to permit a "smooth" transition for different servo

289Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phasespositions. Thus, an increased stress of the model under certain circumstances with a "hard" change of rudder or ﬂ ap positions, for example, is prevented The "Status" column shows you the currently active ﬂ ight phase with an asterisk "¾".2nd StepIn order to actually be able to switch between the individual ﬂ ight phases, the assignment of one or multiple switches is necessary. Either one of the two three-way switches is ideally suited for switching between up to three ﬂ ight phases.Each of the two switch end positions starting from the center position will be assigned to one of the ﬂ ight phase switches A … F. The assignment of the switch takes place in the menu …»Phase assignment« (page 148)First select "C" with the marker frame. Then brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad and move the switch from its center position to one of its end-positions, for example, downward:PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF276Move the switch back to the center position and then select "D", and after activation of the switch assignment, move the switch to the other limit position, for example, to the top:PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF2767Now the 3-way switch is programmed. Now and additional switch could be assigned for the "start" ﬂ ight phase, if applicable. In this case under "A", so that the "start" phase is always switched to from every other ﬂ ight phase in parallel to the switching-on of the motor: PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF27672The given switch positions must then be assigned to respective ﬂ ight phases (names). Although some ﬂ ight phases have already been assigned to names, the phase name «1 Normal» will always initially appear at the right in the display; see the ﬁ gures above.First move the 3-way switch to one of its limit positions, for example to the top, and switch with the marker frame in the display down to the right to set the ﬂ ight phase name. Brieﬂ y tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad to activate the entry ﬁ eld then select the desired ﬂ ight phase for this switch position, in this example «2 Thermal», with the selection keys:PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF276722 ThermalProceed in the same manner for the other switch limit position, which is assigned the name "3 Speed".If applicable move Switch 2 and assign this switch combination the name "4 Start".A brief tap on the center ESC of the left touch pad or the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the time name assignment.The ﬂ ight-phase dependent model settings made before the assignment of phase switches are now in the ﬂ ight phase «1 Normal». This is the phase which is called with the open «Start» switch in the center position of the 3-way switch.3rd Step In order to not have to carry out all previously made settings for the model in the "new" ﬂ ight phase from the ground up, we recommend ﬁ rst copying the already tested programming of the ﬂ ight phase "Normal" to the other ﬂ ight phases. This is carried out in the menu …»Copy / Erase« (page 72)Copy flight phaseErase modelCopy model –> modelExport to SDImport from SD =>

290 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phasesHere, select the "Copy ﬂ ight phase" menu item with the selection keys then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.In the window which now appears, "Copy from phase", "1 Normal" is selected …7Copy from phase:35=>=>24618normal ThermalSpeed Launch… and a subsequent brief tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad will change the display to "Copy to phase". Now the target is to be selected (initially "2 Thermal") and conﬁ rmed by another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. After conﬁ rmation of the subsequent safety query, all settings are copied according to the selection.Proceed in the same manner with the other two phases ("1 Normal" to "3 Speed" and "1 Normal" to "4 Start").4th Step Now three or four phases are programmed, the settings are also copied and there is even a "soft" transfer, but … there are still no ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c settings.Now, if applicable, in order to adapt the ﬂ ap positions to the different requirements of the individual ﬂ ight phases, in the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… the standard default "GL" is ﬁ rst changed to "PH" for "Phase" in the type column:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------offsetPHNormalThen switch to the "Offset" column and make the settings deviating from the "Normal" ﬂ ight phase for the ailerons. However, switch to the desired ﬂ ight phase beforehand, whose name is shown at the bottom in the display, appropriate to the switch position. Both positive and negative throw changes are possible. These settings are to be made separately for each ﬂ ight phase:+100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------offsetPHThermal–7%5th Step Any necessary phase-speciﬁ c trimming of the elevator is made with the help of the digital trimming of the elevator joystick. This requires that you have at least set the elevator trimming to "Phase" in the »Stick mode« menu – as already shown in this programming example.Alternatively, these settings can also be made in the »Phase trim« menu …¿Normal 0%ELThermal0%0%0%AI WK WK2ThermalSpeedLaunch0%0%0%0% 0%0%0%0% 0%0%0%0%QR20%0%0%0%6th Step In the menu …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… the ﬂ ight phase name of the newly activated ﬂ ight phase appears at the bottom edge of the display. If the switch position is now changed, the name of the ﬂ ight phase selected with the switch appears, but with the previously copied settings of the ﬂ ight phase "Normal". Here you set you values phase-speciﬁ cally for the aileron differentiation, the share of the mixture of transverse to side, and if applicable, also a mixture of altitude to transverse. (The latter increases the agility over the transverse axis when "Turning".)Aileron differentialBrake settings+33%Aileron +55%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalNote:The list of displayed options depends on the number of servos entered in the "Ailerons/ﬂ aps" line in the »Model type« menu.Now switch to the sub-menu …

291Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phasesAileron differentialBrake settings+33%Aileron +55%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345Normal… and enter the raised height of aileron brakes for individual ﬂ ight phases in the "Crow" line.With "D.red" (differentiation reduction), you should enter the value previously set in the aileron differentiation line in order to suppress it again while breaking.In the "Elevat curve" sub-menu, enter a correction value for the elevator, see page 150.Note:The "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wingmixers« menu is switched "off" when: for the "Motor at C1 front/rear" column of the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND for the "Motor" column of the »Phasesettings« menu (page 142), a "yes" is entered for the currently active ﬂ ight phase. Change the ﬂ ight phase, if applicable.

292 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases Example 2 …Glider with four ﬂ ap wings, two large ﬂ aps and tow couplingAIFLFLAIELRUThe following example is based on the assumption that you have already mechanically pre-adjusted the model and you have already ensured the correct deﬂ ection of all rudders or checked this again in the scope of this programming and made adjustments, if applicable, through servo switching at the receiver and/or through the »Servo adjustment« menu.This programming example is based on an assignment of the receiver connections in accordance with the following diagram:Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionRudder or elevator/rudder rightLeft aileronElevator or elevator/rudder left2nd airbrake or free or aux. functionReceiver power supplyAirbrake or 1st airbrakeRight aileronLeft flapRight flapAero-tow release or free or aux. functionfree or aux. function13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyBegin with the new programming of the model in a free model memory location. Essentially, the »Basic settings, model« menu is used to bind the receiver to the transmitter. Enter a model name and select or review the selection of appropriate stick mode. Later on this menu will also be used to activate the range test before the start of ﬂ ight operations.In the menu …"Model type" (page 94)… leave "Motor to C1" at "none" and the tail type at "Normal". Set "2 AIL 2 FL" into the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line.In the "Brake" line, program or leave "In1", because the brake and spoiler ﬂ ap servos connected to 1 + 8 should be activated later with the corresponding C1 joystick as the control:Tail typeMotor on C1NormalnoneAileron/camber flaps 2AIL 2FLM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+90%SELSTOThe setting in the "Brake Offset" value ﬁ eld deﬁ nes the neutral position of all mixers speciﬁ ed by the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers«menu. Place this neutral point at approx. +90 %, insofar as the brake ﬂ aps should be retracted in the front position of the C1 joystick. The remaining path between +90 % and the full throw of the joysticks, +100 %, is then assigned as idle travel. This assures that the rudders or ﬂ aps addressed by the mixers of "Brake settings" remain in their "normal" positions even for slight deviations from the limit position of the C1 control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %.In the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… assign a switch, for example Input 9, to operate the aero-tow coupling. In order for this switch to work independently of the ﬂ ight phase, leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column of this input. With "– Travel +" you can adjust the control travel for the switching of the switch:Using ﬂ ight phases

293Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases0% +100%I6I7I8I9Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfr---------offsetGL frNormal10---With a simultaneous tap on the ef keys of the left touch pad, the setting can be checked in the »Servo display«.Since the C1 control should actuate Servo 8 simultaneously with Servo 1, establish this link by way of the »Control adjust« menu.For this reason, also switch to the line before and assign "Control 1" to Input 8.0% +100%I6I7I8I9Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrCn1------------offsetGL frNormal10SELHowever, please note in this connection, that a non-linear control curve programmed in the »Channel1 curve« menu has as little effect on this input as brake offset set to less than 100 %, which you can check very easily in the »Servo display« menu. You can reach this from nearly every menu position with a simultaneous tap on the ef keys of the left touch pad:The travel, and if applicable also the direction of rotation, for spoiler servo 1 as well as the second spoiler servo connected to Output 8 can be adjusted in the menu …Servo adjustment (page 102)0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%In the Multi-ﬂ ap menu of the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… you now enter the ﬁ rst mixer values for the four wing ﬂ aps; for example:FL-Pos.Diff.AI-Tr.AINormal AI+100%WK2FL0%+66% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%+33%0%+33%0%+100% +66% 0%0%FL +100%0% +100%Note:The parameter values shown here are model-dependent and must be determined by test ﬂ ights.In the …cAId determines the percentage share with which the two ﬂ ap pairs "AI" and "FL" are to respond to aileron steering. Also check whether the ailerons are deﬂ ected in the right direction during the adjustment of the parameter values. The adjustment range from -150 % … +150 % enables the correct throw direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of the servos.AI-Tr. determines the percentage share with which aileron trimming should effect the AI and FL.Diff. the entry to specify aileron steering differentiation for AI and FL ﬂ aps is made here. Refer to page 161 about the signiﬁ cance of differentiation. The adjustment range from -100 % … +150 % enables the correct differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and ﬂ ap servos.FL-Pos. The ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c positions for all camber ﬂ aps present on the given model are set in this line. In the process, you can determine the positions the ﬂ aps assume for each ﬂ ight phase.Note:The values appearing in this line are based on the same data set as in the comparable position in the »Phase trim« menu, which is why changes always take effect in both directions.cFLc Since all inputs in the »Control adjust«menu are set to "free" by default, neither the ailerons nor the camber ﬂ aps can be operated with these default settings. In this respect, you also leave the default entry here. However, if ﬂ ap positions are to be varied with a switch or proportional control by the position speciﬁ ed in the "FL-Pos." line, assign the desired control to Input 6 in the »Control adjust« menu and set the desired reaction to the movement of the control selected for this purpose by way of a percentage in this line.HR¼WK this mixer induces a partial reaction from aileron (AI) and camber ﬂ aps (FL) during elevator activation.

294 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases The mixing direction is to be selected so that all ﬂ aps are deﬂ ected downward with the elevator pulled up and deﬂ ected upward with the elevator pushed down (= hydroplane). The mix proportion is normally in the low double-digit range.Now, within the »Wing mixers« menu, switch to the "Brake settings" …Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAI+22%WK20%FL+66%Diff. reduct.WK2+33% 0%+33%Note:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phasesettings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase. Change the ﬂ ight phase, if applicable.Crow Further above in this text section, the C1 joystick was set for brake ﬂ ap steering. In this line you determine the share with which the AI and FL should be included on actuation of C1 in the manner that both ailerons are deﬂ ected "slightly" upward and both ﬂ aps are deﬂ ected as far downward as possible. Now with a simultaneous tap on the ef keys of the left touch pad, a change to the »Servo display« menu can be affected for observation of servo movements and, in particular, to ensure that no inﬂ uence on the ﬂ aps takes place above the adjusted brake offset, e.g. +90 % and beyond to the throw limit of the C1 control ("Idle travel" of the C1 joystick).Diff. reduct. The value previously entered into the aileron differentiation line should also be entered in this "Differentiation reduction" line to fade this out during braking.Elevat. curveThis line is used for the entry of any correction factor that may be required for the elevator, see page 174.Insofar as necessary, again check all ﬂ ap throws and, by way of the »Servo adjustment« menu, adjust the servo center, the servo travel and the travel limit.It may also be time to start the initial ﬂ ight testing, insofar as all global settings – that is to say, all ﬂ ight-phase independent settings – are completed.Two additional ﬂ ight phases are now to be set up below, each of which requires a somewhat different ﬂ ap position.Therefore, switch to the menu …»Phase settings« (page 142)… and activate the assignment of phase names in the "Name" column with a brief tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 50.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw. time––––¾Now give Phase 1 – the "Normal phase" – that is also the phase which includes the previous settings, the name "Normal", which you select from a list with the selection keys.Phase 2 is given the name "Thermal" and Phase 3 is given the name "Speed". Now conclude the entries with a brief tap on the ESC key of the left touch pad or the SET key of the right touch pad:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 50.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. SW. time––––¾NormalThermalSpeedNow move the marker frame beyond the "Fl.ph.Tim" column to the right into the column "Sw. time" and set a "switching time" from any other phase into the given phase in order to avoid an abrupt phase change; in other words to avoid erratic changes of ﬂ ap positions. Now try out different switching times. In this example we have speciﬁ ed 1 s in each case:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 51.0s1.0s1.0s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.tim. Sw. time––––¾NormalThermalSpeedWhether or not one of the phases 1 … 8 currently has an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be seen in the "status" column at the far right.Symbol Meaning– No switch assigned+ Phase can be called via switch¾Indicates the currently active phaseSince, except for phase 1, all other phases are still designated with a "-" symbol, now switch in the menu to …

295Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases»Phase assignment« (page 148)… and assign the previously deﬁ ned ﬂ ight phases to appropriate switches with which a selection from among three phases is possible.Since there is no particular priority here, assign for example switch "C" in the display to one of the two end settings of one of the two 3-way switches. Afterward put the selected switch again into its middle position, activate the switch assignment under "D" then move the selected 3-way switch again out of its middle position and into the other end position, as shown below:PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF267After the switch assignment is complete, use the selection keys to switch to the bottom right and activate the assignment of phase names with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Now close switch "7" by moving the selected 3-way switch forward.Assign the name "<2 Thermal>" to this switch position and leave the name of its "OFF" position as "<1 normal>".PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF2672 ThermalPHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF2671 NormalFinally, move the 3-way switch to the rear toward its "6 o'clock position" and assign this switch position the name "<3 Speed>":PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF2673 SpeedThe phase names selected in the programming are now shown, depending on the switch status, in all ﬂ ight-phase dependent menus, see the table on page 140.Since we have already made some settings in ﬂ ight-phase dependent menus, such as in the »Wing mixers«menu, we will now copy these settings to the «Thermal» ﬂ ight phase. For this purpose, open the menu …»Copy / Erase« (page 72)… and switch to the "Copy ﬂ ight phase" line:Copy flight phaseErase modelCopy model –> modelExport to SDImport from SD =>All eight possible ﬂ ight phases are listed in "Copy from phase":Select the ﬂ ight phase to be copied, e.g. 1. "1 Normal".7Copy from phase:35=>=>24618Normal ThermalSpeedWith a brief tap on the center 2. SET key of the right touch pad, switch the window to entry of the target memory "Copy to phase".Select phase "2 Thermal" as the target:3. 7Kopieren to phase:35=>=>4618NormalSpeedThermal2Conﬁ rm the selection 4. with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.A security query follows, who should be conﬁ rmed 5. with "Yes":Phase to:to be copied?NO1 Normal 2 ThermalYESThen repeat the process with ﬂ ight phase "3 Speed".6.

296 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phasesNow we will program the required settings in the ﬂ ight phase "Thermal" as an example.In order to vary camber ﬂ ap positions in the «Thermal» phase, it is merely necessary to switch over to the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… then change Input 6 – as described beginning on page 108 – from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)" and ﬁ nally assign it to an operating element. To do this, ﬁ rst use the selection keys to switch into the "Typ" column for "I6" and change this setting from "GL" to "PH".0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfrCn1fr---------offsetGL frThermalPH---SELThereafter change one column to the right into the column above SEL …0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfrCn1fr---------offsetGL frPH---SELThermik… and now assign this input, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56, the left proportional slider in the middle console to, for example:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGL Cn1fr---------offsetGL frPH---SELSl1ThermalThis control will allow the ailerons (2 + 5) and camber ﬂ aps (6 + 7) to be continuously adjusted (as camber ﬂ aps) with a mixer ratio yet to be set via the »Wingmixers« menu.If you assign the still free second three-stage switch to Input 6 instead, you can call three different FL positions of the ailerons (AIL) and camber changing ﬂ aps (FL) as well as three elevator positions (Elev) in the "Thermal" ﬂ ight phase, see the following page. (These three switch positions correspond to the center position and the two limit positions of the previously mentioned proportional rotary control.)Note:The FL and AIL ﬂ ap positions in the two limit switch positions or in the switch center depend on the value set in the column "- Travel +" as well as the offset value and the mixer proportion set in the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" of the »Wing mixers« menu, see further below.Leave the (control) "- travel +" at its standard symmetric settings of + 100 % and the offset value at 0 %. Specifying a symmetric or asymmetric time for smooth switching between the three switch positions - in the example "1.0 s 1.0 s" - in the column "- Time +" is recommended:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGL Cn1fr---------offsetGL frNormalPH---SELSl1 1.0 1.0In the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" of the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu, subsequently change only the values for "FL.pos" and "cFLc" in the «Thermal» ﬂ ight phase:FL.pos It is here that AI and FL positioning takes place during the «Thermal» ﬂ ight phase in the event that the assigned control (proportional control or 3-way switch) is in its neutral or middle position.FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AIThermal AI+100%WK2FL0%+66% 0%+100%+100%–9%+100%+33%0%+33%0%+100% +66% 0%0%FL +100%0% +100%–11%cFLc Enter in this line the the share of inﬂ uence for aileron and camber ﬂ ap servos, when used as camber ﬂ aps, is to be produced by the selected control (see above) or 3-way switch. Be sure to set these values high enough that the ﬂ aps can be controlled with appropriate sensitivity, for example:Fl.posDiff.AiI-tr.AIThermal AI+100%WK2FL0%+66% 0%+100%+100%–9%+100%+33%0%+33%0%+100% +66% 0%0%FL +20% +25%–11%+25%+20%

297Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phasesA simultaneous tap on the cd or ef key combination of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset changed values back to their standard default values.Note:Due to the improved lift distribution, the degree of mix ratios should be set so that the camber ﬂ aps are slightly "lower" than the ailerons.With a simultaneous tap on the ef keys of the left touch pad, the reaction of the AI and FL servos can be checked in the »Servo display« by actuation of the selected camber ﬂ ap control. (Push the C1 joystick to the front position so that the "AIL" and "FL" ﬂ ap positions can be better followed on actuation of the corresponding control.) Caution:With aileron actuation the bars of the »Servo display« move in the same manner, for camber ﬂ ap actuation they will move in the opposite manner.In the control's middle position, the – example's – •"FL-pos." setting only has a -9 % effect for the AI and -11 % for the FL.In one transmitter control end-position, AI and FL •are again closer to the neutral position because the mix ratio speciﬁ ed in the example reduces the FL.pos setting, whereas …… in the other limit position, AIL and FL reach •the maximum downward offset prescribed by the mixer percentage.In order to set a – corrective – admix for the elevator, exit the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" and return to the base screen of the »Wing mixers« menu:Brake settings Aileron +50%WING MIXERSFlaps aileron +5%+5%––––––rudder2643ThermalMulti-flap menuIn the two limit positions of the three-stage switch the elevator is moved symmetrically in this example with +5 % (true to side). If, on the other hand, you use a proportional control, the elevator is deﬂ ected according to the degree for the control position.Then make the settings for the "Speed" ﬂ ight phase in the same manner.Notes:The digital trimming of transverse, altitude •and side work independently of these settings – depending on the setting selected in the»Stick mode« menu, page 104 – "global" or for each "phase".All setting values are model-dependent. Carry out •the settings on your ﬁ nished model and/or during the ﬂ ight.

298 Programming examples - Eight-ﬂ ap wing Eight-ﬂ ap wingThe standard features of the mc-20 HoTT support convenient control of up to 8 servos for aileron/camber ﬂ ap functions.In the following we will consider a model without motor drive and without spoilers in the wings. The example is also based on the assumption that the model is already mechanically pre-adjusted, that the deﬂ ection of all rudders to the correct side has been veriﬁ ed, that these items will be checked again in the context of programming and that adaptations will be made as necessary via servo swapping at the receiver and/or in the Servo adjustment menu.The servos should be connected to a suitable receiver as follows: 7256121134910Rudder Receiver outputAileron 2 + 5Aileron 2 11 + 12Camber changing ﬂ aps (exterior) 6 + 7Camber changing ﬂ aps 2 (interior) 9 + 10Elevator 3Rudder 4For the control of all ﬂ aps, up to two additional proportional controls are required in addition to the two joysticks or, alternatively up to two 2-way switches.In order to be able to control all servos, ﬁ rst switch to the menu …"Model type" (page 94)… and select "4AIL 4FL" in the "Ailerons/ﬂ aps" line.Tail typeMotor on C1NormalnoneAileron/camber flapsM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL4 AIL 4 FLIn order to also actuate camber ﬂ ap servos 6 + 7 (FL) and 9 + 10 (FL2) as ailerons, set the appropriate values in the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" of the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu, whereby aileron control of the two camber ﬂ ap pairs is set in the "cAId" line and the "Ail-tr."line is used to adapt aileron trimming.FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AINormal AILE+100%FL20 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%+77% +55%0%0%0%0%0%+100% +77% +55%0%FLAILE2 FLAP+88%+88%0%0%EL FL 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%Any previous settings can be checked in the »Servo display« menu, which can be called from almost any menu position with a brief simultaneous tap on the ef keys of the left touch pad. The servos 6 + 7, 9 + 10 and 11 + 12 now move •for the aileron control just like servos 2 + 5. Aileron trimming also affects all of these servos.The C1 joystick only actuates the servo connected •to receiver output 1.Caution:With aileron actuation the bars of the "Servo display" move in the same manner and in the opposite manner with camber changing ﬂ ap actuation.The necessary ﬁ ne-tuning of the servos is carried out in the …»Servo adjustment« (page 102)0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%… if necessary.In doing so, the basic programming of the eight-ﬂ ap wing is completed.Camber ﬂ ap positioning and ﬂ ight phasesFirst program two or more ﬂ ight phases in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus. Also take this opportunity to change the standard default "global" for trim in the »Stick mode« menu,page 104 to "phase", thus allowing modiﬁ cations to meet individual preferences. An example of ﬂ ight phase programming can be found on page 288.One camber changing ﬂ ap setting per ﬂ ight phaseIf one camber ﬂ ap position per ﬂ ight phase is sufﬁ cient, then in the Multi-ﬂ ap meun" of the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu, use the "FL.pos" line to adjust the camber ﬂ ap position(s) of servo pairs "AILE" (2 + 5), "AIL2" (11 + 12), "FLAP" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) for each programmed ﬂ ight phase to meet your preferences.

299Programming examples - Eight-ﬂ ap wingFL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AIThermal AILE+100%FL20 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%+77% +55%–9%–7%–5%0%0%+100% +77% +55%0%FLAILE2 FLAP+88%+88%0%–12%EL FL 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%Note:Whether positive or negative values must be set in the "FL.pos" line depends on the installation of the servos, among other things.However, if the alternative …variable camber ﬂ ap positions per ﬂ ight phase with a proportional rotary control setting is preferred,… then the basic settings for all 8 ﬂ aps can be additionally varied on a ﬂ ight-phase basis by way of a single control.This is accomplished via the …»Control adjust« (page 108)… menu, by assigning the same transmitter control in every ﬂ ight phase to inputs 5, 6 and 11, for example the proportional slider, and in parallel, reducing travel to about 50 % or even less so that the trimming of ﬂ aps has appropriate sensitivity. Deviating throw travel for individual ﬂ ap pairs can also be matched to one another on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis by way of travel settings in a menu. For this purpose, you only have to switch the corresponding inputs from the standard default "GL" (global) to "PH" (phase):0% +25%I5I6I7I8Typ+25%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +25%+25%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGL frfr---------offsetPH Sl1PH---SEL Sl1Thermal0% +100%I10I11I12I13Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +25%+25%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGL frfr---------offsetGL frPH---SELSl1ThermalNote:With the use of a switch, set the respective "Deviation" of the offset point symmetrically or asymmetrically in the "- Travel +" column.Elevator compensator with actuation of the camber changing ﬂ apsIf it should become evident in the ﬂ ight that a correction of the elevator is necessary after setting the ﬂ aps, this correction can be made in the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)... For this purpose, select the line "FL ¼ EL" and enter an appropriate ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c value, for example:Brake settings Aileron +50%WING MIXERSFlaps aileron +5%+5%––––––rudder2643ThermalMulti-flap menuIf you have assigned the same control to the inputs 5, 6 and 11 – as speciﬁ ed above – all eight ﬂ aps move simultaneously while the elevator follows the set degree of mixture.Camber changing ﬂ ap movement on elevator actuationCamber changing ﬂ ap movement on elevator actuation – normally only used in "High gear" to increase the agility over the transverse axis – is also carried out in the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" of the...»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)... menu. Enter the desired ﬂ ight-phase dependent values in the line "EL ¼ FL":FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AIThermal AILE+100%FL20 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%+77% +55%–9%–7%–5%0%0%+100% +77% +55%0%FLAILE2 FLAP+88%+88%0%–12%EL FL 5 5%+107+107% +9+ 9% +111+11%In addition to the two camber changing ﬂ ap pairs (servos 6 + 7 and 9 + 10), the two aileron pairs (servos 2 + 5 and 11 + 12) are now tracked with the degree of mixture corresponding to the camber changing ﬂ aps – normally opposite the elevator.

300 Programming examples - Eight-ﬂ ap wingBrake settingsNote:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu, page 94, AND the "Motor" column of the »Phasesettings« menu, page 142, are set to "yes" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase. Change the ﬂ ight phase, if applicable.The "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wingmixers« menu is also ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c and can be used to extend aileron pairs (2 + 5) and (11 + 12) upward as well as camber ﬂ ap pairs "FL" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) downward, whereas the elevator is trimmed in parallel to this, see page 174.In order for the brake system to react to the C1 joystick as desired, however, the mixer neutral point (offset) of the brake system must be adjusted accordingly. This takes place in the menu …"Model type" (page 94)After selecting the "Brake Off." line, the C1 joystick is to be moved to the position at which the mixer for the brake system is to take effect – normally just before the forward limit position – and after selecting the appropriate value ﬁ eld, the setpoint is deﬁ ned with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.If the C1 joystick is not moved over this point toward the pilot, all mixers of the brake system are carried along according to their respective degree of mixing. Below this point the mixer remains inactive, whereas the selection of "dead travel" is possible.If the model has additional brake ﬂ aps or spoilers and your receiver has another free Output 1, you can also control this through the C1 joystick by connecting the spoiler servo to receiver Output 1. However, if you control the left and right spoiler each with its own servo, and not together, the receiver Output 8 is still available for the connection of the second spoiler servo. In this case, program the connection to the second spoiler servo as described in the section "Servos running in parallel" on page 286.Reduction of the aileron and camber changing ﬂ ap differentiationFor the improvement of the aileron effect in the crow position, you should automatically suppress any programmed aileron differentiation. For this purpose, use "differentiation reduction" in the "Brake settings" of the »Wing mixers« menu to continuously reduce the degree of the aileron differentiation within an adjustable range when rudders are brought into crow position with the C1 joystick. For more about this, see text beginning on page 174.

301Programming examples - Delta and ﬂ ying wingOf course, the general comments regarding the installation and the adjustment of the RC system to a model at the beginning of the wing model programming on page 268 also applies for delta and ﬂ ying wing models! Similarly, the comments for test ﬂ ying and ﬁ ne-tuning the settings to the programming of ﬂ ight phases also apply.leftrightDelta and ﬂ ying wing models differ signiﬁ cantly from a "normal" ﬂ ight model due to their unique characteristic shape and geometry. The differences in the servo arrangement, on the other hand, are more subtle. For example, with "classic" delta/ﬂ ying wing models, only two rudders are normally provided. They are responsible for both "transverse" and "height/depth", like the side rudder/elevator function on a V-tail unit.With more elaborate designs, on the other hand, it may be the case that one (or two) interior rudders have only an elevator function and the exterior ailerons only support the height/depth function, under certain circumstances. Even with a 4, or indeed up to 8, ﬂ ap wing the use of camber ﬂ ap functions and/or even a crow system is nowadays entirely possible. In all these cases, however, the following assignment of the receiver outputs should be used, see also page 61. Unneeded outputs a simply left free: Receiver power supplyReceiver power supplyAirbrake- or throttle servoor speed controller (electric motor)13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyfree or aux. function or AIL2 / left EL free or aux. function or AIL2 / right EL free or aux. functionfree or flap / left elevatorfree or flap / right elevatorfree or aux. function or flap2 / left ELfree or aux. function or flap2 / right ELfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionAIL / elevator leftAIL / elevator rightfree or aux. functionfree or rudderAccording to the assignment of the receiver outputs, in the menu … »Model type« (page 94)Tail typeMotor on C1 noneAileron/camber flaps 2 AILM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELDelt/fl.wing Delta and ﬂ ying wing… the necessary settings are made:"Motor an C1" "none" or "Throttle min front/rear""Tail type" "Delt/ﬂ .wing""Aileron/camber ﬂ aps""2AIL" (appears automatically). To the extent necessary, expand default "2 AIL" by 4 AIL or 1, 2 or 4 camber ﬂ aps ("1 FL", "2 FL" or "4 FL")."Brake" stays as is, only interesting for a delta wing or ﬂ ying wing of type "2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL". In this case, refer to the text under "Brake offset" on page 95.These model type specifying settings primarily affect the functions made available in the »Wing mixers«menu. Therefore, the options are discussed separately for two-ﬂ ap and multi-ﬂ ap models in the following: Delta/ﬂ ying wing of the type: "2AIL"Tail typeMotor on C1 noneAileron/camber flapsM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELDelt/fl.wing2 AILBy retaining the standard default "2 AIL" in the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line, elevator and aileron control, including the trim function, are automatically mixed by percentage on the software side. However, on the transmitter side, the percentage effect of the elevator and aileron joystick can be inﬂ uenced in the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu, page 120.Settings in the menu …

302 Programming examples - Delta and ﬂ ying wingThis is only then achieved for "2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL" when, in the "Multi-ﬂ aps menu", the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu is set appropriately in the "HR ¼ WK" line to "Aileron, camber ﬂ aps" or, if applicable, "Camber ﬂ ap 2": FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AINormal AILE+100%WK2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEL FL+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Note:Contrary to the separately set aileron trimming, see below, the trimming is transferred proportionally to the set mixer value with the mixer "EL ¼ FL".The following settings are model-speciﬁ c and may not be adopted without checking that they are correct!In the top line of this "Multi-ﬂ ap menu", analogous to "normal" four, six or eight ﬂ ap wings, the effect of the aileron joystick will be set to aileron, camber ﬂ ap and, if applicable to FL2. One line below, in the line "Ail-tr." line, will set the inﬂ uence of aileron trimming on ailerons and camber changing ﬂ aps.The setting of a differentiation is rather tricker due to the model type and should only take place based on a feel for the ﬂ ight behavior of the model.The line "cFLc" should then be set to the standard default of +100 % in the "FLAP" (or "FL2") column – as shown – to 0 %, just to be safe.:»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… are, if need be, advantageous with the "Aileron ¼ Rudder" mixers and are "played' with a great deal of "feel" for ﬂ ying behavior with minor differentiation values. Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalDue to the speciﬁ c idiosyncrasies of this model type, additional settings lead to moments which cannot be compensated.Delta/ﬂ ying wing of the type: "2 / 4 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL"Tail typeMotor on C1 noneAileron/camber flapsM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELDelt/fl.wing2 AIL 2 FLWith delta/ﬂ ying wing constructions with more than two ﬂ aps, more moments can be compensated for. For example, the "lifting" moment caused by the raising of the ailerons (= elevator effect) can be compensated for with camber changing ﬂ aps lowered correspondingly wide ( = hydroplane effect).If you decide in favor of this model type and have assigned the receiver outputs in accordance with the connection plan shown above, the aileron function of the two (exterior) aileron servos will function correctly immediately, but not the elevator function of the two aileron servos and, if applicable, the (interior) camber changing ﬂ aps. FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AINormal AILE+100%WK2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEL FL+100%0%0%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Even though all inputs are set to "free" by default in the »Control adjust« menu, should a control be assigned sometime by mistake … then it will at least have no effect.The last line, "EL ¼ FL", was explained at the beginning of this section.In principle, the author of this manual had programmed a delta model years ago operated with the mc-20 and a crow system as landing assistance … entirely without tilting moments through correspondingly attuned wing mixers "Brake ¼ Aileron" and "Brake ¼ Camber ﬂ ap", whereby "Aileron" refers to the exterior rudder pair and "Camber ﬂ ap" refers to the interior rudder pair. To achieve this now with the mc-20 Hott also, switch to "Brake settings" in the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu, and enter the values for the ailerons to be raised and the "ﬂ aps" to be lowered in the "Crow" line so that the occurring moments compensate one another and the altitude of the model remains stable. In the process, however, you should leave the ﬂ aps with enough "play" for the elevator function!!! Therefore, do not utilize the entire servo travel for the crow alone; for example:

303Programming examples - Delta and ﬂ ying wingElevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE+55%WK20%FLAP+44%Diff. reductWK20% 0%0%You can ignore all other settings in this menu.Note:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phasesettings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase. Change the ﬂ ight phase, if applicable.Similarly, a modern, tapered ﬂ ying wing air craft can also be operated. With some of these models there are also interior and exterior rudders: The prior is in front of the center of gravity and the latter is behind. A downward throw of the central rudder(s) increases the ascending forces and has an elevator effect. An upward throw has the opposite effect. On the exterior ailerons, on the other hand, the effect is just the opposite: A downward throw shows an elevator effect and vice versa. With appropriate adjustment of the "leading" mixer to the setting of curve mixers in order to achieve a supporting effect from the external rudder pair with only extreme joystick deﬂ ection in the height/depth direction, "everything" is possible here. The author of this manual uses a curve mixer for his model, which is deﬁ ned by a total of four points:Curve MIX 9CurvePointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100¼O U T P U T20%EL 513offIn this example the two interpolation points 1 and 2 are each at 0 % as well as the left edge point at +60 % and the right edge point at -65 %. In conclusion, the curve was rounded.In this case: Regardless of which type of servo arrangement was selected, any type of differentiation should be set with caution! On a tail-less model, differentiations show a single-sided height/depth elevator effect, so we urgently recommend beginning at least the initial ﬂ ights with a setting of 0 %! Over the course of the further ﬂ ight testing, under certain circumstances it may be advantageous to experiment with differentiations deviating from zero. With larger models, rudders in the winglets - the "ears" mounted on the wing ends - can be beneﬁ cial. If these are controlled with two separate servos, with the use of one of the mixers in the menu ...»Dual mixer« (page 206)… the rudder signal can be "split" very easily and even differentiated, whereby the second rudder servo is connected to one of the still free receiver outputs. For a model with a "Delt/ﬂ .wing" tail type, receiver output "5" should still be unoccupied and it can then be used as indicated below:Diff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 25RUMixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??+66%0%0%0%Differentiation is necessary in this case because, when ﬂ ying curves, the respective exterior rudders will have a greater curve radius than the interior rudders, so this is comparable to the front wheel positions on a car when driving in curves.Note:The rudder can only be differentiated as programmed above!If these two rudders are also to deﬂ ect outward upon actuation of a brake system with the C1 joystick, this can be achieved, for example, by setting an additional mixer "C1 ¼ 5" with an appropriate travel setting. Set the mixer's offset according to personal preference, "front" (+100 %) or "rear" (-100 %), because the winglet rudder should deﬂ ect outward only for proportional extension.Independent of this, ﬁ nish up by uncoupling the "false" control function from the control channel to which the second servo was connected – even though all inputs in the »Control adjust« menu are "free" by default – by way of the ﬂ ight-phase independent menu …»MIX-only channel« (page 205)... for safety's sake! In keeping with the above example, control channel 5 should therefore be set to "MIX only".

304 Programming examples - F3A model F3A modelF3A models are a part of the group of motor-driven winged models. They are powered by a combustion or electric motor. Models with electric motors can be used in both the electric acrobatic class F5A and are also competitive in the international model acrobatic class F3A.The basic comments and notices for the mechanical installation of a remote steering system, which was already referred to in the ﬁ rst programming example on page 268, also applies, of course, for F3A models and does not need to be mentioned here again.Faultlessly constructed F3A models exhibit a largely neutral ﬂ ying behavior. Ideally, they react with a good nature but precisely to control movements without the individual ﬂ ight axes inﬂ uencing one another.F3A models are controlled with ailerons, elevator and rudders. Normally, each aileron is actuated by a separate servo. There is also the regulation of the drive output of the motor (throttle function) and a retractable landing gear in many cases. The assignment of the channels 1 to 5, therefore, do not differ from the previously described winged models. The additional "Retractable landing gear" function is to be provided on one of the auxiliary channels 6 to 9. It is best to actuate the landing gear with a switch without center position. In addition, another mix offset for the carburetor can – if necessary – be provided. You normally use one of the two proportional controls on the transmitter, which actuates one of the unassigned auxiliary channels.Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionRudderAileron or left aileronElevator or 1st elevatorfree or 2nd elevator or aux. functionReceiver power supplyThrottle servo or speed controller (electric motor)Right aileronfree or landing gear or aux. functionfree or fuel mixture or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. function13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTelemetrieanschlussReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyWith the assignment of auxiliary channels at the transmitter, we recommend making sure that the operating elements required for this are easily within reach, because during ﬂ ight – especially in competition – you have "very little time" to release the joystick.Programming procedureSince the basic programming of the transmitter was already described in detail on pages 268 … 275, only F3A-speciﬁ c tips are added here.In the menu …»Servo adjustment« (page 102)0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%… the settings for the servos are carried out. Experience has shown that working with at least 100 % servo throw is beneﬁ cial, because the control precision is signiﬁ cantly better if greater servo travel is used. This should already be taken into account during the construction of the model in the design of the rudder linkages. Check the servo's direction of rotation. The servo center should be adjusted mechanically, insofar as possible. Any corrections can be made on the software side in the third column during the initial test ﬂ ights. Through the menu …"Model type" (page 94)… the idle trim is activated for Channel 1 (normally "rear", because full throttle is "front"). The trimming then only works in the idle direction:Tail typeMotor on C1NormalAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELThr. min rearThe remaining settings are made or left as shown in the ﬁ gure.

305Programming examples - F3A modelAfter the model is test-ﬂ own and trimmed, we recommend reducing trim travel for the elevator and ailerons The model has signiﬁ cantly less of a reaction to a movement of the trim wheel. "Over-trimming" can be avoided, because with full trim travel, under certain circumstances, the movement by just one trimming step can have too strong of an effect: Therefore, the model which previously pulled slightly to the left, hangs somewhat to the right after the trimming. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Stick mode« (page 104)… and reduce the number of trim steps in the "Tr.s tep" column appropriately:globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTri m0.0sTr.s tep – time +global 0.0s0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s444Phase2It may also be necessary to assign appropriate operating elements and inputs for other model features, e.g. retractable landing gear, fuel-mix, etc. Make these assignments with the …»Control adjust« (page 108) … menu where a speciﬁ c input can be assigned to an operating element, for example, the landing gear can be assigned to an ON/OFF switch on Input 6 and the fuel-mix can be assigned to one of the proportional sliders in the middle console, e.g. the center slider to Input 7. However, since it involves ﬂ ight-phase independent settings, leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column: +33%+33%+33%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal–––(Some experts even use up to a +60 % exponential ratio.)Since (some) combustion motors do not react linearly to movements of the throttle joystick, through the menu …»Channel 1 curve« (page 128)… a "bowed" or, in other words, non-linear throttle curve can be set. Four-cycle motors with Roots pumps, in particular, such as OS Max FS 120, require a steep ascension of the curve in the lower speed range. However, the corresponding values must be adapted. The C1 control curve for the motor could appear as follows:Channel 1 C U R V ECurvePointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100¼O U T P U T0%Normalon1Only three interpolation points, "L" at -100 %, "H" at +100 % and "1" at -50 % give the control travel the rounded curve above.Basic procedure:Move the C1 joystick and, along with it the vertical •line in the graph display, toward idle to about 0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGL frSl2------------offsetGL frNormal2SELThe control travel of the operating elements must be adapted and can also be reversed with a negative travel setting. Note:A delay time can be speciﬁ ed for raising and lowering the retractable landing gear, however, such a time delay is not effective for landing gear servo C 713 MG, order no. 3887.F3A models ﬂ y comparatively fast and thus react "harshly" to the control movements of the servos. However, since small control movements and corrections are not optically perceptible, because this results in inevitable point deductions in competition, we recommend setting an exponential control characteristic of the joystick. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Dual Rate / Expo« (page 120)Experience has shown positive results with values of approx. + 30 % on the ailerons, elevator and rudders, which you set in the right column with the selection keys. In order to be able to control the F3A model to run smoothly and cleanly:

306 Programming examples - F3A model-50 % of control travel then brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.In order to attain the curve shape shown, raise this •point with the selection keys to approx. 0 % in the inverse video value ﬁ eld in the "Point" line.Finally, round the characteristic curve by moving •the marker frame left, select with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then change the value from "Off" to "On" with the selection keys.If additional interpolation points between the left ("L") and right ("H") end are necessary, repeat Steps 2 and 3 analogously.Since F3A models normally have two aileron servos, experience has shown that it is beneﬁ cial to move both ailerons upward somewhat when landing. In the process, the model usually approaches somewhat slower and, above all, more steadily for the landing. In order to do this it is necessary to program mixers through the menu …»Free mixers« (beginning page 193)... accordingly.The ailerons are extended as landing assistance depending on the position of the throttle stick, starting from approximately half throttle toward idle. The further the joystick is moved toward idle, the more the ailerons deﬂ ect upward. Just the opposite applies when "throttling"; the ailerons are retracted again in order to prevent a sudden rise of the model. In order to prevent the model from climbing with the aileron landing ﬂ aps extended, the elevator must be mixed in somewhat.For this purpose, set the two linear mixers shown in the following display. The activation of the mixers takes place with one and the same switch, such as "8", to which both mixers must be assigned with identical switching direction. 5LinearMIX 1type C1from – Begr. +ELC1????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to AdjustTr––––––––Then switch to the second respective display screen in order to adjust the respective mixing degrees. In both cases the mixer neutral point is at the C1 control center.Enter 0 % above the control center after selection of the ASY ﬁ eld for both mixers and below the control center toward idle for:MIX 1: -60 % ... -80 % andMIX 2: -5 % ... -10 % ...Example Linear MIX 1:C1Mix input0%Offset0%5Linear MIX 1–70%SYM ASY SETSTOWith this, the base setup model of an F3A model is concluded.Compensation of model-speciﬁ c errorsUnfortunately, there are nearly always minor model-speciﬁ c "errors" through the mixers of a computer remote control which must be compensated for. However, before you begin with these settings, it should be ensured that the model is faultlessly constructed, optimally balanced over the longitudinal and transverse axes and the down thrust and side thrust are correct.Inﬂ uence of longitudinal and transverse axes by the rudderThe actuation of the rudder often inﬂ uences the behavior of the longitudinal and transverse axes. This is particularly disruptive in so-called knife-edge ﬂ ying, in which the lift of the model with the rudder deﬂ ected should be created by the fuselage alone. In the process, the model can rotate and change directions as though it were controlled with the ailerons and elevator. Therefore, a correction over the transverse axis (elevator) and/or the longitudinal axis (ailerons) must be made, if applicable.This can also be done easily with the »Free mixers«available in the mc-20 HoTT system. For example, if the model drifts away to the right over the longitudinal axis with the rudder extended in knife-edge ﬂ ying, the aileron can be deﬂ ected slightly to the left with the mixer. Changes in direction over the transverse axis can be performed analogously with a mixer on the elevator:Correction over the transverse axis (elevator)•Linear MIX 3: "Rudd ¼ Elev"Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be tested in ﬂ ight.Correction over the longitudinal axis (aileron)•Linear MIX 4: "Rudd ¼ AIL"Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be tested in ﬂ ight.Relatively small mixer values are usually sufﬁ cient in this case, the range lies below 10 %, but can vary from model to model. With the use of curve mixers, the mix ratios can be adapted even more precisely to the corresponding throw of the rudder. Again, no values are indicated for this, because this would be model-speciﬁ c.

307Programming examples - F3A modelVertical ascent and descentSome models have a tendency to deviate from the ideal line in vertical ascents and descents. In order to compensate for this, it is necessary to have a center position of the elevator dependent on the throttle joystick position. If, for example, the model begins to hold off on its own in the vertical descent with a throttled motor, some elevator must be mixed in at this throttle position.For this purpose, program a free mixer "C1 ¼ Elev". The corresponding mixer values are normally under 5 % and must also be tested in ﬂ ight. Turning away over the longitudinal axis in idleIf the throttle is reduced, the model may begin to turn away over the longitudinal axis in idle. This can be counteracted with the aileron. However, the more elegant solution is to correct this effect with a free mixer "C1 ¼ Ail". The input values here are usually very low (approx. 3 %) and the settings should be made in calm weather. It often sufﬁ ces to only use the mixer between half throttle and idle. Therefore program the mixer asymmetrically, if applicable.Turning away with the ailerons/landing ﬂ aps extendedIf you move the ailerons upward for the landing, the result is often a turning away over the longitudinal axis due to various servo paths of the aileron servos or due to design precisions. Therefore, the model begins to automatically hang the left or right wing. This is also easy to compensate for with a mixer "C1 ¼ AIL" depending on the position of the ailerons/landing ﬂ aps. The mixer must be switched on and off with the same switch with which you can switch the aileron/landing ﬂ ap function on and off (see previous page). Therefore, it only works with the aileron/landing ﬂ ap function activated. The appropriate value must be tested in ﬂ ight. One additional comment regarding …"FAIL-SAFE setting"You utilize the safety potential of this option by the safety potential by programming at least the motor throttle position for combustion models to idle and the motor function for electrically powered models to stop for a Fail-Safe case. If interference should occur, the model is then less likely to ﬂ y off on its own and cause damage to property or even personal injury. If you additionally program the fail-safe positions of the rudders to that the model ﬂ ies in gently sinking circles in the event of a failure, there is a good chance that the model even lands relatively gently on its own in the event of a continuing connection failure. You also have sufﬁ cient time to re-establish the connection if the entire 2.4 GHz frequency band is temporarily disrupted. In the receiver's condition as supplied, however, the servos maintain their last validly recognized position ("hold") in the event of a fail-safe situation. As described on page 208, you can deﬁ ne a "Fail-safe position" for each receiver servo output (Fail-safe mode).SummaryThe settings described on this page are especially useful for the "expert" who would like to have an entirely neutral, precisely ﬂ ying F3A model acrobatic model at his or her disposal. It should be mentioned this takes a lot of time, effort, instinct and know-how. Experts even program during the ﬂ ight. To do this, however, is not suggested for an advanced beginner who ventures into an F3A acrobatic model. It would be best to turn to an experienced pilot and carry out the settings step by step until the model has the desired neutrality in its ﬂ ight behavior. Then the pilot can begin to learn the not always easy to perform acrobatic ﬁ gures with a model which ﬂ ies faultlessly.

308 Programming examples - Helicopter models Helicopter models With this programming example, you must have already covered the description of the individual menus and you must be familiar with the use of the transmitter. In addition, the helicopter's mechanical construction should correspond exactly to the corresponding manual. The electronic capabilities of the transmitter should by no means be used to straighten out rough mechanical imprecision.As is often the case in life, there are also various ways and possibilities to achieve a speciﬁ c goal when programming the mc-20 HoTT. The following example should provide you with a clearer structure for logical programming. If there are multiple possibilities, the simplest and most clearly arranged solutions are recommended ﬁ rst. In order for the helicopter to function faultlessly later on, you are, of course, free to try out other solutions which may be better for you.The programming example is based on the clockwise-rotating STARLET 50 helicopter from Graupner with three pivot points each offset 120 ° of the swashplate type "3sv(2 Roll)", beginner adjustment without increased throttle curve; without heading-lock gyro system and without transmitter-side gyro inﬂ uence of the "normal operating mode" and without speed regulator. This simple program was also consciously selected to demonstrate that a helicopter which ﬂ ies really well can also be attained with relatively little (programming) effort. However, we do not want to dispense entirely with the enhancement possibilities: Therefore, after the basic description, you will ﬁ nd adjustment information for the gyro effect, the speed regulators and for the ﬂ ight-phase programming.Note:If you are not interested in the combustion helicopter described here, but a electric helicopter, please continue reading anyhow! With the exception of the omitted idle settings, you can practically adopt most of the settings described in the following unchanged.In the scope of the initial commissioning of a new transmitter, in the selection menu …»General basic settings« (page 256)Battery typeBattery warningTouch SenseTop LCD ContrastLi-IoDisplay lightRegion23.60V0EUROunlim.GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners name H-J SandbrunnerPre-set stick mode 1Pre-set DSC Output PPM10Pre-set Pitch min rearStick warning: unlim.Pre-set modulationOwn phase nameOwn phase nameHoTT210Bottom LCD Contrast 0Own phase name 1Voice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7fr –––SEL SEL7fr –––7fr –––Power-on/off beep yes… some basic information should be entered. This serves various purposes:The ﬁ rst three lines of this menu can be used to individually regulate, in increments between 0 and 10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via the built-in loudspeakers or the transmitter's headset connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to record the transmitter owner's name Select the characters for this from an extensive character list on the second display screen, which can be reached via

$309Programming examples - Helicopter modelsthe symbol with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad: !"#$%&’()Owners name@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¾¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~H-J SandbThe pre-set for "Stick mode" can be selected according to the criteria described on page 258.The same applies to the pre-sets for "Modulation"and "DSC Output".The pre-set for "Pitch min" is a matter of personal control habits. The pre-sets established here for "Stick mode","Modulation", "DSC Output" and "Pitch forward/back" will be initially adopted when a new model memory is created but they can also be freely changed within a given model memory location to any other available option.The settings in the "Top/Bottom LCD Contrast" lines determine the legibility of the given displays under poor light conditions and the setting in the "Display light" line determines how long display lighting remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched on or after the last key actuation.The selection of "yes/no" in the "Power-on/off beep"line determines whether the "recognition melody" is to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on again.The "Battery type" line speciﬁ es whether the transmitter is supplied with current from a "NiMH or a “Lith." battery, and the "Battery warning" line below it speciﬁ es the voltage at which the transmitter's low-voltage warning should trigger. Do not enter a value that is too low here, so you have enough time to land your helicopter.The setting made in the "Stick warning" line determines how long the transmitter will wait after the last actuation of an operating element before issuing visual and acoustic warning signals to indicate it is still switched on. Following the warning, you still have about one minute to actuate the transmitter so the warning will abate. Otherwise the transmitter will switch itself off when this minute expires.The value set in the "Touch Sense" line is a matter of adapting the transmitter to personal preferences. And, in the event the transmitter is to be operated in France, the setting in the "Region" line is important: The legal regulations in France require that the "FRANCE" option is selected instead of the default setting "EURO".Later on, the ten "Own phase name" lines can be used to create one's own phase names if none of the pre-set phase names appear appropriate.Once these settings have been taken care of, commissioning continues with the menu …"Model select" (page 69)Use the selection keys to pick a free memory location …0304050106R16¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿¿¿¿ free¿¿¿00:12h¿¿¿ free¿¿¿02… and call it up with a brief tap on the center SETkey of the right touch pad. In the display which then appears, use the f key of the left or right touch pad …Select model type (free model memory)… to select the "helicopter" model type. The display immediately switches to the base screen if the selection is conﬁ rmed by a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Notes:If the "Select model type" option has been •opened, the process cannot be canceled. Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection must be made! In any case, you can undo this by subsequently deleting the respective model memory.If the "Throttle too high" warning appears, it can •be erased by turning the right-side proportional rotary control to its forward limit.If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover •cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen:not possible nowvoltage too lowOnce this ﬁ rst hurdle is cleared, the connection of the receiver built into the model at this model memory must be made in the menu …$

$310 Programming examples - Helicopter models… which must be assembled from characters available on the second page of the "Model name" line: !"#$%&’()Model name Starle@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¾¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~After entering the "Model name", the settings adopted from »General basic settings« for "Stick mode" and "DSC Output" are to be checked and changed as necessary for the given memory location.The entry ﬁ eld in the "Info" line can be used if needed for a notice of up to 15 characters in length. This notice will then be helpful in the selection of models and so on.Another option is to be activated in the "Autorotation" line. Even if you are not an advanced pilot, the autorotation switch should at least be set as an emergency shutoff switch for the motor. Do this by selecting the "Autorotation" line with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the switch assignment, assign a 2-way switch, e.g. "2", an put it in its "ON" position.BASIC SETTINGS, MODELSET SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM102IAutorotationThe selected switch should be in a location on the transmitter which is easily within reach – without letting loose of a joystick – e.g. above the pitch joystick. »Basic settings, model« (page 84 … 92)... To this end, switch to the line "Module".Model nameStick modeModule1n/aBASIC SETTINGS, MODELn/aInfon/an/aStarletSELHoTTBD1 BD2 BD3 BD42345g/090911Note:After conﬁ rmation of the model selection in the base screen, if you conﬁ rm the message appearing in the screen for a few seconds …BIND. N/AOK… with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, this line will be accessed automatically.The line "Module" initiates a binding process between model memory and receiver, as described in detail on page 88. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver.Afterward, use the c selection key of the left or right four-way pad to move up to the ﬁ rst line and begin with actual model programming in the "Model name" line. Now give the model memory an appropriate name, …Model nameStick modeModule1n/aBASIC SETTINGS, MODELn/aInfon/an/aStarletSELHoTTBD1 BD2 BD3 BD42345g/090911Note:More more information about the setting of this "emergency shutoff", see the beginning of the second following double-page.Another tip:Make a habit of giving all switches a common switch-on direction; then a quick glance over the transmitter prior to the ﬂ ight should sufﬁ ce – all switches off. Setting options for the "Autorotation C1 position","Motor stop", "Marking" and "Stick warning" are not yet of particular interest …… and the "Auto Trim" line should only be assigned to a switch if "Initial trimming" is to be performed on the helicopter in the context of a trimming ﬂ ight. Following such a ﬂ ight, this switch should be erased once again, for reasons of safety.Additional settings speciﬁ c to helicopters are made in the menu …»Helicopter type« (page 98)In the "Swashplate type" line, select control for swashplate or pitch function. In this example: "3Sv(2rol)".The "Linearis. swashpl." line is not yet of interest.In the "Rotor direction" line, it is established whether the rotor – as viewed from above – turns to the right (clockwise) or left (counter-clockwise). In other words, whether it rotates counterclockwise or clockwise. In this example "right". Check the default for "Pitch min", which was adopted from »General basic settings«, to conﬁ rm that the entry "front" or "rear" is in keeping with personal preferences or should be changed.$